DIVISION FIFTEEN
MECHANICAL
Section 15010
Section 15050
Section 15250
Section 15350
Section 15351
Section 15401
Section 15405
Section 15406
Section 15420
Section 15423
Section 15424
Section 15425
Section 15426
Section 15432
Section 15450
Section 15451
Section 15500
Section 15540
Section 15601
Section 15604
Section 15605
Section 15607
Section 15608
Section 15616
Section 15620
Section 15622
Section 15624
Section 15625
Section 15651
Section 15655
General Provisions
Basic Materials and Methods
Insulation
Natural Gas Piping
Compressed Air Piping System
Domestic Water Piping System
Soil, Waste, and Vent System
Roof Drainage System
Plumbing Equipment
Domestic Recirculating Pump
Domestic Electric Water Heaters
Domestic Gas Water Heaters
Condensing Domestic Gas Water Heater
Domestic Water Pressure Booster System
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim - Elementary Schools
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim - Intermediate & High Schools
Automatic Sprinkler System
Fire Pump Assembly
Atmospheric Modular Boilers
Fuel Oil Piping & Accessories
Fuel Oil Transfer Pumps
Underground Storage Tank and Accessories
Underground Storage Tank Removal
Boiler and Water Heater Vent
High Efficiency Boilers
Cast Iron Boilers & Burners
Steel Boilers and Burners
Boiler Burner Replacement and Boiler Conversion
Refrigeration Piping Systems
Combination Split System Air Handler/Remote Air Cooled
Condensing Units
Water Cooled Chiller
Air Cooled Chiller
Propeller Fan Cooling Tower
Centrifugal Fan Cooling Tower
Closed Cell Cooling Tower
Special System Room Air Conditioning Unit (Self Contained Unit)
Special System Room Air Conditioning Unit (Split System Unit)
Variable Refrigerant Flow System
Variable Refrigerant Flow System (for Building Additions)
Hot Water Chilled Water Supply and Return Piping System and
Specialties
Hot Water, Heat Pump Loop Supply and Return Piping System
and Specialities
Water Treatment
Base Mounted Pumps
Inline Pumps
Section 15674
Section 15676
Section 15680
Section 15681
Section 15682
Section 15691
Section 15692
Section 15700
Section 15701
Section 15702
Section 15703
Section 15705
Section 15725
Section 15726
1
11/17
Section 15727
Section 15728
Section 15740
Section 15745
Section 15746
Section 15747
Section 15748
Section 15749
Section 15750
Section 15751
Section 15752
Section 15753
Section 15754
Section 15755
Section 15760
Section 15761
Section 15765
Section 15769
Section 15770
Section 15771
Section 15772
Section 15773
Section 15774
Section 15775
Section 15776
Section 15821
Section 15822
Section 15827
Section 15830
Section 15834
Section 15835
Section 15836
Section 15837
Section 15838
Section 15840
Section 15845
Section 15846
Section 15847
Section 15870
Section 15900
Section 15905
Section 15990
Plate Type Heat Exchanger
Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger
Water Source Heat Pumps
Electric Duct Heaters
Electric Wall Heaters
Induction Terminal Units
Electric Unit Heaters
Electric Cabinet Unit Heaters
Valance System
Hot Water Finned Tube Radiation
Horizontal Pipe Enclosure
Hot Water Convectors
Cabinet Unit Heaters
Hot Water Duct Coil
Hot Water Unit Heaters
Fan Coil Units
Unit Ventilator
Package Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units with Enthalpy Wheels
Package Terminal Air Conditioning Units
Package Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units
Package Rooftop Heat Pump Units
Energy Recovery Units-Self Contained
Energy Recovery Units
Package VAV Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units
Energy Recovery Units - Heat Pump
Cabinet and Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Utility Vent Sets
Air Curtain Fly Fans
Power Roof Ventilator
Air Handling Units
Rooftop Air Handling Units
Roof Mounted Makeup Air Unit
Makeup Air Unit - Self Contained
Makeup Air Unit - Heat Pump
Ductwork and Duct Accessories
Kitchen Heat and Grease Removal Hood
Kitchen Heat Removal Hood (For Elementary and Middle School)
Kitchen Makeup Air Unit
Air Distribution Devices
Automatic Temperature Controls
Variable Frequency Drive
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
2
11/17
SECTION 15010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
A.
The Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1 -General Requirements
for the Construction of this project shall apply to this division and all sections
herein.
B.
Where items under the Bidding and Contract Requirements, and Division 1 General Requirements are repeated in this section, it is intended to call particular
attention to or qualify the items. It is not intended that any other parts under the
Bidding and Contract Requirements of Division 1 - General Requirements shall
be assumed to be omitted if not repeated herein.
SCOPE
A.
The work included under this Division shall include a complete mechanical
system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. Any apparatus,
appliance, material or work not shown on the drawings but mentioned in the
specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the
work complete in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly
specified, shall be furnished, delivered and installed by the contractor without
additional expense to the Owner.
B.
The contractor shall note that all items of equipment are specified in the singular;
however, the contractor shall provide and install the number of items of
equipment as indicated on the drawings and as required for a complete system.
C.
It is the intention of the specifications and drawings to call for finished work,
tested, and ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall
mean, "provide and install complete and ready for use."
D.
Minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary for proper installation
and operations shall be included in the contractor's estimate, the same as if
herein specified or shown.
E.
This contractor shall be responsible for participation and coordination with the
Commissioning process as specified in section 01660.
APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, STANDARDS AND PERMITS
A.
All equipment, materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of
national, state and local codes, laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. All utility
connections shall conform to the requirements of the local utilities.
15010-1
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
B.
C.
SECTION 15010
Unless otherwise specified herein or shown on the contract drawings, the work
and materials shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following codes,
standards and regulations:
1. VUSBC
Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code
2. BOCA
Building Officials & Code Administrators International, Inc.
3. ICC
International Code Council
4. AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc
5. ARI
Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
6. ASHRAE
American Society of
Conditioning Engineers
7. ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
8. ASTM
American Society of Testing Materials
9. NEC
National Electrical Code
10. NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
11. OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Association
12. SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
13. UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
14. ANSI
American National Standards Institute
15. AWS
American Welding Society
16. NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
17. CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
18. IRI
Industrial Risk Insurers
19. CAA
Clean Air Act Amendment of 1990 (Title VI, Section 608)
20. CTI
Cooling Tower Institute
Heating,
Refrigerating
and
Air
Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all
Government taxes, fees and other costs, including costs for water, sewer, and
gas connections or extensions including meters, in connection with his work, file
15010-2
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010
all necessary plans, prepare all documents and obtain required certificates of
inspection for work and deliver same to Owner before request for acceptance and
final payment for work.
D.
1.04
The contractor shall be responsible for purchasing equipment and appliances that
bear the label of an agency, as approved by the Department of Public Works and
Environmental Services (DPWES), Fairfax County. It shall be the responsibility of
the contractor to pay for any label testing of equipment or appliances that are
installed without the label of a DPWES approved agency.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
The contractor shall submit eight (8) copies of the shop drawings to the Architect
for review with ample time for checking prior to delivery of any of this equipment
or material to the job site. The project's and the contractor's names shall be on
each submittal.
B.
Shop drawings shall be submitted on all major pieces of equipment and material.
Each item of equipment proposed shall be a standard catalog product of an
established manufacturer. The shop drawing shall give complete information on
the proposed equipment such as: capacity, size, construction, material,
dimensions, arrangement, operating clearances, performance characteristics,
weight and rating authority. Each item of the shop drawing shall be properly
labeled, indicating the intended service of the material.
C.
The contractor shall, before submitting the shop drawings of the equipment to the
Architect, check each item of the shop drawings to verify the proper equipment.
Items to check shall include but not be limited to:
1)
2)
3)
4)
1.05
Will equipment physically fit into space;
proper equipment for the job; electrical characteristics;
voltage matches that of electric service; proper arrangements for
connections;
meets code requirements.
D.
The shop drawings shall be neatly bound and submitted to the Architect with a
letter of transmittal, which shall list each item, submitted with the manufacturer's
name.
E.
Review of the shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of
measurements or building conditions. Where drawings have been reviewed, said
review does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said review
does not in any way relieve the contractor from his responsibility or the necessity
of furnishing material or performing work as required by the contract drawings.
EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS
A.
Where the contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than the
prototype equipment (a specified manufacturer's equipment used as the basis of
15010-3
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010
design) or that detailed on the drawings which requires any redesign of the
structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the
mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign and all new
drawings and detailing required therefore shall be prepared by the contractor at
his own expense and be approved by the Owner and Engineer.
B.
1.06
1.07
QUALIFICATIONS FOR BIDDERS
A.
The contractor shall examine drawings and specifications relating to work of all
trades and become fully informed as to the extent and character of work required
and its relation to all other work in the project prior to submission of bid or prior to
start of any construction covered by these specifications and drawings.
B.
Before submitting bid the contractor shall visit the site and examine all adjoining
existing building, equipment and space conditions on which his work is in any way
dependent, for the best workmanship and operation according to the intent of the
specifications and drawings. Contractor shall verify dimensions and fully inform
himself as to the nature and scope of the proposed work and also the conditions
under which it is to be conducted. He shall report to the Owner any conditions
that in his estimation might preclude him from installing his equipment and work in
the manner intended and noted on the drawings and in this specification. Failure
to take the above precaution will in no way relieve the contractor from his
obligations to provide the material and work as indicated and as specified without
additional cost to the Owner or extension of completion time.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
1.08
Where such deviation from the prototype equipment requires a different quantity
and arrangement of materials and equipment, the contractor shall furnish and
install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers,
motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit and any other additional equipment
required by the system at no additional cost to the Owner.
Are specified under Temporary Facilities, the General Conditions, Supplementary
General Conditions, and Division l. General requirements are hereby made a
part of this section as fully as if repeated herein.
DRAWINGS
A.
The drawings are diagrammatic, indicating general arrangement of work, and
should not be scaled to establish location of work. The drawings show the size of
piping and ductwork branches, risers and equipment, and must be followed.
Where a change of location or method of running becomes necessary due to
obstructions or other construction difficulties, such changes shall be made after
securing approval of the Owner in writing and at no increase in amount of
contract.
B.
Decisions regarding any and all substitutions and options permitted by the
specifications shall be submitted for approval to the Owner. Approval will only be
15010-4
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010
recognized when in writing.
1.09
1.10
C.
In finished spaces all piping and ductwork shall be concealed or run behind
furring unless shown otherwise. Where concealing is not possible piping and
ductwork may be exposed after obtaining the Owner's approval.
D.
All horizontal piping and ductwork not run below slab on grade shall be run as
close as possible to underside of floor and parallel to building lines. Maintain
maximum headroom in all areas.
E.
All vertical piping and ductwork shall be run as close to walls and partitions as
practicable.
F.
Coordination of all other trades prior to erecting any piping or ductwork is required
to avoid conflict between various components of the building.
COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
The contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish in
writing, with copies to the Owner, any information necessary to permit the work of
all trades to be installed satisfactorily with the least possible interference or delay.
B.
Where the work of the contractor will be installed in close proximity to work of
other trades, or where there is evidence that work will interfere with work of other
trades, he shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory
adjustment. This contractor shall prepare composite working drawings at a scale
not less than 1/4" = 1'-0" clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation
to the work of the other trades. If the contractor installs his work before
coordinating with other trades or as to cause any interference with work of other
trades he shall make necessary changes to his work to correct the condition
without additional cost to the Owner.
C.
The contractor shall furnish to other trades as required all necessary templates,
patterns, setting plans and shop details for the proper installation of the work and
for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.
D.
Structural support elements as shown on the drawings must be in place prior to
the installation of piping or the setting of rooftop equipment. The contractor shall
not install any piping or rooftop equipment until such elements are in place.
ELECTRICAL WIRING
A.
The contractor shall, regardless of voltage, furnish and install all temperature
control wiring, all interlock wiring, and equipment control wiring for the equipment
that the contractor furnishes unless otherwise noted. Division 16 will furnish and
install power wiring to the mechanical equipment and make electrical connections
unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
B.
All electrical wiring furnished under the mechanical contract shall conform with
15010-5
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010
Division 16.
1.11
1.12
FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Contractor shall provide all necessary foundations, supports, pads and bases
required for mechanical equipment and any other equipment furnished under this
contract, unless covered under the architectural or structural work.
B.
For buried concrete or cast iron sewer piping installed in filled cuts over four (4)
feet in depth the contractor shall provide brick or approved equal supports or
piers under piping and fittings with piers or supports extending to a depth to
provide sufficient firm and adequate support to overcome the possibility of any
deflection in the piping system.
C.
For pumps, compressors and other rotating machinery and all equipment where
foundations are indicated, furnish and install concrete pads 4" in height (unless
otherwise noted) extending not less than 4" beyond equipment base in all
directions. Equipment installed in areas other than slab on grade shall be
installed with the appropriate vibration assembly.
D.
Construction of foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers where mounted on
the floor, shall be of the same materials and same quality of finish as the adjacent
and surrounding flooring material.
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING
A.
1.13
Unless otherwise specified, contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging,
hoisting, shoring and services necessary for erection and delivery into the
premises for any equipment and apparatus furnished and shall remove same
from premises when no longer required.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for excavation, backfill, tamping, shoring,
bracing, pumping, street cuts, repairing of finished surface and all protection for
safety of persons and property as required for installing a complete
mechanical/plumbing system. All excavation and backfill shall conform to the
architectural section of the specifications.
B.
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to check the indicated elevations of
utilities entering and leaving the building. If such elevations require excavations
lower than the footing levels, the Owner shall be notified of such conditions and
redesign shall be made before excavations are commenced. It is also the
responsibility of the contractor to make the excavations at the minimum required
depths in order not to undercut the footings.
C.
The trench shall be excavated below the installation level of the bottom of the
pipe. The trench shall be filled with sand or fine gravel so entire length of barrel
of piping rests on solid bed of sand or fine gravel. The backfill shall be filled in
15010-6
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010
layers of 6” max depth and such layers shall be compacted after each placement.
1.14
1.15
D.
Excavation shall be made in a manner to provide a uniform bearing for pipes.
The pipe elevation shall be determined by the contractor to meet the plumbing
codes. Where rock is encountered, excavate 3" below pipe grade and back fill
with sand to the installation level of the pipe. The pipe, including the joints, shall
not rest on rock at any point.
E.
After required test and inspections, backfill the ditch and tamp. The first foot
above the pipe shall be hand backfilled with rock free clean earth. The backfill in
the ditches on the exterior and interior of the building shall be tamped to 95% of
the standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-698). The contractor shall
be responsible for any of his ditch walls that cave in.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
On new work the contractor shall furnish sketches showing the locations and
sizes of all openings and chases, and furnish and locate all sleeves and inserts
required for the installation of the mechanical work before the walls, floors and
roof are built. The contractor shall be responsible for the cost of cutting and
patching where any mechanical items were not installed or where incorrectly
sized or located. The contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of
his hangers.
B.
On alterations and additions to existing projects, the contractor shall be
responsible for the cost of all cutting and patching unless otherwise noted.
C.
No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Owner, and all
such cutting shall be done in a manner directed by him. All patching shall be
performed to match the existing surface in shape, texture and color.
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
The contractor shall locate equipment, which must be serviced, operated or
maintained in fully accessible position. Equipment shall include but not be limited
to: valves, traps, or low limit devices, damper operators, motors, controllers, drain
points, fusible links of fire dampers, fire dampers, filters, etc. If required for better
accessibility, furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from
drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility, and any change shall be
approved. Motor starters shall be installed not more than 6'-0" above finished
floor unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
B.
All filters furnished with air handling equipment shall be readily removable from
sides or bottom of cabinet as required by equipment location. Contractor shall
verify location of all equipment and proper location of access to filters for removal
before submitting shop drawings, placing order for equipment and setting and
connecting of equipment. Any filters deemed by the owner to be inaccessible
after installation will be made accessible by the contractor at no additional cost to
the owner.
15010-7
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.16
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
1.17
1.18
SECTION 15010
The contractor shall keep daily updated accurate records of all deviations in work
as actually installed from work indicated on the contract drawings. The record
drawings shall be kept at the job site, available to the Owner at all times and
labeled as "Project Record Information - Job Set". When work is completed one
complete set of marked-up prints shall be delivered to the Owner.
PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
The contractor shall submit for approval three (3) copies of all of the
manufacturer's installation, operating and maintenance manuals for all new
mechanical equipment listed in the equipment schedule, all necessary
components of mechanical equipment, testing and balancing reports, equipment
start-up records, equipment capacity (input and output) and a list of filter sizes
and belt sizes for all mechanical equipment that requires filters and belts (this
includes, but is not limited to, fan coils, unit ventilators, rooftop units, cabinet
heaters, exhaust fans and air handlers). Submit four (4) copies of the operating
and maintenance manuals for the automatic temperature control system
components and diagrams for approval. A complete written narrative of how each
system is intended to operate shall be included. Manuals shall be assembled in
black vinyl hardback loose-leaf binders, labeled with job name, address and date.
Information on each piece of equipment of system shall be in a separate tab
labeled section. Provide a complete index of the contents. After approval by the
Engineer the binders shall be forwarded to the Owner.
B.
After all tests are conducted and approved as specified below, furnish a
competent operating engineer for a period of two days to instruct and
demonstrate to the Owner or his authorized representative the operation of the
system. The mechanical systems demonstration shall not coincide with the
electrical demonstration. Notify the owner in writing of the person to whom this
instruction was given and the date it was given.
C.
On phased construction projects the aforementioned equipment start-up records
shall be completed and made available to the owner for review prior to the
occupancy of the completed phase.
TESTS
A.
The contractor shall, at his expense, conduct capacity and general operating
tests on each system. The test shall demonstrate the specified capacities of the
various pieces of equipment and shall be conducted in the presence of the
Owner or his authorized representative. The general operating tests shall
demonstrate that the entire equipment is functioning in accordance with the
contract documents. Furnish all instructions and test equipment.
B.
After all systems are completely tested, submit three copies of the test results to
the Owner for approval before final acceptance of project.
15010-8
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.19
1.20
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS CHECKOUT AND START-UP
A.
This contractor is responsible for the checkout and start-up of all equipment and
systems. Equipment start-up shall be in accordance with the manufactures
requirements and recommendations and shall be performed by personnel who
are knowledgeable with the equipment and its requirements. When required by
the equipment manufacturer or as noted in the specifications, equipment
checkout and start-up shall be performed by personnel certified by the
manufacturer. Evidence of proper certification of startup personnel shall be
provided to the owner.
B.
All checkout and start-up activities are the responsibility of this contractor.
C.
This contractor shall notify FCPS two weeks prior to equipment checkout and
start-up.
D.
Systems and equipment shall be operated at both full and part load conditions to
ensure specified requirements can be achieved.
E.
The equipment manufacturer’s checkout and start-up logs shall be completed in
their entirety; should a reference be non-applicable it shall be marked as such.
Copies of completed logs shall be submitted to FCPS personnel the day of
checkout and start-up activities, as well as included in the Operation and
Maintenance manual.
WARRANTY
A.
1.21
SECTION 15010
The contractor shall deliver the work described herein in a first-class operating
condition in every respect. The contractor shall also warrant that the material,
equipment and workmanship furnished shall be entirely free from defects for a
period of one year. All apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics
specified, and that if during the period of one year - from date of substantial
completion (See Section 01740) any such defects in workmanship, materials or
performance appear, he will, without cost to the Owner, remedy such defects
within a reasonable time. In default thereof, Owner may have such work done
and charge the cost to the contractor. In cases where equipment warranties
through the manufacturer exceed the periods listed in these specifications, the
manufacturer’s warranty shall take precedence. The contractor is responsible for
all periodic service and maintenance required to maintain such warranties on
completed work for the duration of the project (See Section 01740.1.05). Once
the entire project is substantially complete, periodic maintenance shall be the
responsibility of the owner.
CONNECTING INTO EXISTING UTILITIES
A.
Procedures: The procedures used for the accomplishment of connecting into
existing work shall provide for safe conduct of the work, careful removal and
disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which is to
remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress, and timely
15010-9
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010
disconnection of utility services.
1.22
B.
Scheduling of Work: Work shall be performed in the sequence, locations and
time periods agreed to by the Owner prior to commencement of work.
C.
Dust Control: The amount of dust resulting from connecting existing utilities shall
be controlled to avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Masks
shall be worn for protection against dust inhalation by all persons in the vicinity of
work involving removal of masonry.
D.
Protection of Existing Work:
1.
Existing work and furnishings to remain shall be protected from damage.
Work damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired to match existing work
without any additional cost to the Owner.
2.
Cover equipment as necessary, to protect it from dust.
3.
Floors shall be protected from damage.
4.
At the end of each workday and during inclement weather, close exterior
openings with weatherproof cover.
5.
Provide temporary filter media on any portions of existing ductwork which
communicate with corridors and construction areas. This media shall be
checked frequently and changed as necessary.
E.
Environmental Protection: Contractor shall comply with all Federal and local
regulations pertaining to Environmental Protection.
F.
Removal of Existing Equipment and Materials: Existing equipment and materials
shall be dismantled and/or cut-up so as to be removable through existing
building's access passages. No alterations to the building shall be made for the
purpose of removing existing equipment and material.
G.
Clean-up:
1.
Debris and Rubbish: Remove debris and rubbish from the site daily. Do
not allow to accumulate in building or on site.
2.
Debris Control: Remove and transport debris in a manner so as to
prevent spillage on site or adjacent areas.
3.
Regulations: Local regulations regarding hauling and disposal shall apply.
DOWNTIME
A.
The contractor shall so arrange his work that domestic water, gas, storm sewer,
sanitary sewer, air conditioning, and heating systems shall be maintained at all
15010-10
11/17
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010
times while the school classes are in session.
1.23
B.
The contractor shall submit written requests to disconnect any existing utility
services and to obtain equipment downtime. Only after receiving Owner approval
of these requests shall work be allowed to proceed. This contractor shall be
responsible for restoring the existing utilities.
C.
If contractor fails to provide domestic hot/cold water, gas, sewers, air conditioning
and/or heating systems as specified herein it is understood and agreed that there
will be liquidated damages deducted in the amount as stated in Division 01010,
per school per consecutive calendar day.
CONSTRUCTION LIMITATIONS
A.
In renewal projects which require work to be continually done, above the corridor
ceilings, while school is in progress. The following requirements shall be met:
1.
No construction material may be stored in a corridor at any time.
2.
Any work done in the corridors after school hours must allow a minimum
corridor of 72" to remain for safe egress. No work such as welding,
soldering, etc., which is considered hazardous to the occupants of the
building, may take place during school hours.
3.
The contractor shall immediately clean any area of debris, if work is done
in any occupied space.
4.
No gas powered construction equipment will be allowed in the building
during school hours.
END OF SECTION
15010-11
11/17
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General requirements and
section 15010 - General Provisions, shall apply to this section.
SCOPE
A.
The work covered under this section covers the basic materials and methods for
a complete mechanical system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A.
All materials shall be of an approved type and shall be designed for the pressures
and temperatures at which they are to be operated, for the materials they are to
handle and for their intended use.
B.
Materials shall conform to the standard reference numbers listed below. See
individual sections of the specifications for use.
1.
Ductile Iron Water Pipe - (Water Service) - AWWA C151.
2.
Copper Tubing (Water Distribution - Type L or K) - ASTM B75, B88, B251
3.
Cast Iron Fittings – ASME B16.4, B16.12; ASTM A74, A888; CISPI 301
4.
Copper Fittings - ASME B16.15, B16.18, B16.22, B16.23, B16.26, B16.29,
B16.32
5.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe - ASTM A74, A888; CISPI 301
6.
Copper Pipe (Waste, Vent, & Hydronic) - ASTM B42, B302
7.
Galvanized Steel Pipe (Waste & Vent) - ASTM A53
8.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe - ASTM D2665, D2949
9.
Plastic Fittings - ASTM D2466, D2467, D2468, D3311, F409, F438, F439
10.
Concrete Pipe - ASTM C14, C76
15050-1
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.02
SECTION 15050
11.
Steel Pipe - ASTM A53, A106
12.
Malleable Iron Fittings - ASME B16.3
13.
Steel Butt Welding Fittings - ASME B16.9
14.
Steel Fittings - ASTM A420
15.
Gray Cast Iron Fittings - ASTM A126
16.
Steel Pipe Flanges - ASME B16.5
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Piping Specialties shall be designed and installed to meet the intended use including
pressures and temperature.
A.
Gaskets - Shall be full face with a working pressure of 300 lbs. and temperature
up to 212 * F. Gaskets shall be manufactured by JM CLIPPER, US PIPE, FNW,
or AMERICAN.
B.
Strainers - HONEYWELL-BRAUKMAN, ARMSTRONG or SARCO.
C.
Unions
1.
Unions shall be of an approved type, shall meet the requirements for the
pressure and temperature at which they are to operate and shall be
compatible with the pipe materials.
2.
Brass Couplings - Shall be used for connecting steel pipe to copper
tubing.
3.
Die-electric unions or waterways shall not be permitted.
D.
Escutcheons - Escutcheon plates shall be stamped brass chromium plated, shall
be of sufficient size to cover sleeved openings for the pipes, shall be of sufficient
depth to cover sleeves projecting above floors, and shall be manufactured by
BLATON AND CALDWELL, DEARBORN BRASS, MASON or GRINNELL.
E.
Gauges and Thermometers - Shall be as listed below unless otherwise specified
under other sections of the specifications.
1.
Temperature Gauges or Thermometers - Shall be the separable socket,
adjustable angle type, not less than 9" scale V-shaped, organic filled, blue
reading column.
Range shall be applicable for the service.
Thermometers shall be adjustable type to permit easy reading from floor
and outside of insulation, as manufactured by ASHCROFT, WEKSLER,
15050-2
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.
3.
2.03
SECTION 15050
TAYLOR or TRERICE.
Pressure Gauges - Shall be of the liquid filled, bourdon-tube type with dial
diameter not less than 4" and operating range 0 - 160 psig. Install a shutoff cock in line to each gauge. Gauges as manufactured by ASHCROFT,
WEKSLER, TAYLOR or TRERICE.
Compound Gauges - Shall be of the liquid filled, bourdon-tube type with
dial diameter not less than 4" and operating range 30" - 0 - 30 psig. Install
a shut-off cock in line to each gauge. Gauges as manufactured by
ASHCROFT, WEKSLER, TAYLOR or TRERICE.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Pipe Hangers and Supports Material - Provide a combination of pipe hangers and
supports such as steel and copper clad clevis hangers, round steel rods,
concrete inserts, clamps, brackets and other items as applicable. Hangers and
supports shall meet the recommendations of the manufacturer. Parallel runs of
horizontal piping shall be grouped together on adjustable trapeze hangers. All
hangers in contact with copper pipe shall be copper-plated. Pipe hangers and
support shall be of the size to accommodate the pipe and insulation where
applicable. Pipe hangers and supports manufacturer: MASON, GRINNELL,
CARPENTER AND PATERSON, ANVIL or NIBCO.
1.
B.
VRF Pipe hangers and supports.
a.
Multiple runs of VRF piping shall be grouped together on
preformed U channel, (trapeze) hanger spacing and hanger rods
as described below.
b.
VRF piping shall be mounted to be preformed U channel with two
piece pipe straps (clamps) with cushioned insert. Klo-Shure 7
series Strut Mount Insulation Couplings or approved equal.
c.
The two piece pipe straps (clamps) shall be sized to snugly fit the
outside diameter of the pipe insulation.
d.
Hangers shall be installed on each side of pipe direction changes
and within 2 feet of each direction change.
e.
Hangers for GelCopper pre-insulated copper tubing shall be
Hydro-Zorb model TRH with 3/8 diameter rod, or approved equal.
Hanger Spacing for Horizontal Pipe shall not exceed:
1.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe (all diameters)
5'-0"
2.
Plastic Pipe (all diameters)
4'-0"
15050-3
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.
SECTION 15050
Schedule 40 Steel Pipe
½” to 1” Pipe
1-1/4”to 2” Pipe
2-1/2” to 4” Pipe
5” and Larger Pipe
4.
C.
Type ‘L’ Copper Tubing
½” to ¾” Pipe
5’-0”
1” Pipe
6’-0”
1-1/4”Pipe
7’-0”
1-1/2”to 2”Pipe
8’-0”
2-1/2” Pipe
9’-0”
3” Pipe
10’-0”
3-1/2” Pipe
11’-0”
4” Pipe
12’-0”
5” Pipe
13’-0”
6” Pipe
14’-0”
Hanger Spacing for Vertical Pipe shall not exceed:
Cast Iron Soil Pipe
Threaded Pipe
Plastic Pipe
Copper Tube
D.
At the base and at each story
At each story
At each story and at the midpoint between floors
At each story
Hanger Rods shall be at least:
Pipe to 2"
2 1/2" to 3"
4" to 5"
6" to 8"
10" to 12"
E.
6’-0”
8’-0”
10’-0”
12’-0”
3/8" diameter
1/2" diameter
5/8" diameter
3/4" diameter
7/8" diameter
Sheet Metal Saddles - Supports for insulated pipes shall not contact the pipe but
shall surround the unbroken covering. Provide galvanized steel sheet metal
saddles properly formed to the jacket between hanger and the lower 1/3 of the
circumference. The size of the saddles shall be as follows:
Pipe to 3”
4” to 6”
8” and larger
24 gauge x12” long
18 gauge x 12” long
16 gauge x 12” long
2.04 VALVES
15050-4
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.05
A.
Valves shall be of an approved type and shall meet the requirements for the
pressure and temperature at which they are to be operated, for the material they
are to handle and for their intended use. Valve manufacturers are listed in the
individual sections of the specifications.
B.
Valve and Tag Chart - Furnish and install on each valve a brass tag with a
number and the abbreviation PLMB (for plumbing) HVAC (for mechanical
systems) embossed in the brass tag for each valve and securely fastened to
each valve wheel with beaded chain or brass wire. Provide a laminated chart in
the water heater room, showing the locations and use of each valve. Laminating
film shall be at least 10mil thick. Two charts shall be provided - one for the
plumbing valves and one for the heating and cooling valves. The plumbing
valves shall start with number 1 and continue consecutively until all plumbing
valves are numbered. The heating and cooling valves shall start with number 1
and continue consecutively until all heating and cooling valves are numbered. A
copy of the valve tag charts shall also be contained in the operation and
maintenance manual.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
2.06
SECTION 15050
The contractor shall furnish access panels not smaller than 16 X 16" for access to
concealed valves, traps, dampers, etc. where no other means of access is
provided. Access panels shall be all steel construction with no. 16 gauge wall or
ceiling and no. 14 gauge panel door with not less than 1/8" insulation secured to
inside of the door. Doors shall be supported with concealed hinges and secured
with suitable clips and countersunk flush screws. Outside of access panels shall
be flush with finished wall or ceilings, except that where panels are located in
acoustic tile or paneling, the door shall be recessed to receive adjacent finish
material. The contractor shall determine the final position of each access door
and the size to be used. Access panels shall be as manufactured by MILCOR.
Fire ratings of access door shall not be less than the surface on which the door is
installed. Where required by specifications locking access doors shall be fitted
with a HL302 lock cylinder and key.
ELECTRIC MOTORS
A.
The contractor shall provide and install all electric motors for equipment furnished
under Division 15. All motors shall be NEMA standard design for quiet operation.
The motors shall be of ample size to operate at their proper load and full speed
continuously without causing noise, vibration or temperature rise in excess of the
rating. Provide high efficiency motors when called for on the drawings or
hereinafter specified.
B.
Motors with belted drives shall be mounted in a manner to allow for belt
adjustment. All belts shall be adjusted before turning project over to owner. All
motors with belt drives shall have belt guards.
15050-5
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.07
SECTION 15050
ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTERS
The contractor shall furnish all motor starters complete with lugs sized to receive
conductors specified and with accessories as required such as stop-start push button
switches, hand-off-auto selector switches, pilot lights, remote switches, auxiliary
contacts, transformers, relays, fuses and overload thermal units or heaters. Contractor
coil voltage shall be 24 volts. All components are to be housed within enclosure.
A.
The motor starters shall be the type to meet the requirements of the motor and
shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. The
starters shall be manufactured by SQUARE 'D', GENERAL ELECTRIC, CUTLERHAMMER or SIEMENS.
B.
Three phase motors shall have across-the-line magnetic starter and single-phase
motors shall have manual starters. The starters shall have NEMA 1 enclosures
unless otherwise noted or required. Outdoor starters shall have weatherproof
enclosures.
C.
The starter shall have an overload thermal unit in each phase conductor. The
thermal units shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer for full
protection of the motor.
All three phase motors and equipment with compressors shall be provided with
three phase motor protectors as manufactured by DIVERSIFED, SLM-ASE series
(match voltage to corresponding model number). Unit shall include range plug,
output fuse, output switch, line adjustment, status/trouble lights and
adjustable/selectable operation with built-in time delays. Unit shall be U/L
labeled. Protectors as manufactured by TIMEMARK #265 or MOTECTOR Power
Guardian PLUS shall also be acceptable.
D.
2.08
EQUIPMENT
A.
Equipment shall be furnished and installed as listed in the specifications or as
required for a complete project.
B.
All equipment shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name and trade
name. The equipment furnished under each section of the specifications shall be
essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
production of the required type of equipment.
C.
All three phase equipment and equipment with compressors shall be provided
with three phase motor protectors as manufactured by DIVERSIFIED, SLM-ASE
series (match voltage to corresponding model number). Unit shall include range
plug,
output
switch,
line
adjustment,
status/trouble
lights
and
adjustable/selectable operation with built-in time delays. Unit shall be U/L
labeled. Protectors as manufactured by TIMEMARK #265 or MOTECTOR Power
Guardian PLUS shall also be acceptable.
15050-6
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
D.
SECTION 15050
Nameplates/Labels – Provide engraved pin-attached laminated plastic
nameplates for all pumps, air handling units, exhaust fans, boilers, chillers, fan
powered heaters unit ventilators, fan coil units, blower coil units, terminal devices,
VAV boxes, fire dampers, smoke detectors and roof mounted equipment. Where
equipment is located above the ceiling, nameplates shall be mounted on the
ceiling below the device. Exhaust fans located on the roof will require two
separate nameplates; one is to be attached to the fan, the other on the ceiling
grid directly below the fan. Each nameplate shall identify the item served, such
as “PRV-2.”or “SMOKE DETECTOR AHU-1” Laminated plastic shall be one
eight (1/8) thick, black with white center core, exception: fire damper nameplates
shall be red with white center core. Nameplates shall be a minimum of one inch
by three inches, with minimum one-quarter inch high block lettering. Adhesive
backed, embossed lettering tape is not acceptable. Exhaust grilles or registers in
each space shall be labeled. Each label shall identify the exhaust fan serving this
grille or register, such as “PRV-2”. Identification labels shall be BROTHER type
“P-TOUCH”, clear tape with upper case letters, minimum ¼ inch high block
lettering, and black printing and shall be located on the ceiling grid next to the
grille or register.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A.
Pipe and Fittings
1.
Pipe, fittings and specialties stored at the job shall be stored in such a
manner as to prevent dirt and moisture from collecting in the material.
Openings in the piping system during construction shall be protected at all
times from foreign matter entering the piping system. PVC piping shall not
be stored in direct sunlight.
2.
Installation - The piping shall be installed complete and shall be of the size
required by code. When a size is not indicated or is in conflict with other
drawings, the contractor shall request the pipe size from the engineer. All
piping shall be cut accurately from dimensions established at the project
site and allowances shall be made for the clearance of windows, doors
and other openings. No part of the building structure may be cut to allow
for the installation of piping unless specifically approved in writing.
3.
All piping shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the building
construction and shall be installed so as to allow for expansion and
drainage. Due to the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to
show all elbows and swing joints required to allow for expansion; however,
the contractor shall install three elbow swing joints at all runouts and other
connection to mains.
15050-7
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
B.
SECTION 15050
4.
Install continuous galvanized sheet metal drip pan under all water piping
passing through all rooms with electrical equipment such as electrical,
elevator equipment and transformer rooms and all other spaces provided
primarily for the installation of electrical equipment. Drip pan shall be
channeled out of the space and be extended to the closest drain.
5.
Eccentric reducing fittings or eccentric reducing couplings shall be
installed to bring top of mains in line and prevent pockets. Eccentric
fittings will not be required on water mains. Ends of pipes shall be
reamed out before being installed.
6.
Pipe Sleeves
a.
Pipe sleeves shall be installed on all pipes passing through walls,
ceilings and floors except floor slabs on grade. On insulated pipes
the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the insulation without
damaging the vapor barrier. The ends of the sleeves shall extend
1/2" above the finished floor and made watertight around sleeve.
Where pipes pass through fire rated floors and wall the space
between the pipe and the sleeve shall be fire stopped and smoke
stopped with the appropriate U.L. rated assembly. Sleeves not in
contact with the earth shall be schedule 40 black steel pipes,
except sleeves in poured concrete slabs above grade may be a
manufactured pipe sleeve. PVC sleeves shall not be used in
plenum spaces.
b.
Pipe Sleeves in contact with the earth shall be cast iron. The
space between the pipe and the cast iron pipe sleeve shall be
packed with oakum with a lead joint and made watertight. The
pipe passing through and under footings and wall below grade
shall have cast iron sleeves. The sleeves not entering the building
need not be watertight.
Piping Joints
1.
Screwed Joints - Screwed joints shall be made with full cut American
Standard Pipe Thread. All pipes shall be reamed to full diameter of the
pipe. Pipe thread compound shall be applied to the male thread only.
2.
Welded Joints
a.
Welded joints for steel pipe 2 1/2" and larger shall be made in
accordance with the procedure standard in the American
Standards Association piping code, and before assigning any
welder to work covered, the contractor shall provide for the
approval of the name(s) of pipe welders to be employed in the
15050-8
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 15050
work, together with certification that each of these welders has
passed qualification tests as prescribed by the National Certified
Pipe Welding Bureau or by other reputable testing laboratory or
agency using procedures approved by the ASME or American
Welding Society. The contractor shall use only approved factory
manufactured welding type fitting for the intersection welding or
branching to mains. Valves and specialties shall have screwed or
flanged joints.
b.
Welding tees, ells, reducers and caps shall be of wrought or
forged construction similar to those manufactured by TUBE
TURNS, INC. In lieu of wrought or forged welding tees for branch
outlets, weldolets or welding nipples may be used; provided, first
that the nipples are accurately coped in the shop to fit the pipes
and leveled for field welding; and provided, second that openings
in the walls of pipes are cut to full inside diameter of the nipples;
and third, that the outlet diameter shall be less than 3/4 the
diameter of the main.
c.
For connections on welded piping to valves 2 1/2" and over and
that of other accessories required to be flanged, weld neck or slipon companion flanges shall be used. The flange face shall be in
every case perpendicular to the axis of the pipe valve.
3.
Solder Joints - the solder joint above grade shall be made, unless
otherwise noted, with 95/5, lead free solder using approved flux. All
underground joints and refrigeration joints shall be made with an approved
silver bearing solder. Cut pipe shall be reamed to full diameter. Copper to
steel pipe shall be made with proper fittings.
4.
Cast Iron Pipe Joints - for bell-and-spigot soil pipe the joint shall be firmly
packed with oakum and filled with molten lead not less than 1" deep and
not to extend more than one-eighth inch below the rim. The use of a
neoprene gasket when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations is also acceptable.
5.
Concrete Pipe Joint - Shall be bituminous joint compound or a cement
plaster installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Joints firmly packed with oakum and filled with a concrete mortar, which
shall extend mortar to 3” beyond the hub, shall also be acceptable. All
joints shall be made with precast concrete fittings.
6.
Flanged joint - The flanged joint shall be made with the proper number
and size of bolts and with the proper gasket between the flanges.
7.
Plastic Pipe Joints - Shall be made with solvent as recommended by the
pipe manufacturer.
15050-9
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.02
3.03
3.04
SECTION 15050
PIPE SPECIALTIES
A.
Pipe specialties shall be installed as indicated in the specifications and as
required to make a complete system.
B.
Escutcheon Plates shall be mounted on all exposed pipes extending through wall,
floor, ceiling or cabinet bases. On insulated pipes the escutcheon shall be on the
outside of the insulation.
C.
Pressure and Compound Gauges shall be installed with shut-off cock in the line
to each gauge.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
All pipes shall be supported from the building structure, and wherever possible,
parallel runs of horizontal piping shall be grouped together on adjustable trapeze
hangers. Single runs of horizontal piping shall be supported with clevis type
hangers. The hangers shall be on the outside of the insulation. Vertical risers
shall be supported at each floor line with steel pipe clamps. All hangers in
contact with copper pipe shall be copper plated. The use of wire or perforated
metal to support pipe will not be permitted. In no case shall copper pipe be in
contact with a ferrous metal.
B.
The pipe hanger spacing and support shall be as listed under 2.03 in this section.
C.
Where piping is supported from the steel, the support shall be attached at the top
of the steel. Attachments shall be made either by welding or using top beam
clamps.
D.
Any supplemental steel required between building structural members shall be
provided by this contractor.
VALVES
A.
The contractor shall install valves where indicated on the drawings and where
required for adequate control of the system. Provide shut-off valves at the base
of the risers and main branches at points of take-offs from the supply or return
mains. Branches shall be considered main branches when they serve three or
more units or fixtures. Provide valves necessary to isolate each piece of
equipment separately from the remainder of the system. Valves shall be installed
in accessible locations. Allow isolation for inspection, maintenance and repair of
each piece of equipment and each service loop. Provide valves to allow for the
phasing of work where required. Valve size shall be the same as the pipe size
except for control valves.
B.
Valves shall be installed with their stems in an upright or horizontal position.
15050-10
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 15050
Stems shall not be inverted.
3.05
C.
After approval of a particular valve, this type valve shall be used throughout the
project. Do not mix styles or manufacturers.
D.
Ball valves shall be provided with a 2” extended handle of a non-thermal
conductive material and shall include a protective sleeve that allows operation of
the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. Extended
handle shall be internally insulated.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
3.06
ELECTRIC MOTORS
A.
3.07
3.08
Install hinged and lock type access doors as required for operation and
maintenance of equipment. The access doors shall be installed so that they
maintain the rating integrity of the material in which they are mounted. Those with
an exposed surface in a finished area shall be flush with the finished material with
a recessed space for installation of flush matching materials when in panel or
acoustical tile.
Electric motors shall be supplied with equipment furnished under Division 15. All
moving parts shall be protected as required by OSHA.
ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTERS
A.
Electric motor starters and accessories shall be installed under Division 16.
B.
Three phase motor protectors shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturers’ recommendations and installation instructions. Unit shall be
selected for voltage specified.
EQUIPMENT
A.
The contractor shall receive and properly store the equipment pertaining to the
mechanical work. The equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against
dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. The manufacturer's
directions shall be followed completely in the delivery, storage, protection and
installation of all equipment and materials.
B.
The contractor shall provide and install all items necessary for the complete
installation of the equipment as required by code without additional cost to the
owner, regardless of whether the items are covered in the specifications. Such
items could be - but are not limited to: concrete pad, supports, vibration
eliminators, additional piping and valves, motor controllers, relief valves and
piping, insulation, electrical wiring, lubrication, refrigerants and start-up and
service.
15050-11
11/17
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 15050
C.
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to clean the equipment, make
necessary adjustments and place the equipment into operation before turning
equipment over to the Owner. Any paint that was scratched during construction
shall be touched-up with factory color paint. Any items that were damaged during
construction shall be replaced.
D.
Where equipment is supported from the steel, the support shall be attached at
the top of the steel. Attachments shall be made either by welding or using top
beam clamps.
E.
Three phase motor protectors shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and installation instructions. Unit shall be
selected for voltage specified. Motor protectors shall be installed prior to start-up.
F.
Permission for the use of new HVAC equipment to be used as a method for
providing temporary heating or cooling shall be at the discretion of the owner. The
use of new HVAC equipment for temporary heating or cooling shall not modify the
terms of the warranty nor shall it constitute substantial completion or beneficial
use. The mechanical contractor is responsible for providing a dust free HVAC
system and shall correct all equipment or system damage caused by construction
operations. New HVAC equipment used for temporary heating or cooling shall
have the filters changed on a regular basis or as directed by the owner and prior
to turning over equipment for permanent operation. The spare filters provided by
the specifications shall not be used for this purpose. The equipment fan belts
shall be inspected for excessive wear and replaced as directed by the owner. The
equipment cooling coils, condensing coils, heat exchangers, energy recovery
devices and associated ductwork shall be inspected for cleanliness and cleaned
as directed by the owner, to a level satisfactory to the owner which may include
this work to be done by an independent third party contractor at this contractors
expense.
G.
The mechanical contractor shall set all outside air dampers to the approximate
minimum position during equipment installation and prior to the start- up of
equipment.
H.
The installer shall be responsible for providing and installing new fan or motor
sheaves and belts when required to obtain the designed airflow.
END OF SECTION
15050-12
11/17
SECTION 15250
INSULATION
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division l - General Requirements, Section
15010 - General Provisions and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall
apply to this section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include providing and installing the insulation
on the items listed in this section or as shown on the drawings.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
All insulation shall have a composite fire hazard rating as tested by ASTM E-84,
NFPA 25 or UL 723 not to exceed 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed, and 50
fuel contributed.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on proposed insulation as described in section 15010 - 1.04.
Shop drawings shall include proposed uses of all insulation components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
2.02
The manufacturer of the products specified in this section shall be OWENSCORNING, CERTAIN-TEED, JOHNS-MANVILLE, ARMSTRONG, MANSON or
KNAUF.
PIPING INSULATION
A.
The piping shall be insulated with heavy density rigid molded fiberglass pipe
insulation with factory applied all service jacket (ASJ) with a 'K' factor not to
exceed .25 @ 75oF mean temperature. The minimum insulation thickness for
the various items shall be as follows:
1.
Domestic Cold Water Piping and Cold Water Makeup Piping - 1/2".
Exceptions: Exterior walls and plumbing chases shall be 1".
15250-1
11/17
INSULATION
SECTION 15250
2. Trap Primer Supply Piping - 1/2" elastomeric, expanded closed cell,
seamless pipe insulation from the drain tap to the trap primer valve or
distribution unit.
3.
Domestic Hot Water, Tempered Water and Hot Water Recirculating
Piping -1". Exceptions: Fixture runouts in interior plumbing chases and
walls may be 1/2".
4.
Storm Water (includes main and overflow piping) - The horizontal section
of the rain leaders, riser to and including the interior part of the roof drains
shall have 1" of insulation. The drain body and sump receiver of the roof
drain shall have 1” of rigid fiberglass board insulation. Above slab piping
serving open site drains shall have 1” pipe insulation from the open site
drain to the rain leader.
5.
Hot Water Heating Supply and Return
6.
a.
Pipe Size 1-1/2” and Under - 1".
b.
Pipe Size 2” and larger - 2".
Chilled Water Supply and Return
a.
Pipe Size 3” and under – 1 ½
b.
Pipe Size 4” and larger – 2”
7.
Condenser Water Supply & Return – 1-1/2”.
8.
Condensate Piping - 1".
9.
Refrigerant Piping - 1" closed cell, semi-slit pipe insulation with a
composite fire hazard rating as tested by ASTM E-84 not to exceed 25
flame spread and 50 smoke developed. Prototype: ARMSTRONG
Armaflex AP.
10.
Domestic water piping in the cells of masonry walls shall have be
polyolefin pipe insulation such as “IMCOLOCK” with a ½ inch wall
thickness
11.
Where chilled/hot water piping is installed within the airstream of
mechanical equipment, piping shall be insulated with flexible closed cell
elastomeric pipe insulation. Insulation thickness shall be 3/4 inch.
B.
Sheet Metal Saddles - See section 15050 - 2.03.
C.
Finish - Exposed Piping - Cover with 8 oz. canvas jacket.
1. Exposed piping in the kitchen shall be insulated per the specification and
15250-2
11/17
INSULATION
SECTION 15250
covered with a PVC jacket 20 mil thick, white in color, washable and
approved by the USDA and the FDA.
2.03
PIPING, FITTINGS, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES INSULATION
A.
Fittings, valves and specialties for the piping systems shall be insulated by twopiece molded fiberglass fittings with an insulating value equivalent to the pipe
insulation. Acceptable alternative insulation methods shall be as described in
paragraph 3.02 D.
B.
The following piping, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be insulated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
2.04
2.05
Domestic cold water piping
Domestic hot water, tempered water and hot water recirculating piping
Hot water heating supply and return
Chilled water supply and return
Condensate piping
Condenser Water Supply & Return
Finish - Insulation on exposed piping fittings, valves and specialties shall be
covered with an 8-oz. canvas jacket.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A.
Chilled Water Pump, Chilled Water Standby Pump, Cooling Tower Pump and
Cooling Tower Standby Pump- Pumps shall be encased with a sectional
fabricated, flanged insulated split metal housing to provide ease of maintenance
without damage to the insulation. Housing shall incorporate integral latching
devices. Housing shall be tight sealing to prevent air infiltration. See drawing
detail. All internal surfaces shall be insulated with 6 pounds per cubic foot density
fiberglass board having a “K” value of 0.22@ 75 Deg F mean temperature with a
factory applied all service jacket (ASJ). Minimum insulation thickness shall be one
inch.
B.
Chiller Cooler and Chilled Water Air Separators - All cold surfaces shall be
insulated with one inch thick fiberglass insulation. 'K' factor shall not exceed 0.27
@ 75°F mean temperature with a density of 6.5 pounds per cubic foot. Chilled
and hot water expansion tanks are not required to be insulated.
C.
Finish - All insulation on chiller cooler and chilled water air separator shall be
covered with an 8-oz. canvas jacket.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
Concealed Supply/Return, including flexible connections (horizontal FCU’s) And
Outside Air Ductwork - Unless noted otherwise on the drawings shall be insulated
with fiberglass duct wrap insulation at 1 pound per cubic foot density, having a
facing of laminated composite aluminum foil and kraft paper reinforced with a
glass reinforcing, with a perm rating not exceeding .05. The 'K' value shall not
15250-3
11/17
INSULATION
SECTION 15250
exceed .29 @ 75 degrees F mean temperature. The duct wrap insulation shall
have a minimum thickness of 2 inches. Insulate flexible connections on
horizontal fan coil units.
B.
Exposed Supply/Return and Outside Air Ductwork - Unless noted otherwise on
the drawings shall be insulated with 6 pounds per cubic foot density fiberglass
insulating board having a facing of laminated composite aluminum foil and kraft
paper reinforced with a glass reinforcing with a perm rating not exceeding .05.
The 'K' value shall not exceed .23 @ 75°F mean temperature. The duct board
shall have a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inches. Exposed ductwork shall include
but is not limited to, ductwork in accessible attics, equipment mezzanines, boiler
rooms and equipment rooms The exposed supply/return and outside air ductwork
shall also be covered with an 8-ounce canvas jacket and be prepared for
painting.
C.
See Section 15840 for description of any additional ductwork that shall be lined.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL
A.
All insulating material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations by personnel regularly employed in the pipe, duct and
equipment insulating trade.
B.
The insulation shall not be applied until all surfaces are clean and dry and until
inspected and released for insulation application.
C.
A complete moisture and vapor seal shall be provided on cold surfaces where
vapor barrier jackets or coatings are required. Anchors, hangers, and other
projections shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
D.
Pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings
except where walls or floors are required to be fire stopped or required to have a
fire resistance rating.
PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Pipe insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Piping (except refrigeration piping) - Butt all joints firmly together. Ends of pipe
insulation shall be sealed off with a vapor barrier coating at all fittings and valves.
The insulation laps and butt strips shall be sealed by one of the following
methods:
1.
Insulation without self-seal laps shall have lap adhesive manually applied
to all laps and butt strips. Stapling is not acceptable.
15250-4
11/17
INSULATION
SECTION 15250
2.
Insulation with self-seal laps shall have lap adhesive manually applied to
the outside of all laps and butt strips after installation. Stapling is not
acceptable.
C.
Refrigeration Piping and domestic water piping using closed cell insulation – Butt
joints and seams shall be joined together with contact adhesive PrototypeArmstrong 520 or manufacturer’s recommended adhesive. Both surfaces to be
joined shall be coated with the adhesive.
D.
Fittings and Valves - Shall be insulated with molded fiberglass fittings, segments
of pipe covering, or with firmly compressed foil faced fiberglass blanket. Mitered
joints are not acceptable. Secure in place with 20 gauge corrosion resistant wire
and apply a smoothing coat of insulating cement. Vapor seal by applying a layer
of open weave glass cloth fabric embedded between flood coats of vapor barrier
mastic. Lap glass fabric 2 inches onto adjacent pipe. PVC covers are acceptable
only if the item covered is fully insulated first. Insulation shall be installed so the
cover cannot be deformed. Contractor shall request an inspection by the Owner
of the insulated items prior to cover installation.
E.
Finish - All exposed piping, and piping fittings, valves and specialties insulation
shall receive an 8 oz. canvas jacket smoothly pasted in place with lagging
adhesive and sized with one brush coat of lagging adhesive. The finished
surface shall be suitable for painting. Exposed piping includes piping in
accessible attics, equipment mezzanines, boiler rooms and equipment rooms.
F.
Outdoor Piping - Weatherproofing Finishes for All Outdoor Insulation.
1.
Piping - Apply aluminum metal jacket 0.016" with moisture barrier around
pipe and slip edge into preformed Z lock positioned to shed water. Butt
next jacket section leaving approximately 3/8" gap. Place preformed 2"
butt aluminum band and wing seal.
2.
Fittings - Apply prefabricated metal fittings in composition to pipe
jacketing.
G.
Sheet Metal Saddles shall be provided and installed on all pipe hangers as stated
under section 15050, 2.03.
H.
Pipe Insulation Support - All insulated piping shall be supported at hanger and
sleeve locations by either using a high density pipe insulation or wooden blocking,
installed inside the vapor barrier for all pipe sizes one inch and larger. Highdensity pipe insulation shall be of the type as recommended by the manufacturer
and shall be substituted for no less than the bottom half section of the fiberglass
pipe insulation. The lengths of the high-density insulation shall be at least two
inches longer (each end) than the length of the saddle. The lengths of wooden
blocking shall be eight inches. Wooden blocking shall be the same thickness as
the pipe insulation, the same width as the pipe, shall be tapered within the
insulation and shall be centered at the hanger.
Remove portions of the
fiberglass pipe insulation by peeling back the factory applied all service jackets
15250-5
11/17
INSULATION
SECTION 15250
from the insulation and cut out and replace the required sections for either
method of insulation support. Re-wrap the vapor barrier to completely enclose
the installation. Manually apply lap adhesive to the outside lap and apply butt
strips.
The installations shall also meet any additional requirements
recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
I.
3.03
3.04
Underground Pipe Insulation
1.
Insulation- insulation shall be cellular glass insulation manufactured in
accordance with ASTM C 552. The insulation shall be fabricated in half
sections wherever possible. For large diameter piping where half sections
are not practical, curved sidewall segments are permitted.
2.
Jacketing- a 50 mil (1.3mm) thick self-sealing, modified bituminous
membrane reinforced with a glass fabric, and a 1mil (0.3mm) aluminum
top film on the outer surface.
3. Mastic- shall be asphalt cutback mastic.
4. Reinforcing Fabric- shall be open mesh polyester fabric with 6x5.5
mesh/inch configuration.
5.
Sealant- shall be a non-setting butyl sealant.
6.
Banding- shall be ½ inch aluminum or fiberglass reinforced nylon for
insulated lines with OD’s of 48 inches or less.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Chiller Cooler and Chilled Water Air Separators - Shall be insulated with
fiberglass insulation cut to a smooth uniform fit with butting edges. Complete
installation shall not have wrinkles, bulges or overlapping edges. Secure
insulation to all surfaces with adhesive designed for that purpose.
B.
Finish - All insulation on chilled water chiller cooler and chilled water air separator
shall be covered with an 8-oz. canvas jacket installed as described in paragraph
3.02 D.
DUCTWORK INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Fiberglass Duct Wrap Insulation - The duct wrap insulation shall be secured to
the ductwork with fire retardant adhesive in sufficient quantities to prevent
sagging. Ducts with a width of over 30" shall be further secured on the underside
with mechanical fasteners on 18" maximum centers. Insulation shall be butted
with facing overlapping all joints at least 2" and sealed with fire retardant vapor
barrier adhesive. Seal all breaks and punctures with vapor barrier tape and same
type of fire retardant adhesive. Stapling is not acceptable.
B.
Fiberglass Insulating Board Application
15250-6
11/17
INSULATION
SECTION 15250
1.
The insulating board shall be secured to the ductwork with mechanical
fasteners. The fasteners shall be spaced 12" to 18" on center with a
minimum of two rows per side of duct. Secure insulation in place with
washers firmly embedded in insulation. Seal all joints, breaks and
punctures with fire retardant vapor adhesive reinforced with a 3" wide strip
similar to that of facing.
2.
Finish - A glass cloth shall be applied over the facing into a wet coat of fire
retardant adhesive, overlapping seams at least 2". Apply finish coat of
same fire retardant adhesive.
END OF SECTION
15250-7
11/17
SECTION 15350
NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division
1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and
Methods, shall apply to this section.
The work under this section shall include a complete natural gas piping system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All work shall conform with the International Fuel Gas Code, NFPA 54 - National
Fuel Gas Code, local gas code, and local gas supplier's requirements.
B.
The entire piping system shall be tested and approved before being placed in
operation.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on all piping and valves as described in Section 15010 – 1.04.
Shop drawings shall include proposed uses of all items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Gas Piping Above Ground - Shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable
screwed 125 psi fittings or schedule 40 black steel pipe with 150 psi weld fittings.
B.
Gas Piping Underground - Shall be plastic pipe and compatible fittings
conforming with ASTM D2513, and shall be installed as recommended by the
pipe manufacturer and local requirements.
C.
Gas Piping Below Floor Slab on Grade - Shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe
with malleable screwed 125 psi fittings run inside a pipe sleeve that is vented to
the outside atmosphere. Pipe sleeves that are located below floor slabs, in walls
or non-plenum spaces shall be schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings. Pipe sleeves
located in plenum spaces shall be welded schedule 40 black steel pipe with 150
psi welded fittings. Pipe sleeves shall terminate to the outside atmosphere
through the roof or exterior wall, shall be turned down to prevent water from
entering system and shall have a bug screen over the end of pipe.
15350-1
11/17
NATURAL GAS PIPING
2.02
SECTION 15350
VALVES
A.
Gas valves shall be of the approved type with an AGA/UL label and shall be
installed as required. Gas valves shall not be located in plenum spaces. Provide
operating nut in lieu of lever handle for all valves located outside of the building.
Pressure regulating valves shall be as manufactured by SENSUS or MAXITROL.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The Contractor shall coordinate the service with the local gas supplier.
B.
The Contractor shall make the gas connection to all gas equipment.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate the gas pressures required with the local gas
supplier. Gas piping to the emergency generator shall be supplied at 2 psi from
the meter and throttled down to a minimum of 11” W.C. at the generator, and
shall have a dedicated line from the meter to the generator.
D. Unions shall not be located in plenum spaces.
END OF SECTION
15350-2
11/17
SECTION 15351
COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and
Methods, shall apply to this section.
The extent of compressed air piping work and auxiliary equipment is indicated by
drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section, and is hereby
defined to include (but not necessarily be limited to) air compressor, receiver, air
dryer, belt guard, all required air piping, needle valves, automatic tank drain and
outlets as indicated and as specified. Provide blow-off valves at low points and
intake filter silencer on exterior of building, piped to compressor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ANSI Code Compliance - Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B 31.1,
“Power Piping.”
B.
ASME Code Symbol Stamps - Provide compressed air receivers and safety
(pressure relief) valves complying with applicable ASME codes, and stamped with
appropriate code symbols.
C.
CGA Standards - Materials shall comply with Compressed Gas Association
standards.
D.
UL Labels - Provide electrical components which have been listed and labeled by
Underwriters Laboratories.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on all equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
A.
Piping shall be galvanized schedule 40 steel pipe with galvanized screwed, 150
pound type fittings.
B.
Air Pressure Reducing Valve - Bronze body, sized for capacity of system and set
15351-1
11/17
COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEM
SECTION 15351
for 125 psi outlet pressure.
2.02
C.
Pressure Gauges – 2” minimum dial with safety blowout brass gauge cock.
D.
Couplings - Provide Hansen quick connect-disconnect couplings. Type shall be
suitable for use with Owner’s equipment.
E.
Valves - Safety relief valve shall be 2 piece, full-port, chrome plated ball valve
rated for 125 psi operating pressure.
AIR COMPRESSOR
A.
General - Furnish and install a self-contained compressor unit, consisting of a
compressor, motor, V-belt drive, and pressure regulator, all mounted on a vertical
ASME receiver. Suitable interconnecting piping between the compressor,
receiver and pressure regulator shall be included.
B.
Performance - The compressor shall deliver not less than the scheduled cubic
feet of free air per minute at inlet conditions compressed to the indicated
pressure. Inlet conditions of 14.7 psia and ambient temperature of 90°F.
Provide the Owner with a copy of the test/start-up record.
C.
The Tech Lab air compressor shall deliver 10.9 ACFM free air delivered at 125
PSIG, 80 gallon ASME receiver, 3 HP V(select) PH(select) 60HZ. Options
shall include; ASME pressure relief valve, automatic tank drain, stop-start control,
belt guard, low oil control, starting unloader, and intake filter silencer. Provide
phase protector as required in section 15050.
D.
Receiver shall be built in accordance with ASME “Unfired Pressure Vessel Code”
for a working pressure of 150 PSI, and shall be stamped with official ASME
symbol, name of manufacturer, maximum allowable working pressure, year built,
and National Board Number. Provide an ASME approved safety valve set to
relieve at a pressure not in excess of working pressure of receiver. Valve shall be
installed directly in receiver. Receiver shall be provided with a pressure gauge
having not less than 2” dial graduated to not less than 1½ times maximum
operating pressure. Gauge shall be installed on, or connected directly to
receiver.
E.
Compressor and receiver shall be installed on a concrete foundation not less than
4” high, having vibration isolation pads.
F.
Automatic Condensate Trap - Automatic condensate trap shall be provided to
remove accumulated moisture from the discharge receiver and aftercooler.
15351-2
11/17
COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEM
SECTION 15351
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
General - Comply with requirements of section 15010 for installation of basic
piping materials. Install compressed air piping products and equipment in
accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of
ANSI B 31.1, and in accordance with recognized industry practices.
B.
The manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified representative to
review the installation of the compressors and all components, test and start the
compressors, and instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the systems.
C.
Extend compressed air lines from receiver to rooms and outlets indicated on the
drawing and connect to all equipment requiring compressed air.
D.
Pitch piping in direction of flow and provide drip pockets and nipples at low points.
Provide stopcocks and unions to permit disconnection at equipment.
PIPE TEST
Compressed Air Piping Leak Test - Prior to initial operation of piping system, purge lines
with oil-free air, and perform a 24-hour standing pressure time-test. Charge line with
compressed air to 150 psi; maintain test pressure for 24 hours with a pressure loss no
greater than 5 psi. During pressure test, test joints and fittings for leaks with soap bubble
solution.
END OF SECTION
15351-3
11/17
SECTION 15401
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include a complete domestic water piping system.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
All water piping shall be tested for leaks before the insulation is applied and before the
piping is covered up. The test shall be at least 100 psi of water pressure for duration of 12
hours.
All grooved couplings, and fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a single
manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved
components.
All casting used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for
quality assurance and traceablility.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on all piping and valves as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Water service piping- Shall be class 150 ductile iron lined tar coated piping with
mechanical or slip joints.
B.
Water piping below grade- Shall be type’K’ soft drawn copper tubing with 125 psi
wrought copper sweat fittings soldered with silver solder.
C.
Water piping below grade (trap primer supply) - Shall be type ‘K’ soft drawn
copper continuous tubing.
D.
Water piping above grade- Shall be one of the following:
1.
Type 'L' hard drawn copper tubing with 125 psi wrought copper sweat fittings
15401-1
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
SECTION 15401
and all joints soldered with 95/5 or silver solder.
2.
The use of mechanically formed tee connections is acceptable. Branches
shall be formed up to the run tube size as shown in ASTM 2014. Forming
procedures shall be in accordance with tool manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.
Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved
components may be used as an option to brazing, soldering or flanged
methods. All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer and conform
to local code approval. Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001
certified. Grooved couplings shall meet the requirements of ASTM F-1476.
Grooved components shall be manufactured by VICTALUIC. Grooved
components manufactured by GRINNELL or ANVIL INT. are acceptable
providing all aspects of the specification are met. No substitutions.
a.
All products shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI /NSF-61
for potable water service and shall meet the low-lead requirements of
NSF-372.
b. Copper pipe shall be roll grooved in accordance with manufacturer’s
current listed standards.
c.
Mechanical couplings for joining copper pipe shall be cast of ductile
iron conforming to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15 and ASTM A-536,
grade 65-45-12. Housings shall be cast with an angle pattern bolt
pad for direct connection of copper without flaring to IPS dimensions.
Coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon
steel track head conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-449
and ASTM A-183. Couplings shall be coated with copper colored
alkyd enamel paint. Zinc electroplated bolts and nuts conforming to
ASTM B633 shall be provided for couplings.
d.
Gaskets for grooved piping shall be molded of synthetic rubber in a
configuration conforming to the copper tube size outside diameter
and coupling housing. Gaskets shall be” E “EPDM compound
designated for domestic water use and complying with ASTM,
UL/ULC and ANSI/NSF standards.
e.
Couplings shall be installation-ready, for direct slab installation without
field assembly.
f.
Fittings for grooved piping shall be full flow smooth turn copper
fittings with copper tube size grooves designed to accept grooved
end
couplings. Fittings shall be wrought copper per ASTM B-75
alloy C12200 and ANSI B16-22; bronze sand castings per ASTM B584 copper alloy CDA 836 (85-5-5-5) per ANSI B16.18. Victaulic
copper connection.
15401-2
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
4.
2.02
SECTION 15401
Exposed water piping to plumbing fixtures - Shall be chrome plated brass
piping and fittings and chrome plated standoff hangers.
VALVES
Valves shall be manufactured by VICTAULIC, STOCKHAM, JENKINS, HAMMOND,
MILWAUKEE, CONBRACO INDUSTRIES, INC., APOLLO VALVES, FAIRBANKS, CRANE,
WATTS, NIBCO or JOMAR. All valves shall be certified to be lead free in accordance with
NSF/ANSI 61 section 8, which states that the wetted surfaces of all plumbing valves shall
have a weighted-average lead content of no more than 0.25%.
2.03
A.
Gate valves 2 1/2" and smaller - Shall be sweated bronze gate valves with screw-in
bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge and a minimum rating of 200-pound wog.
B.
Gate valves larger than 2 1/2" - Shall be flanged iron body OS & Y gate valve with
stainless steel or bronze trim, ductile iron wedge and a minimum rating of 125 psi
and 200-pound wog.
C.
Check valves 2 1/2" and smaller - Shall be sweated bronze, horizontal swing check
valves with solid bronze discs and a minimum rating of 200-poundwog.
D.
Check valves larger than 2 1/2" - Shall be flanged ductile iron, horizontal swing
check valves with stainless steel or cast iron disc and a minimum rating of 200pound wog.
E.
Balancing valves – Valves manufactured by Bell & Gossett or Red-White Valve with
memory stop, positive shutoff, extended insulated handle and P/T type ports for
balancing. Bell & Gossett circuit setter plus size ½ “to 2” flow .25 GPM to 20 GPM.
F.
Ball valves - 2" and smaller may be used in lieu of gate valves. These valves shall
be sweated bronze full port, with chrome plated ball, have extended insulated
handles (such as NIBCO’S Nib-seal or Apollo Valves Therma-seal) and rated at not
less than 200-pound wog.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
Pressure reducing valves shall be as shown on drawings and shall be manufactured by
MUELLER, WATTS or A.W. CASH.
2.04
STOP VALVES
A.
Stop valves shall be bronze and shall be manufactured by NIBCO, BRASS CRAFT,
McGuire, APOLLO, T & S BRASS or as identified in Section 15450 or 15451. Stop
valves shall be loose-key type under all wall hung fixtures and shall be 1/4 turn ball
valves with chrome plated ball, under all countertop fixtures. Compression fittings
are not acceptable.
15401-3
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
2.05
SECTION 15401
TRAP PRIMER VALVES
A.
Trap primer valves shall be as shown on drawings and shall be manufactured by
MIFAB, SMITH, JAY R JOSAM or ZURN. The prototype for trap primer valves is
MIFAB model MR-500 (discharging ½ ounce of water each time a line pressure drop
of 3 PSI is registered), with MIFAB model MI-DU distribution unit when multiple traps
are supplied with a single primer valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPING SUPPORTS
Piping supports in general shall be as called for in section 15050. The water piping in the
plumbing chases shall be supported from the waste and vent pipes. The manufactured
support system shall hold pipes secure to prevent vibration, to assure outlets are in proper
position for fixture setting, and provide electrolytic isolation. Support of pipe, tubing and
equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each
application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed. The Supports shall be as
manufactured by HOLDRITE, M-CO., ADJUSTO-SYSTEM, SUMMER SYSTEM,
CARPENTER&PATTERSON, or BRACKET SYSTEM.
3.02
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Shock absorbers shall be installed on the branch pipe supply to all quick opening and
closing fixtures (including flush valves). Shock absorbers shall be sized in accordance with
Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH201 and shall be located as
recommended by that Standard so as to protect all flush valves on a branch pipe. Provide
access panels for all shock absorbers located in concealed locations. Shock absorbers shall
be constructed of a stainless steel shell with an elastomer bellows, stainless steel adaptor
and male threaded plug. Shock absorbers shall be manufactured by JOSAM, JAY R.
SMITH, or ZURN.
3.03
CLEANING/DISINFECTION OF PIPING SYSTEM
The entire piping system shall be flushed, disinfected and restored to operation in
accordance with the provisions of the international plumbing code and the Health
Department requirements. All new, repaired or extensions of existing piping systems shall
be flushed and disinfected prior to utilization. Provide owner with a copy of the disinfection
report. The report shall include as a minimum, chlorine solution concentration/duration
method used, system pH level data including levels prior to commencement of work, levels
during pre-flushing and levels during post flushing. System cleaning shall be witnessed by
the owner.
3.04
VALVES
A.
Gate Valves/Ball Valves - Shall be installed at the service entrances, at the base of
all risers and in the distribution system to isolate a group of three or more fixtures as
well as at each shock absorber location.
15401-4
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
3.05
SECTION 15401
B.
Stop Valves - Shall be installed at each fixture.
C.
Pressure Reducing Valves - Shall be installed at the service entrance when the
water pressure exceeds 60 psi. Renewal projects shall have existing pressure
reducing valves replaced. All valves shall have pressure gauges.
D.
Check Valves- Shall be installed in water supply lines to all Mop Basins, Laundry
Trays and kitchen 3 compartment sink.
PIPE INSULATION
Pipe insulation shall be as called for in section 15250.
3.06
WATER SERVICE PIPING
Water service piping shall be installed below the recorded frost line but not less than three
feet below the finished grade.
3.07
MECHANICALLY FORMED OUTLETS
A.
3.08
Mechanically formed outlets shall have a collar height not less than three times the
thickness of the branch tube wall. The branch shall be notched to conform to the
inner curve of the run and shall be dimpled or otherwise impeded from penetrating
the run pipe/tube. The branch tube shall also be dimpled to indicate the location of
the notches with respect to the run. Such marking shall be at a sufficient distance
from the face of the joint to allow for a visual point of inspection after the joint is
brazed. All joints constructed using this method shall be brazed. Note: soft soldered
joints will not be permitted.
GROOVED PIPING
A.
Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the
area from pipe end to groove for the proper gasket sealing.
B.
Gasket style and material shall be verified as suitable for the intended service.
C.
D.
Grooved end fittings, couplings, flange adapters, and valves shall be sized to copper
tube dimensions. Flaring of pipe ends to IPS dimensions is not allowed.
All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer.
E.
Grooved connections shall not be installed in inaccessible concealed locations.
F.
Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest
published installation instructions.
G.
Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer, and shall be
verified as suitable for the intended service.
15401-5
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
SECTION 15401
END OF SECTION
15401-6
11/17
SECTION 15405
SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include a complete soil, waste and vent system.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The entire system shall be tested and approved as required by the plumbing code and local
requirements before the system is covered up.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on all piping and fittings as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.01
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Materials
1.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings- Hubless Cast Iron pipe and fittings shall be
marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and
listed by NSF International. Hubless Couplings shall conform to CISPI
Standard 310 and be certified by NSF International. Heavy Duty couplings
shall conform to ASTM C 1540 and shall be used if indicated. Gaskets
shall conform to ASTM C 564. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single
manufacturer and are to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and applicable code requirements.
Couplings shall
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s band
tightening
sequence and torque recommendations. Hub and Spigot Cast Iron pipe and
fittings shall be manufactured from grey cast iron and shall conform to ASTM
A 74. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective
trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International.
Manufacturers shall be one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
AB & I Foundry
Charlotte Pipe and Foundry
Tyler Pipe
15405-1
11/17
SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
2.
B.
2.02
SECTION 15405
PVC Schedule 40 Pipe and Fittings- shall be manufactured from PVC
compound with a cell class of 11432 per ASTM D 4396 for pipe and 12454
per ASTM D 1784 for fittings and conform with National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) Standard 14. Pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) conforming
to ASTM D 2665. Injection molded fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665.
Fabricated fittings shall conform to ASTM F 1866. All pipe and fittings to be
produced by a single manufacturer and be installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements.
Pipe Schedule
1.
Soil and Waste Pipe and Fittings Below Grade: Shall be service weight cast
iron bell-and-spigot pipe and fittings or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and
PVC-DWV fittings.
2.
Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings Above Grade: Shall be service
weight cast iron bell-and-spigot pipe and fittings, schedule 40 galvanized
steel pipe with screwed cast iron drainage pattern fittings, cast iron no-hub
piping and fitting or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and PVC-DWV fittings
except as noted in paragraph '3’. PVC plastic piping shall not be used in
plenum spaces. DWV copper tubing and copper drainage pattern fittings
shall be used for piping at the 3-compartment sink. All piping between the
science prep room sinks and the acid neutralization basin shall be acid
resistant polypropylene pipe and fittings.
3.
Soil, Waste and Vent Stacks - shall be cast iron bell and spigot pipe and
fittings or cast iron no-hub.
VENT FLASHINGS
Vent flashings shall be 3 lb. per square foot lead flashings or 2 1/2 lb. per square foot for
prefabricated flashings, except on roofs where the manufacturer of the roof requires a
special flashing to tie in his roofing system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
All soil and waste piping shall be run at a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot unless
otherwise noted on the drawings. The contractor shall field check all proposed soil
and waste piping to verify that the piping system can be installed at the required
grade before any soil and waste piping is installed.
B.
When the Building Sewer piping is installed using non-metallic piping, an insulated
tracer wire, 18 AWG minimum in size and suitable for direct burial shall be installed
in the same trench as the sewer within 12 inches of the pipe, this tracer wire shall
terminate at the cleanout access cover.
15405-2
11/17
SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
3.02
SECTION 15405
C.
Buried PVC schedule 40 pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321.
Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two-step process with primer manufactured
for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM F 656 and
ASTM D 2564.
D.
Solvent cement PVC joints shall be protected from chemical agents, fire-stopping
materials, thread sealant, plasticized-vinyl products or other aggressive chemical
agents not compatible with PVC compounds. The system shall be hydrostatically
tested after installation.
E.
All openings in the piping system during construction shall be securely capped to
prevent foreign matter from entering the piping system.
F.
Piping to cleanouts shall be as shown on the drawings and as required by the local
plumbing code.
G.
The minimum depth of the building sewer shall be no less than two feet below
finished grade.
H.
Double sanitary tee fittings shall not be allowed for piping receiving the discharge
from fixtures or appliances.
I.
PVC flanges shall not be allowed for water closets or urinals.
J.
Copper pipe and fittings shall not be used on waste piping for urinals.
VENTS AND VENT FLASHINGS
A.
Vent pipes shall extend 12" above the roof unless otherwise required. The minimum
size vent through roof shall be 2".
B.
The lead vent flashings shall be turned down on the inside of the vent. On roofing
systems where the roofing manufacturer requires a special flashing, the contractor
shall install flashing as required.
C.
Vent piping shall not terminate within ten feet of outside air intake.
END OF SECTION
15405-3
11/17
SECTION 15406
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include a complete roof drainage system.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The roof drainage system shall be tested for leaks before the insulation is applied and
before the piping is covered up. The test shall be filling the system with water.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on all piping and fittings as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Materials
1.
Cast Soil Pipe and Fittings- Hubless Cast Iron pipe and fittings shall be
marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and
listed by NSF International. Hubless Couplings shall conform to
CISPIStandard 310 and be certified by NSF International. Heavy Duty
couplings shall conform to ASTM C 1540 and shall be used if indicated.
Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 564. All pipe and fittings to be produced
by a single manufacturer and are to be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable code requirements.
Couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s band
tightening sequence and torque recommendations. Tighten bands with a
properly calibrated torque limiting device. Hub and Spigot Cast Iron pipe and
fittings shall be manufactured from grey cast iron and shall conform to ASTM
A 74. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of
the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International.
Manufacturers shall be one of the following.
a.
b.
c.
AB&I Foundry
Charlotte Pipe and Foundry
Tyler Piper
15406-1
11/17
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM
2.
B.
2.02
SECTION 15406
PVC Schedule 40 Pipe and Fittings- shall be manufactured from PVC
compound with a cell class of 11432 per ASTM D 4396 for pipe and 12454
per ASTM D1784 for fittings and conform with National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) Standard 14. Pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) conforming
to ASTM D2665. Injection molded fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2265.
Fabricated fittings shall conform to ASTM F 1866. All pipe and fittings to be
produced by a single manufacturer and to be installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements.
Pipe Schedule
1.
Storm Water Piping Below Grade: Shall be service weight cast iron bell-andspigot pipe and fittings or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and PVC-DWV
fittings.
2.
Storm Water Piping Above Grade: Shall be service weight cast iron bell-andspigot pipe and fittings, cast iron no-hub piping and fittings, schedule 40
galvanized steel pipe with screwed cast iron drainage pattern fittings, or
schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and PVC fittings. PVC plastic piping shall not
be used in plenum spaces.
3.
Storm water piping below grade from 5 feet outside of the building to the
storm water structure may be reinforced concrete bell-and-spigot pipe with
precast matching fittings.
ROOF DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS
Roof drains and cleanouts shall be as listed under section 15420.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
All piping shall be run at a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot unless otherwise noted on
the drawings. The contractor shall field check all proposed storm water piping to
verify that the piping system can be installed at the required grade before any piping
is installed.
B.
When the Building Sewer piping is installed using non-metallic piping, an insulated
tracer wire, 18 AWG minimum in size and suitable for direct burial shall be installed
in the same trench as the sewer within 12 inches of the pipe, this tracer wire shall
terminate at the cleanout access cover.
C.
Buried PVC schedule 40 pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321.
Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two-step process with primer manufactured
for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM F 656 and
ASTM D 2564.
D.
Solvent cement PVC joints shall be protected from chemical agents, fire stopping
materials, thread sealant, plasticized-vinyl products or other aggressive chemical
15406-2
11/17
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM
SECTION 15406
agents not compatible with PVC compounds. The system shall be hydrostatically
tested after installation.
3.02
E.
All openings in the piping system during construction shall be securely capped to
prevent foreign matter from entering the piping system.
F.
Piping to cleanouts shall be as shown on the drawings and as required by the local
plumbing code.
G.
The piping to the roof drains shall have a minimum of 5 feet offset between the
vertical rain leader and the riser to the drain for expansion unless otherwise noted.
H.
The minimum depth of the building storm sewer shall be no less than two feet below
finished grade.
PIPE INSULATION
The horizontal section of the rain leaders, riser to and including the interior part of the roof
drain, shall be insulated to prevent condensation. Pipe insulation shall be as listed under
section 15250.
3.03
ROOF DRAINS
The roof drains and accessories shall be installed to meet the requirements of the roofing
system. The roof drains shall be flashed with a 4-foot square sheet of 4-lb. lead. On roofing
systems where the roofing manufacturing requires a special flashing, the contractor shall
install the flashing as required.
END OF SECTION
15406-3
11/17
SECTION 15420
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010 General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include furnishing and installing the plumbing
equipment and making the final connections of equipment furnished by others.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on all equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. Shop
drawings shall include uses of all items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
The following equipment shall be as manufactured by J. R. SMITH. Equipment fully equal to
the item specified manufactured by CONBRACO INDUSTRIES, INC., APOLLO VALVE,
JOSAM MANUFACTURING, WADE, WATTS, MIFAB or ZURN shall be acceptable.
A.
Cleanouts (CO) - J.R. SMITH 4031L inside, provide carpet marker(-Y) when
necessary, 4293L outside, stack cleanout 4510 tapped bronze plug to accept screw
for 4710 round stainless steel access cover and 4111L-U for cleanouts located in
sidewalks with 4915-CO frame and access cover. Cleanouts at the Building
Drain/Building Sewer junction shall have a 18”x18”x6” concrete pad with 4915-CO
frame and access cover.
B.
Roof Drains (RD) - J.R. SMITH 1010 Y-C-R-AD-U, non-adjustable, aluminum dome,
vandal proof, with deck clamp and drain receiver.
C.
Combination Roof Drain and Overflow Roof Drains (RD/ORD) - Shall be WATTS
RD-700-B-D-L epoxy coated cast iron dual outlet roof drain/ overflow with flashing
clamp, integral gravel stop, 4” high internal overflow standpipe, vandal proof secured
ductile or cast iron dome, sump receiver and deck clamp. The only acceptable
alternate is ZURN.
D.
Wall Hydrants (WH) - Shall be J.R. SMITH 5519-WC Series automatic draining, nonfreeze wall hydrant with vacuum breaker and wall box with chrome finish; provide
wall clamp.
15420-1
11/17
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 15420
E.
Mixing Type Wall Hydrants (WH-1) - Shall be J.R. SMITH 5560QTseries, automatic
draining, non-freeze, hot and cold water mixing type wall hydrant with vacuum
breaker; provide wall clamp; provide shutoff valve and check valve in both of the
supplies to the hydrant.
F.
Floor Drains (FD) toilet rooms & kitchen - J.R. SMITH 2005-A5NB-U-B vandal proof,
sediment bucket, round bronze top and adjustable strainer. Provide SureSeal model
SS3009V inline floor drain trap seal barrier.
G.
Floor Drains (FD-1) mechanical rooms and sprinkler rooms - J.R. SMITH 2220L –
PB-P050 with sediment bucket and round bronze top. Provide SureSeal model
SS3009V inline floor drain trap seal barrier.
H.
Floor sink (FS) - J.R. SMITH 3200-12.
I.
Shock Absorbers - J.R. SMITH 5000 SERIES.
J.
Traps for art room sinks in middle and high schools - J.R. SMITH 8730; provide slip
fittings.
K.
Grease Interceptors - * J.R. SMITH 8200 with extended top for in-floor installations
and 8000/81000 for on-floor installations, see drawings for type used; provide flow
control fitting and hub adapters.
L.
Check valve (condensate drains) – WATTS CV series, bronze, straight pattern swing
check.
M.
Open site drain with backwater valve - J.R. SMITH 2005L-F37NB-V with ball float
valve. Provide SureSeal model SS3009V inline floor drain trap seal barrier on all
drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
N.
Hose Bibb (HB)- Woodford model 21 wall faucet with vacuum breaker. Hose bibs in
occupied rooms shall be chrome plated with a loose tee key. Hose bibs in
mechanical rooms and unoccupied spaces shall be brass finish with wheel handle.
O.
Downspout Boot (DS Boot)-JAY R. SMITH1786 series.
P.
Downspout Scupper Nozzle (DSN)-JAY R. SMITH 1770-BS cast bronze nozzle and
flange with bird screen.
Q.
Floor Drains (Existing to Remain) – Raise or lower floor drain to the new floor
elevation. Provide new floor drain strainer and sediment bucket to fit existing drain.
Provide SureSeal model SS3009V inline floor drain trap seal barrier. It is the intent of
this requirement that the existing floor drains is to finish flush with new floor surfaces.
R.
Area Drain (AD)- JAY R. SMITH 2253C-U-G large capacity drain with vandal proof
grate and galvanized parts. Set drain in 24”x24”x 6” concrete pad.
15420-2
11/17
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
2.02
2.03
2.04
SECTION 15420
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Refrigerators with ice makers or ice machines – CONBRACO INDUSTRIES, INC.,
APOLLO VALVE Model DUCLF4N series. Backflow preventers fully equal to the
items specified as manufactured by WATTS shall be acceptable.
B.
Backflow preventers for cold water make-up –CONBRACO INDUSTRIES INC.
APOLLO VALVES 4ALF-200 series, reduced pressure, with captured spring
cartridges and domestic ball valve shutoffs with stainless steel handles and trim, with
air gap and drain line extended to floor drain. Products fully equal to the item
specified as manufactured by WATTS or WILKINS shall be acceptable.
C.
Backflow preventers for irrigation systems – CONBRACO INDUSTRIES INC.
APOLLO VALVES 4ALF-200 series. Product fully equal to the item specified as
manufactured by WATTS or WILKINS shall be acceptable.
TEMPERING VALVES
A.
Tempering Valves - LEONARD XL 670 LF series with high/low capabilities for
general service, and TM-356-W/HA for whirlpools. Tempering valves fully equal to
the item specified as manufactured by CONBRACO INDUSTRIES INC. APOLLO
VALVES, POWERS, HONEYWELL, LAWLER or SYMMONS shall be acceptable.
B.
Tempering valves for locker room showers shall be CONBRACO model MVHL
series, ASSE 1069 compliant with locking enclosure cabinet (no substitutions).
C.
Tempering valves for emergency showers LEONARD TM-800-STSTL-REC
emergency water mixing valve mounted in a recessed stainless steel cabinet. Valve
shall have an internal cold water bypass capable of 20GPM upon failure of hot water
supply. Tempering valves fully equal to the items specified as manufactured by
CONBRACO INDUSTRIES INC. APOLLO VALVES, POWERS, LAWLER or
SYMMONS shall be acceptable.
ELEVATOR SUMP PUMP
STANCOR model SE-50 submersible effluent pump,1/2 HP, 115 volts, 3600 RPM,2”
discharge connection. Pump control panel shall be STANCOR Oil Minder System, 115 volts,
with built-in audible and visual alarms when pump does not run due to oil in pti or high liquid
alarm. Provide silencing button for internal audible alarm. Panel shall have additional contact
for remote alarm location. Junction box shall be provided with multi-pin connector and cord
in lengths as required. Provide additional control panel for remote alarm in Building
Engineer’s Office or as shown on drawings.
2.05
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT FILTER (ENGINEER TO SELECT)
*(normal use, engineer to edit)*
Kitchen equipment filter- Alkalinity and pH control system filter for combi-steamer shall be
15420-3
11/17
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 15420
manufactured by EVERPURE, Kleensteam model# EV9797-21 with model#7CB5
replacement cartridge and SS-10 cartridge model#EV9797-02 SR-X scale reducing feeder
and deliming system. Provide with shutoff valve, pressure gauge and accessories
recommended by the manufacturer. Connect system filter to boiler side of combi steamer.
2.06
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT REVERSE OSMOSIS SYSTEM (single combi)
*(to be used in hard water areas, engineer to edit)*
Kitchen equipment - reverse osmosis system- Reverse osmosis/blended water system for
combi-steamer shall be manufactured by EVERPURE,MRS-225CC System model#
EV9970-09 with model #EV9607-41 carbon filter, model# EV9627-03 RO cartridge, model#
EV9627-05 calcium cartridge, Pre-filter kit model# EV9795-81, model# EV9534-40 pre-filter
cartridge and model# DEV3115-69 storage tank. Provide with shutoff valves, pressure
gauges, interconnecting piping and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer.
Connect system to boiler side of combi steamer.
2.07
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT REVERSE OSMOSIS SYSTEM (double combi)
(to be used in hard water areas, engineer to edit)
Kitchen equipment -reverse osmosis system- Reverse osmosis/blended water system for
combi-steamer shall be manufactured by EVERPURE,MRS-350CC System model#
EV9970-18 with model #EV9607-41 carbon filter, model# EV9627-07 RO cartridge,
model#EV9627-05 calcium cartridge, Pre-filter kit model# EV9795-81, model# EV9534-40
pre-filter cartridge and model# DEV3115-70 storage tank. Provide with shutoff valves,
pressure gauges, interconnecting piping and accessories as recommended by the
manufacturer. Connect system to boiler side of combi steamer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Floor drains shall be installed complete including trap primer if required by local
authorities. Floor drains shall be flashed with a 3-foot diameter sheet of 4 pound
lead when installed above ground. The size of the floor drains shall be as shown on
the drawings.
B.
Cleanouts shall be installed in an accessible location. Install carpet markers,
cleanout access covers or access panels where required for accessibility. The size
of the cleanouts shall be as shown on the drawings. Cleanout plugs shall be
installed with a non-hardening type pipe dope on threads to allow for easy removal of
plugs.
C.
Roof drains shall be installed as listed in section 15406. The size of the roof drains
shall be as shown on the drawings.
15420-4
11/17
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
3.02
SECTION 15420
D.
Wall hydrants shall be installed with backflow preventer and a stop and waste valve
in an accessible location. The hydrants shall be selected to match the wall thickness
at the location to be installed. Provide Owner with separate 'T' handle key for each
wall hydrant.
E.
Shock absorbers shall be installed as listed in section 15401 and as required by
local authority, in an accessible location.
F.
Interceptors shall be installed complete. The interceptor shall be installed as
recommended by the manufacturer and local codes. Flow control devices shall be
installed in the drain line from the 3-compartment sink.
G.
Air Gaps shall be installed as required by the local codes. Provide air gap fitting for
all dishwashers in Home EC areas unless unit is provided with integral air gap.
H.
Neutralizing tanks shall be installed complete and as recommended by the
manufacturer and local codes.
I.
Silver Recovery systems shall be owner provided and contractor installed complete
as recommended by the manufacturer and local codes.
J.
Tempering valves shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and shall
be mounted no higher than 66 inches above floor. After installation is complete, the
contractor shall have the manufacturers authorized representative verify that the
installation complies with the manufacturer’s requirements. The representative shall
take apart and clean valve, set-up and adjust the valve for proper operation at the
end of project, but before final inspection. Provide the owner with a copy of the
inspection and set-up report.
K.
Elevator sump pump shall be installed in elevator pit sump as recommended by the
manufacturer and as detailed. The Division 15 contractor shall install all wiring
between the sump pump and the pump control panel. The Division 16 contractor
shall install all power wiring.
L.
Elevator sump pump remote alarm shall be installed as recommended by the
manufacturer and by the local authority. The remote alarm panel shall be furnished
under Division 15. The Division 15 contractor shall install the remote alarm panel,
and all wiring between the pump control panel and the remote alarm panel.
M.
The kitchen equipment reverse osmosis system shall be rack or wall mounted in an
accessible location or as shown on drawings. Interconnecting piping between the
reverse osmosis system, storage tank and combi steamer shall be Type L copper.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow preventers shall be installed as shown on the drawings or as required by the local
codes and shall be mounted no higher than 66 inches above finished floor.
END OF SECTION
15420-5
11/17
SECTION 15423
DOMESTIC RECIRCULATING PUMP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, section
15010 - General Provisions, and section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply
to this section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the domestic recirculating pump as shown on the drawings and
specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Pump must be selected from published test curves showing actual brake
horsepower. The selection point shall be confined to the left of center of the
efficiency curve for the impeller being furnished.
B.
All pump motors shall meet NEMA Standards and shall be U/L listed.
C.
All pumps shall be factory tested prior to shipment to the job site.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
DOMESTIC RECIRCULATING PUMP
The domestic recirculating pump shall be of the centrifugal inline mounted type and of the
size, capacity and voltage shown on the drawings. The pump shall be manufactured by
BELL & GOSSETT. Pumps fully equal to the specified pump and manufactured by
ARMSTRONG, WEINMANN, or PATTERSON are acceptable.
A.
Pump - Shall be quiet operating, horizontal, oil lubricated, inline, single stage,
vertical split case design, and shall be all-bronze construction for domestic water
applications. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without
disturbing piping connections. The pump shall have a dynamically balanced
impeller keyed and locknutted to a ground and polished steel shaft with hardened
integral thrust collar. Shaft shall be supported by oil lubricated bronze sleeve
bearings. Water tight mechanical seal faces shall be carbon on cast iron or
ceramic.
15423-1
11/17
DOMESTIC RECIRCULATING PUMP
2.02
SECTION 15423
B.
Coupling - Shall be self aligning, flexible type connecting the pump and motor.
C.
Motor - Shall be open drip proof, journal bearing, resilient mounted, 1750 rpm, and
shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The electrical characteristics of
the motor shall be as shown on the drawings. The horsepower of the motor shall
be of such a size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the capacity
range of the pump. The motor shall have sealed bearings.
D.
Testing - The pump shall be factory tested, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with
one (1) coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. A set of installation
instructions shall be included with the pump at the time of shipment.
E.
Starter - Provide a manual starter for single phase units and magnetic
across-the-line starter for three phase units.
The starter shall have
HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch and red running light. See Section 15050
paragraph 2.07.
SPECIALTIES
Specialties shall be provided for all pumps, which shall include, but not be limited to,
isolation valves, unions, thermometers, and check valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The pump shall be installed and serviced in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
B.
Coupling guards shall be installed per ANSI and OSHA standards.
END OF SECTION
15423-2
11/17
SECTION 15424
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include providing and installing complete electric
water heaters.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The water heater shall meet the requirements of the current ASHRAE Standard 90.1,
for energy conservation.
B.
The electric water heater shall be factory wired in accordance with the National
Electrical Code, and the heater shall bear the UL label.
C.
The water heater shall be tested at a pressure of 300 psi and shall have a water
working pressure of 150 psi.
D.
The water heater shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and local
codes.
E.
The water heater installation shall include the start-up and check out procedures as
recommended by the manufacturer. Provide the owner with a copy of the start-up
record.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment, including an installation diagram, as described in
Section 15010, 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A.
The size, type and capacity of the water heaters are shown on the drawings along
with the specified manufacturer. Water heaters fully equal to the water heater
specified on the drawings and manufactured by RUUD (UNIVERSAL), A. O. SMITH,
STATE, HUBBELL, BOCK or LOCHINVAR are acceptable.
15424-1
11/17
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
2.02
SECTION 15424
B.
Tank - The steel tank shall be glass lined with magnesium anode to resist corrosion,
unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The tank shall be insulated to meet the
current ASHRAE 90.1 requirements and shall be covered with baked enamel paint.
C.
Heating Element - The heating element shall be the low watt density and screw-in
design. The voltage shall be as shown on the drawings and shall be stamped on the
water heater.
D.
Controls
1.
The water heater shall have an adjustable thermostat for operating control.
The adjustable thermostat shall maintain the correct water temperature as
stated on the drawings or required by Code.
2.
The water heater shall have a high limit or over temperature control to cut off
the power in excess temperature situations.
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE
The combination pressure and temperature relief valve for water heater(s) shall be rated
equal to or greater than the maximum hourly heat input rate of the water heater. Each relief
valve shall be ASME listed, rated and stamped. Pressure relief setting shall be 150 psi or
less and temperature relief of 210 degrees F, all bronze body with stainless steel spring, test
level and mounted to monitor the temperature within 6" of the tank.
2.03
EXPANSION TANK
Shall be ASME labeled and size listed on the drawings. Provide the tank with the required
tappings and a prime coat of paint. The expansion tank shall be BELL & GOSSETT, TACO,
JOHN WOOD, WESSELS or ARMSTRONG.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The water heater shall be installed as shown on the drawings in an accessible
location. Gate valves shall be installed on both the cold water supply pipe and the
hot water pipe. A vacuum relief shall be installed on the cold water pipe between the
gate valve and tank, and shall be located above the top of the tank. A thermometer
shall be installed in the hot water pipe above the top of the heater. All valves shall
be mounted so as to be accessible while standing on the floor.
B.
Where water heaters are mounted above the floor, provide and install a shelf to carry
the water heater. The shelf shall have the capability of carrying the water heater
filled with water.
A drip pan, where shown on the drawings or required by Code, shall be provided and
C.
15424-2
11/17
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
SECTION 15424
installed. The drip pan shall be of a size to accommodate the water heater. The drip
pan shall be fabricated with a minimum of 22 gauge galvanized steel. The drip pan
shall be piped full size to a receptor.
D.
The relief valve shall be piped full size to a receptor.
E.
The thermostats in the water heater shall be adjusted to produce the water
temperature called for on the drawings.
F.
The water heater instruction booklet shall be secured to the water heater.
G.
Provide a spare fuse for the water heater.
H.
Provide ASME rated expansion tank. Install as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
15424-3
11/17
SECTION 15425
DOMESTIC GAS WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include providing and installing complete the
forced draft gas water heater as shown on the drawings.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The gas water heater shall conform with NFPA 54 - Natural Fuel Gas Code
Requirements.
B. The gas water heater shall conform with the current International Fuel Gas Code.
C.
The water heater shall meet the requirements of the current ASHRAE Standard 90.1,
for energy conservation.
D.
The gas water heater shall bear the AGA label.
E.
The water heater shall be tested at a pressure of 300 psi and shall have a water
working pressure of 150 psi.
F.
Water heaters with an AGA rating of 200,000 BTU/hr input or greater shall be ASME
constructed and bear the UL label.
G.
Water heaters with an AGA rating of 300,000 BTU/HR input or greater shall have the
manufacturers IRI rated gas train assembly installed.
H.
The water heater shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and local
codes.
I.
The water heater installation shall include the start-up and check out procedures as
recommended by the manufacturer. Provide the owner with a copy of the start-up
record.
SUBMITTALS
15425-1
11/17
DOMESTIC GAS WATER HEATERS SECTION 15425
Provide shop drawings on this equipment, including an installation diagram, as described in
section 15010, 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
GAS WATER HEATER
A.
The rating, type and capacity of the water heater are shown on the drawings along
with the specified manufacturer. Water heaters fully equal to the water heater
specified on the drawings and manufactured by RHEEM/RUUD, A. O. SMITH,
RAYPACK, STATE, BOCK or LOCHINVAR are acceptable.
B.
Tank - the steel tank shall be glass lined with magnesium anode to resist corrosion
unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The tank shall be insulated to meet the
current ASHRAE Standard 90.1 requirements and shall be covered with a baked
enamel jacket.
C.
The contractor shall totally regulate the gas supply to main and pilot burners. The
heater shall also be equipped with an automatic gas shut off device to shut off entire
gas supply in the event of excessive temperature in tank and pilot safety shut off.
The gas controls shall have an adjustable temperature setting to deliver hot water at
the temperature called for on the drawings.
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE
The combination pressure and temperature relief valve for the water heater(s) shall be rated
equal to or greater than the maximum hourly heat input rate of the water heater. Each relief
valve shall be ASME listed, rated and stamped. Pressure relief setting shall be 150 psi or
less and temperature relief of 210 degrees F, all bronze body with stainless steel spring, test
level and mounted to monitor the temperature within 6" of the tank. A thermometer shall be
installed in the hot water pipe above the top of the tank.
2.03
EXPANSION TANK
Shall be ASME labeled and size listed on the drawings. Provide the tank with the required
tappings and a prime coat of paint. The expansion tank shall be BELL & GOSSETT, TACO,
JOHN WOOD, WESSELS or ARMSTRONG.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Gas Water Heater - The water heater shall be installed as shown on the drawings in
an accessible location. Gate valves shall be installed on both the cold water supply
pipe and the hot water pipe. A vacuum relief shall be installed on the cold water pipe
between the gate valve and tank, and shall be located above the top of the tank. A
15425-2
11/17
DOMESTIC GAS WATER HEATERS SECTION 15425
thermometer shall be installed in the hot water pipe above the top of the tank. All
valves shall be mounted so as to be accessible while standing on the floor.
B.
Piping - The relief valve shall be piped full size to a receptor or to the floor.
C.
Thermostats - The thermostats in the water heater shall be adjusted to produce the
water temperature called for on the drawings.
D.
Instructions - The water heater instruction booklet shall be secured to the water
heater.
E.
Provide a spare fuse for the water heater.
F.
Provide ASME rated expansion tank. Install as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
15425-3
11/17
SECTION 15426
CONDENSING DOMESTIC GAS WATER HEATER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include providing and installing complete the
forced draft gas water heater as shown on the drawings.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The gas water heater shall conform with NFPA 54 - Natural Fuel Gas Code
Requirements.
B.
The gas water heater shall conform with the current International Fuel Gas Code.
C.
The water heater shall meet the requirements of the current ASHRAE Standard 90.1,
for energy conservation.
D.
The gas water heater shall bear the AGA or CSA label.
E.
The water heater shall be tested at a pressure of 225 psi and shall have a water
working pressure of 150 psi.
F.
Water heaters shall be ASME constructed and bear the UL label. ASME fabrication
documents shall accompany the submittal data.
G.
Water heaters with an AGA rating of 300,000 BTU/HR input or greater shall have the
manufacturer’s GE-GAP (IRI) /CSD-1 rated gas train assembly installed.
H.
The water heater shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and local
codes.
I.
The water heater installation shall include factory start-up. Start up on the unit shall
be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. Provide the Owner with a
copy of the start-up record.
J.
First year service policy, including parts and labor, shall be provided at no additional
cost to the owner.
SUBMITTALS
15426-1
11/17
CONDENSING DOMESTIC GAS WATER HEATER
SECTION 15426
Provide shop drawings on this equipment, including an installation diagram, as described in
Section 15010, 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GAS W ATER HEATER
A.
The rating, type and capacity of the water heater are shown on the drawings along
with the specified manufacturer. Water heaters fully equal to the water heater
specified on the drawings and manufactured by PVI, BOCK, or A. O. SMITH, are
acceptable.
B.
Tank - The steel tank shall be glass lined or an unlined pressure vessel
constructed from phase-balanced austenitic and ferritic duplex stainless steel. The
tank shall be insulated to meet the current ASHRAE Standard 90.1 requirements.
C.
Water heaters with full rated input below 600,000 BTU will operate at a minimum
96% thermal efficiency at full firing rate when tested to the ANSI Z21.10.3 thermal
efficiency test protocol (DOE 10 CFR 431). Water heaters with full rated input above
600,000 BTU will operate at a minimum 94% thermal efficiency at full firing rate
when tested to the ANSI Z21.10.3 thermal efficiency test protocol (DOE 10 CFR
431). The water heater shall be ETL listed as a complete unit. The heater shall
satisfy current Federal Energy Policy Act standards for both thermal efficiency and
stand-by heat losses as established for gas fired water heaters.
D.
Combustion will be provided by a premix, fan-assisted surface burner with a gas
train meeting UL, ANSI and FM standards for the input specified. Burner will be
stainless steel.
E.
Water heater will be a category IV, condensing appliance and vent through PVC
or CPVC. Water heater will satisfy requirements for sealed combustion. Vents for
inlet and exhaust can terminate in different pressure zones.
F.
The Contractor shall totally regulate the gas supply to main and pilot burners. The
heater shall also be equipped with an automatic gas shut off device to shut off the
entire gas supply in the event of excessive temperature in tank and pilot safety shut
off. The gas controls shall have an adjustable temperature setting to deliver hot
water at the temperature called for on the drawings.
G.
The water heater shall be a vertical fire tube, design that is constructed and stamped
in accordance with Section IV, Part HLW of the ASME code. Water heater will be
National Board Registered for a working pressure of 150 psi and will be pressure
tested at 1-1/2 times working pressure. Materials shall meet ASME Section II
material requirements and be accepted by NSF 61 for municipal potable water
systems. All tank connections/fittings shall be nonferrous or stainless steel. The
water heater shall employ an electronic operating control with digital temperature
15426-2
11/17
CONDENSING DOMESTIC GAS WATER HEATER
SECTION 15426
readout. Operator shall be capable of connecting to a building automation system
through serial connection using Modbus RTU protocol. At a minimum, the water
heater shall be equipped with the following:
:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.02
Electronic flame monitoring.
Electronic low water cutoff.
An immersion operating control.
An immersion UL listed temperature limiting device.
Condensate neutralization system (Part#121778)
Concentric Vent Kit (Part#12574).
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE
The combination pressure and temperature relief valve for the water heater(s) shall be rated
equal to or greater than the maximum hourly heat input rate of the water heater. Each relief
valve shall be ASME listed, rated and stamped. Pressure relief setting shall be 150 psi or
less and temperature relief of 210 degrees F, all bronze body with stainless steel spring, test
level and mounted to monitor the temperature within 6" of the tank. A thermometer shall be
installed in the hot water pipe above the top of the tank.
2.03
EXPANSION TANK
Shall be ASME labeled and the size listed on the drawings. Provide the tank with the *
required tappings and a prime coat of paint. The expansion tank shall be BELL &
GOSSETT, TACO, JOHN WOOD, WESSELS, or ARMSTRONG.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Gas Water Heater - The water heater shall be installed as shown on the drawings in an
accessible location. Gate valves shall be installed on both the cold water supply pipe
and the hot water pipe. A vacuum relief shall be installed on the cold water pipe
between the gate valve and tank, and shall be located above the top of the tank. A
thermometer shall be installed in the hot water pipe above the top of the tank. All
valves shall be mounted so as to be accessible while standing on the floor. Start up on
the water heater shall be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A
copy of the start up report shall be provided to the contractor and Owner.
B.
Piping - The relief valve shall be piped full size to a receptor or to the floor.
C.
Thermostats - The thermostats in the water heater shall be adjusted to produce the
water temperature called for on the drawings.
D.
Instructions - The water heater instruction booklet shall be secured to the water
heater.
E.
Start up on the unit will be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A
15426-3
11/17
CONDENSING DOMESTIC GAS WATER HEATER
SECTION 15426
copy of the start up report will be provided to the contractor and Owner.
F.
Provide a spare fuse for the water heater.
G.
Provide an ASME rated expansion tank. Install as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
15426-4
11/17
SECTION 15432
DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
(Engineer to edit to make job specific)
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
The work covered under this section shall include providing, installing and testing
a complete domestic water pressure booster system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
section 15010 - General Provisions, and section 15050 - Basic Materials and
Methods shall apply to this section.
The domestic water pressure booster system shall be installed to meet the
requirements of the local plumbing code, the National Electrical Code and the
Virginia Statewide Health Department. The pumps and controls shall be U/L
listed.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
B.
The submittal data for the pumping system shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Pump curves.
Individual data sheets with complete system information including
pressure, pipe sizing, component selection, with instrumentation and
alarm data, etc.
System drawings showing component layout, piping configuration, overall
dimension, field clearances, and piping requirements.
Complete description of control panel with sequencing data and wiring
diagram.
Certificate of insurance showing minimum $1,000,000 liability protection.
Copy of Independent System Third Party Certification.
Copy of the manufacturer's UL 508 Industrial Control Panel Certificate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
DESIGN
A.
The contractor shall install a full size pump bypass where the pumps will not run if
the street pressure is adequate to supply the system. A hydropneumatic storage
tank shall be adjacent to the steel base for the pumps. A pressure transducer
15432-1
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
SECTION 15432
shall be provided in the suction header to operate the lead pump if the pressure
falls below its setting. System shall include a low suction pressure transducer to
shut down the pump system and activate a visual and audible alarm if incoming
pressure is lost. Separate pressure gauges shall be provided to indicate system
pressure, suction pressure, and individual pump discharge pressures. The pump
system shall be factory prefabricated as a complete system package on a
structural steel mounting frame, piped, tubed, mounted and wired. Unit shall be
factory primed and painted with machine grade finish coat. All welding shall be
performed by ASME section 9 certified welders. System shall be vertical
construction. Suction and discharge headers shall be stainless steel. System
manufacturer shall isolate all ferrous from non-ferrous materials. All wetted
surfaces shall be certified lead free in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 section 8.
The domestic water pressure booster system shall be manufactured by
SYNCROFLO Duplex “IRONHEART”. Booster systems fully equal to the
prototype system and manufactured by TIGERFLOW or HYDRONIC MODULES
CORPORATION shall be acceptable.
2.02
PUMPS
A.
Pumps shall be SYNCROFLO, cast iron body, stainless steel fitted construction,
mechanical seal end suction centrifugal type each dose-coupled to a 3600 RPM,
480 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, high efficiency motor. Each pump shall be equipped
with an individual combination type non-electric temperature probe and purge
assembly. Pumps fully equal to the prototype manufacturer and manufactured by
AURORA or HYDRONIC MODULES CORPORATION shall be acceptable.
B.
Booster System - The system shall be rated for a system flow of 175 GPM at a
system pressure of 75 PSIG, including a suction pressure of 22 PSIG.
1.
2.
2.03
MOTOR
A.
2.04
Motor shall be drip-proof and meet NEMA standards and shall operate within the
service factor at any point on the pump capacity head curve.
HYDRO-PNEUMATIC TANK
A.
2.05
Pump No. 1 shall deliver 88 GPM at 122' TDH, 7.5 HP.
Pump No. 2 shall deliver 88 GPM at 122' TDH, 7.5 HP.
System shall include a 180 gallon, 200 psi factory pre-charged hydro-pneumatic
tank with FDA approved replaceable flexible membrane separating air and water.
Vessel shall be ASME code and National Board stamped. Tank shall be provided
complete with bottom connection, air fill valve, and 2-1/2” diameter stainless steel,
liquid filled gauge. The hydropneumatic tank shall be mounted adjacent to tank
skid.
PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
15432-2
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
2.06
A.
Constant system pressure shall be maintained by a pilot-operated diaphragmtype pressure regulating and check valve. The main valve body shall be cast iron
with fully fused epoxy coating. Valve seat, pilot regulator seat, and cover bolting
shall be stainless steel.
B.
Provide one regulator on each pump discharge line. Regulators shall be selected
for not more than 5 psig pressure drop at the full pump capacity.
ISOLATION VALVES
A.
2.07
SECTION 15432
Provide isolation valves on the suction and discharge of each pump. Valves shall
be full port ball valves or lug style butterfly valves. Gate valves are not
acceptable.
PUMP SEQUENCING
Operator Interface (Data Access Console)
A.
B.
The data access console shall be flush mounted in the door of the control panel.
The console shall include an alphanumeric keypad with audible feedback. The
following data shall be accessible through the operator interface:
1.
One-touch access to display system status including flow rate (GPM),
current pressure, any existing system alarm (or "NO ALARMS"), the
current speed of the pumps (%), and the date and time.
2.
One touch access to Usage History, which may be reset. Usage History
shall record the maximum instantaneous flow, along with the date and
time.
3.
A Setup Menu system for adjusting setpoints. Display and adjust flow and
pressure set points and time delays. Set pump alternation to manual or
automatic. Set the hour of the day for automatic alternation. Restore all
factory defaults. Protect adjustable settings with a password.
4.
One-touch access to an Alarm History of the past 10 alarms. Each log
shall include individual pump run status, flow, and alarm type.
5.
One-touch access to an Alarm List of all possible alarms and their current
status.
Automatic sequencing shall include the following features:
1.
2.
3.
Sequence shifting that adjusts the pump sequence when any pump is
disabled.
Successive and 24 hour alternation of equal capacity pumps.
Pump overlap during 24-hour alternation.
15432-3
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.08
Provide a programmable logic controller to control all pump starts and stops and
indicate alarm conditions. The controller shall have the following features: A non
volatile memory with no battery backup which prevents program loss due to
power failure; a program cartridge which allows program changes to be made by
the factory and transmitted to the field for simple loading into the controller by the
operator; input and output "on" status lights must be supplied for ease of
monitoring; and controller must be designed for use in locations where
electromagnetic noise, high temperature, humidity, and mechanical shock will
exist.
INSTRUMENTATION
A.
2.11
Furnish a power and control panel complete with individual pump through-thedoor disconnect motor starter protectors with class 10 overload protection, and
120 volts fused control circuit transformer. All of the above shall be factory
internally pre-wired and tested in accordance with provisions of the National
Electrical Code. All control wires shall be individually numbered and each
component shall be labeled accordingly. All internal wiring shall be copper
stranded, AWG with a minimum insulation of 90 degrees Celsius. The complete
assembly shall have the UL listing mark for industrial control panels.
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
A.
2.10
Lag pump exerciser function.
Special sequencing to reduce surges during power restoration.
Sequential sequencing of lag pumps.
Minimum run and stop delay timer for each pump.
Field adjustable time delay for lag pump pressure start signals.
POWER AND CONTROL PANEL
A.
2.09
SECTION 15432
Each system shall have panel-mounted pressure gauges (2-1/2”) for indicating
suction and system discharge pressure, pump run indicating lights, multiple
position selector switches, and control power light.
EMERGENCY CONTROLS AND ALARMS
A.
Furnish individual temperature probes and purge valves, low suction and low
system pressure alarms, indication of first activated alarm, pulsing alarm horn
with silence function, and individual alarm auxiliary contacts, time delays, and
indicating lights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The system shall be factory prefabricated. Furnish flanged-end stainless steel
suction and discharge headers complete with anti-vibration pads. The only field
15432-4
11/17
DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
SECTION 15432
connections required will be to system headers, tank, over temperature drain
tube, and one incoming power connection at the control panel. System shall
include three fuses, two light bulbs, and one can of touch up paint.
3.02
FACTORY TEST AND CERTIFICATION
A.
3.03
WARRANTY
A.
3.04
The booster system and its component parts shall undergo a complete
operational flow test from zero to 100% design flow rate under the specified
suction and net system pressure conditions. This flow test shall be performed by
supplying the control panel with the specified incoming voltage. Each pump's
performance shall be tested over its full range or flow. All pressure regulators,
pressure switches, and other devices shall be set and functions verified.
Components shall be tested for hydraulic shock, vibration, or excessive noise.
Any parts found to be defective must be replaced prior to shipment. Full
documentation shall be maintained by the manufacturer showing flow rates,
pressures, and amp draws forfuture service and troubleshooting reference.
Include copies of the test data as recorded by an X-Y Plotter.
The Pumping system shall be guaranteed in writing by the manufacturer for a
period of one year from the date of shipment against defect in design, material, or
construction.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
The service of a factory trained representative shall be made available on the job
site to check installation and start up and instruct operating personnel.
END OF SECTION
15432-5
11/17
(ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS ONLY)
SECTION 15450
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010 General Provisions and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include furnishing and installing the plumbing
fixtures and trim and making all final connections of equipment furnished by others.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on these fixtures and trim items as described in Section 15010 1.04. Shop drawings shall include proposed uses of all fixtures and trim.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
WATER CLOSETS
KOHLER COMPANY shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Vitreous china
plumbing fixtures fully equal to the item specified manufactured by ZURN or SLOAN, shall
be acceptable. Flush valves fully equal to the item specified and manufactured by SLOAN,
MOEN or ZURN shall be acceptable. Toilet seats fully equal to the item specified and
manufactured by BEMIS or CHURCH shall be acceptable.
A.
Water Closet (WC) - KOHLER Wellcomme Lite Toilet, elongated K-4350, 14 3/4"
high (white); K-4670SC solid plastic, white, open front, self-sustaining check hinge,
and elongated; flush valve - KOHLER K-10957 1.6 gpf valve with electronic infrared
sensor with Tripoint technology, ZURN ZER6000 PL-CPM-WS1 sensor operated
battery powered flush valve, or SLOAN Regal XL 111-1.6 SFSM, 1.6 gpf battery
powered flush valve with electronic infrared sensor, or MOEN 8310 sensor operated
flush valve, 1.6 GPF, battery powered, mechanical manual override button, selfcleaning heavy duty piston, Bolt caps - 52048.
B.
Water Closet (WC-1) - Adult Handicapped - KOHLER Highcliff Lite Toilet, Water
Guard elongated K-4368, 17 1/2" high; K-4670SC solid plastic, white, open front,
self-sustaining check hinge and elongated. KOHLER K-10957 1.6 gpf valve with
electronic infrared sensor with Tripoint technology, ZURN ZER6000 PL-CPM-WS1
sensor operated battery powered flush valve, or SLOAN Regal XL 111-1.6 SFSM,
1.6 gpf battery powered flush valve with electronic infrared sensor, or MOEN 8310
sensor operated flush valve, 1.6 GPF, battery powered, mechanical manual override
15450-1
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15450
button, self-cleaning heavy duty piston, handles/override push button flush valves
shall be located on the wide side of stalls; Bolt caps - 52048.
2.02
C.
High Efficient Water Closet (HEWC) - KOHLER K-4406 Wellworth 1.28 flushometer
bowl, elongated, white; K-4670SC solid plastic, white open front toilet seat, selfsustaining check hinge, and elongated; KOHLER K-10956 1.28 gpf/4.85lpf touchless
DC toilet flushometer with tripoint technology, polished chrome, or ZURN - ZER6000
PL-CPM-WS1 sensor operated battery powered flush valve, or SLOAN Regal XL
111-1.6 SFSM, 1.6 gpf battery powered flush valve with electronic infrared sensor, or
MOEN 8311 sensor operated flush valve, 1.28 GPF, battery powered, mechanical
manual override button, self-cleaning heavy duty piston, 1" screwdriver stop and
vandal proof cap.
D.
High Efficient Water Closet (Handicapped) (HEWC-1) - KOHLER K-4405 Highline
1.28 flushometer floor mounted bowl, white, K-4670SC solid plastic, white open front
toilet seat, self-sustaining check hinge, and elongated; KOHLER K-10956-CP
1.28gpf/4.85lpf touchless DC toilet flushometer with tripoint technology, or ZURN ZER6000 PL-CPM-WS1 sensor operated battery powered flush valve, or SLOAN
Regal XL 111-1.6 SFSM, 1.6 gpf battery powered flush valve with electronic infrared
sensor,or MOEN 8311 sensor operated flush valve, 1.28 GPF, battery powered,
mechanical manual override button, self-cleaning heavy duty piston, 1" screwdriver
stop and vandal proof cap.
High Efficient Urinal (HEUR-1)
KOHLER COMPANY shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Vitreous china
plumbing fixtures fully equal to the item specified, manufactured by ZURN or SLOAN shall
be acceptable. Flush valves fully equal to the item specified and manufactured by SLOAN,
MOEN or ZURN shall be acceptable
A.
2.03
Kohler K-4991-ET Bardon1/8 gpf high efficiency urinal. K-10949 1/8 gpf touchless
DC urinal flushometer with tripoint technology, polished chrome, screwdriver stop
with vandal proof cap; Carrier-Josam 17550-UR.
LAVATORIES
KOHLER COMPANY shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Vitreous china
plumbing fixtures fully equal to the item specified, manufactured by ZURN or SLOAN shall
be acceptable. Faucets fully equal to the item specified and manufactured by ZURN,
SLOAN, MOEN and CHICAGO shall be acceptable. Trim items manufactured by KOHLER,
AMERICAN STANDARD, NIBCO, ELKAY, McGUIRE BRASSCRAFT, T&S BRASS, MOEN
or CHICAGO shall be acceptable. All trim items shall have heavy duty or extra duty
components. All faucets shall be Certified Lead Free to NSF 372.
A.
Lavatory (L) - KOHLER K-1721, white, vitreous china, 20" X 18" Chesapeake with
single hole faucet drilling, supply faucet- K-13461 CP KOHLER Sculpted Touchless
lavatory faucet, or ZURN Z-6918-F-MT battery powered sensor faucet, or SLOAN
3335061, “EAF-350”, optima sensor activated lavatory faucet with 0.5 gpm aerator
15450-2
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15450
spray head, with (Bak-Chek) tee fitting; or CHICAGO FAUCET 116.606.AB.1 with
0.5 GPM VP aerator, 6V lithium battery and remotely adjustable sensor range/meter
time with 242.165.00.1 mixing tee with integral check and filter, flexible stainless
steel connections; or Moen 8553, Single mount battery powered above deck
electronic sensor faucet, 0.5 GPM recessed aerator, 104424 mixing tee, slow closing
solenoid; K-7715 drain with perforated strainer, 1 1/4" tailpiece; P-Trap - K-8995 1
1/4" X 1 1/2" chromium plated cast brass with cleanout plug; Nipple - K-9016 1 1/2" x
6" chromium plated cast brass with escutcheon; Supplies - K-7601 with loose key
stops, chromium plated with escutcheons; Carrier - JOSAM 17100-67.
B.
Lavatory (L-1) Adult Handicapped - KOHLER K-1721, white, vitreous china, 20" X
18" Chesapeake with single hole faucet drilling. Supply faucet – K-13460 CP
KOHLER Sculpted Touchless lavatory faucet, or ZURN Z-6919-ADM-F battery
powered sensor faucet, or SLOAN 3335061, “EAF-350-ISM”, Optima sensor
activated lavatory faucet with 0.5 gpm aerator spray head; or CHICAGO FAUCET
116.222.AB.1 with 0.5 GPM VP aerator, user adjustable side mixing, 6V lithium
battery and remotely adjustable sensor range/meter time; flexible stainless steel
connections; or Moen 8554, Single mount battery powered above deck electronic
sensor faucet with above deck mixing, 0.5 GPM recessed aerator, slow closing
solenoid; K-7715 1 1/4” drain with strainer or K-13385 offset drain and K-7622 offset
tailpiece for fixtures without the built-in offset; P-Trap - K-8995 1 1/4" X 1 1/2"
chromium plated cast brass with cleanout plug; Nipple - K-9016 1 1/2" X 6"
chromium plated cast brass with escutcheon; Supplies - K-7601 with loose key
stops, chromium plated with escutcheons, Carrier - JOSAM 1710067. Provide
TRUEBRO Model 102 white trap and supply covers. Covers as manufactured by
PLUMBEREX (Pro Series) shall be acceptable.
C.
Lavatory (L-2) Child Handicapped - KOHLER K-1721, white, vitreous china, 20" X
18" Chesapeake with single hole faucet drilling. Supply faucet- K13461 CP
KOHLER Sculpted Touchless lavatory faucet, or ZURN Z-6918-F-MT battery
powered sensor faucet, or SLOAN 3335061, “EAF-350”, Optima sensor activated
lavatory faucet with 0.5 gpm aerator spray head with (Bak-Chek) tee fitting; or
CHICAGO FAUCET 116.606.AB.1 with 0.5 GPM VP aerator, 6V lithium battery and
remotely adjustable sensor range/meter time with 242.165.00.1 mixing tee with
integral check and filter; flexible stainless steel connections; or Moen 8553, Single
mount battery powered above deck electronic sensor faucet, 0.5 GPM recessed
aerator, 104424 mixing tee, slow closing solenoid; K-7715 1 1/4” drain with strainer
or K-13885 1 1/4" offset drain and K-7622 offset tailpiece for fixtures without the
built-in offset; P-Trap-K-8995 1 1/4" X 1 1/2" chromium plated cast brass with
cleanout plug; Nipple - K-9016 1 1/2" X 6" chromium plated cast brass with
escutcheon; Supplies - K-7601 with loose key stops, chromium plated with
escutcheons, Carrier - JOSAM 17100-67. Provide TRUEBRO Model 102 white trap
and supply covers. Covers as manufactured by PLUMBEREX (Pro Series) shall be
acceptable.
D.
Lavatory (L-4) Kitchen - KOHLER K-1721, white vitreous china, 20" X 18"
Chesapeake with single hole faucet drilling; Supply faucet – K-13460 CP Sculpted
Touchless lavatory faucet with 1.5 GPM aerator, or ZURN Z-6918-XL-ADM-E battery
15450-3
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15450
powered faucet with a 1.5 GPM aerator, or SLOAN 3335061, “EAF-350-ISM” Optima
sensor activated lavatory faucet with 1.5 gpm aerator spray head, or CHICAGO
FAUCET 116.222.AB.1 with E34VP 1.5 GPM VP aerator, user adjustable side
mixing, 6V lithium battery and remotely adjustable sensor range/meter; flexible
stainless steel connections; or Moen 8554, Single mount battery powered above
deck electronic sensor faucet with above deck mixing, 1.5 GPM recessed aerator,
slow closing solenoid; K-7715 drain with perforated strainer, 1 1/4" tailpiece; P-Trap K-8995 1 1/4" X 1 1/2" chromium plated cast brass with cleanout plug; Nipple - K9016 1 1/2" X 6" chromium plated cast brass with escutcheon; Supplies - K-7601
with loose key stops; Carrier - JOSAM 17100-67. Provide TRUEBRO Model 102,
white trap supply covers. Covers as manufactured by PLUMBEREX (Pro Series)
shall be accepted.
2.04
SINKS
ELKAY shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Stainless steel sinks fully equal to
the item specified and manufactured by JUST MANUFACTURING shall be acceptable.
A.
Work Sink (S) - ELKAY Lustertone LRAD-2521, 18 gauge, 5 1/2” sink depth, with 3
faucet holes; Supply faucet LK230 or CHICAGO FAUCET 1888-ABCP with 2.2 GPM
vandal proof aerator; or MOEN 8225 with 52615 vandal resistant aerator (2.2 gpm);
LK-35L offset grid strainer, P-Trap with cleanout plug and escutcheon; Supply valves
shall be 1/4 turn ball valve with chrome plated ball, sweated and have escutcheons.
Compression fittings are not acceptable.
B.
Wet and Dirty Sink (S-1) - ELKAY Lustertone DLR-2522, 18 gauge, with 3 faucet
holes, 10" deep; Supply faucet LK-232-S or CHICAGO FAUCET 786GR8AE3V317AB or MOEN 8229 with S00R50 and 52615 vandal resistant aerator
(2.2 gpm); all with vandal proof aerator and restricted swing spout (full swing spout
faucets are not acceptable). Strainer - LK-18B, P-Trap with cleanout plug and
escutcheon; Supply valves shall be 1/4 turn ball valve with chrome plated ball,
sweated and have escutcheons. Compression fittings are not acceptable.
C.
Wet and Dirty Sink (S-1H) child handicapped – ELKAY Lustertone LRAD-2522, 18
gauge, 5 1/2” sink depth, with 3 faucet holes; Supply faucet LK-232-S or CHICAGO
FAUCET 786-GR8AE3V317AB both with vandal proof aerator and restricted swing
spout (full swing spout faucets are not acceptable). LK-35L offset grid strainer, PTrap with cleanout plug and escutcheon; Supply valves shall be ¼ turn ball valve
with chrome plated ball, sweated and have escutcheons. Compression fittings are
not acceptable.
D
Classroom Sink (S-2L & S-2R) - ELKAY Lustertone DRKAD-2220-55-C (3)(1) with
faucet with vandal proof aerator and restricted swing spout (full swing spout faucets
are not acceptable), 5 1/2” sink depth, off-centered drain LK-1141A flexi-guard
bubbler and LK-35L offset grid strainer; P-Trap with cleanout plug and escutcheon;
Supply valves shall be 1/4 turn ball valve with chrome plated ball, sweated and have
escutcheons. Bubblers shall be mounted on the side of the sink, opposite any
sidewalls. See drawings for bubbler locations. CHICAGO FAUCET 78615450-4
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15450
GR8AE3V317AB with vandal proof aerator and restricted swing spout, is also
acceptable (full swing spout will not be accepted). Compression fittings are not
acceptable.
E.
2.05
Clinic Sink (S-3) – ELKAY Lustertone LRAD-2521, 5 1/2” sink depth, 18 gauge, with
3 faucet holes; Supply faucet LK-232-S-BH-5, 5” wrist blades with rigid connections
and gooseneck spout, or CHICAGO FAUCET 786-GR8AE3V317AB or MOEN 8229
with S00R50; Strainer LK-18B, P-Trap with cleanout plug and escutcheon; Supply
valves shall be 1/4 turn ball valve with chrome plated ball, sweated and have
escutcheons. Compression fittings are not acceptable.
SHOWERS
KOHLER shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Showers fully equal to the item
specified and manufactured by SYMMONS, MOEN or POWERS shall be acceptable.
A.
2.06
EXISTING TO REMAIN EQUIPMENT
A.
Existing to remain water closets - Provide and install KOHLER K-4670SC solid
plastic, white, open front, self-sustaining check hinge and elongated for all existing
water closets. Replace closet flange, wax ring, bolts, bolt caps and spud gasket.
Provide and install new flush valves for all existing water closets that are to remain,
refer to section 2.01 for appropriate flush valve replacement.
B.
Existing to remain lavatories - Provide and install new faucets, refer to section 2.03
for appropriate faucet replacement. Provide vandal proof aerator. Supply stops for
each KOHLER K-7601 chrome angle loose key, provide threaded tailpiece supply
extensions. Replace waste outlet and provide chromium-plated p-trap with cleanout
plug and nipple with escutcheon.
Existing to remain shower (SH(E)) - Provide and install KOHLER K-7371
showerhead; shower arm K-7397; and shower valve K-6913-4 pressure balanced
mixing valve with integral stops.
C.
2.07
Shower (SH) Handicapped -Showerhead -KOHLER K8520 hand held shower with
slide bar; supply elbow - K-T6913-4; Shower valve - K-304-KS pressure balanced
mixing valve with integral stops and K-T6913-4 valve trim.
D.
Existing to remain lavatory kitchen - Provide new faucet, refer to section 2.03 for
appropriate faucet replacement. Provide K-7601 supplies with loose key stops.
Provide threaded tailpiece supply extensions.
E.
Existing to remain service sinks and mop basins - Replace faucet with one of the
following faucets respectively - KOHLER K-8905 or K-8907 with wall bracket.
Chicago faucet 305-VB-RCF or 897-RCF with wall bracket shall also be accepted.
All with integral vacuum breakers.
ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS AND DRINKING FOUNTAINS
15450-5
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15450
The following electric water coolers (and/or drinking fountains) shall be manufactured by
ELKAY. Fixtures fully equal to the item specified as manufactured by HALSEY TAYLOR,
OASIS, or HAWS shall be acceptable. Fixtures with plastic bubbler components will not be
acceptable.
2.08
A.
Electric Water Cooler (EWC) - ELKAY wall mounted cooler model No. EWCA-14,
complete with flexi-guard bubbler and all standard accessories. Finish by Architect.
B.
Electric Water Cooler (EWC-1) Child Handicapped – ELKAY EZ-S8 universal mount
barrier free cooler complete with flexi-guard bubbler and standard accessories, finish
by architect.
C.
Electric Water Cooler (EWC-2) Adult Handicapped – ELKAY EZ-S8 universal mount
barrier free cooler complete with flexi-guard bubbler and standard accessories,
provide vandal proof resistant bubbler; finish by architect.
D.
Electric Water Cooler (EWC-3) Handicapped – ELKAY handicapped model #
EZS8WSLK accessible water cooler with Bottle filling station, flexi-guard bubbler and
all standard accessories. Finish by Architect.
E.
Drinking Fountain (DF) – KOHLER Semi Recessed K-5293, vitreous china with
34902 condensation plate assembly, 35301 bubbler assembly, 79186 supply stop
assembly, 35314 trap and 52054 wall screw access pack.
MOP BASIN AND LAUNDRY TRAY
FIAT shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Mop basins fully equal to the item
specified and manufactured by STERN WILLIAMS shall also be acceptable.
A.
B.
C.
2.09
Mop Basin (MB) - FIAT Model TSB-700 with stainless steel caps on curbs, 36" X 24"
X 12”; Faucet, with integral vacuum breaker - 830-AA or CHICAGO FAUCET 897RCF or MOEN 8124 with internal vacuum breaker, integral check stops; Hose and
hose bracket - 832AA. Silicone sealant 833-AA.
Mop Basin (MB-1) – STERN WILLIAMS HL-2100 with 6” drop and stainless steel
cap on threshold, 36" X 24 X 12”; Faucet, with integral vacuum breaker - 830-AA or
CHICAGO FAUCET 897-RCF or MOEN 8124 with internal vacuum breaker, integral
check stops; Hose and hose bracket - 832AA. Silicone sealant 833-AA.
Laundry Tray (LT) – FIAT Model FL -1 floor mounted laundry tray; N0. A-1 faucet
with WATTS N0. 8A vacuum breaker on faucet or CHICAGO FAUCET 8912E27CP.
WASH BOX
A.
Wash Box – GUY GRAY MANUFACTURING CO., INC. model NWFBED-200TS.
Provide with ½” hot and cold water hose bibbs, a 20 amp, 120V duplex receptacle
for washer, and a 30 amp, 220V, 4 wire dryer receptacle.
15450-6
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
2.10
SECTION 15450
OTHER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
A.
The Contractor shall make a complete waste, vent, hot and cold water rough in for all
fixtures, equipment and food service equipment as indicated on the drawings.
Furnish and install 1/4 turn shut off valves for all countertop fixtures and KOHLER K7601 supplies for all wall hung fixtures; traps, tailpieces, sink strainers, supply pipes,
air gaps, escutcheons, and make all final connections for a complete installation. All
sinks that are shown to be handicapped accessible (see Architectural drawings)
shall have offset tailpieces.
B.
The Contractor shall consult the architectural drawings and other sections of the
specifications for equipment requiring roughing in and final connection under this
section of the contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The water supply to each surface mounted fixture shall have angle, loose key stop
valves. On fixtures without integral stops, install stop valves. Fixtures which are
installed in case work or fixtures with plumbing components which are not visible
from the occupied space shall have ¼ turn sweated ball valves with chrome plated
ball and escutcheons. The water supply piping for fixtures located in casework shall
be type L copper from the valve to the fixture, piping shall be run in such a manner
as to allow the space below the fixture to utilized as storage.
B.
Wall hung fixtures such as urinals, lavatories, sinks, electric water coolers, and
drinking fountains, shall have carriers. The specified carriers may not be compatible
for all fixture manufacturers. Carriers shall be coordinated between the fixture
manufacturer and the carrier manufacturer. Where the carrier is not specified with
the fixture, the fixture carrier shall be a 1/8 inch steel plate embedded or anchored in
the wall with all-thread rods bolted or welded to the plate and extending through the
finished wall for the fixture hanger installation. The minimum size rod shall be 1/4".
The fixture carrier shall be installed while the wall is being built.
C.
The plumbing fixtures shall be installed at the mounting heights required by Fairfax
County Public Schools standards. Where mounting heights are not stated, the
plumbing fixtures shall be roughed-in in accordance with the manufacturer's rough-in
information.
D.
The contractor shall provide a complete rough in and make all final connections to
the equipment furnished by others.
E.
The contractor shall provide watertight seals at all joints formed where fixtures come
in contact with walls or floors.
F.
Remove all existing to remain fixtures in toilet rooms to allow for re-tiling of walls and
15450-7
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15450
floors. Remount fixtures at existing heights, except fixtures that get remounted at
handicapped heights, after tile work is completed.
G.
All exposed piping components for lavatory faucets shall be chrome plated or
stainless steel if such components appear below the apron of the fixture. Faucets
with exposed brass pigtails will not be acceptable.
H.
All sinks and lavatories that are indicated to be handicapped accessible shall have
offset tailpieces.
I.
At the time of project closeout all battery powered urinal flush valves, battery
powered water closet flush valves and battery powered faucets shall have the
batteries removed and replaced with new batteries. Owner’s representative shall
verify battery replacement.
J.
Provide check valves on incoming water supply for all mop basins and laundry trays.
END OF SECTION
15450-8
11/17
(INTERMEDIATE AND HIGH SCHOOLS ONLY)
SECTION 15451
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include furnishing and installing the plumbing
fixtures and trim and making all final connections of equipment furnished by others.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on these fixtures and trim items as described in section 15010 - 1.04.
Shop drawings shall include proposed uses of all fixtures and trim.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
WATER CLOSETS AND URINALS
KOHLER COMPANY shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Vitreous china
plumbing fixtures fully equal to the item specified, manufactured by ZURN or SLOAN shall
be acceptable. Flush valves fully equal to the item specified and manufactured by SLOAN,
ZURN or MOEN shall also be acceptable. Toilet seats fully equal to the item specified and
manufactured by KOHLER, BEMIS or CHURCH shall be acceptable.
A.
Water Closet (Handicapped) (WC-1) - Kohler K-4368 Highcliff Lite Toilet, elongated,
water-guard, flush valve toilet, 17 1/2" high; 52048 bolt caps; BEMIS model
1955SSCT, black, extra heavy duty, open front toilet seat with self-sustaining check
hinge; KOHLER K-10957 1.6 gpf flush valve with electronic infrared sensor with
Tripoint technology, ZURN- ZER6000 PL-CPM-WS1 sensor operated battery
powered flush valve, MOEN 8310 sensor operated flush valve, 1.6 GPF, battery
powered, mechanical manual override button, self-cleaning heavy duty piston or
SLOAN Regal XL 111-1.6 SFSM, 1.6 gpf battery powered flush valve with electronic
infrared sensor, 1" screwdriver stop and vandal proof cap.
B.
Water Closet (WC) - Kohler K-4350 Wellcomme Lite Toilet, elongated, water-guard,
flush valve toilet; 52048 bolt caps; BEMIS model 1955SSCT, black, extra heavy duty,
open front toilet seat with self-sustaining check hinge; KOHLER K-10957 1.6 gpf
flush valve with electronic infrared sensor with Tripoint technology , ZURN- ZER6000
PL-CPM-WS1 sensor operated battery powered flush valve, MOEN 8310 sensor
operated flush valve, 1.6 GPF, battery powered, mechanical manual override button,
15451-1
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15451
self-cleaning heavy duty piston or SLOAN Regal XL 111-1.6 SFSM, 1.6 gpf battery
powered flush valve with electronic infrared sensor, 1" screwdriver stop and vandal
proof cap.
C.
Water Closet (WC-2) (rear outlet, floor mounted) Kohler K-4386 Anglesey elongated
siphon jet flush valve toilet; 52048 bolt caps; BEMIS model 1955SSCT, black, extra
heavy duty, open front toilet seat with self-sustaining check hinge; KOHLER K-10957
1.6 gpf flush valve with electronic infrared sensor with Tripoint technology, or ZURNZER6000 PL-CPM-WS1 sensor operated battery powered flush valve, MOEN 8310
sensor operated flush valve, 1.6 GPF, battery powered, mechanical manual override
button, self-cleaning heavy duty piston or SLOAN Regal XL 111-1.6 SFSM, 1.6 gpf
battery powered flush valve with electronic infrared sensor, 1" screwdriver stop and
vandal proof stop.
D.
High Efficient Urinal (HEUR & HEUR-1) KOHLER COMPANY shall manufacture the
following plumbing fixtures. Vitreous china plumbing fixtures fully equal to the item
specified manufactured by ZURN or SLOAN shall be acceptable. Flush valves fully
equal to the item specified and manufactured by SLOAN, MOEN or ZURN shall be
acceptable.
KOHLER K-4991-ET Bardon 1/8 gpf high efficiency urinal. K-10949 1/8 gpf
touchless DC urinal flushometer with tripoint technology, polished chrome,
screwdriver stop with vandal proof cap; Carrier - JOSAM 17550-UR.
2.02
E.
High Efficient Water Closet (Handicapped) (HEWC-1) KOHLER K-4405 Highline
1.28 flushometer floor mounted bowl, white, BEMIS model 1955SSCT, black, extra
heavy duty, open front toilet seat with self-sustaining check hinge; KOHLER K10956-CP 1.28gpf/4.85lpf touchless DC toilet flushometer with tripoint technology, or
ZURN - ZER6000 PL-CPM-WS1 sensor operated battery powered flush valve, or
SLOAN Regal XL 111-1.6 SFSM, 1.6 gpf battery powered flush valve with electronic
infrared sensor, or MOEN 8310 sensor operated flush valve, 1.6 GPF, battery
powered, mechanical manual override button, self-cleaning heavy duty piston, 1"
screwdriver stop and vandal proof cap, Bolt caps - 52048.
F.
High Efficient Water Closet (HEWC) KOHLER K-4406 Wellworth 1.28 flushometer
bowl, elongated, white; BEMIS model SSCT, black, extra heavy duty, open front
toilet seat with self-sustaining check hinge; KOHLER K-10956 1.28 gpf/4.85lpf
touchless DC toilet flushometer with tripoint technology, polished chrome, or ZURN ZER6000 PL-CPM-WS1 sensor operated battery powered flush valve, or SLOAN
Regal XL 111-1.6 SFSM, 1.6 gpf battery powered flush valve with electronic infrared
sensor, or MOEN 8310 sensor operated flush valve, 1.6 GPF, battery powered,
mechanical manual override button, self-cleaning heavy duty piston, 1" screwdriver
stop and vandal proof cap, Bolt caps - 52048.
LAVATORIES
KOHLER COMPANY shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Vitreous china
plumbing fixtures fully equal to the item specified, manufactured by ZURN or SLOAN, shall
15451-2
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15451
be acceptable. Faucets fully equal to the item specified and manufactured by ZURN,
SLOAN, MOEN and CHICAGO shall acceptable. Trim items manufactured by KOHLER,
AMERICAN STANDARD, NIBCO, ELKAY, McGUIRE BRASSCRAFT, T&S BRASS, or
CHICAGO shall be acceptable. All trim items shall have heavy duty or extra duty
components. All faucets shall be Certified Lead Free to NSF 372.
A.
Lavatory (L) - KOHLER K-1721, white, vitreous china, 20" X 18" Chesapeake with
single hole faucet drilling, Supply faucet- K-13461 CP KOHLER Sculpted Touchless
lavatory faucet, or ZURN Z-6918-F-MT battery powered sensor faucet, or SLOAN
3335061, “EAF-350”, Optima sensor activated lavatory faucet with .5 gpm aerator
spray head, with (Bak-Chek) tee fitting, or CHICAGO FAUCET 116.606.AB.1 with
0.5 GPM VP aerator, 6V lithium battery and remotely adjustable sensor range/meter
time with 242.165.00.1 mixing tee with integral check and filter; flexible stainless
steel connections; or Moen 8553, Single mount battery powered above deck
electronic sensor faucet, 0.5 GPM recessed aerator, 104424 mixing tee, slow closing
solenoid; K-7715 drain with perforated strainer, 1 1/4" tailpiece; K-8995 1 1/4" X 1
1/2" chromium plated brass 'P' trap with cleanout plug; K-9016 1 1/2" X 6" chromium
plated brass nipple with chromium plated brass escutcheon; K-7601 lavatory
supplies complete with chromium plated brass angle loose key stops, and
escutcheons; Carrier - JOSAM 17100-67.
B.
Lavatory (L-1) Adult Handicapped - KOHLER K-1721, white, vitreous china, 20" X
18" Chesapeake with single hole faucet drilling. Supply faucet –K-13460 CP Kohler
Sculpted Touchless lavatory faucet, or Zurn Z-6919-ADM-F battery powered sensor
faucet, or SLOAN 3335061, “EAF-350-ISM”, Optima sensor activated lavatory faucet
with .5 gpm aerator spray head, or CHICAGO FAUCET 116.222.AB.1 with 0.5 GPM
VP aerator, user adjustable side mixing, 6V lithium battery and remotely adjustable
sensor range/meter time; flexible stainless connections; Moen 8554, Single mount
battery powered above deck electronic sensor faucet with above deck mixing, 0.5
GPM recessed aerator, slow closing solenoid; K-7715 1 1/4” drain with strainer or K13385 offset drain and K-7622 offset tailpiece for fixtures without the built-in offset;
P-Trap - K-8995 1 1/4" X 1 1/2" chromium plated cast brass with cleanout plug;
Nipple - K-9016 1 1/2" X 6" chromium plated cast brass with escutcheon; Supplies K-7601 with loose key stops, chromium plated with escutcheons; Carrier - JOSAM
1710067. Provide TRUEBRO Model 102 white trap and supply covers. Covers as
manufactured by PLUMBEREX (Pro Series) shall be acceptable.
C.
Lavatory (L-2) Student Handicapped – K-1721, white, vitreous china, 20" X 18"
Chesapeake with single hole faucet drilling. Supply faucet- K-13461 CP KOHLER
Sculpted Touchless lavatory faucet, or ZURN Z-6918-F-MT battery powered sensor
faucet, or SLOAN 3335061, “EAF-350”, Optima sensor activated lavatory faucet with
.5 gpm aerator spray head with (Bak-Chek) tee fitting, or CHICAGO FAUCET
116.606.AB.1 with 0.5 GPM VP aerator, 6V lithium battery and remotely adjustable
sensor range/meter time with 242.165.00.1 mixing tee with integral check and filter;
flexible stainless steel connections; or Moen 8553, Single mount battery powered
above deck electronic sensor faucet, 0.5 GPM recessed aerator, 104424 mixing tee,
slow closing solenoid; K-7715 1¼” drain with strainer or K-13385 offset drain and K7622 offset tailpiece for fixtures without the built-in offset; K-8995 chromium plated
15451-3
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15451
brass 'P' trap with cleanout plug; K-9016 chromium plated brass nipple with
chromium plated brass escutcheon; K-7601 supplies with chromium plated brass
angle loose key stops, and escutcheons; Carrier - JOSAM 17100-67. Provide
TRUEBRO Model 102, white trap and supply covers. Covers as manufactured by
PLUMBEREX (Pro Series) shall be acceptable.
D
2.03
Lavatory (L-4) Kitchen – KOHLER K-1721, white vitreous china, 20" X 18"
Chesapeake with single hole faucet drilling; Supply faucet - K-13460 CP Sculpted
Touchless lavatory faucet with 1.5 GPM aerator, or ZURN Z-6918-XL-ADM-E battery
powered faucet with a 1.5 GPM aerator, or SLOAN 3335061, "EAF-350-ISM" Optima
sensor activated lavatory faucet with 1.5 gpm aerator spray head, or CHICAGO
FAUCETS 116.222.AB.1 with E34VP 1.5 GPM VP aerator, user adjustable side
mixing, 6V lithium battery and remotely adjustable sensor range/meter time; flexible
stainless steel connections; or MOEN 8554, Single mount battery powered above
deck electronic sensor faucet with above deck mixing, 1.5 GPM recessed aerator,
slow closing solenoid; K-7715 drain with perforated strainer, 1 1/4" tailpiece; P-Trap K-8995 1 1/4" X 1 ½" chromium plated cast brass with cleanout plug; Nipple - K9016 1 1/2" X 6" chromium plated cast brass with escutcheon; Supplies - K-7601
with loose key stops; Carrier - JOSAM 17100-67. Provide TRUEBRO Model 102,
white trap supply covers. Covers as manufactured by PLUMBEREX (Pro Series)
shall be acceptable.
SINKS
ELKAY shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Stainless steel sinks fully equal to
the item specified and manufactured by JUST MANUFACTURING shall be acceptable.
A.
2.04
Clinic Sink (S-1) – ELKAY Lustertone LR-2521, 5 1/2” sink depth 18 gauge, with 3
faucet holes; Supply faucet LK-232-S-BH-5 5” wrist blades with rigid connections
and gooseneck spout or CHICAGO FAUCET 786-GR8AE3V317AB or MOEN 8229
with S00R50, strainer LK-18B, P-Trap with cleanout plug and escutcheon; Supply
valves shall be ¼ turn ball valve with chrome plated ball, sweated and have
escutcheons. Compression fittings are not acceptable.
SHOWERS
LEONARD shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Showers fully equal to the
item specified and manufactured by KOHLER, SYMMONS, MOEN or POWERS shall be
acceptable.
A.
Gang shower (Handicapped-Surface mounted) (SH) - LEONARD Surfashower SSVO-BH-501P with single supply blade handle, hand shower mounted on slide bar.
Provide SS-HC horizontal pipe cover with back plate. Exposed parts shall be
vandal-resistant.
B.
Gang shower (Handicapped) (SH) - Leonard 476 volume control valve with blade
handle, single supply 501P hand shower mounted on slide bar or Chicago faucet
770-317PLABCP with 151-777-037K. Exposed parts shall be vandal-resistant.
15451-4
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
2.05
2.06
SECTION 15451
C.
Gang shower (SH-1-Surface mounted) (SH) - Leonard Surfashower SS-VO-300 with
single supply, cross handle, H-06 shower head. Provide SS-HC horizontal pipe
cover with back plate. Exposed parts shall be vandal-resistant.
D.
Gang shower (SH-1) - LEONARD 770 volume control valve with single supply, cross
handle, H-06 showerhead or Chicago Faucet 770PLABCP with 621CP showerhead.
Exposed parts shall be vandal-resistant.
E.
Shower (SH-2) (Handicapped) - Showerhead - KOHLER K-8520 hand held shower
with slide bar; supply elbow - K-9664; shower valve K-304-KS pressure balanced
mixing valve with integral stops and K-T6913-4 valve trim or MOEN T9346EP15,
Posi-Temp pressure balancing valve shower system, hand held shower, 1-1/2" X 24"
stainless steel ADA grab bar with MOEN 8371HD, Posi-Temp pressure balancing
control valve with built in stops with T8370.
EXISTING TO REMAIN EQUIPMENT
A.
Existing to remain water closets - Provide and install BEMIS model 1955SSCT,
black, extra heavy duty, open front, self-sustaining check hinge and elongated for all
existing water closets. Replace closet flange, wax ring, bolts, bolt caps and spud
gasket.See 2.01 for appropriate flush valve replacement.
A.
Existing to remain lavatories - See 2.02 for appropriate faucet replacement. Provide
vandal proof aerator. Supply stops for each Kohler K-7601 chrome angle loose key,
provide threaded tailpiece supply extensions. Replace waste outlet and provide
chromium-plated p-trap with cleanout plug and nipple with escutcheon.
B.
Existing to remain shower (SH(E)) - Provide and install KOHLER K-7371
showerhead; shower arm K-7397; and shower valve K-6913-4 pressure balanced
mixing valve with integral stops.
C.
Trough Sink (TS) (Existing Fixture) – Provide and install three (3) sets of CHICAGO
FAUCETS Model N0. 225-261 faucets for each trough sink. Plug unused former
bubbler mount with chrome plug.
D.
Existing to remain hand sink in kitchen – See 2.02 D for appropriate faucet
replacement. Provide K-7601 supplies with loose key stops. Provide threaded
tailpiece supply extensions.
E.
Existing to remain service sinks and mop basins - Replace faucet with one of the
following faucets respectively - Kohler K-8905 or K-8907 with wall bracket. Chicago
faucet 305-VB-RCF or 897-RCF with wall bracket shall also be accepted. All with
integral vacuum breakers.
ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
The following electric water coolers (and/or drinking fountains) shall be manufactured by
ELKAY. Electric drinking fountains fully equal to the item specified, manufactured by
15451-5
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15451
HALSEY TAYLOR, OASIS, HAWS or SUNROC shall be acceptable. Fixtures with plastic
bubbler components will not be acceptable.
2.07
A.
Electric Water Cooler (EWC) - Elkay EWCA-14 wall mounted compact cooler
complete with flexi-guard bubbler and all standard accessories; finish by Architect.
B.
Electric Water Cooler (EWC-1) - Elkay EZ-8 universal mount barrier free cooler
complete with flexi-guard bubbler and all standard accessories; finish by Architect.
C.
Electric Water Cooler (EWC-2) - ELKAY handicapped model # EZS8WSLK
accessible water cooler with Bottle filling station, flexi-guard bubbler and all standard
accessories. Finish by Architect.
D.
Drinking fountain and cuspidor (DF) – Kohler Semi Recessed K-5293, vitreous china
with 34902 condensation plate assembly, 35301 bubbler assembly, 79186 supply
stop assembly, 35314 trap and 52054 wall screw access pack.
MOP BASIN/ LAUNDRY TRAY
FIAT shall manufacture the following plumbing fixtures. Mop basins and laundry trays fully
equal to the item specified and manufactured by STERN WILLIAMS shall also be
acceptable. Laundry Tray fully equal to the item specified and manufactured by JUST
MANUFACTURING shall be acceptable.
2.08
A.
Mop Basin (MB-1) - FIAT Model TSB-700 with stainless steel caps on all curbs, 12" x
36" x 24"; Faucet, with integral vacuum breaker - 830-AA or CHICAGO FAUCETS
897-RCF or MOEN 8124 with internal vacuum breaker, integral check stops; Hose
and hose bracket - 832-AA; Silicone sealant - 833-AA.
B.
Mop Basin (MB-2) - STERN WILLIAMS HL-2100 with 6" drop and stainless steel cap
on threshold, 36" X 24" X 12"; Faucet, with integral vacuum breaker - 830-AA or
CHICAGO FAUCET 897-RCF or MOEN 8124 with internal vacuum breaker, integral
check stops; Hose and hose bracket - 832AA; Silicone sealant - 833-AA.
C.
Laundry Tray (LT) - ELKAY model RNSF8118LR, 16 gauge, type 304 stainless steel,
floor mounted scullery sink with drainboards on both sides; Faucet shall be ELKAY
model LK940AT10L2H with 2.2 GPM vandal resistant aerator, strainer LK-18B, PTrap with cleanout plug and escutcheon; Supply valves shall be 1/4 turn sweated
ball valves with chrome plated ball and escutcheons.
WASH BOX
A.
2.09
Wash Box – GUY GRAY MANUFACTURING CO., INC. Model NWFBED-200TS.
Provide with ½” hot and cold water hose bibbs, a 20 amp, 120V duplex receptacle
for washer, and a 30 amp, 220V, 4wire dryer receptacle.
OTHER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
15451-6
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15451
A.
The contractor shall make a complete waste, vent, hot and cold water rough in for all
fixtures, equipment and food service equipment as indicated on the drawings.
Furnish and install 1/4 turn shut off valves for all countertop fixtures and KOHLER K7601 supplies for all wall hung fixtures; traps, tailpieces, sink strainers, supply pipes,
air gaps, backflow preventers, escutcheons, and make all final connections for a
complete installation.
B.
The contractor shall consult the architectural drawings and other sections of the
specifications for equipment requiring roughing in and final connection under this
section of the contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The water supply to each surface mounted fixture shall have angle, loose key stop
valves. On fixtures without integral stops, install stop valves. Fixtures which are
installed in case work or fixtures with plumbing components which are not visible
from the occupied space shall have ¼ turn sweated ball valves with chrome plated
ball and escutcheons. The water supply piping for fixtures located in casework shall
be type L copper from the valve to the fixture, piping shall be run in such a manner
as to allow the space below the fixture to utilized as storage.
B.
Wall hung fixtures such as urinals, lavatories, sinks, electric water coolers and
drinking fountains, shall have carriers. Where the carrier is not specified with the
fixture, the fixture carrier shall be a 1/8 inch steel plate embedded or anchored in the
wall with all-thread rods bolted or welded to the plate and extending through the
finished wall for the fixture hanger installation. The minimum size rod shall be 1/4".
The fixture carrier shall be installed while the wall is being built.
C.
The plumbing fixtures shall be installed at the mounting heights required by Fairfax
County Public Schools standards. Where mounting heights are not stated, the
plumbing fixtures shall be roughed-in in accordance with the manufacturer's rough-in
information.
D.
The contractor shall make all final connections to the equipment furnished by others.
E.
The contractor shall provide watertight seals at all joints formed where fixtures come
in contact with walls or floors.
F.
Remove all existing to remain fixtures in toilet rooms to allow for re-tiling of walls and
floors. Remount fixtures at existing heights, except fixtures that get remounted at
handicapped heights, after tile work is completed.
G.
All exposed piping components for lavatory faucets shall be chrome plated or
stainless steel if such components appear below the apron of the fixture. Faucets
with exposed brass pigtails will not be acceptable.
15451-7
11/17
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
SECTION 15451
H.
All sinks and lavatories that are indicated to be handicapped accessible shall have
offset tailpieces.
I.
At the time of project closeout all battery powered urinal flush valves, battery
powered water closet flush valves and battery powered faucets shall have the
batteries removed and replaced with new batteries. Owner’s representative shall
verify battery replacement.
J.
Provide check valves on incoming water supply for all mop basins and laundry trays.
END OF SECTION
15451-8
11/17
SECTION 15500
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
1.03
SCOPE
A.
An automatic sprinkler system shall be designed, installed, tested and approved for
the entire building in accordance with Fairfax County School standards, NFPA
standards, state codes, local jurisdiction's requirements and contract documents.
B.
In all renovation and addition projects the contractor shall provide temporary
protection for all branch mains and bulk mains run through corridors where the
ceiling has been removed. The contractor shall provide upright sprinklers (within 12"
of the deck above) along the path of all water charged sprinkler branch mains and
bulk mains in the corridor. When the ceilings are replaced the upright sprinklers shall
be removed and the outlets they were connected to shall be capped. In projects
where there is an existing sprinkler system, the existing sprinkler system shall be
removed and replaced with a new sprinkler system. While work is being done in
existing areas the existing sprinkler system may need to be removed and re-piped to
allow for the installation of new equipment. When existing ceilings are removed for
renovation, the existing sprinklers shall be removed and re-piped as upright
sprinklers to provide sprinkler protection during phased construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The automatic sprinkler system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA No. 13, FM
1637, UL 2443 and be approved by the local jurisdiction.
B.
The sprinkler contractor shall be licensed by the local jurisdiction to install the
sprinkler system as required.
C.
All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a
single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the
grooved components.
1.
1.04
All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, and valve bodies shall be
date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.
SHOP DRAWINGS
This contractor shall prepare eight sets of shop drawings for the Architect to review. The
local jurisdiction, the Architect and the Owner shall approve the shop drawings. The shop
drawings shall include detailed working drawings at a scale no smaller than 1/8" per foot and
15500-1
11/17
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 15500
shall also include lighting fixtures, ductwork, ceiling diffusers, grilles, HVAC and plumbing
piping and any other possible obstructions. An overall plan showing the sprinkler zones
shall be included on the working drawings (See paragraph 2.05). Calculations, sprinkler
heads, alarm check valve, flow switches and other equipment shall also be included on the
shop drawings. No sprinkler piping shall be installed until shop drawings have been
reviewed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
DESIGN
The entire building shall receive a sprinkler system, hydraulically designed and zoned.
Zones shall not exceed fifty thousand square feet (50,000 sq. ft.). The sprinkler design shall
be a wet-pipe system for the interior of the building. Attic spaces, crawlspaces and areas
subject to freezing shall receive dry system. Loading docks, Walk-in freezer and unheated
outdoor storage shall have dry heads. The sprinkler contractor shall obtain current hydrant
flow test information from the local water authority prior to starting any design work.
2.02
SPRINKLER HEADS
The following sprinkler heads shall be manufactured by VICTAULIC. Sprinkler heads fully
equal to the item as manufactured by VIKING, RELIABLE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER
CORPORATION of AMERICA or TYCO shall be acceptable. Sprinklers shall be glass bulb
type, with hex-shaped wrench boss integrally cast into the sprinkler body to reduce the risk
of damage during installation. Wrenches shall be provided by the sprinkler manufacturer that
directly engage the wrench boss. Sprinklers with rubber O-Rings are not acceptable.
A.
Sprinkler heads, where there are ceilings, shall be recessed mounted with a polished
chrome finish and escutcheon and shall be quick response type. Heads shall be as
manufactured by Victaulic model "V2708". Exception: Sprinkler heads in locker
rooms and shower rooms shall have a corrosion resistant coating.
B.
Sprinkler heads, upright or pendent, exposed, shall be factory brass and shall be
quick response as manufactured by Victaulic model "V2704 (upright) and V2708
(pendant)".
C.
Sprinkler heads, dry sidewall, shall be glass bulb, quick response with white epoxy
coating and escutcheon as manufactured by Victaulic model "V3610".
D.
Sprinkler heads, sidewall, shall be wall mounted with polished chrome finish and
escutcheon and shall be extended coverage quick response as manufactured by
Victaulic model "V3416".
E.
Sprinkler heads, dry pendant, shall be extended type glass bulb, quick response with
corrosion resistant coating and escutcheon as manufactured by Victaulic model
"V3606". Provide and install dry sprinkler boot as manufactured by Victaulic to
eliminate the air gap at the wall or ceiling.
F.
Sprinkler heads in unoccupied spaces may be rough brass.
15500-2
11/17
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
G.
H.
2.03
SECTION 15500
Sprinkler heads, concealed, shall have factory finished white painted cover plate and
shall be quick response as manufactured by Victaulic model "V3904”. For ceilings
painted black, custom black painted cover plate shall be provided.
Provide sprinkler guards on all heads in the physical education rooms, gymnasiums,
gym storage, walk-in coolers, loading docks, all storage rooms, gang toilets, locker
rooms, boiler rooms and in mechanical rooms. Guards in occupied spaces shall be
chrome plated. See 3.01.R for gang toilet and locker room exception.
I.
Escutcheons and guards shall be listed, supplied, and approved for use with the
sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer.
J.
Sprinkler heads shall be of the same manufacturer for each type used.
K.
Escutcheon finishes shall match that of the sprinkler head they serve.
L.
Chrome plating is not an acceptable corrosion resistant coating.
FLOW SWITCHES
The flow switches shall be vane type. The flow switches shall be equipped with two sets of
form 'C' contacts. Flow switches as manufactured by Potter Electric or Viking shall be
acceptable.
2.04
2.05
CHROME FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (SIAMESE)
A.
Two-way projecting Siamese with cast brass, straight Y pattern, double inlet body,
furnished with plugs and chains, and brass escutcheon plate lettered 'AUTO. SPKR.'
Finish - polished brass chrome plated and shall be manufactured by Potter Roemer,
No. 5750 with automatic ball drip. Provide low point drain for service. Siamese
connections fully equal to the item specified, manufactured by ELKHART,
GUARDIAN FIRE EQUIPMENT< FIRE END< CROKER CORPORATION or
POWHATTAN shall be acceptable. Siamese connections with a rough brass finish
are not allowed. Provide a minimum 24” x 24” keyed lockable, access door, key
shall be compatible to the owners HL302 key, to service check valve, ball drip and
low point drain. Provide one key for each location and store in sprinkler cabinet.
B.
At the low point near each fire department connection, install a 90-degree elbow with
drain connection to allow for system drainage to prevent freezing. Basis of Design:
Victaulic #10-DR.
SPRINKLER ZONE GRAPHIC
A.
Provide two sets of small scale floor plans showing the sprinkler zone diagram
graphic. The graphic shall show the outline of the entire school, all rooms and
corridors with multiple floors shown separately. The sprinkler zones, as shown on
the drawings shall be delineated with each zone shown in a different color. The
number of each zone shall be shown in its respective area and the graphic shall be
15500-3
11/17
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 15500
titled "Sprinkler Control Zones". The graphic shall show the Siamese connection, the
locations of all control, zone, test and drain valves, all low point drains, bulk drains,
fire department connection drain, hose valves and shall identify the zone the valve
serves and its function. The graphic shall have minimum dimensions of 11”x17” for
elementary, middle, high and secondary schools. Larger drawings shall be provided
if the minimum dimensions are too small to convey the required information legibly.
The graphic shall be laminated. The graphic shall be professionally produced; hand
shading will not be accepted. Provide shop drawings on this graphic with sprinkler
shop drawings.
B.
2.06
One zone diagram shall be wall mounted next to the sprinkler service entrance and
shall be framed and covered by 1/8" clear plastic. The second zone diagram shall
be turned over to the owner for sprinkler shop records.
VALVES
A.
Sprinkler system valves shall be as manufactured by STOCKHAM, MILWAUKEE,
NIBCO, MUELLER, UNITED, VICTAULIC, KENNEDY or any manufacturers listed in
section 2.02. Butterfly valves as manufactured by Central are not acceptable. The
minimum working pressure for system components shall be 250 psi. All valves
controlling the flow of water to sprinklers shall be listed indicating valves. The main
system control valve shall be an O.S. & Y, equal to VICTAULIC SERIES 771H.
type; other control valves may be with grooved ends or wafer type (butterfly), equal
to VICTAULIC SERIES 705. Butterfly valves shall include a pressure responsive
seat, and the stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide complete 360degree circumferential seating. Auxiliary control valves, (elevator shaft, pit and
machine room), shall be slow close ball valves, equal to VICTAULIC SERIES 728
(MILWAUKEE series BB-SCS). All control valves shall be provided with tamper
switches. All valve actuators shall be weatherproof. Fire department connection
check valves shall incorporate upstream and downstream pressure taps. The
inspectors test/drain valve shall be as manufactured by G/J Innovations, Inc. Model
Sure-Test, combination test and drain valve with integral sight glass and test orifice.
Test and drain valves manufactured by VICTAULIC TestMaster II Style 720, UNITED
BRASS or AGF shall also be acceptable.
B.
Backflow prevention valve shall be a U.L., listed double check valve assembly
including ball type test cocks to protect the potable water supply against backflow
from the automatic sprinkler system. Shutoff valves shall be U.L./FM listed, OS&Y
type with tamper switches. The assembly shall comply with ASSE 1015 or AWWA
C510. The double check valve assembly shall be manufactured by CONBRACO
INDUSTRIES, INC., APOLLO VALVES 4SG series. Backflow prevention valves
equal to the item specified as manufactured by WATTS, AMES, FEBCO or WILKINS
shall be acceptable.
C.
Service device valves shall be UL listed and FM approved, with a grooved end ductile
iron body. The valves shall be rated for service of 225-psi (minimum). The valves shall
be externally resettable, and all internal components shall be replaceable without
removing the valve from the installed position. Basis of Design: VICTAULIC Series 751
(alarm valve), Series 769-NXT (preaction / deluge valve), and Series 768-NXT (dry
15500-4
11/17
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 15500
valve, with required air pressure of 13-psi. Approved equal by VIKING will be
acceptable.
2.07
PIPING
A.
All main and branch piping shall be schedule 40 or schedule 10 steel pipe.
Schedule 10 piping shall only be allowed for piping larger than two inches. No piping
less than schedule 10 shall be acceptable. Grooved end fittings shall be ductile iron,
short-pattern, with flow equal to standard pattern fittings. Basis of Design: VICTAULIC
FireLock, or approved equal.
B.
Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing segments to ASTM
A536, pressure responsive gasket to ASTM D2000, and zinc electroplated steel
bolts and nuts to ASTM A449. Couplings shall comply with ASTM F1476 Standard
Specification for the Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use In
Piping Applications.
1.
Rigid Type: Coupling housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt
pads to provide joint rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with
NFPA-13. Couplings shall be fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset
contact. Tongue-and-recess type couplings, or any coupling that requires
exact gapping of bolt pads at required torque ratings, shall be installed in
strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions.
a.
2.
Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 009-EZ and 107H, Installation-Ready,
for direct stab installation without field disassembly, or standard rigid
couplings Victaulic Style 005 “FireLock” and Style 07 “Zero-Flex”.
Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress
relief are required, and for the elimination of flexible connectors. Basis of
Design: Victaulic Installation-Ready Style 177 or Style 77.
C.
Spaces with suspended acoustical ceilings shall receive flexible sprinkler drops
manufactured by FLEXHEAD INDUSTRIES or VICTAULIC. Union joints shall be provided for
all flexible sprinkler drops. Areas without suspended acoustical ceilings shall be hard piped
using return bends. Dry pipe systems shall have galvanized piping.
D.
FlexHead industries- flexible sprinkler drops, hose assembly shall be stainless steel
fully welded non-mechanical fittings, braided, leak tested with minimum one (1) inch
true-bore internal corrugated hose diameter. The ceiling brackets shall be
galvanized steel attachment type with integrated snap-on clip ends attached to the
ceiling using tamper-resistant screws. The flexible hose attachment shall be
removable hub type with set screw.
E.
Victaulic- flexible sprinkler drops, the sprinkler drops shall be stainless steel, braided
with union joints factory tested to 400 psi. No O-rings will be allowed. The flexible
drop shall be attached to the ceiling grid using a one-piece open gate stainless steel
bracket. The sprinkler heads installed in acoustical ceiling and concealed ceiling
shall be factory pre-assembled to the flexible sprinkler drops. The drops shall include
15500-5
11/17
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 15500
all required supports and bracing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The sprinkler system shall be installed and tested in accordance with NFPA NO. 13 and
shall be approved by the local jurisdiction. Two copies of the test results approved by the
jurisdiction shall be sent to the Architect.
A.
The sprinkler piping shall be installed concealed above the ceiling and be
coordinated not to interfere with the ductwork, air devices, lighting fixtures HVAC
piping, plumbing piping and other items. All mains shall run below the ductwork and
all branches shall be as high as possible. Branch piping that is not installed as high
as possible shall be removed and re-installed at the proper height at no additional
cost to the owner. Piping shall be arranged to allow for the easy removal of
acoustical ceiling tiles, piping shall be a minimum of 6” above ceiling grid.
B.
The sprinkler heads in ceilings shall be installed in the center (both longitudinally and
laterally) of the ceiling tile in lobbies, corridors and large rooms such as cafeterias,
media centers, libraries, lecture rooms, etc. Sprinkler heads installed in corridor
ceilings shall be installed in the center of the corridor. The intent is that when the
corridor width allows for a single row of sprinklers, the heads shall align witht the
centerline of the corridor. Sprinkler heads in tiles in other spaces shall be installed in
the center of tiles in at least the lateral dimension (width).Flexible sprinkler drops
shall be installed in the top or side of main or branch piping (see drawing detail)
inverted attachment is not acceptable.
C.
All sprinkler heads installed within the same room or space, shall be set at a uniform
elevation.
D.
Test or drain lines shall discharge to the exterior of the building and shall be kept
away from any entrances and off of loading docks and sidewalks.
E.
Maintain a minimum clearance of 6" between sprinkler heads and any other
obstruction such as lighting fixtures, clocks, etc.
F.
The fire service main shall be lined piping outside of the building and inside up to the
OS & Y valve. If a spool piece is used between the fire line stub and the OS & Y
valve then the spool piece shall be galvanized. If the OS & Y valve is rated by the
American Water Works Association (AWWA) as suitable for a connection to a
potable water system, then no galvanized pipe is required and the OS & Y valve may
be attached directly to the fire line stub.
G.
The sprinkler system shall be zoned as shown on the sprinkler zone diagram on the
drawings. Each zone shall have an inspector’s test and drain valve located off the
remote area of the zone.
H.
Provide high temperature sprinkler head(s) in the kitchen heat removal hood, Kiln
15500-6
11/17
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 15500
room, near unit heaters and above gas water heaters. Heads installed within ten
feet of gas clothes dryers shall be rated at 200º deg F. Heads located in the kitchen
heat removal hood shall be located in the corner of the hood opposite the combisteamer unit and rated at 360°F. Heads located in kiln hoods shall be rated at 286*
deg F. Sprinklers in the heat removal hood and in the kiln room shall be white epoxy
coated or stainless steel. Provide intermediate temperature, standard response
sprinkler head (200°F), at the bottom of the elevator shaft and in the elevator
machine room. Provide intermediate temperature, quick response sprinkler head
(200°F), in the walk-in freezer.
I.
All zone valves, control valves, test valves, hose valves and drain valves shall have
laminated plastic labels attached to the valve to identify the zone the valve serves
and the function of the valve (i.e. - "Control Valve - Zone 1", "Inspector's Test - Zone
1", “Drain valve – Zone 1”, etc.). Laminated plastic shall be one eighth inch thick, red
with white center core. Labels shall be a minimum of two inch by six inches with a
minimum one quarter inch high block lettering. Peel off labels or permanent markers
are not acceptable. Pre-manufactured labels with engraved information are
acceptable. Where valves are located above ceilings, labels shall be screwed or
riveted to the ceiling grid. In addition to the above, where valves are located in
spaces which have doors, label with dimensions of 2” x10” shall be installed above
the door on the occupied side of the door. Label shall read “Sprinkler control valve
zone _ _ _” etc. Labels attached directly to valves shall be attached by a non-ferrous
metal chain.
J.
Piping shall be substantially supported from the building structure; the support shall
be attached to the upper chord of the structure. Attachments shall be made either by
welding or using top beam clamps. The supporting of piping from the supports of
other disciplines is not acceptable.
K.
As phases of construction are completed, the sprinkler system shall be activated for
any additions to the building that are turned over to the owner for occupancy. Active
sprinkler mains that run through portions of the building without sprinkler protection
shall be protected as required by the Fire Marshall or the Authority Having
Jurisdiction. Sprinkler valve signs shall be installed in these areas. Sprinkler
systems shall remain activated throughout normal school hours and any subsequent
connections into active systems shall be made outside of these hours.
L.
All dry type sprinklers shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be insulated and
sealed around the pipe penetration and shall have a corrosion resistant coating.
Walk-in coolers/freezers shall have sprinklers located on opposite side of
refrigeration equipment. All dry type sprinklers shall be 12” long unless special
conditions require longer lengths.
M.
Sprinkler main and branch piping shall be flushed prior to installing any sprinkler
heads. Flushing connections shall be provided on mains and shall be 2 1/2”.
Flushing connections shall consist of threaded nipples with hose valves and caps.
Flushing connections shall remain after the flushing and testing has been completed
for use as future drain valves. Two flushing connections shall be provided for each
zone and shall be located within 50’ of operable windows or exterior doors. Flushing
15500-7
11/17
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 15500
connections shall be located on opposite ends of each zone. The flushing of each
zone shall be witnessed and verified by the owner’s representative.
N.
Check valves shall not be mounted higher than five feet above the finished floor.
O.
Fire department check valve upstream and downstream pressure taps shall have
valves and be provided with capped hose end connections for future
maintenance/inspection purposes.
P.
All control and zone valves located in the sprinkler room shall not be mounted higher
than five feet above the finished floor.
Q.
All inspectors’ test/drain valves shall be located in chases with keyed alike, lockable
access doors, minimum size is 10”x10”.. Key shall be compatible with owner’s
HL302 key. Provide one key for each location and store in sprinkler cabinet.
R.
Coordinate the spacing of heads with curtains and folding partitions.
S.
Backflow valves shall be tested by an approved testing agency after installation. In
addition to the testing valves supplied with the backflow preventer, two 21/2 inch
hose valves shall be provided in the bulk main, on the leaving side of the backflow
preventer, for testing purposes.
T.
Provide concealed type sprinkler heads in all group toilets, locker rooms and shower
rooms, for all middle, high and secondary schools. Provide concealed type sprinkler
heads in bulkheads, and spaces where the ceiling height is 7 foot 6 inches or less.
Provide concealed type sprinkler heads at folding partitions as to not interfere with
the operation of the folding partition.
U.
Piping in exposed areas shall not be painted prior to the Fire Marshall approval of
hydrostatic testing.
V.
The use of piping bushings is not acceptable.
W.
The shortest suitable length flexible braided sprinkler drop shall be used, however,
avoid excessively shard bends or stress at the takeoff from the branch line or main.
X.
The sprinkler bulb protector must remain in place until the sprinkler is completely
installed and before the system is placed in service. Remove bulb protectors
carefully by hand after installation. Do not use any tools to remove bulb protectors.
Y.
Do not install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of
fluid. Never install sprinklers with cracked bulbs.
Z.
Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
recommendations. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations,
projections, or roll marks. The gasket shall be molded and produced by the coupling
manufacturer of an elastomer suitable for the intended service.
15500-8
11/17
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
AA.
3.02
SECTION 15500
Provide a listed relief valve per NFPA 13.
SPARE PARTS
A.
Provide and install cabinet adjacent to sprinkler service with spare heads,
escutcheons, and wrenches for each type of sprinkler used including, but not limited
to, all dry type and concealed heads, in accordance with the following schedule:
TOTAL NUMBER
OF SPRINKLERS
1-10
11-299
OVER 299
3.03
NUMBER OF SPARE
SPRINKLERS REQUIRED
1
6
12
B.
All dry sprinklers shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Spare sprinklers shall
be the same as those used on the project (temperature, color, length, etc.)
C.
Provide a spare sprinkler wrench for each type of sprinkler and provide PVC sleeves
with screwed caps to house dry type sprinklers. Hang sleeves on wall adjacent to
sprinkler cabinet(s). Provide allen keys for flow/tamper covers.
D.
Provide two spare flexible sprinkler drops for each length used. Provide bracket and
hardware for each flexible sprinkler drop.
E.
Provide one set of Backflow Preventer repair kit.
F.
Spare wrench for recessed heads shall be socket type.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
A.
The kitchen, all storage, mechanical, science rooms and science prep rooms shall
be designed for Ordinary Hazard, Group One.
B.
Sprinkler heads needed for sprinkler system design but not specifically referenced
under paragraph 2.02 will be considered on a case by case basis.
C.
Systems utilizing bulk mains, as shown on contract drawings, shall have zone valve
assemblies located as shown on these drawings. The zone valve assembly shall
consist of a control valve with tamper switch, a check valve and a flow switch.
D.
Inspector test valves for attic dry pipe systems shall be installed in the space below,
with drum drip and keyed, access door.
E.
Pool areas shall use galvanized piping and sprinkler heads with corrosion resistant
coatings.
END OF SECTION
15500-9
11/17
SECTION 15540
FIRE PUMP ASSEMBLY
(ENGINEER TO EDIT TO MAKE JOB SPECIFIC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
General
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
A complete fire pump system shall be installed.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A fire pumping system shall be installed and tested to meet the requirements of NFPA 20
Centrifugal Fire Pumps, state codes and the local jurisdiction.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on the complete fire pump system as described in Section 15010 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FIRE PUMP
A.
Furnish and install as indicated on the drawings a completely piped and wired
packaged fire pump system. The fire pump package shall be an electric motor
driven system complete with control panel, valves, check valves, bypass, pump test
header, relief valve, strainers, jockey pump, and jockey pump control panel. Fire
pump shall be a packaged system mounted on a common base of fabricated steel
and shall be manufactured by PEERLESS, model No. 5PVF7. Provide system as a
complete split-skid package system on a rectangular structural steel mounting frame
complete with all necessary pipe supports, wiring, and hard copper sensing lines for
a complete package. The package shall be U/L listed as a system for its intended
use. The package shall be electrically and hydrostatically tested per NFPA
requirements before shipment. Unit shall be factory primed and painted with a
machine grade finish coat. All welding shall be performed by ASME section 9
certified welders. Packaged fire pump systems fully equal to the prototype
manufacturer by SYNCROFLO or LIQUITROL shall be acceptable.
B.
The fire pump shall be vertical in-line type with a capacity of 500 GPM at a design
head of 55 PSI, 25 HP, 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, rated at 3520 RPM. Motor shall
be provided by the pump manufacturer in accordance with NFPA 20 with all
accessories for automatic operation. Fire pumps fully equal to the prototype
15540-1
11/17
FIRE PUMP ASSEMBLY
SECTION 15540
manufacturer and manufactured by SYNCROFLO or LIQUITROL shall be
acceptable.
C.
The jockey pump shall be a BURKS Model E37CT7M close coupled turbine pump
with mechanical seal, designed complete with a 3450 RPM, ¾ HP, 480 volt, 3 phase
ODP motor. The jockey pump shall have a capacity of 8 GPM at a design head of
76 PSI. The jockey pump pressure relief valve shall be pilot operated, UL listed,
3/4".
D.
Pump Accessories - The manufacturer shall furnish accessories as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.02
½" Automatic air release valve, if applicable.
Set of suction and discharge pressure gauges
¾" Casing relief valve, pilot operated type, UL listed.
Eccentric suction reducer, if applicable
Concentric discharge increaser, if applicable
4" outside hose valve header, 125# flanges
Two sets of brass 2½" hose valves, NST angle
FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER
A.
The controller shall be a MASTER Control Systems Model “ECA”, G4 Enhanced
UL/FM labeled combination manual and automatic type designed for across-the-line
full voltage starting. Five (5) year warranty on the entire controller, Phase Smart
single phase protection, sensing lines with Y-strainer and connection located outside
the enclosure. Limited service controllers will not be acceptable.
B.
The enclosure shall be a NEMA Type 12, 11 AWG steel and shall meet the
requirements of the most recently mandated edition of NFPA 20 and shall be listed
by Underwriters Laboratories and approved by Factory Mutual.
C.
The withstand rating of the controller shall be not less than 100,000 Amps.
D.
The controller shall include a motor rated isolating disconnect switch and circuit
breaker, operated with two external handles, one for each device. The isolating
disconnect switch and circuit breaker shall be mechanically interlocked so that the
enclosure door cannot be opened with the handle in the ON position except by a
hidden tool operated defeater mechanism.
E.
In addition to the three standard remote alarms the fire pump controller
manufacturer shall supply an additional separate set of dry contacts for fire pump
run. This condition shall not be pulled off the original set. It must be a dedicated
separate set for independent use.
F.
The controller shall have a minimum running period timer, set for ten minutes.
Terminals shall be provided to field convert the controller from automatic to manual
shutdown.
G.
The controller shall have externally mounted, individual visual indicators for
15540-2
11/17
FIRE PUMP ASSEMBLY
SECTION 15540
POWER AVAILABLE, LOW PRESSURE, LOCAL START, REMOTE START,
PHASE FAILURE, PHASE REVERSAL, INTERLOCK ON, PUMP RUNNING, and
RUN TIMER ON. The controller shall be supplied with duplicate individual
PHASE FAILURE, PHASE REVERSAL, and PUMP RUNNING alarm contacts.
H.
2.03
The controller shall have a pressure recorder and event log that records up to 5,000
events and 2 years of retrievable data.
FIRE PUMP OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICE
A.
The fire pump overcurrent protection device shall be a model OPD as manufactured
by TORNATECH, rated for 460V/25HP/3 phase/60Hz and specifically designed to
assure complete upstream overcurrent protection coordination with the electric fire
pump controller. It shall have the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.04
JOCKEY PUMP CONTROLLER
A.
The jockey pump controller shall be a MASTER Model JPC, complete with fusible
disconnect switch that is service rated, Hand-Off-Automatic selector switch, and a
pressure switch in a NEMA 2R enclosure. The controller shall be rated for ¾ HP, 3
phase, 60 cycle, 480 volt operation.
B.
Provide the following items:
1.
2.
2.03
Control circuit transformer
Power available pilot light
SPECIALTIES
A.
2.04
Factory assembled, wired, and tested
UL listed for fire pump service as per NFPA 70 (NEC) 695.4(B)(2)(a)(2) and
695.3(F)(2)
Suitable as service entrance equipment
NEMA 2 assembly
Flange mounted disconnect handle lockable in the ON (closed) position
Markings as per NFPA 70 (NEC) 695.4(B)(3)(a)(2)
All wiring between OPD and the Fire Pump Controller and Motor shall be
completed and tested at the factory.
Specialties shall be provided to meet the requirements of NFPA 20 including but not
limited to pipe, fittings, valves, check valves, eccentric reducers, concentric
increasers, strainers, relief valves, pressure gauges, pressure switch including wiring
and air vents. A ceiling lifting lug shall be provided directly over the fire pump motor.
The lifting lug shall be sized to lift no less than 400 Lbs.
TEST MANIFOLD
A.
The test manifold for fire pump test connection shall be as shown on the drawings.
The flush type wall hydrant shall be cast brass, double inlet body with male NPT
15540-3
11/17
FIRE PUMP ASSEMBLY
SECTION 15540
inlet(s) and furnished with caps and chains, and cast brass escutcheon plate marked
"Pump Test Connection". Finish shall be polished chrome plated, size 6" x 2-1/2" x
2-1/2", as manufactured by Potter-Roemer, Model 5862-7, complete with male
snoots, caps and chains and removable swivel hose valves. Provide automatic ball
drip. After the tests are complete and approved, the valves shall be removed and
stored in lockable wall cabinet, 20” x 20” x 9”, with solid door, as manufactured by
Potter-Roemer, Model 1815. Locate cabinet in pump room. Pump test manifolds
fully equal to the item specified, manufactured by Allenco, Seco, or Elkhart, and shall
be acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
The fire pump system shall be installed and tested as shown on the drawings and
specified herein and in accordance with NFPA 20, state and local codes. Two (2)
copies of the test report approved by the local jurisdiction shall be submitted to the
Owner.
B.
All sensing lines and interface wiring for the fire pump and jockey pump shall be
provided by the factory and installed by the fire pump and fire pump controller’s local
representative. All power supplies to the fire pump and jockey pump controller shall
be provided by the onsite electrical contractor. The left or right rotation shall be
confirmed at release to production.
C.
The fire pump supplier shall provide the services of a factory qualified technician to
align pump coupling and check all items prior to fire pump test. Provide the Owner
with a copy of this report.
D.
Relief valves that discharge into floor drains shall not cause splashing of water in the
pump room.
E.
Unless prohibited by code, drains shall discharge to the exterior of the building.
F.
Install unions between relief valves, jockey pump, and fire pump.
G. Secure all piping with hangers or clamps.
H. All drain lines for drip cup and relief valves shall be PVC, CPVC, or copper pipe.
TESTS
A.
The automatic fire pump shall be tested for capacity and flow in accordance with
NFPA 20.
B.
All labor, tools, materials and the services of an electrician shall be provided by the
Fire Protection Contractor for all required automatic fire pump tests.
C.
The Certified Technician for the Fire Pump Manufacturer and Controller
15540-4
11/17
FIRE PUMP ASSEMBLY
SECTION 15540
Manufacturer shall be present for the field acceptance test. The technician shall
be a duly authorized representative of the fire pump, fire pump controller and
driver manufacturer. Each shall submit documentation certifying such
authorization, and shall comply with the requirements of NFPA-20 4.3, 2010. In
addition the Certified Technician’s information must be provided in the submittal
documentation to include: Company Name, Certified Technician(s) Name, Office
Phone, Fax and email. In addition provide the same contact information for
warranty and service calls to be forwarded to the owner or owner's
representative. Provide a start-up check list for the fire pump and fire pump
controller to be completed by the General Contractor, Electrical Contractor and
Sprinkler Contractor to be completed and returned prior to scheduling the
preliminary start-up and test.
D.
Preliminary Start-up with flow test shall be conducted no less than 24 hours prior
to the fire marshal test and include the following:
Attested By and Date
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Confirm Piping arrangement is in accordance with NFPA 20.
Confirm Electrical Inspection is complete.
Confirm Motor is wired correctly and rotation is correct.
Laser align the coupling and forward the detailed report for record to
engineer.
Calibrate the transducer or pressure switch between fire and jockey
Record pressures for each:
a.
Fire/Jockey Off _____ Jockey On _____ Fire On_____
Attested By ___________________ Date_________________
END OF SECTION
15540-5
11/17
SECTION 15601
ATMOSPHERIC MODULAR BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The General Conditions, Special Conditions, Division 1, and the applicable portion of
Division 15, Mechanical General Provisions including sections 15060, 15080, and 15100,
are a part of this Section.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
The work covered under this section of the specifications shall include the furnishing and
installation of the modular boilers and associated items specified and/or indicated and all
necessary piping and electrical connections required for a complete system as shown on the
drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Each boiler shall be designed, constructed and pressure tested in accordance with
the provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for Heating Boilers and
shall be stamped with the required official ASME symbol.
B.
Each boiler shall be rated to standards developed by the American Boiler
Manufacturers Association.
C.
Each boiler shall be tested, certified, and listed in accordance with the requirements
of the American Gas Association.
D.
The boiler control panels shall be approved and listed by the Underwriters
Laboratory and shall include the official UL Label.
E.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
BOILER & ACCESSORIES
A.
General Requirements
15601-1
11/17
ATMOSPHERIC MODULAR BOILERS
B.
C.
SECTION 15601
1.
Provide complete modular, low pressure, cast iron, hot water boiler system
arranged for operation with natural gas, with atmospheric draft as shown on
the drawings.
2.
Packaged boilers shall be manufactured by Burnham, Weil McLain, or
Hydrotherm.
3.
The boiler shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of
Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and shall be
stamped with the ASME symbol. It shall be tested, approved, and listed by
IBR, shall be capable of developing full IBR gross output capacity of 100%
firing rate and shall include the IBR certification symbol. The burner shall
comply with the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories.
4.
The boiler shall be ASME stamped and all data reports signed and approved
by a national board pressure vessels inspector with the unit.
5.
The entire boiler, base frame and other components shall be factory-painted
before shipment, using a hard-finished enamel.
6.
The flue gas exit temperatures shall not fall below the dew point of the flue
gases to prevent condensation corrosion within the boiler.
7.
Unit shall be fully assembled and wired, with burner, controls, trim, and
insulated steel jacket.
Boiler Trim
1.
Safety valves, size and quantity shall be in strict accordance with ASME
Code requirements.
2.
Provide all water trim, including a combination pressure altitude gauge and
thermometer, ASME rated water relief valves, high limit aquastat, and low
water cutoff.
Water Manifolds
Water manifolds shall be provided that are designed for primary/secondary
circulation. One combination supply and return manifold with interconnecting boilerto-manifold piping shall be installed by the contractor.
D.
Gas Valve Train
1.
Each boiler shall be furnished with an AGA certified gas train.
2.
The gas control train of each boiler shall be factory assembled and consist of
a combination 24 volt redundant gas valve with 100% shut-off and a 1/8"
N.P.T. pressure tapping.
15601-2
11/17
ATMOSPHERIC MODULAR BOILERS
E.
SECTION 15601
Controls
1.
Individual Boiler Module Gas Controls
a.
2.
Each boiler ignition system shall be of the EI type electronic control
system which shall provide an electrically ignited intermittent gas pilot
and permit the main gas valve to open only when the pilot burner is
proven to be lit. Should a loss of pilot flame occur, the main gas
valve will close and the spark will recur within 0.8 seconds. If pilot
fails to ignite within 90 seconds, control will attempt to relight after 5
minutes. System shall include an electronic ignition module, pilot
assembly, and pilot gas valve. Boilers shall be controlled by the
Building Automation System (BAS). Boiler sequence of operation
shall be as described in Section 15900.
All conduit for controls shall be liquid-tight. See specification Section 16110.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
The boiler shall be assembled as recommended by the boiler manufacturer and set
above the boiler room floor on a 4" high concrete pad where shown on the drawing.
The installation shall meet all ASME requirements.
B.
A level foundation (4" concrete base) shall be provided by the Contractor with full
consideration given to the overall boiler dimensions and assembled and operating
weight.
C.
The boiler shall be installed to permit all required access for complete servicing and
maintenance.
START-UP
A.
Start-up service shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer's authorized
representative and shall include complete testing of all controls, burner adjustment
and overall boiler operation. The Contractor is responsible for a monitored start-up.
The monitoring agency (Washington Gas Light Company) shall record the main gas
supply pressure at inlet of gas line control assembly, gas manifold pressure, and
control settings. Copies of this data are to be supplied to the Owner.
B.
The boiler shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions prior to being placed into service.
C.
Three complete operating and maintenance manuals, including wiring diagrams,
start-up and operating sequence and material list shall be turned over to the Owner.
See specification Section 01730 1.03 A.
15601-3
11/17
ATMOSPHERIC MODULAR BOILERS
3.03
SECTION 15601
TESTS
All burner units shall receive factory tests to check the construction, controls, and operation
of the unit.
3.04
COMBUSTION TEST
The Contractor, upon completion of the fuel burning system, shall submit a written report on
the operation of each burner to the Owner and will include the following information:
GAS BURNER
Make
Model
Serial No.
CO 2
CO
High Fire
High Fire
Low Fire
Low Fire
Net Stack Temp.
Gas Burning Rate
High Fire
High Fire
Low Fire
Low Fire
Gas Pressure at Orifices
Gas Pressure Upstream of All Valves
High Fire
High Fire
Low Fire
Low Fire
Microamp or Voltage Reading for flame supervision
Microamps (Volts)
END OF SECTION
15601-4
11/17
SECTION 15604
FUEL OIL PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions and Section 15050 -Basic Materials and
Methods, shall apply to this section.
The work covered under this section shall include a complete fuel oil piping system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The fuel oil piping shall meet the requirements of NFPA 30 - Flammable
Combustible Liquids Code, and NFPA 31 - Oil Burning Equipment, state and local
codes.
B.
The fuel oil piping system shall be tested with 5 pounds per square inch air pressure
for a minimum of 30 minutes.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide shop drawings on the proposed piping arrangement and on all accessories
as described in section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
UNDERGROUND PIPING
A.
The fill and sounding lines, vent line, and fuel oil supply and return piping shall be of
fiberglass and resin construction, U/L listed for underground installation. Piping shall
be inert to all petroleum products. Piping shall be Dualoy 3000L as manufactured by
AMERON or Red Thread II by SMITH FIBERGLASS PRODUCTS INC.
B.
Fuel Oil Gauge Conduit - Shall be schedule 40 PVC with factory fittings.
C.
Observation Wells - Shall be schedule 40 PVC with factory installed 0.02 inch slots.
ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A.
Vent Line - Shall be schedule 40 black steel.
B.
Fuel Oil Gauge Conduit - Shall be pvc plastic schedule 40 with fittings.
15604-1
11/17
FUEL OIL PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
C.
2.03
Fuel Oil Supply and Return Piping - Shall be black malleable iron with fittings.
Valves shall be threaded bronze gate valves with screw-in bonnet, rising stem, solid
wedge and shall be rated for oil.
FUEL OIL GAUGE
A.
2.05
SECTION 15604
VALVES
A.
2.04
The gauge unit shall be HERSEY model VR-2 transducer and model 5000 indicator
or equal by Pneumercator or Petrometer.
FUEL OIL STRAINER
A.
A fuel oil strainer shall be provided to each burner. Strainer basket shall be
removable brass construction with wire mesh suitable for number 2 fuel oil.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
3.02
OIL VALVES
A.
3.03
The fuel oil gauge shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
FUEL OIL STRAINER
A.
3.05
Oil valves shall be installed in the supply pipe where the oil enters the boiler room
and at each boiler.
FUEL OIL GAUGE
A.
3.04
Fuel oil piping shall be installed as shown on the drawings.
The fuel oil strainer shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
OBSERVATION WELLS
The observation wells shall be installed with all accessories as detailed on the drawings and
as noted below:
A.
Manhole Cover - Shall be cast with a full size equilateral triangle that shall be painted
black.
15604-2
11/17
FUEL OIL PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15604
B.
Locking Cap - Shall be keyed differently from the fill and sounding box-locking cap.
C.
Warning Message - Install a laminated plastic label inside the manhole with the
following warning:
OBSERVATION WELL
WARNING:
Do not place petroleum products or other substances in this well.
END OF SECTION
15604-3
11/17
SECTION 15605
FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include a complete fuel oil transfer pumping
system.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The pumping system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 31 - Oil Burning
Equipment, state and local codes.
B.
The transfer pump shall be U/L listed for fuel oil use.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS
Provide and install a duplex fuel oil pump package as shown on the drawings. The fuel oil
transfer pump shall be manufactured by VIKING. Pumps fully equal to the specified pump
and manufactured by TUTHILL, WEBSTER or SUNDSTRAND are acceptable.
A.
Type - The pump shall be positive displacement internal gear rotary type in standard
cast iron construction. Provide cast iron mounting foot.
B.
Capacity shall be as shown in equipment schedule on drawings.
C.
Rotor - Iron heads shall be hydraulically balanced to assure instant priming and
constant flow. Rotor, shaft and idler shall be steel.
D.
Seal - The pump shall employ a mechanical face-type seal, with carbon graphite
casing bushing.
E.
Bearings - the bearing shall be Teflon impregnated outboard type.
15605-1
11/17
FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS
SECTION 15605
F.
Motor - Pump shall be mounted on formed steel base direct connected through
flexible coupling with guard to 1200-rpm open drip-proof motor.
G.
Starter - Provide a manual starter for single-phase units and magnetic across-theline starter for three phase units. The starter shall have ON-OFF switch and red
running light. See section 15050, article 2.07.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The fuel oil transfer pumps shall be installed as shown on the drawing and as recommended
by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
15605-2
11/17
SECTION 15607
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include a complete installation of a double wall
fiberglass underground fuel oil storage tank with an electronic fuel oil gauge, overfill and spill
prevention system, hydrostatic tank monitoring system, and all other measures required by
local, state, and national governing bodies having jurisdiction over the installation and as
shown on the drawings and in the specifications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 30, “Flammable and Combustible
Liquids Code”, and NFPA 31, “Standards for Installation of Fuel Burning Equipment”,
Commonwealth of Virginia State Water Control Board regulation VR 680-13-02,
“Underground Storage Tanks; Technical Standards and Corrective Action
Requirements”, and the County of Fairfax building code.
B.
The storage tank shall bear a UL label.
C.
The complete tank and piping system shall be tested as follows:
1.
Primary and secondary tank shall be leak tested by the manufacturer prior to
shipment.
2.
Leak test primary and secondary tanks before installing in ground. Pressure
test primary tank to 5 psig for thirty (30) minutes using gauge pressure to
check for leaks. Connect primary and secondary tanks together, pressure
test to 5 psig for one hour using gauge pressure to check for leaks. Soap
entire tank during this period to check for leaks.
3.
After installing the tank in the ground repeat the above tests using gauge
pressure to check for leaks.
4.
After installation is completed, perform precision test of entire tank and piping
system. Test method shall be able to detect leaks of .05 gallons per hour in
accordance with Virginia Regulation VR 680-13-02 part 2.1-D and NFPA
329.
15607-1
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES 5.
1.04
SECTION 15607
Perform operation test of hydrostatic tank monitoring system by temporarily
raising and lowering fluid in annular space.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings for tank, piping, and all ancillaries as described in Section 15010,
1.04.
1.05
WARRANTY
The installed tank specified in this section shall warranted not to fail or leak due to internal or
external corrosion or structural damage under normal use and services. If within 30 years
from the date of acceptance by the Architect the tank should fail, the manufacturer shall
repair or replace it. Installation costs after the first year are not a part of this warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
C.
FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED POLYESTER UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK
A.
Provide and install double-wall storage tank as shown on the drawings. The storage
tank shall have corrosion resistant construction of glass fiber reinforcement and
isophthalic resin. Capacity and dimensions of the tank shall be as shown on the
drawings. The tank shall be manufactured by FLUID CONTAINMENT or XERXES.
Tank shall be double wall fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) underground storage
tank with a primary (internal) tank and a secondary (external) tank.
B.
Loading Conditions – Tank shall meet the following design criteria:
1.
Internal Load: Primary and secondary tanks shall withstand 5 psi air pressure
test with 5 to 1 safety factor.
2.
Vacuum Test: Tank shall be vacuum tested by the tank manufacturer to
assure structural integrity. Primary tank shall be tested to 11.5 inches
mercury and secondary tank tested to 9.5 inches mercury vacuum.
3.
Surface Loads: Tank shall withstand surface H-20 axle loads when properly
installed according to current manufacturer’s installation instructions.
4.
External hydrostatic pressure: Buried in ground with 7’ of overburden over
the top of the tank, the hole flooded and a safety factor of 5:1 against general
buckling.
5.
Tank shall be designed to support accessory equipment such as drop tubes
when installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations and limitations.
Product Storage Requirements
1.
Tanks shall be capable of storing petroleum with specific gravity up to 1.1,
15607-2
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15607
shall be chemically inert to petroleum products, and shall be capable of
storing fuel oil at temperatures not to exceed 150 degrees F.
2.
2.02
The primary tank shall be vented to atmospheric pressure. The tank is not
designed as a pressure vessel.
D.
Materials – Tanks (primary and secondary) shall be manufactured with 100%
isophthalic polyester resin and glass fiber reinforcement with no sand fillers.
E.
Brine Filled Annular Space – Tank shall have a space between the primary and
secondary shell walls to allow for the free flow and containment of all leaked product
from the primary tank.
TANK ACCESSORIES
A.
Anchor straps – Provide FRP anchor straps as manufactured by tank manufacturer.
Number and location of straps shall be specified in current literature of tank
manufacturer. Each strap shall be capable of withstanding the buoyancy load for
tank diameter as follows:
4’-4,200 lbs. 8’-25,000 lbs. 12’-26,000 lbs.
6’-18,000 lbs. 10’-32,000 lbs.
B.
Tank Flanged Manway shall be 22” I.D. flanged complete with U.L. listed gaskets,
bolts and covers.
C.
Gauge Plates shall be installed by the manufacturer under each fitting and manway
to prevent damage from dipstick abuse and ladders.
D.
Annular Space
E.
1.
Tank shall have a space between the primary and secondary shell walls to
allow for the free flow and containment of all leaked product from the primary
tank.
2.
Tank shall have one 4” NPT fitting located at each end of the tank for
monitoring access to the space between the primary and secondary shell
walls. Tank shall also include one 4” NPT fitting in the reservoir on the top of
the tank.
NPT Threaded Fittings
1.
All threaded fittings shall be a material of construction consistent with the
requirements of the U.L. label. Fittings shall withstand a minimum of 150
foot pounds of torque and 1000 foot pounds of bending both with 2:1 factor
of safety.
2.
All standard thread fittings shall be half couplings and shall be 4” in diameter.
15607-3
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15607
Reducers are to be used for smaller sizes where shown and provided by
contractor.
2.03
3.
Suction Line – Shall be installed by contractor on site. Pipes shall terminate
a minimum of 4” from bottom of tank.
4.
Return line shall be installed by contractor and shall terminate at the top of
the tank.
F.
Hydrostatic Monitor Reservoir – An integrally mounted reservoir installed by the
manufacturer shall be installed on the top of the tank. Reservoir shall be constructed
of fiberglass reinforced plastic and shall have a 4” NPT monitoring fitting on top.
G.
Deadman Anchors – Deadman shall be a concrete beam with a total length 12”
greater than the length of the tank. Deadman for 6’ and 8’ diameter tanks shall be
12” X 12” and deadman for 10’ diameter tanks shall be 24” X 18”.
H.
Certification Plate – Underwriter Laboratory label shall be permanently affixed to
tank.
I.
Lifting Lugs – Provide lifting lugs on tank. Lugs shall be capable of withstanding
weight of tank with a safety factor of 3 to 1.
J.
On 4,000 gallon tanks only, the Contractor shall install a foot valve in the supply line
inside of the oil tank. The valve shall be single poppet style with an 8-mesh
protective screen. Prototype: OPW model 91.
FUEL OIL GAUGE SYSTEM
The fuel oil gauge system shall consist of a liquid level transducer in the tank with an
electronic indicator mounted in the boiler room complete with all necessary wiring. The tank
gauging system shall be Hersey Model VR-2 transducer and model 5000 indicator or equal
by Pneumercator or Petrometer, providing all aspects of the following are met:
1.
The liquid level transducer shall extend to the bottom of the tank with the connection
section mounted on the top outer tank shell. The transducer shall convert the
position of a floating magnet to a variable resistive signal output to the indicator. The
transducer shall be enclosed in a stainless steel housing, have a resolution of 1/8”,
include zener barriers for intrinsically safe operation, and be Factory Mutual
approved for fuel oil tanks.
2.
The electronic indicator shall be compatible with level transducer and have a
calibrated 250°F 10-1/2 inch diameter dial, an accuracy of 1.5% full scale, a standard
proportional 4-20 mA output, an integral terminal connection block, and four alarm
contacts. Power supply to the unit shall be 115 volt and low voltage power supply
shall be internal to the unit. The indicator shall in a NEMA 3R housing and surface
mounted in the boiler room. Wiring between the transmitter and the indicator and
from the 115 volt power source to the indicator shall be under this section of the
15607-4
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15607
specifications.
3.
2.04
Buried conduit for fuel oil gauge and reservoir sensor conductors shall be ¾” nonmetallic. Conduit exposed in manhole shall be rigid metallic. Conduit within the
boiler room shall be rigid metallic or IMC. Junction boxes shall be in manholes and
shall be NEMA type 6, submersible watertight. Minimum conductor size shall be
AWG #18 type THHN.
OVERFILL AND SPILL PREVENTION SYSTEM
The overfill and spill prevention system shall consist of an automatic overfill prevention
valve, a spill containment basin, product fill tube, and manhole with lid and lockable fill cap.
Overfill and spill prevention shall be the product of a single manufacturer. System shall be
Emco/Wheaton model A1000 or equal provided all aspects of this specification are met.
Components shall meet the following:
2.05
1.
Overfill Prevention Valve – Valve shall be mounted within the spill containment basin
for access. Valve shall shut off flow when the tank is 95% full, have a two-stage
reset, a test button, and a spill basin drain assembly. Valve shall be cast aluminum
with teflon floats protected with a shroud, with buna seals and 4” NPT fittings on
each end. Prototype: OPW 61-60 overfill valve with drop tube, fill adapter and
lockable cap.
2.
Spill Prevention Basin – Basin shall have a 5 gallon capacity and shall contain an
expandable inner shield within a rigid outer housing. The overfill prevention valve
shall be mounted in the inner shield of the basin. Basin shall be constructed of fuel
resistant plastic. Prototype: EMCO/WHEATON Model A1003.
3.
Fill Tube – Tube shall be supplied with the overfill prevention valve, shall be
aluminum, and shall extend to 4” from the bottom of the tank.
4.
Manhole Cover – Manhole shall be cast iron or aluminum and be capable of a 7-1/2
ton bearing load. Paint the cover green.
5.
Fill Tube Cap – Cap shall be water tight and lockable.
6.
Sound Line Cap – Cap shall be watertight and oil wrench operated. Provide one oil
wrench for the Owners use. Mount the wrench on the wall next to the fuel oil gauge
or monitoring system.
HYDROSTATIC TANK MONITORING
The hydrostatic tank monitoring system shall be supplied by the tank manufacturer and shall
consist of a brine solution in the annular space between tanks, a level sensor in the
monitoring reservoir, an alarm panel, and all necessary wiring. The monitoring system shall
be capable of detecting a leak in the primary and/or secondary tank as small as .05 gallons
per hour regardless of the oil level in the tank or ground water conditions. Components shall
be as follows:
15607-5
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES 2.06
SECTION 15607
1.
Brine Solution - The annular space between tanks shall be filled with environmentally
safe, non-toxic brine solution able to provide freeze protection to minus 40 degrees F
and UL listed for compatibility with the tank.
2.
Level Sensor - The sensor shall be mounted in the monitoring reservoir on the tank
and shall complete a circuit to generate alarm signals for normal, high, and low brine
levels.
3.
Alarm Panel - The alarm panel shall have a 120 volt power source. The panel shall
have a normal operation lamp, an alarm indicator lamp, a bell alarm, a test button, a
silencing switch, terminal contacts for external monitoring, two spare light bulbs,
NEMA 2 enclosure, and a hasp for a padlock. Each lamp or switch shall be
permanently labeled. A wiring diagram for the monitoring system shall be provided.
VENT CAP
The fuel oil tank vent line shall be extended to at least ten (10) feet above grade. Provide a
rain roof cap on vent opening.
2.07
MANHOLE COVER
Manholes shall be 30" diameter, round with cast iron lid and steel rim. Manholes shall be set
in 8" thick concrete extending at least 18" in all directions. Concrete shall slope away from
hole to ensure drainage.
2.08
MANWAY RISERS
Riser shall be fiberglass, 48" diameter. Bottom of riser shall be within 6" of top of the tank.
2.09
TANK NAMEPLATE
Provide an engraved aluminum or brass nameplate (minimum 10” x 8”) permanently
mounted in the concrete at the tank fill valve or on the building adjacent to the trench.
Nameplate shall state the following: “TANK CAPACITY IN GALLONS”, DIAMETER OF
TANK”, “TANK MANUFACTURER”, “TANK U/L #”, “DATE OF INSTALLATION”, “TYPE OF
FUEL”, “TANK #” (if more than one tank). Engraved letters shall be one inch high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FUEL OIL TANK
A.
Tank shall be installed according to current installation instructions provided by the
manufacturer. Tank system shall be tested according to manufacturer's instruction
and part 1.03 of this section.
B.
A 12 inch deep layer of pea gravel (1/8" to 3/4" diameter) or fine stone crushings
15607-6
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15607
(1/8" to 1/2" diameter) (ASTM D-448 & C-33-9.1) shall be spread evenly under the
entire tank as a bed to separate the tank from the earth.
3.02
C.
Before placing the tank in the excavation, all dirt clods and similar foreign matter
shall be cleaned from the tank and areas of coating damages shall be repaired with
a compatible coating.
D.
Equipment to lift the tank shall be of adequate size to lift and lower the tank without
dragging or dropping to ensure do damage to the tank. Tanks shall be carefully
lifted and lowered by use of cables of adequate length attached where
recommended by the manufacturer. Under no circumstances will chains or slings
around the tank shell be used.
E.
Special care should be exercised when installing hold down straps to ensure that the
straps are separated from the tanks by separating pad made of an inert insulating
material. The separating pad should be at least 2 inches wider than hold down
straps width and must be carefully placed anywhere on the tank where hold down
straps would come into direct contact with the tank shell.
F.
Backfill consisting of pea fine gravel or #8 crushed stone shall be placed along
bottom sides of tank by shoveling and tamping to ensure the tank is fully and evenly
supported around bottom quadrant. The backfill shall be deposited carefully around
tank and to a depth over tank shown on the drawings.
G.
The plugs at unused tank openings, shall be removed; a pipe compound shall be
added, and the plugs shall be reinstalled in the unused openings. The plugs in tank
openings which are to be used should not be overtightened as this may cause the
bushing thread or damage the nonmetallic bushings when replacing plugs or
installing required tank piping.
H.
Anchoring - Concrete pad or Deadman as shown on plans shall be located and
installed as recommended by the tank manufacturer.
I.
The tank shall be filled to 100% of capacity with new number 2 fuel oil.
ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
All ancillary equipment including the fuel oil gauge system, overfill and spill prevention
system, hydrostatic tank monitoring system, vent caps manholes, etc. shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.03
INSTALLATION FIRM
The storage tank system shall be installed by experienced mechanics regularly employed by
a specialty firm that is in the full time business of designing and installing petroleum storage
tank and fuel dispensing systems. The firm shall have a minimum of five (5) years
successful history in the design, installation, and maintenance of petroleum storage
systems. Submit a written description of the firm's experience and a listing of at least three
15607-7
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15607
(3) of its installations of a comparable size and complexity.
3.04
TANK INSTALLATION DOCUMENTATION
Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following information for each tank installed
within thirty days after installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Facility address.
Fire Marshall or other installation inspection reports.
Manufacturers installation instruction sheet with UL# and procedures checked.
MSDS sheets on materials supplied.
Precision test results.
Virginia Water Control Board (VWCB) amended form 7530-1 completed and signed.
Copy of approved drawings and permit from local building authority.
END OF SECTION
15607-8
11/17
SECTION 15608
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK REMOVAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions shall apply to this section.
1.02
1.03
SCOPE
A.
The work covered under this section shall include the removal of the existing
underground fuel oil storage tank and associated piping, and all other measures
required by local, state, and national governing bodies having jurisdiction over the
existing installation and as shown on the drawings and in the specifications.
B.
The oil tank area shall be restored to grade and re-paved.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The demolition/removal shall meet the requirements of the Commonwealth of Virginia State
Water Control Board regulation VR 680-13-02, “Underground Storage Tanks; Technical
Standards and Corrective Action Requirements”, the County of Fairfax building code, and
Fire Marshal Regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
BACKFILL
Backfill shall be installed in accordance with section 02200.
2.02
PAVEMENT AND SUBBASE
Pavement and Subbase shall be installed in accordance with section 02510.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FUEL OIL TANK AND PIPE REMOVAL:
A.
Contractor shall remove and dispose of the existing fuel oil tank, concrete pad, and
soil in a manner as required and approved by all federal, state, and local agencies.
The contractor shall be responsible for the removal of ten inches (10”) or less of
oil/water in the tank. Additional liquid will be disposed of at an additional cost to
FCPS. A Certificate of Compliance with these requirements shall be submitted to
the Owner.
15608-1
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK REMOVAL
3.02
3.03
SECTION 15608
B.
Contractor shall remove and dispose of the existing oil piping in the boiler room, and
any piping within the tank excavation area. Remaining underground oil piping shall
be drained and abandoned in place.
C.
If evidence of contamination exists (as determined by the Fire Marshal Official, or by
soil tests submitted to the state) the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner
and take necessary steps to limit any future contamination of surroundings. The
state and local governing authorities will dictate corrective action to be taken subject
to guidelines established by The Environmental Protection Agency. Corrective
actions will be done by change order to the contract.
D.
Any additional or backfill soil shall be free of all debris and shall be compacted to 95
percent density. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all backfill soil. See
Specification 02200.
E.
All tank cleaning and disposal costs shall be included in contract price.
F.
Prior to removal of existing underground fuel oil tank, the Contractor shall notify the
office of the Fire Marshal and obtain all necessary permits.
G.
An official from the office of the Fire Marshal will witness the tank removal and,
subject to his determination, backfilling of excavation shall be permitted or denied.
H.
Excavated soil shall be piled in multiple piles by soil condition at an Owner approved
location either on site within property or at a site provided by Contractor. Costs for
loading, hauling, and dumping shall be included in the bid. Pile(s) shall be on plastic
sheets with seams taped and surrounded by hay bales.
EXISTING UTILITIES
A.
The Contractor shall contact “Miss Utility” to determine the location of any conflicting
utilities in the oil tank excavation area. Provide adequate means of protection during
earthwork operations of any utilities.
B.
Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative
immediately.
C.
The Contractor shall not move or interrupt existing utilities without first coordinating
with the Owner’s Representative.
EXCAVATING, SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING
A.
Existing asphalt and concrete surface shall be cut neatly and cleanly.
B.
Stability of Sides: Slope sides of excavations over 4' deep to angle of response of
material excavated; otherwise, shore and brace where sloping is not possible either
because of space restrictions, stability of material excavated or nearby utilities.
15608-2
11/17
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK REMOVAL
C.
3.04
SECTION 15608
1.
Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion
of backfilling by scaling, benching, shelving or bracing.
2.
Take precautions to prevent slides or cave-ins when excavations are made
in locations adjacent to backfilled excavations, and when sides of
excavations are subjected to vibrations from vehicular traffic or the operation
of machinery, or any other source.
Shoring and Bracing shall be installed in accordance with section 02250.
BACKFILL
Backfill shall be installed in accordance with section 02200.
3.05
PAVEMENT AND SUBBASE
Pavement and Subbase shall be installed in accordance with section 02510.
3.06
BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS AND LIGHTS
Comply with recognized standards and code requirements for the erection of substantial,
structurally adequate barricades where needed to prevent accidents and losses. Paint with
appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel at the site and the public,
of the hazard being protected against. Provide lighting where appropriate and needed,
including flashing red lights where appropriate.
3.07
ENCLOSURE FENCE
When excavation or other substantial elements of the work begin, install a general enclosure
fence with suitable lockable entrance gates. Enclose substantially the entire site or portion
thereof determined to be sufficient to accommodate the entire construction operation. Install
fence in a manner that will prevent persons, dogs and similar animals from easily entering
the site. Fence shall be a minimum height of 6 feet.
END OF SECTION
15608-3
11/17
SECTION 15616
BOILER AND WATER HEATER VENT
*(Engineer to coordinate with Plumbing for water heater vent selection)*
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
Section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install a complete factory-built vent system as called for on the drawings.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The vents shall meet the requirements of NFPA standards and The International Fuel Gas
Code, be UL listed, and satisfy all state and local codes.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GAS FIRED BOILER VENTS
Provide and install the boiler vents complete as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
The vents shall be UL listed for this application and meet the requirements of NFPA
standard No. 211. The boiler vent shall be double walled using AL29-4C stainless steel.
Model SAF-T Vent CI Plus as manufactured by SELKIRK. Vents manufactured by METALFAB or SCHEBLER are acceptable provided they are fully equal to the vent specified.
2.02
GAS FIRED WATER HEATER VENT
Provide and install the water heater vent complete as shown on the drawings and specified
herein. The vents shall be UL listed for this application and meet the requirements of NFPA
standard No. 54 and/or No. 211. The vents shall be as manufactured by SELKIRK
METALBESTOS. The water heater vent for atmospheric type heaters shall be model RV for
3” to 8” and model QC for 10” vents. The water heater vent for power burner type heaters
shall be model PS. High efficient condensing water heater vent shall be double walled using
AL29-4C stainless steel, Model SAF-T Vent CI Plus as manufactured by SELKRIK. Vents
manufactured by METAL-FAB or SCHEBLER are acceptable provided they are fully equal to
the vent specified.
15616-1
11/17
BOILER AND WATER HEATER VENT
SECTION 15616
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GAS FIRED BOILER VENTS
The boiler vents shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and to meet the requirements of NFPA No. 211, state and local codes. Provide barometric
dampers when recommended by boiler manufacturer.
3.02
WATER HEATER VENT
The water heater vent shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and to meet the requirements of NFPA No. 54 and/or No. 211, state and
local codes. Provide barometric dampers when recommended by water heater
manufacturer.
3.03
CONNECTIONS TO CHIMNEYS
Vent connections to chimneys shall be made with thimbles. The thimble shall be
permanently cemented in place, utilizing heat-resistant cement. The metal vent shall be
flush with the inside wall of the chimney.
END OF SECTION
15616-2
11/17
SECTION 15620
HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
Provide a complete packaged low pressure condensing firetube water boiler
arranged for operation with natural gas.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The boiler shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of Section IV of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and shall be stamped with the ASME
symbol. The burner shall comply with the requirements of AGA.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.05
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall
apply to this section.
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
WARRANTY
A.
The boiler manufacturer will repair or replace any part of the boiler that is found to be
defective in workmanship or material within eighteen (18) months of shipment from
the factory or twelve (12) months from start-up, whichever comes first.
B.
The boiler’s pressure vessel is warranted against failure due to thermal shock for a
period of ten (10) years from the date of shipment from the factory is installed,
controlled, operated and maintained in accordance with the Installation, Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
C.
The pressure vessel and heat exchanger is covered against failures resulting from
flue gas corrosion and/or defective material or workmanship for a period of ten (10)
years from the date of shipment from the factory. Waterside corrosion or scaling is
not covered. The manufacturer will repair, replace, exchange or credit at their
option, FOB factory, the pressure vessel as defined above, provided this equipment
15620-1
11/17
HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILERS
SECTION 15620
has been installed, operated and maintained by the buyer in accordance with the
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILER
The boiler assembly shall consist of packaged pulse boiler, a natural gas burner, controls
and an insulated jacket. Capacity shall be as shown on the drawings. Boiler shall be
manufactured by Fulton Boiler Works, Inc. Boilers by Viessmann Manufacturing, Inc. and
Lochinvar are acceptable providing capacities and arrangement can be furnished.
A.
Boiler
1.
The boiler shall be completely factory assembled as a self-contained unit.
2.
The pressure vessel design and construction shall be in accordance with
Section IV of the ASME Code for heating boilers. The boiler shall comply with
CSD-1 code requirements.
3.
The firetube area of the heat exchanger where the flue gases will condense
shall be constructed using duplex alloys of stainless steel.
4.
Heat exchange capability shall be maximized within the pressure vessel via
the use of corrulator fire tube technology. All heat transfer enhancements
shall be stainless steel; aluminum heat transfer enhancers are unacceptable.
5.
Boilers with heat exchangers using cast aluminum, cast iron or copper finned
tube design platforms are unacceptable.
6.
The boiler shall be a fire tube design. The furnace location shall be such that
all furnace components are within water-backed areas.
7.
The burner shall be a premix low emission design with a build in flame
arrestor functionality.
8.
The burner shall feature direct spark ignition.
9.
A zero flow or low flow condition shall not cause any harm to the pressure
vessel or heat exchanger of the boiler. Flow switches, dedicated circulator
pumps, or primary/secondary piping arrangements are not required to protect
the heat exchanger or pressure vessel from thermal shock or other system
related considerations. Boilers requiring the use of flow switches or
primary/secondary piping arrangements are unacceptable.
10.
A lock up regulator upstream of the fuel train shall be furnished by the boiler
manufacturer as a standard component integral to the boiler cabinet.
Factory test fire of the boiler with the provided lock up regulator is required.
15620-2
11/17
HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILERS
B.
SECTION 15620
Boiler Controls
1.
The control shall provide a prepurge and postpurge cycle. The control shall
maintain a running history of operating hours, number of cycles, and the
most recent sic flame failures.
2.
The boiler shall be equipped for modulated gas input. Fuel flow shall be
controlled by a valve in the fuel train. Air flow shall be controlled by a
butterfly valve located in the exhaust vent. Both valves shall be connected to
a modulation motor. Turn down shall be 5:1.
3.
Combustion controls shall be of on/off operative type and are to include:
a.
Operating temperature controller for automatic start and stop of the
combustor.
b.
High limit temperature controller with manual reset.
c.
One low water cutoff probe in the boiler shell with manual reset and
push-to-test capability.
d.
Air safety switch to prevent operation until sufficient prepurge air is
assured.
e.
High condensate cut-off switch located in the exhaust decoupler.
f.
Proof of flame switch to prove combustion based on pressure.
g.
Gas pressure regulator shall be furnished factory, field installed.
h.
Full modulation combustion control system shall be furnished which
shall provide a turndown rate of 5 to 1 over the input range from low
to high fire. The supply temperature and setpoint temperature shall
be displayed at all times by an LED readout.
All controls shall be panel mounted and located on the boiler to
provide ease of servicing the boiler without disturbing the controls.
All controls shall be mounted and wired according to AGA
requirements.
i.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The boiler shall be assembled as recommended by the boiler manufacturer and set
above the boiler room floor on a 4" high concrete pad where shown on the drawing.
B.
The boiler shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Piping shall be supported with
hangers with vibration isolation
15620-3
11/17
HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILERS
3.02
SECTION 15620
C.
Intake and exhaust mufflers shall be installed. When required by the boiler
manufacturer.
D.
The condensate drain shall be trapped and extended to the floor drain.
VENTING
Boilers shall be vented per manufacturer’s requirements as shown on the drawings and
described in Section 15616.
3.03
GAS PIPING
Gas piping shall be installed as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15350.
3.04
START-UP
Service shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer’s authorized representative and
shall complete testing of all controls, burner adjustment and overall boiler operation. The
Contractor is responsible for a monitored start-up. The monitoring agency (Washington Gas
Light Company or owner approved company) shall record the main gas supply pressure at
inlet of gas line control assembly, gas manifold pressure, and control settings. Copies of this
data shall be supplied to the Owner.
3.05
COMBUSTION TESTS
The contractor, upon completion of the fuel burning system, shall submit a written report on
the operating of each burner to the engineer and will include the following information.
15620-4
11/17
HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILERS
SECTION 15620
COMBUSTION TEST REPORT
Job Name:
Manufacturer:
Model #
National Board #
Operating Set Point: _______
High Limit Set Point: _______
Gas Supply Pressure LF _______ / HF _______
Last Elbow Pressure LF _______ / HF _______
Low Fire
O 2 _______
CO _______
CO 2 _______
Stack Temp _______
Mid Fire
O 2 _______
CO _______
CO 2 _______
Stack Temp _______
High Fire
O 2 _______
CO _______
CO 2 _______
Stack Temp _______
END OF SECTION
15620-5
11/17
SECTION 15622
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall
apply to this section.
Provide a complete field assembled low pressure wet base cast iron sectional water
boiler arranged for operation with a combination natural gas and No. 2 light oil forced
draft power burner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The boiler shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of Section IV of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and shall be stamped with the ASME
symbol. It shall be tested, approved and listed by IBR, shall be capable of
developing full IBR gross output capacity at 100% firing rate and shall include the
IBR certification symbol. The burner shall comply with the requirements of the
Underwriters Laboratories. The complete fuel burning system shall further be in full
accordance with Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI).
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CAST IRON BOILER/BURNER UNIT
The boiler assembly shall consist of multiple cast iron sections, a natural gas and light oil
fired combination burner, fuel trains, water and control connections, controls and an
insulated jacket. Capacity shall be as shown on the drawings. Boiler shall be as
manufactured by PEERLESS. Boilers manufactured by BURNHAM, WEILMCLAIN, SLANTFIN or H.B. SMITH are acceptable providing capacities and arrangements can be furnished.
Burners shall be as manufactured by WEBSTER ENGINEERING. Burners manufactured by
POWER FLAME are acceptable providing capacities and arrangements can be furnished.
15622-1
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
A.
B.
C.
SECTION 15622
Boiler
1.
The boiler shall consist of cast iron sections constructed in conformity with
ASME Code requirements and tested hydrostatically for a 50 psi water
working pressure. The boiler sections shall be of the three-nipple design
with internal waterway baffles to provide for balanced water circulation.
2.
Jacket - The boiler shall be provided with a metal jacket to be installed after
the supply and return piping is in place. The jacket shall cover the entire
boiler excluding the burner and shall be completely insulated between the
jacket and the boiler with fiberglass insulation. The jacket shall have a
factory applied baked enamel finish. Provide an extended jacket when noted
in the equipment schedule.
3.
Trim - Provide all water trim, including a combination pressure altitude gauge
and thermometer, ASME rated water relief valves, high limit aquastat, and
two low water cutoffs (one float type and one probe type).
Pressure Atomizing Burners
1.
Furnish and install UL labeled combination gas-oil mechanical pressure
atomizing type oil burners. Oil burner shall be capable of burning No. 2 fuel
oil and shall be capable of burning natural gas. Burner shall have rated
capacity as specified.
2.
The oil burner shall burn the specified quantity of fuel without objectionable
vibration, noise, or pulsation with not more than 20% excess air and no CO in
the products of combustion on gas firing, and maximum of No. 2 smoke as
measured on the Bacharach Scale.
3.
The burners shall incorporate a stainless steel flame retention type
combustion head for long life and efficient operation. Burners that have
refractory of cast iron type combustion heads will not be approved.
4.
A permanent observation port shall be provided in the burner to allow
observation of both the pilot and main flame.
5.
Supply voltage will be volts, phase, 60 hertz. All motors shall be suitable for
use on this voltage. All burner controls are to be for use on 120 volts, 1
phase, 60 hertz. The 120-volt control voltage shall be supplied through an
isolating step-down control transformer from the supply voltage. Transformer
shall be supplied as part of the burner controls and mounted in the control
cabinet.
Burner Accessories
1.
A two-stage oil pump shall be provided for each burner. This shall be
supplied as an integral part of the burner.
15622-2
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
2.02
SECTION 15622
2.
Two approved automatically operated safety shut-off valves shall be provided
in the oil supply to the burner; valves are to be piped in series but wired in
parallel.
3.
Supply an oil pressure gauge (liquid filled with 1 1/2" diameter face) to
indicate the discharge oil pump pressure. Provide ¼ turn gauge cock.
4.
Install a manual gate valve, fuel oil filter or strainer, and vacuum gauge on
the suction side of the oil pump.
5.
Install a fusible link actuated safety cut-off valve in the oil supply line between
the oil tank and the manual gate valve at the oil pump.
6.
Oil pressure supervision shall be provided by an approved pressure switch
interlocked to accomplish a non-recycling safety shutdown in the event of low
oil pressure.
7.
Oil piping connections to the burners shall consist of, on the inlet side: shutoff valve, filter, union, and pressure gauge; and on the outlet side: check
valve, shut-off valve, pressure gauge and union. Relief valve or pressure
regulators shall be installed per burner manufacturer's recommendations.
BURNER CONTROLS
A.
The on/off operation of the burner(s) shall be controlled by water temperature by
means of a temperature control.
B.
An additional high-limit safety temperature control of the manual reset type shall be
provided to control each burner.
C.
Pre- and post-purge operation of the burner fan shall be provided.
D.
A manual restart of the burner shall be necessary in the event of shutdown due to
flame failure.
E.
All three phase motors shall be controlled and protected by an automatic starter with
thermal overload protection. Starter shall be interlocked to prevent burner operation
when overload relays are tripped out.
F.
Supply a burner mounted airflow switch to prevent the energization of the main fuel
valves in the event of insufficient combustion air.
G.
Manual reset of system shall be required to restart burner after airflow failure has
occurred.
H.
A factory prewired control cabinet shall be supplied with each burner. Cabinet shall
be mounted on burner. Cabinet shall house the flame safeguard control,
15622-3
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15622
programming purge timer, burner motor starter, fuses, control switches, alarm bell
with automatic reset silencing switch to ring on low water or flame failure, control
transformer, indicating lamps as specified hereinafter and relays that may be
required. Alarm bell shall be EDWARD's 4" diameter AC adaptable. Provide an
engraved nameplate permanently affixed to the front of the cabinet with the following
information.
Installing Contractor:
Contractor Phone No.
Date Warranty - FROM:
2.03
TO:
I.
Provide in each control cabinet individual lights with nameplates to indicate "power
on," main fuel valve on," "call heat," "ignition on," "pilot failure," "low water," and
"main flame failure."
J.
Furnish and install on the control cabinet for each boiler an electrical non-resettable
elapsed time indictor, minimum of 99,999.9 hours, minimum 2 1/2" round face, UL
listed, with NEMA standard round and square detachable bezels. Units by CramerGrainger's model no. 6X137.
K.
The changing from one fuel to the other shall be manual by means of fuel selector
switch. No burner adjustments shall be required to switch from one fuel to the other.
L.
The burners shall be equipped with suitable fuel and air controls to assure smooth
main flame ignition.
M.
Fuel-air control must be synchronized. The fuel-air drive unit shall be provided with a
position-indicating switch, which shall be interlocked with the flame safeguard
system to assure starting with low fire position. The flame safeguard system shall
further program this drive unit to provide a full open louver purge of sufficient time to
provide a four air change pre-ignition purge of the combustion chamber, heat
exchanger, and a flue passages. Duration of purge shall not be less than 30
seconds.
N.
Pre-ignition purge air flow rate shall be no less than 60% maximum firing rate air
flow. Interlocks shall be provided to monitor and prove 60% airflow purge when air
inlet louvers are opened automatically to obtain this purge rate.
O.
Provide and install emergency shut-off switch of burners at each entrance/exit to
boiler room. Switch shall be push button type by Square "D" type TR with type TM
contact and type KA contact block.
BOILER SEQUENCING CONTROLS
15622-4
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
2.04
SECTION 15622
A.
Provide and install as a part of the burner control systems a Lead-Lag Boiler
Sequencing Control System for a two-boiler system. It shall respond to variations in
the main header temperature. The system operating temperature is 180 degrees F.
Two lead-lag aquastats shall be installed in the header and wired to the boiler #1
burner panel lead-lag terminals. Install a boiler #1/boiler #2 switch in the boiler #1
burner panel.
B.
In the event of power failure, the Lead-Lag system shall bring the boilers on the line
in sequence after power is restored.
C.
The two boiler mounted temperature controls on each boiler, previously specified,
one of which shall be the manual reset type, shall be in addition to the Lead-Lag
System and shall both function as high limit controls.
BURNER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
Each burner will be equipped with a Microprocessor Based Burner Management Safeguard
Control System, which shall be UL listed.
A.
B.
Components
1.
Each burner will be equipped with UL/FM approved microprocessor based
Burner Management Safeguard Control System that incorporates a plug-in
design, with the programmer, amplifier and display module to be in separate
components. A self-diagnostic circuit within the control will identify module
failures and an appropriate message will be displayed for servicing. This
circuit will cause a safety shutdown should any component in the control fail.
For example, if the amplifier module is malfunctioning, the message center
will display the message, “LOCKOUT REPLACE AMPLIFIER”.
2.
Each component will plug into the Master Chassis and be keyed to insure
that the components may be installed only into the proper location.
3.
The control mounting screw will secure all components in the chassis. This
will prevent tampering while the control is installed in the base. The control
must be removed from the base to replace any of the components.
4.
The amplifier shall be the auto-check ultraviolet type.
5.
The control shall be the FIREYE YB110UV Flame-Monitor with the BLl510
display module and YP100 Programmer.
6.
The ultraviolet scanner shall be the FIREYE UV1A.
Control System Functions
15622-5
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15622
1.
The control will have a non-volatile memory, which allows it to remember
burner history and present position, even after a power interruption. A
minimum of 42 different messages will be displayed on the message center
of the control (in English words and phrases) which indicates system function
and diagnostic information.
2.
The messages shall provide clear, concise information concerning system
timing, present burner sequence position, lockout causes including wiring
base terminal designations and historical data.
3.
The control shall provide for direct connection of limit and operating controls,
fuel valve interlock, damper position interlocks, running interlocks (such as
airflow, fuel pressure and temperature), burner motor, ignition, pilot valves,
firing rate motor and alarm.
4.
During the firing cycle, a constant read-out of the flame signal will be
displayed on the message center.
5.
At the end of each firing cycle, the control will display main fuel operating
hours and complete firing history.
6.
The control shall accomplish a safe start component check during each start.
This will prevent the burner from firing under any condition, which causes the
flame to assume and hold its energized position due the presence of an
actual flame, a flame simulating component failure or mechanical failure.
7.
Control shall provide a purge period of not less than 30 seconds with a
damper driven to the open position and an interlock circuit provided to prove
airflow rate during the purge period. A starting interlock circuit is required to
prove that the burner equipment is in the low fire position at the same time of
ignition, plus an interlock to prove airflow during the purge and firing cycle.
8.
Control shall provide limited trial-for-ignition of pilot flame restricted to 10
seconds, trial-for-main flame restricted to 10 or 15 seconds (selectable) for
oil or gas.
9.
Control shall provide a safety shutdown following flame failure, with fuel and
ignition circuits de-energized in not more than four seconds.
10.
Control shall provide a post purge period of 15 seconds following a
shutdown.
11.
The system shall remain automatically under control of the operating control
and when power is restored following power failure. Manual reset shall be
required following any safety lockout. When in a lockout condition, power
interruptions will not recycle the control.
12.
The control shall provide a check-run switch will allow the service technician
15622-6
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15622
to stop the burner sequence in any of four different positions.
-
2.05
High Fire Purge
Low Fire Purge
Pilot Trail for Ignition
Low Fire (Burner On)
13.
Interconnection with either a computer terminal or modem communications
shall be possible. When connected, such equipment will access both
present control/burner status and historical information through a serial data
port on the display module.
14.
The message center display shall be designed to accept first out indication of
an additional 16 limit condition from a separate future expansion module.
GAS VALVE TRAIN
A.
The gas train piping shall include a 1/4" NPT pressure tapping with 1/4" pipe plug
upstream and downstream of each valve and regulator in the gas train.
B.
Provide a gas pressure gauge to indicate the gas burner manifold pressure.
C.
Furnish and install one manually operated lubricated plug cock upstream of all
valves.
D.
Provide one gas pressure regulator (of tight shut-off type) with vent to outside
atmosphere, in accordance with local gas company and IRI requirements.
E.
Provide one automatically operated motorized safety gas valve. Safety valve shall
be proven closed during pre-ignition by proof of valve closure interlock switch on
valve.
F.
Provide a second automatically motor operated gas safety shut-off valve to operate
simultaneously with the above gas valve.
G.
A normally open, fully ported, electrically with proven closed operated valve shall be
provided in a vent line connected between the two safety shut-off valves. The vent
pipe shall be run independent of other vents to the outside atmosphere and provided
with union to check vent valve operation. The proven closed switch shall interlock
with its burner controls. Acceptable manufacturer: MAXON.
H.
A separate pilot gas cock, gas pressure regulator and pilot safety shut-off valve shall
be provided for the ignition gas supply.
I.
A manually operated lubricated plug-type gas valve shall be located downstream of
both automatic gas valves to permit leakage testing of the valves. A leak test gauge
and gauge cock shall be provided.
15622-7
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
J.
SECTION 15622
Gas pressure supervision shall be provided by approved pressure switches
interlocked to accomplish a non-recycling safety shutdown in the event of either high
or low gas pressure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
The boiler shall be assembled as recommended by the boiler manufacturer and set
above the boiler room floor on a 4" high concrete pad where shown on the drawing.
The installation shall meet all IRI requirements. Provide gas ignition when required.
B.
Burners shall have 4” deep, sealed, galvanized sheet metal oil drip pans. Pans shall
be 6” larger than burner assembly (all sides).
VENTING
Boilers shall be vented as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15616.
3.03
GAS PIPING
Gas piping shall be installed as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15350.
3.04
OIL PIPING
Oil piping shall be installed as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15604.
3.05
START-UP
Start-up service shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer’s authorized
representative and shall include complete testing of all controls, burner adjustment and
overall boiler operation. The Contractor is responsible for a monitored start-up. The
monitoring agency (Washington Gas Light Company or owner approved company) shall
record the main gas supply pressure at inlet of gas line control assembly, gas manifold
pressure, control settings and chimney draft-inches water column. Copies of this data shall
be supplied to the Owner.
3.06
COMBUSTION TESTS
The contractor, upon completion of the fuel burning system, shall submit a written report on
the operating of each burner to the engineer and will include the following information.
15622-8
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15622
GAS BURNER
Make
Model
Serial No.
CO 2
High Fire
Low Fire
CO
High Fire
Low Fire
Net Stack Temperature
High Fire
Low Fire
Gas Burning Rate
High Fire
Low Fire
Gas Pressure at Orifices
Gas Pressure Upstream of All Valves
High Fire
Low Fire
High Fire
Low Fire
Microamp or Voltage Reading
for flame supervision
Microamps
Volts
15622-9
11/17
CAST IRON BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15622
OIL BURNER
Make
Model
Serial No.
CO 2
High Fire
Low Fire
Smoke Bacharach Scale
High Fire
Low Fire
Net Stack Temperature
High Fire
Low Fire
Oil Burning Rate
High Fire
Low Fire
Nozzle Pressure
High Fire
Low Fire
Microamp or Voltage Reading
for flame supervision
Microamps
Volts
END OF SECTION
15622-10
11/17
SECTION 15624
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010 General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide a complete low pressure packaged three-pass steel firetube water boiler arranged
for operation with combination natural gas and No. 2 light oil forced draft power burner.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Each boiler shall be designed, constructed and pressure tested in accordance with
the provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for Heating Boilers and
shall be stamped with the required official ASME symbol.
B.
Each boiler shall be rated to standards developed by the American Boiler
Manufactures Association.
C.
Each boiler shall be tested, certified and listed in accordance with the requirements
of the American Gas Association and GE Global Asset Protection (GE GAP).
D.
Each boilers burner unit shall be approved and listed by the Underwriters Laboratory
and shall include the official U/L Label. Burner shall be factory fire tested prior to
shipment. A copy of this report shall be furnished to the Owner.
E.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
BOILER/BURNER UNIT
The boiler assembly shall consist of a packaged steel firetube boiler, a natural gas and light
oil fired combination burner, fuel train, water control connections, controls and an insulated
15624-1
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15624
jacket. Capacity shall be as shown on the drawings. Boiler shall be as manufactured by
BURNHAM. Boilers by HURST BOILER (series 100) are acceptable providing capacities
and arrangement can be furnished. Burners shall be as manufactured by WEBSTER
ENGINEERING. Burners by POWER FLAME are acceptable providing capacities and
arrangements can be furnished.
A.
B.
Boiler
1.
The boiler shall be a packaged three-pass forced draft steel firetube type
constructed in conformity with ASME Code requirements and tested
hydrostatically for a 30 psi working pressure. Boiler shall be sealed for
forced draft firing, with skid base and floor insulation, factory installed and
insulated jacket, rear vertical smoke outlet, rear access door with observation
port, lifting lugs, and flue brush and handle.
2.
Boiler shall be equipped with a minimum of six (6) handholes for cleaning
purposes and at least two corner blowdowns for chemical/sludge blowdown
purposes.
3.
Boiler to have a hinged front flue access cover with access to all fire tubes,
and a rear access door for fire box access.
4.
The boiler insulation shall consist of a 2 inch fiber glass blanket under a
sectional performed sheet metal lagging. Smoke box and front flue access
shall have a minimum of 2” inside or outside insulation.
5.
Trim - Provide all water trim, including a combination pressure altitude gauge
and thermometer, ASME rated water relief valves, high limit aquastat, and
two low water cutoffs (one float type and one probe type).
Pressure Atomizing Burners
1.
Furnish and install UL labeled combination gas-oil mechanical pressure
atomizing type oil burners. Oil burners shall be capable of burning No. 2 fuel
oil and shall be capable of burning natural gas. Burner shall have rated
capacity as specified.
2.
The oil burners shall burn the specified quantity of fuel without objectionable
vibration, noise, or pulsation with not more than 20% excess air and a
maximum of No. 2 smoke as measured on the Bacharach Scale.
3.
The burners shall incorporate a stainless steel flame retention type
combustion head for long life and efficient operation. Burners that have
refractory or cast iron type combustion heads will not be approved.
4.
A permanent observation port shall be provided in the burner to allow
observation of both the pilot and main flame.
15624-2
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
5.
C.
2.02
SECTION 15624
Supply voltage will be
volts,
phase, 60 hertz. All motors shall be
suitable for use on this voltage. All burner controls are to be for use on 120
volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The 120 volt control voltage shall be supplied
through an isolating step-down control transformer from the supply voltage.
Transformer shall be supplied as part of the burner controls and mounted in
the control cabinet.
Burner Accessories:
1.
A two-stage oil pump shall be provided for each burner. This shall be
supplied as an integral or remote part of the burner.
2.
Two approved automatically operated safety shut-off valves shall be provided
in the oil supply to the burner, valves are to be piped in series but wired in
parallel.
3.
Supply an oil pressure gauge (liquid filled with 1 1/2" diameter face) to
indicate the discharge oil pump pressure. Provide ¼ turn gauge cock.
4.
Install a manual gate valve, fuel oil filter or strainer and vacuum gauge on the
suction side of the oil pump.
5.
Install a fusible link actuated safety cut-off valve in the oil supply line between
the oil tank and the manual gate valve at the oil pump.
6.
Oil pressure supervision shall be provided by an approved pressure switch
interlocked to accomplish a non-recycling safety shutdown in the event of low
oil pressure.
7.
Oil piping connections to the burners shall consist of, on the inlet side: shutoff valve, filter, union, and pressure gauge; and on the outlet side: check
valve, shut-off valve, pressure gauge and union. Relief valve or pressure
regulators shall be installed per burner manufacturer's recommendations.
BURNER CONTROLS
A.
The on/off operation of the burner(s) shall be controlled by water temperature by
means of a temperature control.
B.
An additional high-limit safety temperature control of the manual reset type shall be
provided to control each burner.
C.
Pre- and post-purge operation of the burner fan shall be provided.
D.
A manual restart of the burner shall be necessary in the event of shutdown due to
flame failure.
15624-3
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15624
E.
All conduit for controls and motors shall be liquid-tight.
Section 16110.
See specification
F.
All three phase motors shall be controlled and protected by a burner mounted fuse
block with fuses sized per NEC and an automatic starter with thermal overload
protection. Starter shall be interlocked to prevent burner operation when overloaded
relays are tripped out.
G.
Supply a burner mounted airflow switch to prevent the energization of the main fuel
valves in the event of insufficient combustion air.
H.
Manual reset of system shall be required to restart burner after airflow failure has
occurred.
I.
A factory pre-wired control cabinet shall be supplied with each burner. Cabinet shall
be mounted on burner. Cabinet shall house the flame safeguard control,
programming purge timer, burner motor starter, fuses, control switches, alarm bell
with automatic reset silencing switch to ring on low water and flame failure, control
transformer, indicating lamps as specified hereinafter and relays that may be
required. The control cabinet door shall be hinged to allow access to the controls.
Alarm bell shall be EDWARD's 4" diameter AC adaptable. Provide an engraved
nameplate permanently affixed to the front of the cabinet with the following
information.
Installer Contractor:
Contractor Phone No.:
Date Warranty - FROM:
TO:
J.
Provide on each control cabinet six (6) individual lights with nameplates to indicate
"POWER ON", "CALL FOR HEAT", “IGNITION", "FUEL ON", "LOW WATER" AND
“FLAME FAILURE".
K.
Furnish and install on the control cabinet for each boiler an electrical non-resettable
elapsed time indictor, minimum of 99,999.9 hours, minimum 2 1/2" round face, UL
listed, with NEMA standard round and square detachable bezels. Units by CramerGrainger's model no. 6X137.
L.
The changing from one fuel to the other shall be manual by means of fuel selector
switch. No burner adjustments shall be required to switch from one fuel to the other.
M.
The burners shall be equipped with suitable fuel and air controls to assure smooth
main flame ignition.
N.
Fuel-air control must be synchronized. The fuel-air drive unit shall be provided with a
position-indicating switch, which shall be interlocked with the flame safeguard
system to assure starting with low fire position. The flame safeguard system shall
15624-4
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15624
further program this drive unit to provide a full open louver purge of sufficient time to
provide a four air change pre-ignition purge of the combustion chamber, heat
exchanger, and flue passages. Duration of purge shall not be less than 30 seconds.
2.03
2.04
O.
Pre-ignition purge air flow rate shall be no less than 60% maximum firing rate air
flow. Interlocks shall be provided to monitor and prove 60% airflow purge when air
inlet louvers are opened automatically to obtain this purge rate.
P.
Modulation of fuel input shall be provided. A modulation temperature control shall be
supplied to modulate a burner mounted damper motor controlling both fuel and air
supply by means of mechanical linkage. Provide on the control cabinet a manualauto switch and a potentiometer for manual control of the firing rate. Characterized
cams shall be provided for both oil and gas operation.
Q.
Provide an aquastat in the boiler water to maintain low-fire until the aquastat setting
of 120°F is reached.
R.
Provide and install emergency shut-off switch of burners at each entrance/exit to
boiler room. Switch shall be push button type by Square "D" type TR with type TM
contact and type KA contact block.
BOILER SEQUENCING CONTROLS
A.
Provide and install as a part of the burner control systems a Lead-Lag Boiler
Sequencing Control System for two-boiler system. It shall respond to variations in
the main header temperature. The system operating temperature is 180 degrees F.
Two lead-lag aquastats shall be installed in the header and wired to the boiler #1
burner panel lead-lag terminals. Install a boiler #1/boiler #2 switch in the boiler #1
burner panel.
B.
In the event of power failure, the Lead-Lag system shall bring the boilers on the line
in sequence after power is restored.
C.
The two boiler mounted temperature controls on each boiler, previously specified,
one of which shall be the manual reset type, shall be in addition to the Lead-Lag
System and shall both function as high limit controls.
BURNER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
Each burner will be equipped with a Microprocessor Based Burner Management Safeguard
Control system that shall be UL listed.
A.
Components
1.
Each burner will be equipped with UL/FM approved microprocessor based
Burner Management Safeguard Control System that incorporates a plug-in
design, with the programmer, amplifier and display module to be in separate
components. A self-diagnostic circuit within the control will identify module
15624-5
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15624
failures and an appropriate message will be displayed for servicing. This
circuit will cause a safety shutdown should any component in the control fail.
For example, if the amplifier module is malfunctioning, the message center
will display the message, “LOCKOUT REPLACE AMPLIFIER”.
B.
2.
Each component will plug into the Master Chassis and be keyed to insure
that the components may be installed only into the proper location.
3.
The control mounting screw will secure all components in the chassis. This
will prevent tampering while the control is installed in the base. The control
must be removed from the base to replace any of the components.
4.
The amplifier shall be the auto-check ultraviolet type.
5.
The control shall be the FIREYE YB110UV Flame-Monitor with the BLL510
display module, YP100 Programmer.
6.
The ultraviolet scanner shall be the FIREYE UV1A.
7.
Provide the FIREYE YZ300 Expansion Module which shall annunciate the
following messages: “LOW GAS PRESSURE”, “HIGH GAS PRESSURE”,
“LOW OIL PRESSURE”, “AIRFLOW”, AND “LOW WATER”.
Control System Functions
1.
The control will have a non-volatile memory, which allows it to remember
burner history and present position, even after a power interruption. A
minimum of 42 different messages will be displayed on the message center
of the control (in English words and phrases) which indicates system function
and diagnostic information.
2.
The messages shall provide clear, concise information concerning system
timing, present burner sequence position, lockout causes including wiring
base terminal designations and historical data.
3.
The control shall provide for direct connection of limit and operating controls,
fuel valve interlock, damper position interlocks, running interlocks (such as
airflow, fuel pressure and temperature), burner motor, ignition, pilot valves,
firing rate motor and alarm.
4.
During the firing cycle, a constant read-out of the flame signal will be
displayed on the message center.
5.
At the end of each firing cycle, the control will display main fuel operating
hours and complete firing history.
6.
The control shall accomplish a safe start component check during each start.
This will prevent the burner from firing under any condition, which causes the
15624-6
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15624
flame to assume and hold its energized position due the presence of an
actual flame, a flame simulating component failure or mechanical failure.
7.
Control shall provide a purge period of not less than 30 seconds with a
damper driven to the open position and an interlock circuit provided to prove
airflow rate during the purge period. A starting interlock circuit is required to
prove that the burner equipment is in the low fire position at the same time of
ignition, plus an interlock to prove airflow during the purge and firing cycle.
8.
Control shall provide limited trial-for-ignition of pilot flame restricted to 10
seconds, trial-for-main flame restricted to 10 or 15 seconds (selectable) for
oil or gas.
9.
Control shall provide a safety shutdown following flame failure, with fuel and
ignition circuits de-energized in not more than four seconds.
10.
Control shall provide a post purge period of 15 seconds following a
shutdown.
11.
The system shall remain automatically under control of the operating control
and when power is restored following power failure. Manual reset shall be
required following any safety lockout. When in a lockout condition, power
interruptions will not recycle the control.
12.
The control shall provide a check-run switch will allow the service technician
to stop the burner sequence in any of four different positions.
-
2.05
High Fire Purge
Low Fire Purge
Pilot Trail for Ignition
Low Fire (Burner On)
13.
Interconnection with either a computer terminal or modem communications
shall be possible. When connected, such equipment will access both
present control/burner status and historical information through a serial data
port on the display module.
14.
The message center display shall be designed to accept first out indication of
an additional 16 limit condition from a separate future expansion module.
GAS VALVE TRAIN
A.
The gas train piping shall include a 1/4" NPT pressure tapping with 1/4" pipe plug
upstream and downstream of each valve and regulator in the gas train.
B.
Provide a gas pressure gauge to indicate the gas burner manifold pressure.
15624-7
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15624
C.
Furnish and install one manually operated lubricated plug cock upstream of all
valves.
D.
Provide one gas pressure regulator (of tight shut-off type) with vent to outside
atmosphere, in accordance with local gas company and GE GAP requirements.
E.
Provide one automatically operated motorized safety gas valve. Safety valve shall
be proven closed during pre-ignition by proof of valve closure interlock switch on
valve.
F.
Provide a second automatically motor operated gas safety shut-off valve to operate
simultaneously with the above gas valve.
G.
A normally open, fully ported, electrically with proven closed operated valve shall be
provided in a vent line connected between the two safety shut-off valves. The vent
pipe shall be run independent of other vents to the outside atmosphere and provided
with union to check vent valve operation. The proven closed switch shall interlock
with its burner controls. Acceptable manufacturer: MAXON. No substitutes.
H.
A separate pilot gas cock, gas pressure regulator and pilot safety shut-off valve shall
be provided for the ignition gas supply.
I.
A manually operated lubricated plug-type gas valve shall be located downstream of
both automatic gas valves to permit leakage testing of the valves. A leak test gauge
and gauge cock shall be provided.
J.
Gas pressure supervision shall be provided by approved pressure switches
interlocked to accomplish a non-recycling safety shutdown in the event of either high
or low gas pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
The boiler shall be assembled as recommended by the boiler manufacturer and set
above the boiler room floor on a 4" high concrete pad where shown on the drawing.
The installation shall meet all GE GAP and ASME requirements. Provide gas
ignition when required.
B.
Burners shall have 4” deep, sealed galvanized sheet metal oil drip pans. Pans shall
be 6” larger than burner assembly (all sides).
C.
The boiler main drain, low water cutoff and pressure relief valve shall be piped
separately to the nearest floor drain.
VENTING
Boilers shall be vented as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15616.
15624-8
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
3.03
SECTION 15624
GAS PIPING
Gas piping shall be installed as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15350.
3.04
OIL PIPING
Oil piping shall be installed as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15604.
3.05
START-UP
Service shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer’s authorized representative and
shall complete testing of all controls, burner adjustment and overall boiler operation. The
Contractor is responsible for a monitored start-up. The monitoring agency (Washington Gas
Light Company or Owner approved company) shall record the main gas supply pressure at
inlet of gas line control assembly, gas manifold pressure, control settings and chimney draftinches water column. Copies of this data shall be supplied to the Owner.
3.06
COMBUSTION TESTS
The Contractor, upon completion of the fuel burning system, shall submit a written report on
the operation of each burner to the engineer and will include the following information.
15624-9
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15624
GAS BURNER
Make
Model
Serial No.
CO 2
High Fire
Low Fire
CO
High Fire
Low Fire
Net Stack Temperature
Gas Burning Rate
High Fire
Low Fire
High Fire
Low Fire
Gas Pressure at Orifices
Gas Pressure Upstream of All Valves
High Fire
Low Fire
High Fire
Low Fire
Microamp or Voltage Reading
for flame supervision
Microamps
Volts
15624-10
11/17
STEEL BOILERS AND BURNERS
SECTION 15624
OIL BURNER
Make
Model
Serial No.
CO 2
High Fire
Low Fire
CO
High Fire
Low Fire
Net Stack Temperature
High Fire
Low Fire
Nozzle Pressure
High Fire
Low Fire
Microamp or Voltage Reading
for flame supervision
Smoke Bacharach Scale
High Fire
Low Fire
Oil Burning Rate
High Fire
Low Fire
Microamps
Volts
END OF SECTION
15624-11
11/17
SECTION 15625
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010 General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
1.03
SCOPE
A.
Boiler Room – Replace the burners on the (select)____ existing boilers with new
combination natural gas and no. 2 light oil forced draft power burners. The
(select)____ existing boilers are (select)_______ model (select)________. Provide
new gas valve trains for these two boilers.
B.
Boiler Room – Convert the____ steam boilers and burners to hot water heating.
Remove all existing steam trim. The (select) ____ existing boilers are (select)
______ model(select) _______ with (select)_______ model(select) _______
burners.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The burner shall comply with the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories. The
complete fuel burning system shall further be in full accordance with Industrial Risk Insurers
(IRI).
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
BOILER UNIT (Burner Replacement Only)
Burner shall be manufactured by WEBSTER ENGINEERING. Burners manufactured by
POWER FLAME are acceptable providing capacities and arrangements can be furnished.
A.
Pressure Atomizing Burners
1.
Furnish and install U/L labeled combination gas-oil mechanical pressure
atomizing type oil burners. Oil burners shall be capable of burning No. 2
fuel oil and shall be capable of burning natural gas. Burner shall have rated
capacity as specified. Burners shall have necessary accessories for
mounting onto existing boilers.
15625-1
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
B.
SECTION 15625
2.
The oil burners shall burn the specified quantity of fuel without objectionable
vibration, noise, or pulsation with not more than 20% excess air and a
maximum of No. 2 smoke as measured on the Bacharach Scale.
3.
The burners shall incorporate a stainless steel flame retention type
combustion head for long life and efficient operation. Burners, which have
refractory or cast iron type combustion heads, will not be approved.
4.
A permanent observation port shall be provided in the burner to allow
observation of both the pilot and main flame.
5.
Supply voltage will be (select)____ volts,(select) ____ phase, 60 hertz. All
motors shall be suitable for use on this voltage. All burner controls are to be
for use on 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The 120 volt control voltage shall
be supplied through an isolating stepdown control transformer from the
supply voltage. Transformer shall be supplied as part of the burner controls
and mounted in the control cabinet.
Burner Accessories
1.
A two-stage oil pump shall be provided for each burner. This shall be
supplied as an integral or remote part of the burner.
2.
Two approved automatically operated safety shut-off valves shall be provided
in the oil supply to the burner, valves are to be piped in series but wired in
parallel.
3.
Supply an oil pressure gauge (liquid filled with 11/2” diameter face) to
indicate the discharge oil pump pressure.
4.
Install a manual gate valve, fuel oil filter or strainer and vacuum gauge on the
suction side of the oil pump.
5.
Install a fusible link actuated safety cut-off valve in the oil supply line between
the oil tank and the manual gate valve at the oil pump.
6.
Oil pressure supervision shall be provided by an approved pressure switch
interlocked to accomplish a non-recycling safety shutdown in the event of low
oil pressure.
7.
Oil piping connections to the burners shall consist of, on the inlet side: shutoff valve, filter, union, and pressure gauge; and on the outlet side: check
valve, shut-off valve, pressure gauge and union. Relief valve or pressure
regulators shall be installed per burner manufacturer’s recommendations.
8.
All conduit for controls and motors shall be liquid-tight. See specification
section 16110.
All three phase motors shall be controlled and protected by a burner
9.
15625-2
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
SECTION 15625
mounted fuse block with fuses sized per NEC and an automatic starter with
thermal overload protection. Starter shall be interlocked to prevent burner
operation when overloaded relays are tripped out.
10.
Supply a burner mounted airflow switch to prevent energizing the main fuel
valves in event of insufficient combustion air.
11.
Manual reset of system shall be required to restart burner after airflow
failure has occurred.
12.
A factory pre-wired control cabinet shall be supplied with each burner.
Cabinet shall be mounted on burner. Cabinet shall house the flame
safeguard switches, alarm bell with automatic reset silencing switch to ring
on low water or flame failure, control transformer, indicating lamps as
specified hereinafter and relays that may be required. The control cabinet
door shall be hinged to allow access to the controls. Alarm bell shall be
EDWARD’s 4” diameter AC adaptable. Provide an engraved nameplate
permanently affixed to the front of the cabinet with the following information.
Installing Contractor: ____________________
Contractor Phone No.:___________________
Date Warranty – FROM: ________TO:______
13.
Provide on each control cabinet six (6) individual lights with nameplates to
indicate "POWER ON", "CALL FOR HEAT", “IGNITION", "FUEL ON", "LOW
WATER" AND “FLAME FAILURE".
14.
Furnish and install on the control cabinet for each boiler an electrical nonresettable elapsed time indictor, minimum of 99,999.9 hours, minimum 2
1/2" round face, UL listed, with NEMA standard round and square
detachable bezels. Units by Cramer-Grainger's model no. 6X137.
15.
The changing from one fuel to the other shall be manual by means of fuel
selector switch. No burner adjustments shall be required to switch from one
fuel to the other.
16.
The burners shall be equipped with suitable fuel and air controls to assure
smooth main flame ignition.
17.
Fuel-air control must be synchronized. The fuel-air drive unit shall be
provided with a position-indicating switch, which shall be interlocked with the
flame safeguard system to assure starting with low fire position. The flame
safeguard system shall further program this drive unit to provide a full open
louver purge of sufficient time to provide a four air change pre-ignition purge
of the combustion chamber, heat exchanger, and flue passages. Duration
of purge shall not be less than 30 seconds.
15625-3
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
2.02
SECTION 15625
18.
Pre-ignition purge airflow rate shall be no less than 60% maximum firing
rate airflow. Interlocks shall be provided to monitor and prove 60% airflow
purge when air inlet louvers are opened automatically to obtain this purge
rate.
19.
Modulation of fuel input shall be provided. A modulation temperature
control shall be supplied to modulate a burner mounted damper motor
controlling both fuel and air supply by means of mechanical linkage.
Provide on the control cabinet a manual-auto switch and a potentiometer for
manual control of the firing rate.
20.
Provide an aquastat in the boiler water to maintain low-fire until the aquastat
setting of 120̊ F is reached.
21.
Provide and install emergency shut-off switch of burners at each
entrance/exit to boiler room. Switch shall be push button type by Square
"D" type TR with type TM contact and type KA contact block.
BURNER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM (Burner Replacement Only)
Each burner will be equipped with a Microprocessor Based Burner Management Safeguard
Control system, which shall be U/L, listed.
A.
Components
1.
Each burner will be equipped with UL/FM approved microprocessor based
Burner Management Safeguard Control System that incorporates a plug-in
design, with the programmer, amplifier and display module to be in separate
components. A self-diagnostic circuit within the control will identify module
failures and an appropriate message will be displayed for servicing. This
circuit will cause a safety shutdown should any component in the control fail.
For example, if the amplifier module is malfunctioning, the message center
will display the message, “LOCKOUT REPLACE AMPLIFIER”.
2.
Each component will plug into the Master Chassis and be keyed to insure
that the components may be installed only into the proper location.
3.
The control mounting screw will secure all components in the chassis. This
will prevent tampering while the control is installed in the base. The control
must be removed from the base to replace any of the components.
4.
The amplifier shall be the auto-check ultraviolet type.
5.
The control shall be the FIREYE YB110UV Flame-Monitor with the BLL510
display module, YP100 Programmer.
6.
The ultraviolet scanner shall be the FIREYE UV1A.
15625-4
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
B.
SECTION 15625
Control System Functions
1.
The control will have a non-volatile memory, which allows it to remember
burner history and present position, even after a power interruption. A
minimum of 42 different messages will be displayed on the message center
of the control (in English words and phrases) which indicates system function
and diagnostic information.
2.
The messages shall provide clear, concise information concerning system
timing, present burner sequence position, lockout causes including wiring
base terminal designations and historical data.
3.
The control shall provide for direct connection of limit and operating controls,
fuel valve interlock, damper position interlocks, running interlocks (such as
airflow, fuel pressure and temperature), burner motor, ignition, pilot valves,
firing rate motor and alarm.
4.
During the firing cycle, a constant read-out of the flame signal will be
displayed on the message center.
5.
At the end of each firing cycle, the control will display main fuel operating
hours and complete firing history.
6.
The control shall accomplish a safe start component check during each start.
This will prevent the burner from firing under any condition, which causes
the flame to assume and hold its energized position due the presence of an
actual flame, a flame simulating component failure or mechanical failure.
7.
Control shall provide a purge period of not less than 30 seconds with a
damper driven to the open position and an interlock circuit provided to prove
airflow rate during the purge period. A starting interlock circuit is required to
prove that the burner equipment is in the low fire position at the same time of
ignition, plus an interlock to prove airflow during the purge and firing cycle.
8.
Control shall provide limited trial-for-ignition of pilot flame restricted to 10
seconds, trial-for-main flame restricted to 10 or 15 seconds (selectable) for
oil or gas.
9.
Control shall provide a safety shutdown following flame failure, with fuel and
ignition circuits de-energized in not more than four seconds.
10.
Control shall provide a post purge period of 15 seconds following a
shutdown.
11.
The system shall remain automatically under control of the operating control
and when power is restored following power failure. Manual reset shall be
required following any safety lockout. When in a lockout condition, power
15625-5
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
SECTION 15625
interruptions will not recycle the control.
12.
The control shall provide a check-run switch will allow the service technician
to stop the burner sequence in any of four different positions.
-
2.03
High Fire Purge
Low Fire Purge
Pilot Trail for Ignition
Low Fire (Burner On)
13.
Interconnection with either a computer terminal or modem communications
shall be possible. When connected, such equipment will access both
present control/burner status and historical information through a serial data
port on the display module.
14.
The message center display shall be designed to accept first out indication of
an additional 16 limit condition from a separate future expansion module.
GAS VALVE TRAIN (Burner Replacements Only)
A.
The gas train piping shall include a 1/4" NPT pressure tapping with 1/4" pipe plug
upstream and downstream of each valve and regulator in the gas train.
B.
Provide a gas pressure gauge to indicate the gas burner manifold pressure.
C.
Furnish and install one manually operated lubricated plug cock upstream of all
valves.
D.
Provide one gas pressure regulator (of tight shut-off type) with vent to outside
atmosphere, in accordance with local Gas Company and GE GAP requirements.
E.
Provide one automatically operated motorized safety gas valve. Safety valve shall
be proven closed during pre-ignition by proof of valve closure interlock switch on
valve.
F.
Provide a second automatically motor operated gas safety shut-off valve to operated
simultaneously with the above gas valve.
G.
A normally open, fully ported, electrically with proven closed operated valve shall be
provided in a vent line connected between the two safety shut-off valves. The vent
pipe shall be run independent of other vents to the outside atmosphere and provided
with union to check vent valve operation. The proven closed switch shall interlock
with its burner controls. Acceptable manufacturer: MAXON. No substitutions
H.
A separate pilot gas cock, gas pressure regulator and pilot safety shut-off valve shall
be provided for the ignition gas supply.
I.
A manually operated lubricated plug-type gas valve shall be located downstream of
15625-6
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
SECTION 15625
both automatic gas valves to permit leakage testing of the valves. A leak test gauge
and gauge cock shall be provided.
J.
2.04
STEAM TO HOT WATER BOILER CONVERSION
A.
Trim – Provide all water trim, including a combination pressure altitude gauge and
thermometer, ASME rated water relief valves, high limit aquastat, and two low water
cutoffs.one probe type and one float type. The boiler water jacket shall be acid
washed prior to water being circulated through the hot water heating system.
B.
Burner Controls
C.
2.05
Gas pressure supervision shall be provided by approved pressure switches
interlocked to accomplish a non-recycling safety shutdown in the event of either high
or low gas pressure.
1.
The on/off operation of the burner(s) shall be controlled by water temperature
by means of a temperature control.
2.
An additional high limit safety temperature control of the manual reset type
shall be provided to control each burner.
3.
Pre- and post-purge operation of the burner fan shall be provided.
4.
A manual restart of the burner shall be necessary in the event of shutdown
due to flame failure.
5.
Provide an aquastat in the boiler water to maintain low-fire until the
aquastat’s setting of 120̊ F is reached.
Boiler conversions shall comply with the following:
1.
Virginia Department of Labor and Industry, Office of Compliance
Management, Boiler Safety.
2.
ASME
3.
The Boiler Manufacturer
4.
Boiler nameplate information shall be updated by the boiler manufacturer or
approved testing agency to reflect the conversion.
BOILER SEQUENCING CONTROLS
A.
Provide and install as a part of the burner control systems a Lead-Lag Boiler
Sequencing Control System for two boiler system. It shall respond to variations in
the main header temperature. The system operating temperature is 180F. Two
15625-7
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
SECTION 15625
lead-lag aquastats shall be installed in the header and wired to the boiler #1 burner
panel lead-lag terminals. Install a boiler #1/boiler #2 switch in the boiler #1 burner
panel.
B.
In the event of power failure, the Lead-Lag system shall bring the boilers on the line
in sequence after power is restored.
C.
The two boiler mounted temperature controls on each boiler, previously specified,
one of which shall be the manual reset type, shall be in addition to the Lead-Lag
System and shall both function as high limit controls.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The new burners shall be mounted on the existing boilers. The installation shall meet all GE
GAP and ASME requirements.
3.02
GAS PIPING
Gas piping shall be installed as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15350.
3.03
OIL PIPING
Oil piping shall be installed as shown on the drawings and described in Section 15604.
3.04
COMBUSTION TESTS
The Contractor, upon completion of the fuel burning system, shall submit a written report on
the operation of each burner to the engineer and will include the following information.
15625-8
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
SECTION 15625
GAS BURNER
Make
Model
Serial No.
CO 2
High Fire
Low Fire
CO
High Fire
Low Fire
Net Stack Temperature
Gas Burning Rate
High Fire
Low Fire
High Fire
Low Fire
Gas Pressure at Orifices
Gas Pressure Upstream of All Valves
High Fire
Low Fire
High Fire
Low Fire
Microamp or Voltage Reading
for flame supervision
Microamps
Volts
15625-9
11/17
BOILER BURNER REPLACEMENT AND BOILER CONVERSION
SECTION 15625
OIL BURNER
Make
Model
Serial No.
CO 2
High Fire
Low Fire
CO
High Fire
Low Fire
Net Stack Temperature
High Fire
Low Fire
Smoke Bacharach Scale
High Fire
Low Fire
Nozzle Pressure
High Fire
Low Fire
Microamp or Voltage Reading
for flame supervision
Oil Burning Rate
High Fire
Low Fire
Microamps
Volts
END OF SECTION
15625-10
11/17
SECTION 15651
REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
The refrigeration piping system shall be provided, installed, tested, evacuated and
charged.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
1.04
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall
apply to this section.
The refrigeration piping system shall be provided, installed, tested, evacuated and
charged in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, ANSI, ASHRAE,
and ARI's Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, state and local codes.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on the proposed system as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
The refrigerant piping system shall be provided complete and installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein. The size of the refrigerant
pipes shall be obtained from the equipment manufacturer unless otherwise shown on the
drawings.
A.
Pipe, Fittings and Accessories - The pipe shall be type ACR 'L' copper refrigerant
tubing with hard wrought copper fittings. Pipe sized ½ inch and larger shall be hard
drawn. Pipe size 3/8 inch and smaller can either be hard or soft drawn. All of the
joints shall be brazed with a filler material that complies with AWS classification
BCuP-5. A sight glass with moisture indicator shall be provided if not provided with
equipment, and installed in the liquid line in close proximity to the expansion device
(not required on VRF systems). A removable SPORLAN cartridge type drier-strainer
shall be installed in the liquid line with a three-way valve by-pass if it is not provided
on the equipment (not required on VRF systems). Use type 'L' copper tubing to pipe
the relief valve discharge to the outside.
B.
Condensate Drain Piping - Shall be type 'L' copper tubing.
15651-1
11/17
REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEMS
SECTION 15651
C.
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Shall be as required in section 15050.
D.
The piping shall be insulated as shown in section 15250.
E.
For VRF systems, the use of GelCopper per-insulated copper tubing, or approved
equal, is acceptable for use from the refrigerant mains, typically located in corridors,
to the terminal devices in sizes listed for soft copper.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
The Refrigeration Piping System shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
A.
Installation- During brazing an inert gas (such as nitrogen) shall be continuously
passed through the system at a rate sufficient to maintain an oxygen free
environment to prevent the formation of copper oxide scale. After piping has been
completed, the refrigerant piping system shall be pressure tested at a pressure of
300 psi on the high side and 150 psi on the low side. The pressure shall be
maintained on the system for a minimum of 12 hours. The system shall be
evacuated when the surrounding ambient air is not less than 60°F. If the
temperature is less, auxiliary heat must be provided to insure proper evacuating
conditions. A minimum vacuum of 500 Microns of Hg. shall be pulled on the system
and maintained for 12 hours. The vacuum pump displacement shall be not less than
2 cfm for up to 15 tons. Owner/Engineer shall be notified to witness both the
pressure and vacuum tests.
B.
The system shall be charged as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
15651-2
11/17
SECTION 15655
COMBINATION SPLIT SYSTEM AIR HANDLER/REMOTE
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 -Basic Materials and
Methods shall apply to this section.
Provide and install complete the Combination Air Handling/Remote Air Cooled
Condensing Units as shown on the drawing and specified herein.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The combined systems shall comply with ARI Standard 210.
B.
Both the air handling unit and the air cooled condensing unit shall be Underwriters
Laboratories listed and bear the UL label.
C.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
COMBINATION AIR HANDLER/REMOTE AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT
The combination air handling/remote air cooled condensing unit systems shall be provided
and installed of the type and capacities as shown on the drawings and specified herein. The
matching systems shall be manufactured by the manufacturer shown on the drawings.
Combination systems fully equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured by
TRANE, CARRIER or DAIKIN are acceptable.
A.
Air Handling Units
1.
Type - Shall have horizontally or vertically arranged insulated cabinet, direct
expansion cooling coil, non-corrosive, positively sloped, cleanable, insulated
IAQ type drain pan, centrifugal fan, adjustable belt drive and integral filter
15655-1
11/17
COMBINATION SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
HANDLER/REMOTE AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 15655
rack with throwaway filters. An accessory heating coil shall be provided
when indicated on the drawings.
2.
Cabinet - Heavy gauge steel, phosphatized and finished with baked-on
acrylic enamel and insulated with foil faced permanent fireproof glass fiber.
Provide removable access panels for the filter, fan and damper sections.
Install isolators as recommended by manufacturer.
3.
Cooling Coil - Shall be aluminum fin secondary surface mechanically bonded
to primary surface of 1/2" seamless copper tubing and shall be leak tested to
300 psi. Refrigerant holding charge and matched capacity expansion valves
shall be provided. Coil rows and circuiting to be as recommended by
manufacturer to match condensing unit to meet job requirements.
4.
Heating Coil Electric - Shall be enclosed nickel-chromium wire heating
element. Heating section shall contain built-in contactors, thermal cutouts,
interlock relays and box, and line voltage terminal blocks with lugs.
Heating Coil Hot Water-Shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically
bonded to seamless copper tubes, with continuous fin collars and sleeved
coil and supports. Coils shall be factory tested at 300 psi. Hot water coils
shall be placed downstream of the Dx coil.
B.
5.
Drain Pan – Insulated non-corrosive, positively sloped, cleanable IAQ type
with threaded pipe connection.
6.
Fan - Forward curved centrifugal with adjustable belt drive. Motor shall be
overload protected.
7.
Filters – Shall be throwaway type, 2" thick, 35% efficient.
8.
Starter - Provided magnetic starter with red running light. See Electric Motor
Starters, Section 15050 - 2.07.
Air Cooled Condensing Unit
1.
Type - The air-cooled condensing unit shall have all operating components
assembled on one common base. These shall include: compressor,
condenser coil, condenser fans and motors, charging valves, moisture
indicating sight glass, shut-off valves, all controls and a holding charge of R410A. The unit shall be designed for outdoor installation.
2.
Casing - Shall be of 14-gauge zinc coated steel with all exterior surfaces
painted with enamel for weather protection. Drain holes shall be provided for
elimination of rain. Provide removable panels for access to components.
15655-2
11/17
COMBINATION SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
HANDLER/REMOTE AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 15655
3.
Condenser Fans and Motors - Shall be furnished with direct driven, propeller
type fans arranged for vertical discharge. Condenser fan motors shall have
Class B motor insulation, inherent protection, and shall be of the permanently
lubricated type, resiliently mounted. Each fan shall have a safety guard.
Controls shall be included for low ambient operation down to 0* F.
4.
Condenser Coil - Shall have copper tubing with heavy-duty aluminum fins.
The coil shall be factory tested at 425 psi and dehydrated. A factory or field
installed sub-cooling circuit shall be provided to sub-cool refrigerant a
minimum of 20° below saturation temperatures.
5.
Compressor - Shall be of hermetic design with spring isolators and shall
have crankcase heaters. Compressor shall be located in a section
separated from condenser fans and coils. Compressor shall have acrossthe-line start.
6.
Controls - Shall be factory wired and located in a separate enclosure. Safety
devices shall consist of high and low pressure stats compressor overload
devices and evaporator defrost control. Unit shall have electronic defrost
controls and capabilities. Controls shall include a transformer for the control
circuit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The combination system shall be installed and tested in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, start-up and service instructions and as shown on
the drawings.
B.
The refrigeration piping system shall be installed in accordance with section 15651.
C.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall be
stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
D.
Provide one spare fan belt for each air handling unit.
E.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, and belt sizes to be
included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size,
belt size and the number of filters and belts required for each unit. In addition to this
submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115
Gatehouse Road Falls Church VA 22042.
15655-3
11/17
COMBINATION SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
HANDLER/REMOTE AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
2.
SECTION 15655
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032.
END OF SECTION
15655-4
11/17
SECTION 15674
WATER COOLED CHILLER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010 General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
A complete factory assembled package water-cooled hermetic centrifugal water chiller shall
be installed.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Unit shall be run tested at the factory and start-up and checkout shall be done by a
factory certified technician. Pressurized components shall comply with the ASME
code for unfired pressure vessels.
B.
Manufacturer shall provide a certification that the equipment has been performance
tested at the factory. Certification shall record the unit capacity in BTU/hour and
kilowatts.
C.
Chiller performance shall be rated in accordance with Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 550, latest edition.
D.
Equipment and installation shall be in compliance with Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration, ANSI/ASHRAE 15-2004.
E.
Factory start-up- The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
F.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
section15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
15674-1
11/17
WATER COOLED CHILLER
SECTION 15674
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
CHILLER
The chiller shall be of the type and capacity shown on the equipment schedule on the
drawings. The unit shall be manufactured by TRANE. A unit fully equal to that specified and
manufactured by CARRIER or DAIKIN are acceptable. Centrifugal, helical-rotary or screwtype compressors are acceptable.
A.
Unit Description - The chiller shall be a factory assembled, piped, wired and tested
unit consisting of an evaporator, condenser, compressor, control panel, refrigerant
piping and purge system all assembled on one base with accessories as required in
this specification or as shown on the drawings. A matching motor starter shall be
located as shown on the drawings.
B.
Refrigerant – The chiller shall use refrigerant R-134a or R-410a.
C.
Evaporator and Condenser - Shall be of shell and tube type. Test pressures shall be
45 psig minimum for the refrigerant side and 225 psig for the water side of the shells.
Provide refrigerant circuit safety rupture disc. Condensing circuit marine type water
box with taps for vents and drains shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times working
pressure. Provide fixed orifice return liquid refrigerant flow control.
D.
Compressor - Shall be direct drive, single or multiple stage design with high strength
aluminum alloy, proof tested statically and dynamically balanced impellers keyed
directly to motor shaft. Hermetic compressor motor shall be liquid refrigerant cooled
with inherent low voltage protection, each phase motor winding temperature sensing
for stopping by any phase sensing excessive temperature. Inherent single-phase
protection shall operate in the same manner. Capacity control shall be variable inlet
guide vanes capable of modulating performance from 100 to 10 percent of rated unit
capacity at design conditions. Provide submerged oil pump for lubrication.
E.
Refrigerant Isolation Valves- Factory-installed condenser inlet and outlet refrigerant
valves shall allow isolation of the full refrigerant charge in the condenser while
servicing the chiller.
F.
Control Panel - Shall be electronic with microprocessor, current limiter, temperature
control system with dead band range, indicator lights and gauges, low refrigerant
temperature override, unloaded start, anti-recycle timer to limit starts to two per hour,
oil pump operation, purge system operation, safety controls, and integral fused
control circuits. Provide Expanded Service Panel located in the chiller control panel
for reset of chilled water temperature based on return water temperature. Purge
System - Shall be provided to remove non-condensable gasses and return
refrigerant to the machine. Provide a communication interface between the chiller
and the building energy management system. Provide all necessary protocol
documentation and gateway hardware and software (if required) such that the
section 15900 system supplier may successfully create a communication interface
between the control system furnished in this section of the specification and
15674-2
11/17
WATER COOLED CHILLER
SECTION 15674
the15900 control system. Provide an adequate level of technical support to guide the
section 15900 personal towards completion of subject communication interface.
Protocol must support reading/writing status and analog and digital point information
from this section of the specification.. All documentation, gateway hardware and
software, and required technical support are understood to be included in the bid.
The points listed in section 15900 input/output summaries as well as those below
shall be the minimum acceptable.
1. Chilled water pump request.
2. Chilled water setpoint.
3. Chiller enable/disable.
4. Chiller current draw.
5. Entering water temperature.
6. Leaving water temperature.
7. Compressor starts.
8. Compressor run time.
9. Alarm.
10. Present operating mode
G.
2.02
Integral Compressor Motor Starter - Shall be closed transition Wye-Delta type
enclosed in a NEMA-1 enclosure with hinged door. Wires, busbars, and fittings shall
be copper. Anti-recycling timer shall be included. Provide lugs for connection of
specified conductors.
REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE SENSOR
A sensor mounted within the chiller room shall monitor refrigerant levels in the room. The
sensor shall measure and indicate refrigerant levels ranging from 0-1000 parts per million.
The sensor shall have an alarm setting of 1000 PPM which will activate audible and visual
alarms located in the chiller room, outdoors at the chiller room entrance, and in the building
outside of the chiller room. Exceeding the alarm setting of the sensor shall also activate the
chiller room emergency exhaust fan (and de-energize the boilers and water heaters if
located in the chiller room). Interlock wiring to be provided by the mechanical contractor.
2.03
SIGNAGE
A.
Provide signage outdoors on the exterior door to the chiller room, and indoors on the
outside of the chiller room door, which states "DO NOT ENTER WHEN ALARM IS
ACTIVE. CALL THE OFFICE OF SAFETY AND SECURITY " 571-423-2000.
B.
Provide hazard signage outdoors on the exterior door to the chiller room, and
indoors on the outside of the chiller room door, to comply with the NFPA 704
requirements for use of refrigerants R-134a R-410a. Signs shall be a minimum of 6"
x6" and shall display the hazard ratings.
15674-3
11/17
WATER COOLED CHILLER
SECTION 15674
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory start-up- The manufacturer shall supply a complete factory start-up by
factory approved start-up agent.
a
B.
Insulation - Insulate the evaporator shell, exposed refrigerant circuit piping and
auxiliary water piping as required. Insulation shall comply with the requirements of
Section 15250.
C.
Installation - The chiller shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide auxiliary water supply to purge unit and oil cooler.
D.
Isolation - The chiller shall be mounted on spring vibration isolators.
E.
Pipe Connections - The chiller shall have a marine water box on the condenser
water piping connections to the machine and either a marine water box or flanged
pipe connections on the chilled water piping connections to the machine to allow
removal of headers for inspection, cleaning, or removal of tubes. Two 1/2" valved
connections shall be provided in tower water lines at machine inside the condenser
shut off valves for future chemical cleaning.
F.
Refrigerant Leakage Sensor Installation - Sensor and alarms shall be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
G.
Refrigerant Vent - Provide vent piping from rupture disc to outside of building. Piping
shall be sized as recommended by ARI.
H.
Provide an engraved nameplate permanently affixed to the front of the control
cabinet with the following information.
INSTALLING CONTRACTOR:_______________________________
CONTRACTOR PHONE #
: _______________________________
WARRANTY DATE FROM: _____________TO: _______________
END OF SECTION
15674-4
11/17
SECTION 15676
AIR COOLED CHILLER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall
apply to this section.
A complete factory assembled package air-cooled water chiller shall be installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Unit shall be run tested at the factory and start-up and check out shall be done by a
factory certified technician. Pressurized components shall comply with the ASME
code for unfired pressure vessels. Rating and construction shall be in accordance
with ARI Standard 59086, ANSI B9.1 safety code and the National Electrical Code.
B.
Manufacturer shall provide a certification that the equipment has been performance
tested at the factory. Certification shall record the unit capacity in BTU/hour and
kilowatts.
C.
Factory start-up- The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
D.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
section15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
AIR COOLED CHILLER
The air-cooled chiller shall be of the type and capacity shown in the equipment schedule on
the drawings. The unit shall be manufactured by TRANE. A unit fully equal to that specified
and manufactured by CARRIER or DAIKIN is acceptable.
15676-1
11/17
AIR COOLED CHILLER SECTION 15676
A.
Unit Description - The Air Cooled chiller shall be a factory assembled, piped, wired
and tested unit consisting of a corrosion protected steel casing, an evaporator,
condensers, multiple scroll or screw compressors, control panel, refrigerant piping
and dual refrigeration system all assembled on one base with accessories as
required in this specification or as shown on the drawings. Motor starters shall be
unit mounted. The refrigerant used shall have an ozone depletion potential of less
than .05 and a global warming potential of less than 0.37, (R-134A, R-410A).
B.
Unit Casing - Unit shall be enclosed in a galvanized steel casing, zinc phosphatized,
with an electrostatically applied baked enamel finish, capable of withstanding
Federal Test Method Standard No. 141, Method 6061, 500 hour salt spray test.
C.
Evaporator/Cooler - Shall be shell and tube type with removable heads and shall
have two independent direct-expansion refrigerant circuits. Cooler shall be tested
and stamped in accordance with ASME code for refrigerant side working pressure of
235 psig and a minimum waterside working pressure of 150 psig. Copper tubes
shall be rolled into the tube sheets. Shell shall be covered with 3/4" layer of closedcell foam plastic, vapor insulated.
D.
Condenser
1.
Air cooled condenser coils shall have aluminum fins mechanically bonded to
seamless copper tubes, cleaned, dehydrated, sealed, leak tested at 150 psig
and pressure tested at 450 psig.
2.
Condenser fans shall be propeller type with PVC coated steel wire safety
guards, balanced statically and dynamically, and shall discharge vertically.
3.
Condenser fan motors shall have inherent overcurrent protection.
4.
Provide metal hail guards to protect the condenser coil from damage.
E.
Compressors - Shall be scroll hermetic type with a maximum speed of 3500 rpm, or
rotary screw, serviceable and shall have an automatically reversible oil pump and
operating oil charge. Compressors shall be equipped with suction and discharge
shutoff valves and shall be mounted on individual spring vibration isolators. Each
compressor motor shall be cooled by suction gas passing around the motor windings
and shall be thermally protected with manual restart after thermal or pressure
overload stoppage. Each compressor shall be equipped with an insert type
crankcase heater to control oil dilution during shutdown. Cycles per hour per
compressor shall not exceed six.
F.
Refrigeration Circuit - Each refrigeration circuit shall include: hot gas muffler,
combination moisture indicator and sight glass, replaceable core refrigerant filter
drier, liquid line solenoid valve, expansion valve, suction and discharge pressure
gauges with manual shutoff valves, high side pressure relief device, and charging
valve.
15676-2
11/17
AIR COOLED CHILLER G.
SECTION 15676
Controls
1.
Unit controls, including microprocessor, shall be factory mounted and wired
in a weatherproof enclosure with hinged access doors for easy access. The
controls shall include automatic lead-lag except where noted, pumpdown at
beginning and end of every circuit cycle, loss-of-charge protection, inherent
low water flow protection, low chilled water temperature safety, low- and
high-suction superheat protection, low oil pressure protection for each circuit,
ground current protection for each compressor, low control voltage to unit,
current limit, field power and control circuit terminal blocks, compressor and
fan motor circuit breakers, ON/OFF switch, replaceable relay board,
individual solid-state compressor protection board, leaving chilled water set
point board, diagnostic digital display module, a microprocessor board and a
temperature reset board. The chiller shall be capable of sending a chill water
pump run request to the building automation system.
2.
Unit control capacity is based upon leaving water temperature and will be
compensated by return water temperature.
3.
Minimum number of capacity control steps shall be as shown in the
equipment schedule.
4.
Provide a definite purpose magnetic contactor for each compressor.
5.
Calibrated circuit breakers shall be factory installed for each compressor,
shall be manual reset and ambient insensitive, and shall open all three
phases should an overload occur on any phase.
6.
Unit primary electrical power supply shall be connected to a single point with
lugs sized for specified conductors.
7.
Control voltage shall be provided by a factory installed integral control
transformer.
8.
Heat tracing for exterior piping shall be provided by a separate 120 volt,
single phase power supply.
9.
Provide a barrel freeze alarm output for connection to the BAS.
H.
Chiller shall be capable of operating at ambient air temperatures down to 0 deg F
without the use of glycol or any other type of antifreeze. Chillers that do not meet
this requirement are not acceptable.
I.
Flow switches- switches for flow conformation shall be provided. Switches shall be
paddle type with stainless steel bellows and paddle. Switches shall be suitable for
outdoor installation.
15676-3
11/17
AIR COOLED CHILLER SECTION 15676
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory Start-up- The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
B.
Installation - The chiller shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
C.
Install isolation valves on evaporator water inlet and outlet at chiller.
D.
Install thermometers on evaporator water inlet and outlet at chiller.
E.
Isolation - Provide spring isolators as recommended by chiller manufacturer.
F.
Pipe Connections - The machine shall have water boxes or the contractor shall
provide flanged pipe connections in the piping adjacent to the machine to allow
removal of headers for inspection, cleaning or removal of tubes.
G.
Provide an engraved nameplate permanently affixed to the front of the control
cabinet (inside of cabinet for outdoor locations) with the following information.
INSTALLING CONTRACTOR: _______________________________
CONTRACTOR PHONE #
: _______________________________
WARRANTY DATE FROM: __________ TO: ___________________
END OF SECTION
15676-4
11/17
SECTION 15680
PROPELLER FAN COOLING TOWER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Building and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
A complete factory assembled propeller fan type cross flow induced draft design cooling
tower shall be installed.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Capacity shall be in accordance with published ratings; wet deck ASTM standard E84 flame spread rated and finish corrosion protection tested per ASTM B117-64.
Towers thermal performance shall be in accordance with CTI standard 201.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PROPELLER FAN COOLING TOWER
The propeller fan-cooling tower shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings.
The cooling tower shall be manufactured by BALTIMORE AIRCOIL. A unit fully equal to the
specified manufacturer and manufactured by MARLEY or EVAPCO is acceptable.
A.
Unit Description - The cooling tower shall be a factory assembled, piped, wired and
tested unit consisting of a stainless steel housing, distribution basins, wet deck, drift
eliminator, propeller fan and fan motor and drive, all assembled on one base with
accessories using series 300 stainless steel nuts and bolts, as required in this
specification or as shown on the drawings.
B.
Casing and Basins - Shall be constructed of heavy gauge, stainless steel including
all angles or channels. All casing exterior panels shall be fiberglass reinforced
15680-1
11/17
PROPELLER FAN COOLING TOWER
SECTION 15680
polyester (FRP) panels or stainless steel panels. Piping connections shall be
flanged.
C.
Hot water Distribution Basins - Shall be type 304 stainless steel and open gravity
type with distribution weirs and plastic metering orifices. Basin shall include integral
balancing valves and removable basin covers. Each cell shall have a single water
inlet with pre-strainer assembly, or external factory mounted strainer. PVC
distribution system with plastic or brass nozzles are acceptable.
D.
Cold Water Basin - Shall be type 304 stainless steel and include circular access
doors; large area strainers type 304 stainless steel with perforated openings sized
smaller than water distribution metering orifices; and an integral anti-vortexing hood
to prevent air entrainment.
E.
Wet Deck and Drift Eliminator - Shall be manufactured and performance tested by
the manufacturer and shall be 15 mils thick polyvinyl chloride. It shall have a flame
spread rate of 5 per ASTM E84-77a.
F.
Air Inlet Louvers - Shall be waveform, fiberglass-reinforced polyester or stainless
steel, spaced to minimize air resistance and prevent splash out.
G.
Fan - Shall be fixed pitch cast aluminum propeller type mounted on a solid steel fan
shaft supported by heavy duty, self-aligning relubricatible 40,000-hour life bearings
with cast iron housings. Extended lube lines shall be provided for ease of
maintenance. Provide galvanized steel fan guard.
H.
Fan Motor and Drive
I.
1.
Motor - Shall be 1750 rpm drip-proof ball-bearing type with 1.15 service
factor. High efficiency motor shall be rated for VFD duty and suitable for
outdoor service and operation on indicated electrical service. Motor shall be
mounted on easily adjusted heavy-duty motor base located so that drive and
motor are in a protected position.
2.
The V-belt fan drive shall be designed for not less than 150% of motor
nameplate horsepower. Drive and all moving parts shall be completely
enclosed by removable stainless steel screens.
3.
Install VFD Variable Frequency Drive per specification section 15905.
4.
Provide a vibration cutout switch to de-energize fan motors in case of
excessive vibration.
Electronic Water Level Control Package - Consists of a weather protected unit
mounted to the sump out of air stream and a slow acting solenoid valve installed in
the makeup water line.
15680-2
11/17
PROPELLER FAN COOLING TOWER
SECTION 15680
J.
Starter - Shall be magnetic with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch and red running
light. See 15050, 2.07.
K.
Basin Sump Heater Package – Provide heaters, contactors for each heater element,
control transformer, basin thermostat, and low water cut out. Provide and wire one
heater package for each tower cell. Provide a 1” threaded outlet in each cells sump
for the purposes of temperature monitoring via the ATC.
L.
Internal/External Working/Service Platforms - provide complete internal/external
working/service platforms and ladder systems for the maintenance and service of all
drive components and motor assemblies, at access doors for plenum sections and at
the louver face. Towers which require service/maintenance from the top (fan deck)
shall be provided with a perimeter handrail system with a ladder from grade to the
fan deck. Ladders for external platforms shall extend to grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The cooling tower shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate required elevation with supporting structure.
Provide vibration isolation as shown on drawings.
3.02
A.
Install OSHA approved ladders to all internal and external working/service platforms.
B.
Install manufacturer’s handrail system around the perimeter of the top of the unit.
WARRANTY
See Section 15010 for warranty information.
END OF SECTION
15680-3
11/17
SECTION 15681
CENTRIFUGAL FAN COOLING TOWER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
A complete factory assembled centrifugal fan type sectional counterflow blow-through
design-cooling tower shall be installed.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Capacity shall be in accordance with published ratings, wet deck ASTM standard E84 flame spread rated and finish corrosion protection tested per ASTM B117-64.
Towers thermal performance shall be in accordance with CTI standard 201.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CENTRIFUGAL FAN COOLING TOWER
The centrifugal fan-cooling tower shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings.
The cooling tower shall be manufactured by BALTIMORE AIRCOIL. A unit fully equal to the
specified manufacturer and manufactured by EVAPCO is acceptable.
A.
Unit Description - The cooling tower shall be a factory assembled and tested unit
consisting of a type 304 stainless steel pan and fan section with access openings,
centrifugal fan, fan motor and drive, heat transfer surface, water distribution system
and eliminator section, all prepared for piping and wiring and assembled on one
base with accessories series 300 stainless nuts and bolts as required in this
specification or as shown on the plans.
B.
Casing and Basins - Shall be constructed of heavy gauge, stainless steel, including
all casing and basin interior and exterior surfaces.
15681-1
11/17
CENTRIFUGAL FAN COOLING TOWER
C.
D.
E.
SECTION 15681
Pan-Fan Section
1.
The combination pan-fan section shall consist of heavy gauge stainless steel
framework, stainless steel type 304 V-shaped self-cleaning pan and
centrifugal fans mounted beneath the sloping undersides of the pan.
2.
Standard pan accessories shall include circular access doors; large area liftout stainless steel type 304 strainer with perforated openings sized smaller
than spray nozzle orifices, and mounted in an assembly baffled to prevent
circulation; and waste water bleed line with valve.
3.
The forwardly curved centrifugal fans shall be constructed totally of 304
stainless steel statically and dynamically balanced. Fan housings shall have
compound curve inlet rings for efficient air entry, and discharge cowls within
the pan for increased fan efficiency and to prevent water from entering the
fans. Fan bearings shall be spherical self-aligning sleeve type with two piece
cast iron body, deep well reservoir, and oil cup.
4.
Electronic Water Level Control Package - Consists of a weather protected
unit mounted to the sump out of air stream and a slow acting solenoid valve
installed in the makeup water line.
Fan Motor Drive
1.
A 1750-rpm drip-proof ball-bearing fan motor with 1.15 service factor shall be
furnished. High efficiency motor shall be rated for VFD duty and suitable for
outdoor service and operation on indicated electrical service. Motor shall be
mounted on easily adjusted heavy-duty motor base located so that drive and
motor are in a weather-protected position.
2.
The V-belt fan drive shall be designed for not less than 150% of motor
nameplate horsepower. Drive and all moving parts shall be completely
enclosed including the bottom by removable stainless steel screens.
3.
Provide and install VFD variable frequency drive per specification
Section 15905.
4.
Provide a vibration cutout switch to de-energize fan motors in case of
excessive vibration.
Surface Section
1.
The heat transfer sections of the tower shall be removable from the pan.
Each shall be a composite assembly containing wet deck surface fill and
water distribution system in channel-formed casing layers, and shall have
sectional eliminators on top.
15681-2
11/17
CENTRIFUGAL FAN COOLING TOWER
SECTION 15681
2.
Fill - the wet deck surface of the tower shall consist of wave-formed or crossfluted sheets of polyvinyl chloride. The wet deck shall be designed for
protection against vermin, rot, fire, fungus attack, or warpage.
3.
Water Distribution - Shall be distributed evenly over the tower fill area
through a spray tree consisting of a header and removable branches
constructed of schedule 40 PVC pipe. The branches and closely spaced
molded ABS plastic spray nozzles shall be threaded or held in place with
snap-on rubber grommets providing quick removal of individual nozzles or
complete branches for cleaning or flushing. The header shall include
provision for measuring spray pressure externally.
4.
Eliminators - Shall be constructed of ultra violet light resistive polyvinyl
chloride. Eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections. They
shall have a minimum of three breaks with a hooked leaving edge and shall
direct discharge air away from the fans at a 45-degree angle.
F.
Starter - Shall be magnetic with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch and red running
lights. See 15050, 2.07.
G.
Basin Sump Heater Package – Provide heaters, contactors for each heater element,
control transformer, basin thermostat and low water cut out. Provide and wire one
heater package for each tower cell. Provide a 1” threaded outlet in each cells sump
for the purpose of temperature monitoring via the automatic temperature system.
H.
Internal/External Working/Service Platforms- provide complete internal/external
working/service platforms and ladder systems for the maintenance and service of all
drive components and motor assemblies, at access doors for plenum sections and at
the louver face. Towers which require service/maintenance from the top (fan deck)
shall be provided with a perimeter handrail system with a ladder from grade to the
fan deck. Ladders for external platforms shall extend to grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The cooling tower shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate required elevation with supporting structure.
Provide vibration isolation as shown on drawings.
A.
3.02
Install OSHA approved ladders to all internal and external working/service platforms.
WARRANTY
See Section 15010 for warranty information.
END OF SECTION
15681-3
11/17
SECTION 15682
CLOSED CELL COOLING TOWER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods,
shall apply to this section.
1.02
SCOPE
A complete factory-assembled closed circuit cooling tower of induced draft design with
vertical air discharge shall be installed.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Capacity shall be in accordance with published ratings, wet deck ASTM standard
E-84 flame spread rated and finish corrosion protection tested per ASTM B11764. Towers thermal performance shall be in accordance with CTI standard 201.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings
are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
COOLING TOWER
The cooling tower shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings. The cooling
tower shall be manufactured by BALTIMORE AIRCOIL. A unit fully equal to the
specified manufacturer and manufactured by MARLEY or EVAPCO is acceptable.
A.
Unit Description - The cooling tower shall be a factory assembled, piped, wired
and tested unit consisting of a stainless steel housing, distribution basins, wet
deck, drift eliminator, propeller fan and fan motor and drive, recirculating spray
water pump and piping, positive closure damper hood and actuator, all
assembled on one base with accessories using series 300 stainless steel nuts
and bolts, as required in this specification or as shown on the drawings.
B.
Casing and Basins - Shall be constructed of heavy gauge, stainless steel
including all angles or channels. All casing exterior panels shall be fiberglass
15682-1
11/17
CLOSED CELL COOLING TOWER
SECTION 15682
reinforced polyester (FRP) panels or stainless steel panels. Piping connections
shall be flanged.
C.
Stainless Steel Coil - Coil shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel
serpentine tube. Tubes shall be sloped for free drainage and coil assembly shall
be pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,685 kPa). Coil shall be ASME B31.5
compliant.
D.
Hot Water Distribution Basins - Shall be type 304 stainless steel and open gravity
type with distribution weirs and plastic metering orifices. Basin shall include
integral balancing valves and removable basin covers. Each cell shall have a
single water inlet with pre-strainer assembly, or external factory mounted
strainer. PVC distribution system with plastic or brass nozzles are acceptable.
E.
Cold Water Basin - Shall be type 304 stainless steel and include circular access
doors; large area strainers type 304 stainless steel with perforated openings
sized smaller than water distribution metering orifices; and an integral antivortexing hood to prevent air entrainment.
F.
Wet Deck and Drift Eliminator - Shall be manufactured and performance tested
by the manufacturer and shall be 15 mils thick polyvinyl chloride. It shall have a
flame spread rate of 5 per ASTM E84-77a.
G.
Air Inlet Louvers - Shall be wave form, fiberglass reinforced polyester or
stainless steel, spaced to minimize air resistance and prevent splash-out.
H.
Positive Closure Damper Hood - Provide coil air intake hoods with factory
mounted positive closure dampers with stainless steel linkages and damper
actuators. The hood shall be factory insulated.
I.
Fan - Shall be fixed pitch cast aluminum propeller type mounted on a solid steel
fan shaft supported by heavy duty, self-aligning relubricatible 40,000 hour life
bearings with cast iron housings. Extended lube lines shall be provided for ease
of maintenance. Provide galvanized steel fan guard. To maintain the quality of
the local environment, the closed circuit cooling tower shall be furnished with a
low sound fan.
J.
Fan Motor and Drive
1.
Motor - Shall be 1750 rpm drip-proof ball-bearing type with 1.15 service
factor. High efficiency motor shall be rated for VFD duty and suitable for
outdoor service and operation on indicated electrical service. Motor shall
be mounted on easily adjusted heavy duty motor base located so that
drive and motor are in a protected position.
2.
The V-belt fan drive shall be designed for not less than 150% of motor
nameplate horsepower. Drive and all moving parts shall be completely
enclosed by removable stainless steel screens.
15682-2
11/17
CLOSED CELL COOLING TOWER
K.
SECTION 15682
3.
Install VFD Variable Frequency Drive per specification Section 15905.
4.
Provide a vibration cutout switch to de-energize fan motors in case of
excessive vibration.
Recirculating Spray Water Pump
1.
Pump shall be close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump.
2.
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor.
3.
Provide bleed line with metering valve from pump discharge to overflow.
L.
Electronic Water Level Control Package - Consists of a weather protected unit
mounted to the sump out of air stream and a slow acting solenoid valve installed
in the makeup water line. Provide a level control package for each tower cell.
M.
Basin Sump Heater Package - Provide heaters, contactors for each heater
element, control transformer, basin thermostat, and low water cut out. Provide
and wire one heater package for each tower cell. Provide a 1" threaded outlet in
each cells sump for the purposes of temperature monitoring via the ATC.
N.
Pump Starter - Shall be magnetic with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch and red
running light. See 15050, 2.07.
O.
Internal/External Working/Service Platforms- provide complete internal/external
working/service platforms and ladder systems for the maintenance and service of
all drive components and motor assemblies, at access doors for plenum sections
and at the louver face. Towers which require service/maintenance from the top
(fan deck) shall be provided with a perimeter handrail system with a ladder from
grade to the fan deck. Ladders for external platforms shall extend to grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The cooling tower shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate required elevation with
supporting structure. Provide vibration isolation as shown on drawings.
B.
Install OSHA approved ladders to all internal and external working/service
platforms.
C.
Install manufacturer's handrail system around the perimeter of the top of the unit.
15682-3
11/17
CLOSED CELL COOLING TOWER
3.02
SECTION 15682
WARRANTY
See Section 15010 for warranty information.
END OF SECTION
15682-4
11/17
SECTION 15691
SPECIAL SYSTEM ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
(SELF CONTAINED UNIT)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Furnish and install a ceiling mounted self contained air conditioning unit for the room as
described below and shown on plans.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The air conditioning units shall have published ratings and shall be listed as acceptable by
an approved testing agency.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SELF CONTAINED ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
The air conditioning unit shall be furnished and installed of the type and capacity as shown
on the drawings and herein specified. The air conditioning unit shall be manufactured by
LIEBERT. Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured by SPACE
COOLER, DATAAIRE, or SKIL-AIRE are acceptable.
A.
Package Indoor Unit - Shall be completely assembled, piped, wired, and factory
tested. Unit configuration shall be horizontal, designed for ceiling mounting and fit
the 2' X 4' opening of the T-bar ceiling.
1.
Cabinet - Shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and
designed for easy installation and service access. All service access shall
be through the sides of the unit without removing the unit from the ceiling.
Cabinet shall be insulated with 1 1/2 pound density insulation providing
thermal and acoustical treatment. Mounting kit shall include vibration
isolators.
2.
Air Distribution System - Shall include a direct drive forward curved
centrifugal fan arranged to draw air through the evaporator. The blower
motor shall be mounted on vibration isolators and shall have three speeds to
15691-1
11/17
SPECIAL SYSTEM ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
(SELF CONTAINED UNIT)
SECTION 15691
allow airflow to be adjusted to the specific requirements of the installation.
The return/supply grille assembly shall include discharge grille and a hinged
return grille for filter access. Filter shall be a 1" disposable type.
3.
Compressor - Shall be of the hermetically sealed type, complete with a
resilient suspension system, oil strainer, inherent motor protection, and antislug protection. Refrigerant shall be 410A.
4.
Evaporator Coils - Shall be direct expansion type. The prime surface shall
be of seamless copper tubes with aluminum plates fins.
B.
Condenser - The built-in condenser section contains the compressor, filter drier,
sightglass, suction line accumulator, and condenser coil. The coil shall be
constructed with copper tubes and aluminum fins. Condenser air shall be ducted to
the unit using a centrifugal condenser fan.
C.
Automatic Temperature Control - Unit shall operate through built-in controls and wall
mounted microprocessor-based thermostat. Provide all control wiring between unit
and thermostat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The air conditioning units shall be installed and tested in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
B.
Unit shall be suspended from the structure using all-thread rods with vibration
isolators.
C.
Units shall not be located directly above any electronic/electric equipment.
D.
New filters shall be installed after construction is over and before the final inspection.
E.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter sizes to be included in the
O & M manuals. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the
list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Project
Manager, Design & Construction Services, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite
3500, Falls Church, VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
END OF SECTION
15691-2
11/17
SECTION 15692
SPECIAL SYSTEM ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
(SPLIT SYSTEM UNIT)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, and Section 15651
Refrigeration Piping Systems shall apply to this section.
1.02
SCOPE
Furnish and install a ceiling/wall mounted air conditioning unit for the room as described
below and as shown on the plans.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The ductless air conditioning units shall have published ratings and shall be listed as
acceptable by an approved testing agency.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in section 15010, 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SPLIT SYSTEM ROOM AIR CONDITIONER
The ductless room air conditioning unit shall be furnished and installed of the type and
capacity as shown on the drawings and herein specified. The ductless air conditioning unit
shall be manufactured by PANASONIC. Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and
manufactured by MITSUBISHI, LG DAIKIN, TRANE or CARRIER are acceptable.
A.
Air cooled split system air conditioning unit having the capability listed in the
schedule on the drawings.
B.
Air conditioning unit to be factory assembled and pre-wired suitable for low pressure
operation, consisting of an indoor and outdoor unit, controls, air filters, refrigerant
cooling coil and refrigerant piping. Refrigerant shall be 410A.
C.
The ductless unit drain pan shall be provided with a float switch to automatically
shutoff the unit should the drain pan fill a indicating a clogged condensate drain line.
D.
Outdoor unit shall be equipped with low ambient kit, wind baffle, and crankcase
heater.
15692-1
11/17
SPECIAL SYSTEM ROOM AIR
CONDITIONING UNIT (DUCTLESS AIR CONDITIONER)
E.
SECTION 15692
Automatic Temperature Control- Unit shall operate through built in controls and wall
mounted microprocessor based thermostat. Provide all control wiring between unit
and thermostat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
For areas containing ceilings, provide a ceiling recessed type unit. Should a wall unit
be required, install unit as high as possible under provisions of the manufacturer's
instruction.
B.
Identify unit with its tag showing the building number, unit number and area served.
For example, label the Communication Room unit “AC-1-1/Communication Room”.
C.
Coordinate installation with architectural and electrical work.
D.
During construction, keep unit inlet and outlet sealed with polyethylene sheet to
prevent accumulation of construction dust in unit.
E.
Prior to startup, clean inside of unit thoroughly of all construction dust.
F.
Do not operate unit until area has been cleaned and filters are in place.
G.
Unit to be fully charged with refrigerant.
H.
Refrigerant piping shall be type ACR ‘L’ copper refrigerant tubing with hard wrought
copper fittings. Pipe sized ½ inch and larger shall be hard drawn. Pipe sized 3/8 inch
and smaller can either be hard or soft drawn. All of the joints shall be brazed with a
filler material that complies with AWS classification BCuP-5. Use type ‘L’ copper
tubing to pipe the relief valve discharge to the outside.
I.
Correct any deficiencies in unit operation.
J.
Do not locate unit directly overtop of electric or electronic equipment.
K.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter sizes to be included in the
O & M manuals. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the
list, distributed to:
1. Project Manager, Design & Construction Services, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite
3500, Falls Church Va 22042.
2. Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032.
END OF SECTION
15692-2
11/17
SECTION 15700
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include the following:
A.
Complete variable refrigerant flow system including equipment, piping, and controls.
System shall be a VRF (variable refrigerant flow) multi split air conditioning system.
The system will utilize an air cooled condensing unit supplying a maximum of forty
indoor fan coil units with combinations of outdoor units 3 - 25 ton capacity with a
maximum of 2 outdoor units connected at one time for 208-230V/ 3 Phase service.
B.
The VRF (Variable Refrigerant Flow) system shall be a simultaneous cooling and
heating heat pump system. The VRF system shall consist of an outdoor unit, high
efficiency heat recovery units designed for minimum piping and maximum design
flexibility, indoor units, and controls by the equipment manufacturer. Each indoor
unit shall be independently capable of operating in either heating or cooling mode
regardless of the mode of other indoor units.
C.
The variable refrigerant flow system piping system shall be designed by a
manufacturer's certified designer. If Basis-of-Design system is not used, contractor
shall submit fully revised piping layout to engineer, complete with revised locations
and quantities of heat recovery units. Revised piping layout shall be submitted with
equipment submittal for review and approval by engineer. Revised piping layout
shall not affect performance of indoor or outdoor units. The contractor is responsible
for all costs associated with additional review required by engineer.
D.
The variable refrigerant flow system piping system shall be installed by a
manufacturer's certified contractor.
E.
The installing contractor shall be trained and certified at the manufacturer's training
facility prior to installation, start-up, and commissioning. Submit for review the
installation contractor's certification from the manufacturer. This certification shall
include the company certification as well as certifications for each individual which
will be working on this project.
F.
The refrigeration piping system shall be provided, installed, tested, evacuated, and
charged.
15700-1
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
G.
1.03
1.04
SECTION 15700
The installing contractor shall have at least one year experience installing variable
refrigerant flow systems (VRF) similar in size to the individual mechanical systems
on this project. Proof of experience and project work shall be provided with the
submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Field Service - Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing.
B.
The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. All
wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). The units shall
be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001.
C.
The refrigeration piping system shall be provided, installed, tested, evacuated and
charged in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, ANSI, ASHRAE,
and ARI's Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, state and local codes.
D.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Leak Test - After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
2.
Operational Test - After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
E.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
F.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers - Provide products by one of the following:
1.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC - City Multi VRFZ R2-Series
15700-2
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
B.
2.02
SECTION 15700
2.
LG Multi-V Sync II
3.
PANASONIC ECOi 3-way Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Heat Recovery
System.
4. Daikin Industries.
5.
TOSHIBA
6.
TRANE- Advantage VRF
Coordinate any changes from the basis of design with all associated trades. Any
additional costs associated with the alternate equipment shall be covered by the
equipment manufacturer. No additional costs shall be incurred by the Owner.
REFRIGERANT COMPONENTS
A.
The equipment specified in this section shall operate with refrigerant R410A - no
exceptions or substitutions.
B.
The system shall utilize fully modulating electronic expansion valves.
C.
Refrigerant Piping
1.
The refrigerant piping system shall be provided complete and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified
herein and the requirement of 15651. The size of the refrigerant pipes shall
be obtained from the equipment manufacturer unless otherwise shown on
the drawings.
2.
Pipe, Fittings, and Accessories - The pipe shall be type ACR 'L' copper
refrigerant tubing with hard wrought copper fittings. Pipe sized ½ inch and
larger shall be hard drawn. Pipe sized 3/8 inch and smaller can either be
hard or soft drawn. All of the joints shall be brazed with a filler material that
complies with AWS classification BCuP-5. Use type 'L' copper tubing to pipe
the relief valve discharge to the outside.
3.
Condensate Drain Piping - Shall be type 'L' copper tubing.
4.
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Shall be as required in Section 15050.
5.
All refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit to the indoor
terminal units as shown in Section 15250.
6.
The system shall be capable of operating with refrigerant piping up to 492
equivalent feet, a total combined length of 984 feet of piping between the
condensing and fan coil units with 164 feet maximum vertical difference,
15700-3
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15700
without any oil traps or additional equipment. The vertical difference shall not
exceed a maximum of 131 feet where the outdoor unit is located below the
indoor unit.
7.
2.03
The use of GelCopper pre-insulated copper tubing, or approved equal, is
acceptable for use from the refrigerant mains, typically located in corridors, to
the terminal devices in sizes listed for soft copper.
HEAT PUMP CONDENSING UNIT
A.
B.
The outdoor unit will have air cooled heat exchange coils constructed from copper
tubing with aluminum fins. The coils will be set in a vertical formation with air being
drawn in through three sides of the unit and discharged out of the top of the unit. The
systems will have a single fan mounted on top of the coils.
The outdoor unit will have one inverter controlled hermetic compressor. Partial
capacity cooling/heating capability must be available. The system shall use a control
sequence to ensure that indoor loads are matched to compressor capacity control.
C.
The refrigeration process of the outdoor unit will be maintained by pressure and
temperature sensors controlling solenoid valves check valves and bypass valves.
The heating or cooling mode of the outdoor unit will be controlled using a
combination of two- and three-way valves which will reverse the cycle of the
refrigerant to change the mode of the outdoor unit.
D.
The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be variable refrigerant
flow split system. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators using PID control
and inverter driven outdoor unit. The unit shall consist of direct expansion (DX),
air-cooled heat pump air conditioning system, variable speed driven compressor
multi zone split system. The outdoor unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity
of 50-130% to that of the outdoor condensing unit capacity. Each indoor unit shall be
capable of operating separately with individual temperature control.
E.
The outdoor unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit types specified in this section.
The indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor units utilizing the specialized
piping joints and headers provided by the equipment manufacturer.
F.
General - The outdoor unit is designed specifically for use with manufacturers
components:
1.
Refrigerant: R410A.
2.
The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary
electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing
unit shall consist of a compressor, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic
expansion valve, solenoid valves, four-way valve, distribution headers,
capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports, liquid
receivers and accumulators.
15700-4
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15700
3.
Both liquid and suction lines shall be individually insulated between the
outdoor and indoor units.
4.
The outdoor unit shall be wired and piped with outdoor unit access from left,
right, rear, or bottom.
5.
The connection ratio of indoor units to outdoor unit shall be 50% to 130%.
6.
The outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 63 dB(A).
7.
The system shall automatically restart operation after a power failure and
shall not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for
re-programming.
8.
The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side
installation with minimal spacing.
9.
The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit: high
pressure switch, crankcase heaters, high pressure switch, overload relay,
inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan
motors, and over current protection for the inverter. To ensure the liquid
refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various fan coil units, the
circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature. Oil recovery cycle shall
be automatic, occurring one hour after system start up, every six hours of
system operation or as required to maintain oil levels at the system
condensing unit.
10.
The outdoor unit shall operate in heating mode to -4F dry bulb ambient
temperature without additional ambient controls.
G.
Unit Cabinet - The outdoor unit model shall be completely weatherproof and
corrosion resistant. The outdoor unit will be constructed from steel plate and treated
with acrylic paint, or galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a powder coated
baked enamel.
H.
Fan
I.
1.
The condensing unit shall consist of a propeller type, direct-drive fan motor
that has multiple speed operation via a DC inverter.
2.
The fan motors shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated
bearings and be mounted.
3.
The fan motors shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with
moving parts.
Condenser Coil - The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
15700-5
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
J.
K.
2.04
SECTION 15700
Compressor
1.
The compressor shall be variable speed control capable of changing the
speed to follow the variations in total cooling load as determined by the
suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit.
2.
The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be a high
efficiency DC, hermetically sealed compressor.
3.
The capacity control range shall be a minimum of 20% to 100% of total
capacity.
4.
Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure
safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector.
5.
Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an oil
balancing circuit.
6.
The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
Electrical
1.
The power supply to the outdoor unit shall be 208/230 volts, 3 phase, 60
hertz with a voltage range of 187 volts to 253 volts.
2.
The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making
it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unit with one
2-cable shielded communications wire.
HEAT RECOVERY UNITS FOR SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
A.
General - The Heat Recovery Unit shall be designed for use with VRF equipment of
the same manufacturer. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that
interfaces to the controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for
operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The heat recovery unit shall
be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at
the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors. The sum of connected capacity of all
indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of rated capacity.
B.
Unit Cabinet
1.
The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel.
2.
Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration
control valves.
3.
The unit shall house tube-in-tube heat exchangers.
15700-6
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
2.05
SECTION 15700
C.
Refrigerant - R410A refrigerant shall be required for Heat Recovery units in
conjunction with outdoor unit systems.
D.
Refrigerant Valves
1.
The unit shall be furnished with multiple branch circuits which can individually
accommodate up to 54,000 BTUH and/or three indoor units. Branches may
be twinned to allow more than 54,000 BTUH.
2.
Each branch shall have multiple two-position valves to control refrigerant flow
for optimum efficiency.
3.
Service shut-off valves shall be installed for each branch to allow service to
any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. Shut-off
valves shall be full-port ball valves, rated at 700 PSIG, with a Schrader port.
4.
Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable
refrigerant flow.
E.
Integral Drain Pan - A integral condensate pan and drain, if required, shall be
provided.
F.
Electrical
1.
The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz.
2.
The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of
187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253V (230V/60Hz).
3.
The Heat Recovery unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.
4.
The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be
24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide
total integration of the system.
INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
A.
It shall be possible for the total connected capacity of the indoor units to be between
50 and 130% of the capacity of the outdoor unit.
B.
Each indoor unit will have a heat exchanger which shall be constructed from copper
tubing with aluminum fins. The flow of refrigerant through the heat exchanger will be
controlled by an electronic proportional expansion valve. This valve will be controlled
by two pipe thermistors, a return air and discharge air thermistor and shall be
capable of controlling the variable capacity of the indoor unit between 25% and
100%.
15700-7
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15700
C.
Each indoor unit shall have an operating voltage of 208-230V/1 phase/60Hz. The
indoor unit shall supply demand capacity information to the outdoor unit via its
control algorithm.
D.
Four (4) Way Ceiling Cassette Indoor Unit
1.
The indoor unit shall be a ceiling cassette fan coil unit for installation into the
ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grille to be connected to indoor unit
as scheduled and specified in this section. The indoor unit shall have a
four-way air distribution type, impact resistant and washable decoration
panel. The supply air shall be distributed via motorized louvers which can be
horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0 degree to 90 degree angle.
2.
Construction
a.
The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested.
The unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional
expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector,
condensate drain pan, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function,
3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.
b.
The 4-way supply airflow shall be field modifiable to 3-way and 2-way
airflow to accommodate various installation configurations including
corner installations.
Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which shall include a
filter.
c.
3.
d.
The indoor unit shall be equipped with a condensate pan.
e.
The indoor unit shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
f.
The indoor unit shall be separately powered with 208-230V/1
phase/60Hz.
g.
The voltage range shall be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts
minimum.
h.
The indoor unit shall be equipped with a condensate pump capable
of providing at least 19" of lift.
Unit Cabinet
a.
The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the
ceiling.
b.
The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two
sides allowing for simpler corner installation.
15700-8
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
c.
4.
E.
SECTION 15700
Provide fresh air intake kit where used and indicated on the
drawings. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting
supply air.
Fan
a.
The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and
dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds
available.
b.
The indoor unit shall operate with a power supply of 208/230 volts, 1
phase, 60 hertz. The allowable voltage range shall be 187 to 253
volts.
c.
The airflow rate shall be adjustable and have high, medium and low
fan settings.
d.
The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
5.
Filter - The return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life filter.
6.
Coil
a.
Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper
tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b.
A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. The condensate
pan shall have a built in high level safety alarm to shut down the unit.
c.
A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas line.
One (1) Way Ceiling Cassette Indoor Unit
1.
The indoor unit shall be a ceiling cassette fan coil unit for installation into the
ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grille to be connected to indoor unit
as scheduled and specified in this section. The indoor unit shall have a
one-way air distribution type, impact resistant and washable decoration
panel. The supply air shall be distributed via motorized louvers which can be
horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0 degree to 90 degree angle.
2.
Construction
a.
The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested.
The unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional
expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector,
condensate drain pan, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function,
3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.
15700-9
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
b.
Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which shall include a
filter.
c.
The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan.
d.
The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
e.
The indoor unit shall be separately powered with 208-230V/1
phase/60Hz.
f.
The voltage range shall be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts
minimum.
The indoor unit shall be equipped with a condensate pump capable
of providing at least 23" of lift.
g.
3.
4.
SECTION 15700
Unit Cabinet
a.
The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the
ceiling.
b.
Provide fresh air intake kit where used and indicated on the
drawings. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting
supply air.
Fan
a.
b.
The fan shall be direct-drive fan type with statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
The indoor unit shall operate with a power supply of 208/230 volts, 1
phase, 60 hertz. The allowable voltage range shall be 187 to 253
volts.
c.
The airflow rate shall be adjustable and have high, medium and low
fan settings.
d.
The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
5.
Filter - The return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life filter.
6.
Coil
a.
Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper
tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b.
A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. The coil in the
condensate pan shall have a built in high level safety alarm to shut
down the unit.
15700-10
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
c.
2.06
2.07
SECTION 15700
A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas line.
CONTROLS
A.
The units shall have controls provided with the unit by the manufacturer to perform
input functions necessary to operate the system.
B.
Computerized PID control shall be used to maintain room temperature within 1F of
setpoint.
CONTROLLERS
A.
Physical Characteristics - The control system shall be a neutral color plastic material
with a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
B.
Electrical Characteristics
C.
D.
1.
General - From each circuit board to the controls, the electrical voltage shall
be 16 - 24 volts DC.
2.
Wiring: Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from
indoor unit to indoor unit then to the outdoor unit. Control wiring shall run
from the indoor unit terminal block to the specific controller for that unit.
3.
Wiring Size: The wire shall be a shielded, size AWG16-2 or AWG 18-2.
Individual Zone Controller
1.
The simplified wired remote controller shall be able to control 1 group
(maximum of 16 fan coil units).
2.
The simplified wired remote controller shall have the following features:
a.
Operation - Start/Stop, Operation Mode, Temperature Setting, 60F 90F Set Point Range, Fan Speed, Airflow Direction.
b.
Monitoring - Status, malfunction flashing, malfunction content, filter
sign, operation mode, temperature setting, permit/prohibit selection,
fan speed, airflow direction.
c.
Scheduling - ON/OFF Timer.
d.
Control Management - Field Setting Mode, Group Setting, Auto
Restart.
Centralized Controller
1.
The Centralized Controller shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 50
indoor units across multiple outdoor units. Centralized controller shall have a
15700-11
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15700
color LCD touch-screen. The Centralized Controller shall support system
configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, night
setback settings, free contact interlock configuration and malfunction
monitoring. The Centralized Controller shall have five basic operation controls
which can be applied to an individual indoor unit, a group of indoor units (up to
50 indoor units), or all indoor units (collective batch operation). This basic set of
operation controls for the Centralized controller shall include on/off, operation
mode selection (cool, heat, auto, dry, and fan), temperature setting, fan speed
setting, and airflow direction setting. The Centralized Controller shall allow the
user to define both daily and weekly schedules with operations consisting of
ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, air flow (vane) direction, fan
speed, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers.
2.
E.
BACnet Interface to Building Automation System
1.
F.
The cooling and heating BACnet7 interface shall be compliant with BACnet7
Protocol (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004) and be Certified by the (BTL) BACnet7
Testing Laboratories. The BACnet7 interface shall support BACnet Broadcast
Management (BBMD). The BACnet7 interface shall support a maximum of 50
indoor units. Operation and monitoring points include, but are not limited to,
space temperature, space temperature setpoint, on/off, operation mode, fan
speed, prohibit remote controller, filter sign reset, alarm state, error code and
error address.
Control Panel
1.
G.
The functions of the Centralized Controller shall be accessible through the Web
via a Web gateway in the Operator Interface Software as described in 15900
2.05 I2. Any required hardware or software for this access shall be provided by
the VRF manufacturer. The Centralized Controller shall be connected to the
buildings Local Area Network (LAN).
This contractor shall deliver the components of the centralized controllers and
the BACnet interface devices to the Division 15900 contractor. It is the
responsibility of the Division 15900 contractor to construct the control panel,
housing these components in compliance with 15900 specification 2.02F.
Indoor Unit Sequence of Operations
1.
On/Off Control - the indoor units shall be commanded ON/OFF by the BAS. If all
indoor units are off, the outdoor unit shall turn off. With the Night Setback
Function/Mode, the system shall cycle on during unoccupied periods as needed
to maintain unoccupied temperature setpoint of 55°F (adjustable).
2.
Space Temperature Control - the indoor unit shall modulate its internal linear
expansion valve (LEV) to maintain the temperature setpoint via the indoor unit’s
internal controls.
a.
The setpoint is provided and adjustable through the BAS interface.
15700-12
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
b.
3.
SECTION 15700
The temperature setpoint provided through the BAS interface shall
additionally be adjustable to a maximum of ±2°F from that setpoint using
the room controller.
Mode Control
a.
Auto Mode
1)
The indoor unit shall determine whether it should be in autoheat mode or auto-cool mode based on space temperature
relative to temperature setpoint. If the indoor unit is in auto-heat
mode, the indoor unit control board shall follow the heat mode
sequence. If the indoor unit is in auto-cool mode, the indoor unit
control board shall follow the cool mode sequence.
2)
The indoor unit shall switch from auto-heat to auto-cool when
the space temperature rises above and remains above the
temperature setpoint plus the dead band for 3 minutes.
3)
The indoor unit will switch from auto-cool to auto-heat when the
space temperature drops below and remains below the
temperature setpoint minus the dead band for 3 minutes.
b.
Heating Mode - the indoor unit shall modulate its linear expansion valve
(LEV) to maintain temperature setpoint of 71°F (adjustable).
c.
Cooling Mode - the indoor unit shall modulate its linear expansion valve
(LEV) to maintain temperature setpoint of 74°F (adjustable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install all piping, fittings, and insulation to meet manufacturers requirements. Install
units level and plumb. Evaporator-fan components shall be installed using
manufacturers standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.
Install and connect refrigerant tubing and fittings.
B.
Installer shall supply isolation ball valves for zoned refrigerant isolation. Installer
shall supply Isolation ball valves with Schrader connection for isolating refrigerant
charge and evacuation at each connected air handling unit and condensing unit.
Isolation ball valves, with Schrader connection, are required for instances of air
handling unit isolation for troubleshooting, repair, or replacement without affecting
the remainder of the system. Isolation ball valves with Schrader connection are also
required at condensing unit connection to isolate unit for troubleshooting, repair or
replacement and as required to provide partial capacity Heating/Cooling in the
instance of a failure of one of the multiple outdoor unit (condensing unit)
compressors.
15700-13
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15700
C.
During brazing an inert gas (such as nitrogen) shall be continuously passed through
the system at a rate sufficient to maintain an oxygen free environment to prevent the
formation of copper oxide scale. After piping has been completed, the refrigerant
piping system shall be pressure tested at a pressure of 300 psi on the high side and
150 psi on the low side. The pressure shall be maintained on the system for a
minimum of 12 hours. The system shall be evacuated when the surrounding
ambient air is not less than 60 F. If the temperature is less, auxiliary heat must be
provided to insure proper evacuating conditions. A minimum vacuum of 500 Microns
of Hg. shall be pulled on the system and maintained for 12 hours. The vacuum
pump displacement shall be not less than 2 cfm for up to 15 tons. The system shall
be charged as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Owner/Engineer shall
be notified to witness both the pressure and vacuum tests.
D.
Electrical wiring required by this section, both high and low voltage, shall comply with
the Division 16 requirements.
E.
Start Up - Engage manufacturer or factory-authorized service representative to
perform startup service.
Manufacturer shall provide on-site startup and
commissioning assistance through job completion. Complete installation and startup
checks according to manufacturers written instructions. This shall include a factory
startup for factory provided control devices as well as configuring control points for
other DO devices. Service representative shall completely configure all control
devices and establish remote internet connectivity with the owner’s energy
management department web server.
F.
Demonstration - Engage manufacturer or factory-authorized service representative
to demonstrate and instruct the owner’s maintenance personnel of the operation and
functionality of the system.
G.
Training - Engage manufacturer or factory authorized service representative to train
owner’s maintenance personnel for a period of 2 days, to adjust, operate and
maintain individual units and complete system. This shall also include training of the
owner’s energy management department representatives as to establish control
system programming, scheduling routines, alarm reporting, system topography,
communication protocols and password level assignments.
This training shall take place on-site and at the owner’s maintenance facility at 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax VA 22032.
H.
The indoor air handling and outside condensing units shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the
drawings. The first unit installed will be considered the typical mock up and shall
require notification, inspection and approval by the designated owner representative
and/or architect and engineer before any additional installations will be allowed.
I.
Provide laminated as built drawings and manufacturer’s refrigeration piping layout
showing typical layout of the system. This shall include the actual room numbers, not
from construction documents, and addressing scheme. Laminate shall have
15700-14
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15700
minimum thickness of 10 mil. Drawing size shall be 11”x17”. Provide multiple
drawings should zones not fit into one page. These will be mounted in the water
heater room unless otherwise shown.
J.
Refrigerant distribution (BC) controllers shall include a label affixed to the controllers
which identifies the room or rooms served such as “VRF-A1, A125” for each line set
on the controller. Use the actual room numbers and not room numbers from
construction documents. Identification labels shall be BROTHER type “P-TOUCH”,
white tape with upper case letters, minimum ½ high block lettering, and black printing
and shall be located on the bottom of the branch controller next to each pipe run.
K.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, to be included in the
O&M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size, and the number
of filters required for each unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional
copies of the list, distributed to:
L.
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church, VA
22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia 22032.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each condensing unit. Tag is to be screwed or riveted
to unit. Identification tag shall be black with engraved ½ " white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
M.
(month/day/year)
This contractor is responsible for the completion and approval of documents required
by the manufacturer to initiate the warranty. In any instance where the
manufacturer’s warranty is pulled due to the incorrect installation or workmanship,
the terms of this warranty become this contractor’s responsibility.
END OF SECTION
15700-15
11/17
SECTION 15701
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
(For Building Additions)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include the following:
A.
Complete variable refrigerant flow system including equipment, piping, and controls.
System shall be a VRF (variable refrigerant flow) multi split air conditioning system.
The system will utilize an air cooled condensing unit supplying a maximum of forty
indoor fan coil units with combinations of outdoor units 3 - 25 ton capacity with a
maximum of 2 outdoor units connected at one time for 208-230V/ 3 Phase service.
B.
The VRF (Variable Refrigerant Flow) system shall be a simultaneous cooling and
heating heat pump system. The VRF system shall consist of an outdoor unit, high
efficiency heat recovery units designed for minimum piping and maximum design
flexibility, indoor units, and controls by the equipment manufacturer. Each indoor
unit shall be independently capable of operating in either heating or cooling mode
regardless of the mode of other indoor units.
C.
The variable refrigerant flow system piping system shall be designed by a
manufacturer's certified designer. If Basis-of-Design system is not used, contractor
shall submit fully revised piping layout to engineer, complete with revised locations
and quantities of heat recovery units. Revised piping layout shall be submitted with
equipment submittal for review and approval by engineer. Revised piping layout
shall not affect performance of indoor or outdoor units. The contractor is responsible
for all costs associated with additional review required by engineer.
D.
The variable refrigerant flow system piping system shall be installed by a
manufacturer's certified contractor.
E.
The installing contractor shall be trained and certified at the manufacturer's training
facility prior to installation, start-up, and commissioning. Submit for review the
installation contractor's certification from the manufacturer. This certification shall
include the company certification as well as individual certifications for each
individual which will be working on this project.
F.
The refrigeration piping system shall be provided, installed, tested, evacuated, and
charged.
15701-1
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
G.
1.03
1.04
SECTION 15701
The installing contractor shall have at least one year experience installing variable
refrigerant flow systems (VRF) similar in size to the individual mechanical systems
on this project. Proof of experience and project work shall be provided with the
submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Field Service - Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing.
B.
The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. All
wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). The units shall
be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001.
C.
The refrigeration piping system shall be provided, installed, tested, evacuated and
charged in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, ANSI, ASHRAE,
and ARI's Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, state and local codes.
D.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Leak Test - After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
2.
Operational Test - After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
E.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
F.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15701-2
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.02
SECTION 15701
Manufacturers - Provide products by one of the following:
1.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC - City Multi VRFZ R2-Series
2.
LG Multi-V Sync II
3.
PANASONIC ECOi 3-way Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Heat Recovery
System.
4.
Daikin Industries.
5.
TOSHIBA
6.
TRANE – Advantage VRF
Coordinate any changes from the basis of design with all associated trades. Any
additional costs associated with the alternate equipment shall be covered by the
equipment manufacturer. No additional costs shall be incurred by the Owner.
REFRIGERANT COMPONENTS
A.
The equipment specified in this section shall operate with refrigerant R410A - no
exceptions or substitutions.
B.
The system shall utilize fully modulating electronic expansion valves.
C.
Refrigerant Piping
1.
The refrigerant piping system shall be provided complete and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified
herein. The size of the refrigerant pipes shall be obtained from the
equipment manufacturer unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
2.
Pipe, Fittings, and Accessories - The pipe shall be type ACR 'L' copper
refrigerant tubing with hard wrought copper fittings. Pipe sized ½ inch and
larger shall be hard drawn. Pipe sized 3/8 inch and smaller can either be
hard or soft drawn. All of the joints shall be brazed with a filler material that
complies with AWS classification BCuP-5. Use type 'L' copper tubing to pipe
the relief valve discharge to the outside.
3.
Condensate Drain Piping - Shall be type 'L' copper tubing.
4.
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Shall be as required in Section 15050.
5.
All refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit to the indoor
terminal units as shown in Section 15250.
15701-3
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
2.03
SECTION 15701
6.
The system shall be capable of operating with refrigerant piping up to 492
equivalent feet, a total combined length of 984 feet of piping between the
condensing and fan coil units with 164 feet maximum vertical difference,
without any oil traps or additional equipment. The vertical difference shall not
exceed a maximum of 131 feet where the outdoor unit is located below the
indoor unit.
7.
The use of GelCopper pre-insulated copper tubing, or approved equal, is
acceptable for use from the refrigerant mains, typically located in corridors, to
the terminal devices in sizes listed for soft copper.
HEAT PUMP CONDENSING UNIT
A.
The outdoor unit will have air cooled heat exchange coils constructed from copper
tubing with aluminum fins. The coils will be set in a vertical formation with air being
drawn in through three sides of the unit and discharged out of the top of the unit. The
systems will have a single fan mounted on top of the coils.
B.
The outdoor unit will have one inverter controlled hermetic compressor. Partial
capacity cooling/heating capability must be available. The system shall use a control
sequence to ensure that indoor loads are matched to compressor capacity control.
C.
The refrigeration process of the outdoor unit will be maintained by pressure and
temperature sensors controlling solenoid valves check valves and bypass valves.
The heating or cooling mode of the outdoor unit will be controlled using a
combination of two- and three-way valves which will reverse the cycle of the
refrigerant to change the mode of the outdoor unit.
D.
The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be variable refrigerant
flow split system. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators using PID control
and inverter driven outdoor unit. The unit shall consist of direct expansion (DX),
air-cooled heat pump air conditioning system, variable speed driven compressor
multi zone split system. The outdoor unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity
of 50-130% to that of the outdoor condensing unit capacity. Each indoor unit shall be
capable of operating separately with individual temperature control.
E.
The outdoor unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit types specified in this section.
The indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor units utilizing the specialized
piping joints and headers provided by the equipment manufacturer.
F.
General - The outdoor unit is designed specifically for use with manufacturers
components:
1.
Refrigerant: R410A.
2.
The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary
electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing
15701-4
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15701
unit shall consist of a compressor, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic
expansion valve, solenoid valves, four-way valve, distribution headers,
capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports, liquid
receivers and accumulators.
3.
Both liquid and suction lines shall be individually insulated between the
outdoor and indoor units.
4.
The outdoor unit shall be wired and piped with outdoor unit access from left,
right, rear, or bottom.
5.
The connection ratio of indoor units to outdoor unit shall be 50% to 130%.
6.
The outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 63 dB(A).
7.
The system shall automatically restart operation after a power failure and
shall not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for
re-programming.
8.
The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side
installation with minimal spacing.
9.
The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit: high
pressure switch, crankcase heaters, high pressure switch, overload relay,
inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan
motors, and over current protection for the inverter. To ensure the liquid
refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various fan coil units, the
circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature. Oil recovery cycle shall
be automatic, occurring one hour after system start up, every six hours of
system operation or as required to maintain oil levels at the system
condensing unit.
10.
The outdoor unit shall operate in heating mode to -4F dry bulb ambient
temperature without additional ambient controls.
G.
Unit Cabinet - The outdoor unit model shall be completely weatherproof and
corrosion resistant. The outdoor unit will be constructed from steel plate and treated
with acrylic paint, or galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a powder coated
baked enamel.
H.
Fan
1.
The condensing unit shall consist of a propeller type, direct-drive fan motor
that has multiple speed operation via a DC inverter.
2.
The fan motors shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated
bearings and be mounted.
15701-5
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
3.
The fan motors shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with
moving parts.
I.
Condenser Coil - The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
J.
Compressor
K.
2.04
SECTION 15701
1.
The compressor shall be variable speed control capable of changing the
speed to follow the variations in total cooling load as determined by the
suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit.
2.
The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be a high
efficiency DC, hermetically sealed compressor.
3.
The capacity control range shall be a minimum of 20% to 100% of total
capacity.
4.
Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure
safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector.
5.
Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an oil
balancing circuit.
6.
The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
Electrical
1.
The power supply to the outdoor unit shall be 208/230 volts, 3 phase, 60
hertz with a voltage range of 187 volts to 253 volts.
2.
The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making
it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unit with one
2-cable shielded communications wire.
HEAT RECOVERY UNITS FOR SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
A.
General - The Heat Recovery Unit shall be designed for use with VRF equipment of
the same manufacturer. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that
interfaces to the controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for
operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The heat recovery unit shall
be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at
the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors. The sum of connected capacity of all
indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of rated capacity.
B.
Unit Cabinet
1.
The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel.
15701-6
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
2.05
SECTION 15701
2.
Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration
control valves.
3.
The unit shall house tube-in-tube heat exchangers.
C.
Refrigerant - R410A refrigerant shall be required for Heat Recovery units in
conjunction with outdoor unit systems.
D.
Refrigerant Valves
1.
The unit shall be furnished with multiple branch circuits which can individually
accommodate up to 54,000 BTUH and/or three indoor units. Branches may
be twinned to allow more than 54,000 BTUH.
2.
Each branch shall have multiple two-position valves to control refrigerant flow
for optimum efficiency.
3.
Service shut-off valves shall be installed for each branch to allow service to
any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. Shut-off
valves shall be full-port ball valves, rated at 700 PSIG, with a Schrader port.
4.
Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable
refrigerant flow.
E.
Integral Drain Pan - A integral condensate pan and drain, if required, shall be
provided.
F.
Electrical
1.
The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz.
2.
The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of
187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253V (230V/60Hz).
3.
The Heat Recovery unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.
4.
The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be
24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide
total integration of the system.
INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
A.
It shall be possible for the total connected capacity of the indoor units to be between
50 and 130% of the capacity of the outdoor unit.
B.
Each indoor unit will have a heat exchanger which shall be constructed from copper
tubing with aluminum fins. The flow of refrigerant through the heat exchanger will be
15701-7
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15701
controlled by an electronic proportional expansion valve. This valve will be controlled
by two pipe thermistors, a return air and discharge air thermistor and shall be
capable of controlling the variable capacity of the indoor unit between 25% and
100%.
C.
Each indoor unit shall have an operating voltage of 208-230V/1 phase/60Hz. The
indoor unit shall supply demand capacity information to the outdoor unit via its
control algorithm.
D.
Four (4) Way Ceiling Cassette Indoor Unit
1.
The indoor unit shall be a ceiling cassette fan coil unit for installation into the
ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grille to be connected to indoor unit
as scheduled and specified in this section. The indoor unit shall have a
four-way air distribution type, impact resistant and washable decoration
panel. The supply air shall be distributed via motorized louvers which can be
horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0 degree to 90 degree angle.
2.
Construction
a.
The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested.
The unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional
expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector,
condensate drain pan, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function,
3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.
b.
The 4-way supply airflow shall be field modifiable to 3-way and 2-way
airflow to accommodate various installation configurations including
corner installations.
Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which shall include a
filter.
c.
3.
d.
The indoor unit shall be equipped with a condensate pan.
e.
The indoor unit shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
f.
The indoor unit shall be separately powered with 208-230V/1
phase/60Hz.
g.
The voltage range shall be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts
minimum.
h.
The indoor unit shall be equipped with a condensate pump capable
of providing at least 19" of lift.
Unit Cabinet
15701-8
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
4.
E.
SECTION 15701
a.
The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the
ceiling.
b.
The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two
sides allowing for simpler corner installation.
c.
Provide fresh air intake kit where used and indicated on the
drawings. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting
supply air.
Fan
a.
The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and
dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds
available.
b.
The indoor unit shall operate with a power supply of 208/230 volts, 1
phase, 60 hertz. The allowable voltage range shall be 187 to 253
volts.
c.
The airflow rate shall be adjustable and have high, medium and low
fan settings.
d.
The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
5.
Filter - The return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life filter.
6.
Coil
a.
Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper
tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b.
A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. The condensate
pan shall have a built in high level safety alarm to shut down the unit.
c.
A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas line.
One (1) Way Ceiling Cassette Indoor Unit
1.
The indoor unit shall be a ceiling cassette fan coil unit for installation into the
ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grille to be connected to indoor unit
as scheduled and specified in this section. The indoor unit shall have a
one-way air distribution type, impact resistant and washable decoration
panel. The supply air shall be distributed via motorized louvers which can be
horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0 degree to 90 degree angle.
2.
Construction
15701-9
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
3.
4.
SECTION 15701
a.
The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested.
The unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional
expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector,
condensate drain pan, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function,
3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.
b.
Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which shall include a
filter.
c.
The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan.
d.
The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
e.
The indoor unit shall be separately powered with 208-230V/1
phase/60Hz.
f.
The voltage range shall be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts
minimum.
g.
The indoor unit shall be equipped with a condensate pump capable
of providing at least 23" of lift.
Unit Cabinet
a.
The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the
ceiling.
b.
Provide fresh air intake kit where used and indicated on the
drawings. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting
supply air.
Fan
a.
The fan shall be direct-drive fan type with statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
b.
The indoor unit shall operate with a power supply of 208/230 volts, 1
phase, 60 hertz. The allowable voltage range shall be 187 to 253
volts.
c.
The airflow rate shall be adjustable and have high, medium and low
fan settings.
d.
The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
5.
Filter - The return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life filter.
6.
Coil
15701-10
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
2.06
2.07
SECTION 15701
a.
Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper
tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b.
A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. The coil in the
condensate pan shall have a built in high level safety alarm to shut
down the unit.
c.
A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas line.
CONTROLS
A.
The units shall have controls provided with the unit by the manufacturer to perform
input functions necessary to operate the system.
B.
Computerized PID control shall be used to maintain room temperature within 1F of
setpoint.
CONTROLLERS
A.
Physical Characteristics - The control system shall be a neutral color plastic material
with a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
B.
Electrical Characteristics
C.
1.
General - From each circuit board to the controls, the electrical voltage shall
be 16 - 24 volts DC.
2.
Wiring: Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from
indoor unit to indoor unit then to the outdoor unit. Control wiring shall run
from the indoor unit terminal block to the specific controller for that unit.
3.
Wiring Size: The wire shall be a shielded, size AWG16-2 or AWG 18-2.
Individual Zone Controller - Wired Remote Controller
1.
The wired remote controller shall be able to control 1 group (maximum of 16
fan coil units) and shall be able to function as follows:
a.
The controller shall have a self diagnosis function that constantly
monitors the system for malfunctions (total of 80 components).
b.
The controller shall be able to immediately display fault location and
condition.
c.
An LCD digital display shall allow the temperature to be set in 1F
units.
15701-11
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
d.
2.
D.
E.
SECTION 15701
The controller shall be equipped with a thermostat sensor in the
remote controller making possible more comfortable room
temperature control.
The wired remote controller shall have the following features:
a.
Operation - Start/Stop, Operation Mode, Temperature Setting, 60F 90F setpoint Range, Fan Speed, Airflow Direction.
b.
Monitoring - Status, malfunction flashing, malfunction content, filter
sign, operation mode, temperature setting, permit/prohibit selection,
fan speed, airflow direction.
c.
Scheduling - ON/OFF Timer
d.
Control Management - Field Setting Mode, Group Setting, Auto
Restart
Individual Zone Controller B Simplified Wired Remote Controller
1.
The simplified wired remote controller shall be able to control 1 group
(maximum of 16 fan coil units).
2.
The simplified wired remote controller shall have the following features:
a.
Operation - Start/Stop, Operation Mode, Temperature Setting, 60F 90F Set Point Range, Fan Speed, Airflow Direction.
b.
Monitoring - Status, malfunction flashing, malfunction content, filter
sign, operation mode, temperature setting, permit/prohibit selection,
fan speed, airflow direction.
c.
Scheduling - ON/OFF Timer.
d.
Control Management - Field Setting Mode, Group Setting, Auto
Restart.
System Remote Controller - The controller shall control up to 50 units in 4 zones and
shall be able to be used in conjunction with all room controller types. Collective and
individual group commands are available with permit/prohibit individual remote
controller function. The system controller shall use the following connections for
power and remote monitoring:
L1:
C1:
C3:
C4:
A1:
Power supply (60 Hz, 208-230 VAC)
Inter-unit control wiring (Low voltage)
Auxiliary
Ground for inter-unit control wiring
Input for turning ON air conditioners concurrently
15701-12
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
A2:
A3:
B1:
B2:
B3:
F.
SECTION 15701
Input for turning OFF air conditioners concurrently
Common input for turning air conditioners ON or OFF
On operation state indicator output
Alarm indicator output
Common indicator output
Web Enabled Intelligent Controller
1.
2.
3.
This controller shall be wall mounted and hard wired. It will be manufactured
with an LCD display and will be the manufacturers standard color. The
controller will be capable of individually controlling the following functions on
at least 50 indoor fan coil units:
a.
On/off.
b.
Operating mode.
c.
Set point.
d.
Fan speed.
e.
Louver position.
f.
Timer settings.
g.
Test run.
The controller shall also be capable of displaying the following information
individually for at least 50 indoor fan coil units:
a.
On/off.
b.
Operating mode.
c.
Set point.
d.
Fan speed.
e.
Louver position.
f.
Timer settings.
g.
Test run.
h.
Fault diagnosis.
Each Intelligent controller unit shall be accessed both locally and remotely
via standard Internet Explorer IE6 or IE7 software. The Intelligent controller
15701-13
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15701
will be able to indicate system alarms via volt free contacts as well as
providing control points for other DO devices. Additionally, the intelligent
controller shall be able to monitor individual usage of heating and cooling
demands, report alarm and conditions to nominated email address, and
enable remote alteration of systems setpoints and schedules..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install all piping, fittings, and insulation to meet manufacturers requirements. Install
units level and plumb. Evaporator-fan components shall be installed using
manufacturers standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.
Install and connect refrigerant tubing and fittings.
B.
Installer shall supply isolation ball valves for zoned refrigerant isolation. Installer
shall supply Isolation ball valves with Schrader connection for isolating refrigerant
charge and evacuation at each connected air handling unit and condensing unit.
Isolation ball valves, with Schrader connection, are required for instances of air
handling unit isolation for troubleshooting, repair, or replacement without affecting
the remainder of the system. Isolation ball valves with Schrader connection are also
required at condensing unit connection to isolate unit for troubleshooting, repair or
replacement and as required to provide partial capacity Heating/Cooling in the
instance of a failure of one of the multiple outdoor unit (condensing unit)
compressors.
C.
During brazing an inert gas (such as nitrogen) shall be continuously passed through
the system at a rate sufficient to maintain an oxygen free environment to prevent the
formation of copper oxide scale. After piping has been completed, the refrigerant
piping system shall be pressure tested at a pressure of 300 psi on the high side and
150 psi on the low side. The pressure shall be maintained on the system for a
minimum of 12 hours. The system shall be evacuated when the surrounding
ambient air is not less than 60 F. If the temperature is less, auxiliary heat must be
provided to insure proper evacuating conditions. A minimum vacuum of 500 Microns
of Hg. shall be pulled on the system and maintained for 12 hours. The vacuum
pump displacement shall be not less than 2 cfm for up to 15 tons. The system shall
be charged as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Owner/Engineer shall
be notified to witness both the pressure and vacuum tests.
D.
Electrical wiring required by this section, both high and low voltage, shall comply with
the Division 16 requirements.
E.
Start Up - Engage manufacturer or factory-authorized service representative to
perform startup service.
Manufacturer shall provide on-site startup and
commissioning assistance through job completion. Complete installation and startup
checks according to manufacturers written instructions. This shall include a factory
startup for factory provided control devices as well as configuring control points for
other DO devices. Service representative shall completely configure all control
15701-14
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
SECTION 15701
devices and establish remote internet connectivity with the owner’s energy
management department web server.
F.
Demonstration - Engage manufacturer or factory authorized service representative to
demonstrate and instruct the owner’s maintenance personnel of the operation and
functionality of the system.
G.
Training - Engage manufacturer or factory authorized service representative to train
owner’s maintenance personnel for a period of 2 days, to adjust, operate and
maintain individual units and complete system. This shall also include training of the
owner’s energy management department representatives as to establish control
system programming, scheduling routines, alarm reporting, system topography,
communication protocols and password level assignments.
This training shall take place on-site and at the owner’s maintenance facility at 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax VA 22032.
H.
The indoor air handling and outside condensing units shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the
drawings. The first unit installed will be considered the typical mock up and shall
require notification, inspection and approval by the designated owner representative
and/or architect and engineer before any additional installations will be allowed.
I.
Provide laminated as built drawings and manufacturer’s refrigeration piping layout
showing typical layout of the system. This shall include the actual room numbers, not
from construction documents, and addressing scheme. Laminate shall have
minimum thickness of 10 mil. Drawing size shall be 11”x17”. Provide multiple
drawings should zones not fit into one page. These will be mounted in the water
heater room unless otherwise shown.
J.
Refrigerant distribution (BC) controllers shall include a label affixed to the controllers
which identifies the room or rooms served for each line set on the controller. Use the
actual room numbers and not room numbers from construction documents.
K.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, to be included in the
O&M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size, and the number
of filters required for each unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional
copies of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church, VA
22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia 22032.
15701-15
11/17
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
L.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each condensing unit. Tag is to be screwed or riveted
to unit. Identification tag shall be black with engraved ½ " white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
M.
SECTION 15701
This contractor
required by the
manufacturer’s
workmanship,
responsibility.
(month/day/year)
is responsible for the completion and approval of documents
manufacturer to initiate the warranty. In any instance where the
warranty is pulled due to the incorrect installation or
the terms of this warranty become this contractor’s
END OF SECTION
15701-16
11/17
SECTION 15702
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall
apply to this section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include the following:
1.03
A.
Complete chilled water piping systems.
B.
Complete hot water piping systems.
C.
Complete condenser water piping systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The piping system shall be tested for leaks before the insulation is applied and before the
piping system is covered up. The test shall be at least 100 psi of water pressure for a
duration of 12 hours.
All grooved couplings, and fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a
single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved
components.
All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped
for quality assurance and traceability.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. Shop
drawings shall include proposed uses of all items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING AND FITTINGS
A.
Hot water supply and return: Shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe with 125 psi
cast iron screwed fittings or 150 psi steel weld fittings.
15702-1
11/17
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
1. B.
SECTION 15702
Type “L” copper tubing with copper fittings is acceptable for piping 2” and
under.
Chilled water supply and return: Shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe with 125
psi cast iron screwed fittings or 150 psi steel weld fittings.
1. Type “L” copper tubing with copper fittings is acceptable for piping 2” and
under.
C.
Cold water make-up - Shall be type 'L' copper tubing with copper fittings.
D. Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved
components may be used as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods.
All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer and conform to local code
approval. Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified. Grooved
couplings shall meet the requirements of ASTM F-1476. Grooved components
shall be manufactured by VICTAULIC. Grooved components manufactured by
GRINNELL or ANVIL INT. are acceptable providing all aspects of the
specification are met. No substitutions.
1.
Carbon steel piping shall be roll grooved in accordance with
manufacturers current listed standard.
2.
Mechanical couplings for grooved piping shall be cast of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, and ASTM A-536, grade 6545-12. Couplings shall be rigid style and be of the angle patterned bolt
pad type, and shall provide system support and hanging requirements in
accordance with ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.4 and NFPA 13. Coupling bolts
and nuts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon steel
track head conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-183. Mechanical
couplings shall be coated with an alkyd enamel finish.
3.
Gaskets for grooved pipe and fittings shall be grade “E” EPDM compound
conforming to ASTM D-2000 designation 2CA615A25B24F17Z.
4.
Rigid Type: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads
shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in
accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.9, with Victaulic Style 107H/107N
(Quick-Vic), Installation ready rigid coupling for direct stab installation
without field disassembly. Gasket shall be Grade "EHP" EPDM designed
for operating temperatures from -30 deg F to +250 deg F.
5.
Grooved fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395,
grade 65-45-15, and ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12, wrought steel to
ASTM A234, Grade WPB; or factory-fabricated from ASTM A53 steel
pipe. Grooved fittings shall be coated with an alkyd enamel finish.
Grooved fittings shall be full flow.
15702-2
11/17
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
2.02
SECTION 15702
E.
Condensate drain piping: Shall be type 'L' copper tubing and fittings.
F.
Runouts to terminal units with copper pipe connections: Type 'L' hard drawn
copper tubing shall be used for runouts where required. A brass coupling shall
be used between the steel pipe and copper tubing connection.
G.
Hot water supply and return under slab - Each piece of equipment shall have
separate runouts and shall be type 'K' continuous copper pipe with no joints
allowed below slab. All joints above slab shall be made with copper brazing rods.
The entire underground pipe system shall be inside a minimum 6" round
schedule 40 plastic pipe sleeve. Pipe shall be insulated; see section 15250.
H.
Condensing water supply and return piping - Shall be schedule 40 black steel
pipe with 125 psi cast iron screwed fittings or 150 psi steel weld fittings inside of
the building and schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe and fittings for outdoors.
I.
The use of running or close nipples is prohibited.
VALVES
Valves shall be manufactured by VICTAULIC, STOCKHAM, JENKINS, HAMMOND,
JOMAR, MILWAUKEE, FAIRBANKS, CRANE, CONBRACO INDUSTRIES, INC.,
APOLLO VALVES, LUNKENHEIMER, WALWORTH, NIBCO, JAMESBURY or
ROCKWELL unless otherwise noted. STOCKHAM catalog numbers are listed to identify
quality and style Valves shall be rated for the medium served.
A.
Gate valves 2 1/2" and smaller: Shall be cast bronze body, sweat type or screwed
ends and solid wedge disc with rising stem, STOCKHAM #B108.
B.
Gate valves larger than 2 1/2" - Shall be iron body flanged ends and solid wedge
disc with rising stem (O S & Y type),STOCKHAM #G623.
C.
Globe valves 2 1/2" and smaller: Shall be cast bronze body, sweat type or
screwed ends and replaceable composition disc,STOCKHAM #B24T.
D.
Check valves 2 1/2" or smaller: Shall be cast bronze body swing check with
either screwed ends or sweat type and with regrinding disc,STOCKHAM #B319
or B309.
E.
Check valves larger than 2 1/2" - Shall be flanged iron body with bronze disc and
ring,STOCKHAM #G931.
F.
Non-Slam check valves - Shall be used for all vertical applications and on pump
discharge piping and shall be flanged iron body with bronze disc, wafer check,
NIBCO #F-910 for 2 1/2” and larger or W-910 for under 2” and smaller.
15702-3
11/17
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
2.03
SECTION 15702
G.
Butterfly valves - 2" and larger may be used in lieu of gate or globe valves except
at boiler supply and return pipe. These valves shall be rated at not less than 150
psi WOG Class and be suitable for use with 180°F water. Shall be lug type for
pipe removal on either side of valve, shall have stainless steel shafts and shall
have 4" extended stem lengths for all size valves. Stockham #LD611.
H.
Ball valves: 2" and smaller may be used in lieu of gate or globe valves. These
valves shall be bronze, rated at not less than 150 psi WOG Class,full port, solid
chrome plated ball design and stem, blow out proof stem. Be suitable for use with
180-degree water and provided with extended insulated handles. Stockham
#S216. Extended insulated handles shall be APOLLO VALVES “Therma-Seal” or
NIBCO “ Nib-seal”.
I.
Balancing valves: Valves manufactured by FLOWSET, GRISWOLD, GERAND,
DANFOSS, FLOW-PAC, NUTECH, BARCO or PRESO with memory stop,
positive shutoff, extended insulated handle and P/T type ports for balancing.
Flowset model AS size 1/2" to 2" flow .25 GPM to 100 GPM. For all units with
runouts 2" and smaller.
J.
Constant volume flow valves – VICTAULIC, GRISWOLD, AUTOFLOW or
FLOWSET, automatic pressure-connecting spring and cartridge type valves with
quick disconnect pressure taps. For all units with pipe size 2 1/2" and larger with
GPM capacity shown.
K.
Valve Operating Chains: Valves installed six feet or more above finished floor in
boiler rooms or mechanical rooms shall be chain operated. Provide chain and
chain wheel with chain guide of size required, as manufactured by STOCKHAM.
L.
Balance valve for pump: Eccentric, combination shut-off and balancing with
memory stop valve as manufactured by DEZURIK or ROCKWELL.
M.
Provide metering device in boiler room or in pump room for measuring pump flow
rates, for systems piping a minimum of 20 feet (measured along pipe length) from
pump discharge or just before pipe exits room, whichever is greater. Provide
extended metering taps on metering devices. Flow metering devices and
elements shall be as manufactured by FLOWSET, GERAND, GRISWOLD,
PRESO or BARCO.
N.
Valves for flushing piping mains - Provide 1 1/2" full port ball valves on the supply
and return mains of each piping system for the purpose of flushing debris and
other foreign mater out of piping. Valves shall be rated at not less that 150 PSI
WOG, shall be suitable for 180 degree water and provided with extended
insulated handle. Provide adapter for valve to accept a fire hose and provide a
removable cap. STOCKHAM # S207.
SPECIALTIES
A.
Pipe Hangers and Supports: See section 15050.
15702-4
11/17
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
B.
C.
SECTION 15702
Unions: Shall be provided for the assembly, dismantling or service to any portion
of the piping system.
1.
Unions 2" and Smaller: Shall be malleable iron ground joint unions with
brass to iron seals. Stockham Fig. #694.
2.
Unions 2-1/2" and Larger: Shall be of the companion flange type with ring
type gasket painted with graphite before installation. Stockham Fig. #799.
3.
Brass Couplings:
tubing.
Shall be used for connecting steel pipe to copper
Thermometers: Shall be provided and installed in the supply and return piping of
the system. Thermometers mounted at heights other than 5 feet from the floor
shall be the adjustable angle type and located so they may be read from the floor.
The body of the thermometer shall be brass or die-cast aluminum and at least 9"
long. The thermometer shall be blue organic fill type with an appropriate scale for
the medium being measured. The thermometer shall be mounted in the pipe in a
separate well. Manufacturer – TRERICE BX 91406 or equivalent by WEKSLER,
TAYLOR, or WEISS.
D.
Pressure Gauges: Shall be installed in the piping system at the pumps. Connect
the gauge to the piping system with 1/4" iron pipe. Provide 1/4" rough brass cock
between the gauge and piping system.
The pressure gauge shall be of the liquid filled, bourdon-tube type with at least a
4" diameter dial with an appropriate scale. The gauge shall be the dust, corrosion
and moisture resistance type with a cast aluminum case. Manufacturers –
ASHCROFT, WEKSLER, TAYLOR, or TRERICE.
E.
Expansion Tank: Shall be ASME labeled and the size listed on the drawings.
Provide the tank with the required tappings and a prime coat of paint. The
expansion tank shall be BELL & GOSSETT, TACO, JOHN WOOD, WESSELS,
or ARMSTRONG.
F.
Tank Fitting: Shall match the tank to maintain the proper amount of air. The tank
fitting shall be BELL & GOSSETT or TACO.
G.
Air Separator: Shall be ASME labeled and the same size as connecting pipe.
Provide separator with strainer. The air separator shall be BELL & GOSSETT,
TACO, THRUSH, AMTROL, JOHN WOOD, or ARMSTRONG.
H.
Pressure Reducing Valve: Shall be set at 12 psi unless otherwise noted on
drawings and shall be the size of the cold water make up piping. The pressurereducing valve shall be CONBRACO INDUSTRIES INC., APOLLO VALVES,
WATTS, BELL & GOSSETT, or TACO.
15702-5
11/17
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15702
I.
Flexible Connection: Flexible pipe connection shall be installed on all pipes
connecting to equipment where indicated on the drawings. The isolated
equipment shall be provided with flexible connections for all piping connections
immediately adjacent to the equipment. The hose shall be flexible, braidreinforced, seamless metal hose within the pressure and temperature range
applicable. Hose lengths shall be a minimum of ten inches and as recommended
by the manufacturer, whichever is greater. Short style will not be acceptable.
Provide control rods for stabilization. Flexible connections shall be as
manufactured by TWIN CITY HOSE, METRAFLEX, SSI, KEFLEX, or
METRASPHERE.
J.
Air Vents: Provide at high points of systems, on trapped sections of piping with
automatic air vents or other locations as required for air removal from the system.
Manual air vents shall be used on piping above ceilings in all finished spaces.
Each air vent shall be accessible. Provide Hoffman No. 77 manual air vents for
unit heaters, fan coil units, unit ventilators, piping mains above ceilings, etc.
Provide Hoffman No. 79 automatic air vents for all exposed piping mains, air
handling units, etc. Air vents as manufactured by SPIROTHERM shall also be
acceptable.
K.
Strainers: Shall be VICTAULIC, CONBRACO INDUSTRIES, INC., APOLLO
VALVES, ARMSTRONG, TACO, or SARCO. Iron or brass body 'Y' pattern
sediment strainers shall be installed. These strainers shall be provided with
stainless steel or non-ferrous straining elements with heads for removal of the
elements.
1.
Iron body 'Y' pattern sediment strainers shall be installed with steel pipe.
2.
Brass body 'Y' pattern sediment strainers shall be installed with copper or
brass pipe.
3.
Area of strainer openings shall not be less than four (4) times the pipe
area. All strainers shall have blow-off valves with hose ends.
4.
Strainer elements shall be No. 10 (ten), mesh screen or perforated
stainless steel.
5.
Each strainer body shall be cast with the manufacturer's name, an arrow
indicating the direction of flow, strainer size, and pressure classification.
6.
Each strainer shall be of the operating pressure, temperature and service
rating of the respective systems.
L.
Check valves (condensate drains): See Section 15420.
M.
Condensate overflow protection.
Provide float control safety switches in
condensate drain pans (or secondary drain pans), for all equipment with cooling
coils. Switches shall be as manufactured by BECKETT or LITTLE GIANT.
15702-6
11/17
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15702
Equipment located outside of plenum spaces may use safety switches as
manufactured by EZ-TRAP (1-877-439-8727), where the switch is integral to a
PVC trap.
N.
2.04
Low point drains shall be provided for sections of trapped piping. Low point drains
shall be a ¾ ball valve with a hose end connection and cap.
WATER PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING:
A.
Provide and install for all exterior piping Raychem Corporation, XL-Trace, U/L
Listed, braided, self regulating heating cable with inherent temperature control
and a 5 foot cold lead inside the building. Electrical characteristics 120/1/60. All
piping shall have Model 5XL-CR heat tracing. Nominal watts per foot rating at 40
degree pipe temperature is 5.9 for Model 5XL-CR. Provide Models XLK-PC and
XLK-SET components for power connection, tees, end seals kits and splices and
GT-66 glass cloth adhesive tape. Heat tracing cable equal to the item specified
as manufactured by THERMON shall be acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
The piping systems shall be installed as described in section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods.
B.
Heat tracing cable shall be installed linearly along the piping, not spiraled.
Secure heat tracing to piping using glass cloth adhesive tape. Provide
manufacturer's recommended pattern coverage for valves, flanges and pipe
supports. Heat tracing shall be installed on all exterior piping to five feet inside
the building beyond the pipe sleeve. Heat tracing shall be tested, after
installation, per manufacturer's recommendations. Heat traced piping shall have
manufacturers warning labels installed stating that the piping is electrically heat
traced. This contractor shall install heat trace in such a manner that the
termination points are coordinated with the electrical drawings.
C.
Float control safety switches shall be interlocked with the fan to turn off the unit
when a high water level is detected.
PIPING SYSTEM CLEANING
A.
The piping systems shall be cleaned and flushed with chemicals in accordance
with the following sequences:
1.
Initial Flush - The initial flush shall be performed on the piping mains, with
pumps running and before any branch piping or equipment has been
connected. This initial flush is to remove debris and other foreign objects
out of the piping systems. Flush systems until all matter has been
15702-7
11/17
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15702
removed from piping. After this flushing, the strainers shall be opened,
screens removed and the entire unit cleaned and re-installed.
2.
Pre-Cleaning - After the initial flush, the piping mains shall then be precleaned for a minimum of eight hours with the pumps running and before
any branch piping or equipment has been connected with cleaning
chemicals provided by the water treatment contractor. After the precleaning, the strainers shall be opened, screens removed and the entire
unit cleaned and re-installed.
3.
Cleaning - After equipment and branch piping has been installed, the
entire piping systems shall then be cleaned out for a minimum of eight
hours with the pumps running, all 3-way valves open to equipment coils
and all valves open in the systems to allow complete circulation of
cleaning chemicals. The water treatment contractor shall provide the
cleaning chemicals required to perform this cleaning. After piping system
cleaning, all strainers shall be opened, screens removed and the entire
unit cleaned and re-installed.
4.
Flushing - After the piping systems cleaning, the systems shall then be refilled with water and circulated for a minimum of two hours, followed by
draining the entire systems. The hot water system shall be brought up to
operating temperature for this procedure. After systems draining, the air
control tank strainer shall be removed and cleaned.
5.
pH Balance and Treatment - After the two hour flush but before the water
balance, the piping systems shall be flushed until the total alkalinity of the
rinse water is equal to that of the make-up water. Once this has been
completed, the systems shall be refilled with clean water and shall be
treated per Section 15705. The treatment shall be performed by the water
treatment contractor.
B.
The piping systems cleaning and flushing shall be witnessed and verified by the
owners representative. The contractor shall verify in writing that the cleaning and
flushing of the piping systems has been performed and shall have the signature
of the owner’s representative.
C.
The mechanical contractor shall provide the water treatment contractor the
capacities of the systems so that proper dosages of products will be used.
D.
Valves for flushing piping mains shall be located at the low points in the mains.
Mains shall be flushed before any branch piping or equipment is connected.
Renewal projects, which must have piping mains installed in phases, shall have
separate valves installed for each phase.
15702-8
11/17
HOT WATER, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
3.03
SECTION 15702
GROOVED PIPING
A.
Pipe Ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in
the area from the pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing.
B.
The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for
the intended service.
C.
The use of bolted branch outlets is not permitted.
D.
Outlets for wells and gauges etc. shall be made using welded “thread-o-lets”.
E.
All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer.
F.
Grooved connections shall not be installed in inaccessible concealed locations.
G.
Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest
published installation instructions.
END OF SECTION
15702-9
11/17
SECTION 15703
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, section
15010 - General Provisions, and section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall
apply to this section.
1.02 SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include the following:
1.03
A.
Complete hot water piping systems.
B.
Complete hydronic heat pump loop water piping systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The piping system shall be tested for leaks before the insulation is applied and before
the piping system is covered up. The test shall be at least 100 psi of water pressure for
a duration of 12 hours.
All grooved couplings, and fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a
single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved
components.
All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date
stamped for quality assurance and traceability.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in section 15010, 1.04. Shop
drawings shall include proposed uses of all items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A.
Heat Pump Loop Supply and Return - Shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe with
125 psi cast iron screwed fittings or 150 psi steel weld fittings.
1.
Type "L” copper tubing with copper fittings is acceptable for piping 2" and
under.
15703-1
11/17
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
B.
SECTION 15703
Hot Water Supply and Return - Shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe with 125
psi cast iron screwed fittings or 150 psi steel weld fittings.
1.
Type "L" copper tubing with copper fittings is acceptable for piping 2" and
under.
C.
Cooling Tower Water Supply and Return – Shall be scheduled 40 black steel pipe
with 125 psi cast iron screwed fittings or 150 psi steel weld fittings inside of the
building and schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe and fittings for outdoors.
D.
Cold water make up - Shall be type 'L' copper tubing with copper fittings.
E.
Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components
may be used as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods. All grooved
components shall be of one manufacturer and conform to local code approval.
Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified. Grooved couplings
shall meet the requirements of ASTM F-1476. Grooved components shall be
manufactured by VICTAULIC. Grooved components manufactured by GRINNELL
or ANVIL INT. are acceptable providing all aspects of the specification are met. No
substitutions.
1.
Carbon steel piping shall be roll grooved in accordance with
manufacturer's current listed standard.
2.
Mechanical couplings for grooved piping shall be cast of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, and ASTM A-536, grade 6545-12. Couplings shall be rigid style and be of the angle patterned bolt
pad type, and shall provide system support and hanging requirements in
accordance with ANSI 831.1, ANSI B31.4 and NFPA 13. Coupling bolts
and nuts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon steel
track head conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-183. Mechanical
couplings shall be coated with an alkyd enamel finish.
3.
Gaskets for grooved pipe and fittings shall be grade "E" EPDM compound
conforming to ASTM D-2000 designation 2CA615A25B24F17Z.
4.
Rigid Type: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads
shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in
accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.9, with Victaulic Style 107H/107N
(Quick-Vic), Installation ready rigid coupling for direct stab installation
without field disassembly. Gasket shall be Grade "EHP" EPDM designed
for operating temperatures from -30 deg F to +250 deg F.
5.
Grooved fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395,
grade 65-45-15, and ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12, wrought steel to ASTM
A234, Grade WPB; or factory-fabricated from ASTM A53 steel pipe.
15703-2
11/17
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15703
Grooved fittings shall be coated with an alkyd enamel finish. Grooved
fittings shall be full flow.
F.
Condensate drain piping - Shall be type 'L' copper tubing and fittings.
G.
Runouts to terminal units with copper pipe connections - Type 'L' hard drawn copper
tubing shall be used for runouts where required. A brass coupling shall be used
between the steel pipe and copper tubing connection.
H.
Hot water supply and return under slab - Each piece of equipment shall have
separate runouts and shall be type 'K' continuous copper pipe with no joints
allowed below slab. All joints above slab shall be made with copper brazing rods.
The entire underground pipe system shall be inside a minimum 6" round
schedule 40 plastic pipe sleeve. Pipe shall be insulated; see section 15250.
I.
The use of running or close nipples is prohibited.
2.02 VALVES
Valves shall be manufactured by VICTAULIC, STOCKHAM, JENKINS, HAMMOND, JOMAR,
MILWAUKEE, FAIRBANKS, CRANE, CONBRACO INDUSTRIES, INC., APOLLO VALVES,
LUNKENHEIMER, WALWORTH, NIBCO, JAMESBURY, or ROCKWELL unless otherwise
shall be rated for the medium served.
A.
Gate valves 2-1/2" and smaller - Shall be cast bronze body, sweat type or
screwed ends and solid wedge disc with rising stem, STOCKHAM #B108.
B.
Gate valves larger than 2-1/2" - Shall be iron body flanged ends and solid wedge
disc with rising stem (OS & Y type), STOCKHAM #G623.
C.
Globe valves 2-112" and smaller - Shall be cast bronze body, sweat type or
screwed ends and replaceable composition disc, STOCKHAM #B24T.
D.
Check valves 2-1/2" or smaller - Shall be cast bronze body swing check with either
screwed ends or sweat type and with regrinding disc, STOCKHAM #B319 or B309.
E.
Check valves larger than 2-1/2" - Shall be flanged iron body with bronze disc and
ring, STOCKHAM #G931.
F.
Non-Slam check valves - Shall be used for all vertical applications and on pump
discharge piping and shall be flanged iron body with bronze disc, wafer check,
NIBCO #F910 for 2W and larger or W910 for 2" and smaller.
G.
Butterfly valves - 2" and larger may be used in lieu of gate or globe valves except at
boiler supply and return pipe. These valves shall be rated at not less than 150 psi
WOG Class and be suitable for use with 180°F water. Shall be lug type for pipe
15703-3
11/17
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15703
removal on either side of valve, shall have stainless steel shafts and shall have 4"
extended stem lengths for all size valves. STOCKHAM #LD611.
H.
Ball valves - 2" and smaller may be used in lieu of gate or globe valves. These
valves shall be bronze, rated at not less than 150 psi WOG Class, full port, solid
chrome plated ball design and stem, blow out proof stem. Be suitable for use with
180-degree water and provided with extended insulated handles. STOCKHAM
#5216. Extended insulated handles shall be APOLLO VALVES "Therma-Seal" or
NIBCO " Nib-seal".
I.
Balancing valves - Valves manufactured by FLOWSET, GRISWOLD, GERAND,
DANFOSS, BARCO, PRESO, FLO-PAC, or NUTECH with memory stop, positive
shutoff, extended insulated handle and PIT type ports for balancing. Flowset
model AS size "A" to 2" flow 0.25 GPM to 100 GPM. For all units with runouts 2"
and smaller.
J.
Constant volume flow valves – VICTAULIC, GRISWOLD, AUTOFLOW, or
FLOWSET, automatic pressure-connecting spring and cartridge type valves with
quick disconnect pressure taps. For all units with pipe size 2-1/2" and larger with GPM
capacity shown.
K.
Valve operating chains - Valves installed six feet or more above finished floor in
boiler rooms or mechanical rooms shall be chain operated. Provide chain and chain
wheel with chain guide of size required, as manufactured by STOCKHAM.
L.
Balance valve for pump - Eccentric, combination shut-off and balancing with
memory stop valve as manufactured by DEZURIK or ROCKWELL.
M.
Provide metering device in boiler room or in pump room for measuring pump flow
rates, for systems piping a minimum of 20 feet (measured along pipe length)
from pump discharge or just before pipe exits room, whichever is greater.
Provide extended metering taps on metering devices. Flow metering devices and
elements shall be as manufactured by FLOWSET, PRESO, GERAND,
GRISWOLD, or BARCO.
N.
Valves for flushing piping mains - Provide 1 1/2" full port ball valves on the
supply and return mains of each piping system for the purpose of flushing debris
and other foreign matter out of piping. Valves shall be rated at not less than 150
PSI WOG, shall be suitable for 180°F water and provided with extended
insulated handle. Provide adapter for valve to accept a fire hose and provide a
removable cap. STOCKHAM #S207.
2.03 SPECIALTIES
A.
Pipe Hangers and Supports - See section 15050.
15703-4
11/17
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
B.
SECTION 15703
Unions - Shall be provided for the assembly, dismantling or service to any portion
of the piping system.
1.
Unions 2" and Smaller - Shall be malleable iron ground joint unions with
brass to iron seals. Stockham Fig. #694.
2.
Unions 2-1/2" and Larger - Shall be of the companion flange type with ring
type gasket painted with graphite before installation. Stockham Fig. #799.
3.
Brass Couplings - Shall be used for connecting steel pipe to copper tubing.
C.
Thermometers - Shall be provided and installed in the supply and return piping of
the system. Thermometers mounted at heights other than 5 feet from the floor
shall be the adjustable angle type and located so they may be read from the floor.
The body of the thermometer shall be brass or die-east aluminum and at least 9"
long. The thermometer shall be blue organic filled type with an appropriate scale
for the medium being measured. The thermometer shall be mounted in the pipe in
a separate well. Manufacturer - TRERICE BX 91406 or equivalent by WEKSLER,
TAYLOR, or WEISS.
D.
Pressure Gauges - Shall be installed in the piping system at the pumps, Connect
the gauge to the piping system with 1/4" iron pipe. Provide 1/4" rough brass cock
between the gauge and piping system. The pressure gauge shall be of the liquid
filled, bourdon-tube type with at least a 4" diameter dial with an appropriate scale.
The gauge shall be the dust, corrosion and moisture resistance type with a cast
aluminum case. Manufacturers ASHCROFT, WEKSLER, TAYLOR, or TRERICE.
E.
Expansion Tank - Shall be ASME labeled and the size listed on the drawings.
Provide the tank with the required tappings and a prime coat of paint. The
expansion tank shall be BELL & GOSSETT, TACO, JOHN WOOD, WESSELS,
or ARMSTRONG.
F.
Tank Fitting - Shall match the tank to maintain the proper amount of air. The tank
fitting shall be BELL & GOSSETT or TACO.
G.
Air Separator: Shall be ASME labeled and the same size as connecting pipe.
Provide separator with strainer. The air separator shall be BELL & GOSSETT,
TACO, THRUSH, AMTROL, JOHN WOOD, or ARMSTRONG.
H.
Pressure Reducing Valve - Shall be set at 12 psi unless otherwise noted on
drawings and shall be the size of the cold water make up piping. The pressurereducing valve shall be CONBRACO INDUSTRIES INC., APOLLO VALVES,
WATTS, BELL & GOSSETT, or TACO.
I.
Flexible Connection - Flexible pipe connection shall be installed on all pipes
connecting to equipment where indicated on the drawings. The isolated equipment
shall be provided with flexible connections for all piping connections immediately
15703-5
11/17
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15703
adjacent to the equipment. The hose shall be flexible, braid-reinforced, seamless
metal hose within the pressure and temperature range applicable. Hose lengths
shall be a minimum of ten inches and as recommended by the manufacturer,
whichever is greater. Short style will not be acceptable. Provide control rods for
stabilization. Flexible connections shall be as manufactured by METRAFLEX,
KEFLEX, SSI, or METRASPHERE.
J.
Air Vents - Provide at high points of systems, on trapped sections of piping with
automatic air vents or other locations as required for air removal from the system.
Manual air vents shall be used on piping above ceilings in all finished spaces. Each
air vent shall be accessible. Provide Hoffman No. 77 manual air vents for unit
heaters, fan coil units, unit ventilators, piping mains above ceilings, etc. Provide
Hoffman No. 79 automatic air vents for all exposed piping mains, air handling units,
etc. Air vents as manufactured by SPIROTHERM shall also be acceptable.
K.
Strainers - Shall be VICTAULIC, CONBRACO INDUSTRIES, INC., APOLLO
VALVES, ARMSTRONG, TACO, or SARCO. iron or brass body 'Y' pattern
sediment strainers shall be installed. These strainers shall be provided with
stainless steel or non-ferrous straining elements with heads for removal of the
elements.
1.
Iron body 'Y' pattern sediment strainers shall be installed with steel pipe.
2.
Brass body Y pattern sediment strainers shall be installed with copper or
brass pipe.
3.
Area of strainer openings shall not be less than four (4) times the pipe
area. All strainers shall have blow-off valves with hose ends.
4.
Strainer elements shall be No. 10 (ten) mesh screen or perforated
stainless steel.
.
Each strainer body shall be cast with the manufacturer's name, an arrow
indicating the direction of flow, strainer size and pressure classification.
5.
6.
Each strainer shall be of the operating pressure, temperature and service
rating of the respective systems.
L.
Check valves (condensate drains): See Section 15420.
M.
Condensate Overflow Protection - Provide float control safety switches in
condensate drain pans (or secondary drain pans), for all equipment with cooling
coils. Switches shall be as manufactured by BECKETT or LITTLE GIANT.
Equipment located outside of plenum spaces may use safety switches as
manufactured by EZ-TRAP (1-877-439-8727), where the switch is integral to a
PVC trap.
15703-6
11/17
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
N.
SECTION 15703
Low point drains shall be provided for sections of trapped piping. Low point
drains shall be a 3/ 4 " ball valve with a hose end connection and cap.
2.04 WATER PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING:
A.
Provide and install for all exterior piping RAYCHEM Corporation, XL-Trace, U/L
Listed, braided self regulating heating cable with inherent temperature control and a
5 foot cold lead inside the building. Electrical characteristics 208/1/60. All piping shall
have Model 5XL-CR heat tracing. Nominal watts per foot rating at 40 degree pipe
temperature is 5.9 for Model 5XL-CR. Provide Models XLK-PC and XLK-SET
components for power connection, tees, end seals kits and splices and GT-66 glass
cloth adhesive tape. Heat tracing cable equal to the item specified as manufactured
by THERMON shall be acceptable.
B.
Cooling Tower heat tracing shall include supply and return piping, makeup water
piping, water treatment piping, drain and overflow piping, electronic water level
piping, spray pump suction piping, spray pump body (excluding motor), and
spray pump discharge piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The piping systems shall be installed as described in section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods.
B.
Heat tracing cable shall be installed linearly along the piping, not spiraled. Secure
heat tracing to piping using glass cloth adhesive tape. Provide manufacturer's
recommended pattern coverage for valves, flanges and pipe supports. Heat tracing
shall be installed on all exterior piping to five feet inside the building beyond the pipe
sleeve. Heat tracing shall be tested, after installation, per manufacturer's
recommendations. Heat traced piping shall have manufacturer's warning labels
installed stating that the piping is electrically heat traced. This contractor shall
install heat trace in such a manner that the termination points are coordinated
with the electrical drawings.
C.
Float control safety switches shall be interlocked with the fan to turn off the unit
when a high water level is detected.
3.02 PIPING SYSTEM CLEANING
A.
The piping systems shall be cleaned and flushed with chemicals in accordance with
the following sequences:
1.
Initial Flush - The initial flush shall be performed on the piping mains, with
pumps running and before any branch piping or equipment has been
15703-7
11/17
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15703
connected. This initial flush is to remove debris and other foreign objects out
of the piping systems. Flush systems until all matter has been removed from
piping. After this flushing, the strainers shall be opened, screens removed
and the entire unit cleaned and re-installed.
2.
Pre-Cleaning - After the initial flush, the piping mains shall then be precleaned for a minimum of eight hours with the pumps running and before
any branch piping or equipment has been connected with cleaning
chemicals provided by the water treatment contractor. After the precleaning, the strainers shall be opened, screens removed and the entire
unit cleaned and re-installed.
3.
Cleaning - After equipment and branch piping has been installed, the entire
piping systems shall then be cleaned out for a minimum of eight hours with
the pumps running, all 3-way valves open to equipment coils and all valves
open in the systems to allow complete circulation of cleaning chemicals. The
water treatment contractor shall provide the cleaning chemicals required to
perform this cleaning. After piping system cleaning, all strainers shall be
opened, screens removed and the entire unit cleaned and re-installed.
4.
Flushing - After the piping systems cleaning, the systems shall then be
refilled with water and circulated for a minimum of two hours, followed by
draining the entire systems. The hot water system shall be brought up to
operating temperature for this procedure. After systems draining, the air
control tank strainer shall be removed and cleaned.
5.
pH Balance and Treatment - After the two hour flush but before the water
balance, the piping systems shall be flushed until the total alkalinity of the
rinse water is equal to that of the make-up water. Once this has been
completed, the systems shall be refilled with clean water and shall be
treated per Section 15705. The treatment shall be performed by the water
treatment contractor.
B.
The piping systems cleaning and flushing shall be witnessed and verified by the
Owner's representative. The contractor shall verify in writing that the cleaning
and flushing of the piping systems has been performed and shall have the
signature of the Owner's representative.
C.
The mechanical contractor shall provide the water treatment contractor the
capacities of the systems so that proper dosages of products will be used.
D.
Valves for flushing piping mains shall be located at the low points in the mains.
Mains shall be flushed before any branch piping or equipment is connected.
Renewal projects which must have piping mains installed in phases shall have
separate valves installed for each phase.
15703-8
11/17
HOT WATER, HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY
AND RETURN PIPING SYSTEM AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15703
3.03 GROOVED PIPING
A.
Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in
the area from the pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing.
B.
The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for
the intended service.
C.
The use of bolted branch outlets is not permitted.
D.
Outlets for wells and gauges etc. shall be made using welded "thread-o-lets".
E.
All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer.
F.
Grooved connections shall not be installed in inaccessible concealed locations.
G.
Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest
published installation instructions.
END OF SECTION
15703-9
11/17
SECTION 15705
WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include the furnishing of all labor, piping, valves,
gauges, control panels, water meter wiring, chemicals and all other equipment required for a
complete water treatment service as indicated on the drawings or herein specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The water treatment chemical equipment and service supplier shall be a recognized
specialist, active in the field of industrial water treatment for the last ten years, whose major
business is in the field of water treatment and shall have regional water analysis
laboratories, development facilities and service department, plus full time service personnel
located within the trading area of the job site.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
Provide, install and service a water treatment system for the water systems. The water
treatment system shall be as manufactured by MOGUL CORPORATION. Other
manufacturers fully equal to the specified manufacturer as manufactured by HYDAC,
MORR, ARC, or AQUATOMIC are acceptable.
A.
Piping, valves, and accessories shall be furnished and installed as required by the
water treatment manufacturer.
B.
Provide all chemicals required at system start-up and throughout the service period.
Chemical formulations shall not exceed the allowable EPA or local effluent limits.
C.
The water treatment chemical and service supplier shall furnish basic water test
equipment including carrying case and reagents for use with suppliers' products.
This shall include apparatus for determination of pH, P and M alkalinity, treatment
15705-1
11/17
WATER TREATMENT
SECTION 15705
residual, and conductivity. Where specialized or supplementary equipment is
required, it shall be furnished as part of the contract.
D.
Condenser System Feeding and Control Equipment - Contractor shall install the
following apparatus including all external piping and wiring for each condenser water
system.
1.
One MOGUL AUTO CHEM Model 16712 as manufactured by the MOGUL
CORPORATION, for controlling Total Dissolved Solids (TDS), biological
growth, inhibitor feed and chemical treatment in the cooling water system.
Controller shall be U.L. Listed. Control panel shall be a single, NEMA 1 steel
enclosure, primed and fully painted, and shall have the following basic
features, fully pre-wired:
a.
Internal wiring harnessed, color-coded, clearly identified, and brought
to master terminal board.
b.
Grounded AC receptacles for chemical treatment pump and utility
use.
c.
Main power switch and indicating lamps, with legend plate, for power,
bleed control, biocide pump, inhibitor pump and system flow.
d.
Line voltage safety switch - Interlock with door to shut off line voltage
to control when adjustment or maintenance is required.
e.
Manual-Off-Auto selector switches and indicating lamps for bleed off
control, chemical feed and acid feed, with legend plates.
f.
Manual-Off-Auto selector switch for inhibitor feed and a push button
to simulate a water meter pulse in the makeup water supply line for
test purposes.
g.
A selector switch for control of chemical feed from metered makeup.
h.
Conductivity controller accurate to 5% full scale with an analogindicating meter.
i.
Front panel fuses.
j.
Dual biocide feed program modules to automatically alternate
between two biocides with a seven-day timer.
k.
A temperature compensated conductivity electrode and flow switch
mounted on the side of the controller enclosure.
l.
Bleed lock-out timer to prevent bleed function after a biocide feed.
15705-2
11/17
WATER TREATMENT
SECTION 15705
Power and bleedoff status shall be displayed by indicating lights on the front panel. The
controller shall be insensitive to phase angle shifts and be capable of operating with input
line voltage of 95 to 130 volts AC without affecting accuracy. Conductivity level shall be
recorded on an indicating meter. The chemical feed shall be controlled by a reset timer
actuated by a make-up water meter with electric contractor. The chemical feed control
module shall have a pump status indicating lamp, a Manual-Off-Auto switch and a 20 amp
pump relay.
2.
E.
The chemical feed pumps shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 steel enclosure,
primed and fully painted. They shall be pre-plumbed, pre-wired and include
the following:
a.
Sample stream piping assembly, including a conductivity flotee,
sample cock, check valve and three chemical injection tees.
b.
One Inhibitor feed pump, two biocide feed pumps of the positive
displacement type, with ball type check valves, 120/1/60 fractional hp
motor drive, discharge pressure relief valve, foot valve, suction tubing
and discharge tubing. The feed rate shall be adjustable while the
pump is running and the chemicals shall be pumped directly from the
shipping container. Pump shall be U.L. Listed and shall be
manufactured by PULSA FEEDER, LMI or CHEM-TECH.
3.
One sample stream injection assembly.
4.
One water meter, complete with electric contacting registers sized to meter
the peak make-up rates.
5.
One bleedoff solenoid and throttling valve, sized for bleed off requirements of
the system.
6.
One 50-gallon inhibitor tank and two 30-gallon biocide tanks. Tanks shall be
polyethylene and shall include lids. Pump suction will be through the lid.
Fittings in tanks are not allowed.
Hot and Chilled Water Systems - Contractor shall install a One Shot Feeder for each
system, minimum four quart capacity, designed to meet pressure requirements of the
specific system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The water treatment system shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
A.
Pre-Cleaning and Cleaning
15705-3
11/17
WATER TREATMENT
1.
B.
Provide the chemicals used for the pre-cleaning and cleaning sequences
listed in Section 15701. Chemicals shall be capable of removing deposits
from construction, such as pipe dope, oils, most loose mill scale, and other
extraneous materials. The products used shall inhibit corrosion of the
various metals in the piping systems and shall be safe to handle and use.
Effectiveness of the product shall be such that the water need only be at
ambient temperatures. Add recommended dosages of products for
corresponding system capacities.
pH Balance and Treatment
1.
C.
SECTION 15705
Piping systems shall be drained and flushed until the total alkalinity of the
rinse water is equal to the makeup water, as described in Section 15701.
Refill with clean water, which shall be properly treated to prevent scale and
corrosion during operation of the water systems (See paragraph 3.01.C).
This contractor shall assist in performing the pH balance of the systems.
Maintain the following conditions in each system:
1.
Chilled
a. pH
b. Buffered Nitrite
2.
7.0 to 9.0
500 PPM
Hot
a. pH
b. Buffered Nitrite
3.
Condenser
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.02
7.0 to 9.0
1000 PPM to 180 Deg. F
2000 PPM above 180 Deg. F
pH
Organic Inhibitor
Cycles
Organic Growths
7.0 to 8.0
15 to 25 PPM
7 Maximum
None
SYSTEM SERVICE
A.
The water treatment service shall start after the initial cleaning, flushing, start-up and
check out of the water systems and shall continue for a period of one year after the
substantial completion date of the entire project.
B.
Prior to the substantial completion date and during the one year service period after
this date, the water treatment contractor shall visit the site and thoroughly inspect the
systems for proper operation, make necessary adjustments, test water and chemical
conditions, and complete a written report on conditions. Service frequency shall be
as a minimum as follows:
15705-4
11/17
WATER TREATMENT
SECTION 15705
1.
Chiller/cooling tower condensers - every two weeks
2.
Closed loop hot and chilled water - once per month
C.
Prior to the substantial completion date and during the one year service period after
this date, the water treatment contractor shall test water samples from cooling tower
water for legionella pneumophila. Tests shall be made monthly when the cooling
tower operates. The report shall give the result in bacteria per millimeter and include
the result from the previous month.
D.
The water treatment contractor shall maintain complete records of the treatment
program for each system and submit to the Owner three copies of each report
distributed to:
E.
1.
System Site
2.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115
Gatehouse Road Falls Church VA 22042.
3.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax Virginia 22032
The initial fill of water treatment chemicals and water treatment service shall be
witnessed and verified by the Owners representative. A signed service card must be
obtained by the technician after each visit for service.
END OF SECTION
15705-5
11/17
SECTION 15725
BASE MOUNTED PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the base mounted pumps as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Pumps must be selected from published test curves showing actual brake
horsepower. The selection point shall be confined to the left of the center of the
efficiency curve for the impeller being furnished.
B.
All pump motors shall meet NEMA Standards.
C.
All pumps shall be factory tested prior to shipment to the job site.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
BASE MOUNTED PUMPS
The base mounted pump shall be of the centrifugal base mounted type and of the size,
capacity and voltage shown on the drawings. The pump shall be series 1510 as
manufactured by BELL & GOSSETT. Pumps fully equal to the specified pump and
manufactured by ARMSTRONG, PATTERSON or WEINMANN are acceptable.
A.
Pump - Shall be of the vertical split case design for servicing without disturbing
piping connections or motor. Motor to pump connections shall be of the flexible
spacer spring coupler type, to dampen noise transmission and protect pump and
motor from stress and strain of high starting torque. The pump shall use a
mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall face against a ceramic insert. The
pump shall have a seal flush line of copper and shall be equipped with regreasable
ball bearings. Extend grease fitting with permanently attached tube to extend
15725-1
11/17
BASE MOUNTED PUMPS
SECTION 15725
through insulation. Provide variable speed drive coupler for variable speed drive
pumps.
2.02
B.
Motor - Shall be drip-proof, 1750 rpm, and shall be especially selected for quiet
operation, and shall be so stamped. The electrical characteristics of the motor shall
be as shown on the drawings. The horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size
as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the capacity range of the pump.
The motor shall have sealed bearings.
C.
Base - Shall be of the size suitable for the pump, motor and shaft, and shall be
constructed of cast iron or welded steel.
D.
Starters - Magnetic line voltage starter with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch and red
running light. See section 15050, 2.07.
SUCTION DIFFUSER
A.
Provide suction diffuser at each pump. Units shall consist of an angle type body with
inlet vanes and combination diffuser - strainer - orifice cylinder with 3/16" diameter
openings for pump protection. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow
stream and shall be removable for cleaning. The orifice cylinder shall be equipped
with a disposable fine mesh strainer that shall be removed after start-up. Orifice
cylinder shall be designed to withstand a pressure differential equal to pump shutoff
head and shall have a free area equal to five times the cross section area of the
pump to suction opening. Vane length shall be not less than 2 1/2 times the pump
connection diameter. Unit shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry
weight of suction piping. Manufacturer shall be Bell & Gossett. Suction diffusers
manufactured by Patterson are acceptable provided they are fully equal to the
suction diffuser specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The pumps shall be installed and serviced in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
B.
A concrete base a minimum of four (4) inches higher than the surrounding floor shall
be provided. Foundation bolts in pipe sleeves shall be set in the base to allow
movement for final positioning of the bolts. The pump base shall be set dead level
by means of properly spaced metal blocks or wedges. After pump is leveled, align
pump and motor shaft and then pour grout between concrete base and pump base.
C.
Pump base shall be isolated as shown on the drawings.
D.
Coupling guards shall be installed per ANSI and OSHA standards.
15725-2
11/17
BASE MOUNTED PUMPS
E.
SECTION 15725
Pumps mounted in areas other than slab on grade shall be mounted on
inertia bases with vibration isolators.
END OF SECTION
15725-3
11/17
SECTION 15726
INLINE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the inline pump as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Pump must be selected from published test curves showing actual brake
horsepower. The selection point shall be confined to the left of center of the
efficiency curve for the impeller being furnished.
B.
All pump motors shall meet NEMA Standards and shall be UL listed.
C.
All pumps shall be factory tested prior to shipment to the job site.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
INLINE PUMP
The inline pump shall be of the centrifugal inline mounted type and of the size, capacity and
voltage shown on the drawings. The pump shall be booster series as manufactured by
BELL & GOSSETT. Pumps fully equal to the specified pumps and manufactured by
ARMSTRONG, WEINMANN, or PATTERSON are acceptable.
A.
Pump - Shall be quiet operating, horizontal, oil lubricated, inline, single stage, vertical
split case design, in cast iron bronze fitted construction for heating or cooling
applications and shall be all bronze construction for domestic water applications.
The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping
connections. The pump shall have a dynamically balanced impeller keyed and
locknutted to a ground and polished steel shaft with hardened integral thrust collar.
Shaft shall be supported by oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. Watertight
mechanical seal faces shall be carbon on cast iron or ceramic.
B.
Coupling - Shall be self-aligning, flexible type connecting the pump and motor.
15726-1
11/17
INLINE PUMPS
2.02
SECTION 15726
C.
Motor - Shall be open drip proof, journal bearing, resilient mounted, 1750 rpm, and
shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The electrical characteristics of the
motor shall be as shown on the drawings. The horsepower of the motor shall be of
such a size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the capacity range
of the pump. The motor shall have sealed bearings.
D.
Testing - The pump shall be factory tested, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one
(1) coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. A set of installation instructions shall
be included with the pump at the time of shipment.
E.
Starter - Provide a manual starter for single-phase units and magnetic across-theline starter for three phase units. The starter shall have HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC
switch and red running light. See Section 15050 paragraph 2.07.
SPECIALTIES
A.
Specialties shall be provided for all inline pumps, which shall include, but not be
limited to, isolation valves, unions, strainers, thermometers and check valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The pumps shall be installed and serviced in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
B.
Coupling guards shall be installed per ANSI and OSHA standards.
END OF SECTION
15726-2
11/17
SECTION 15727
PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the plate type heat exchanger as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plate type heat exchanger shall be manufactured to meet ASME codes and shall be
hydrostatically tested at the factory at pressures higher than the unit will be subjected to in
the field.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER
The plate type heat exchanger shall be completely factory assembled and shall be of the
type and capacity as shown on the drawings. The heat exchanger shall be manufactured by
TRANTER. Units fully equal to the specified unit and manufactured by ALFA LAVAL, BELL
& GOSSETT or MUELLER are acceptable.
A.
Construction - Frame shall be carbon steel with baked epoxy enamel paint. Guide
bars shall be hard chrome plated carbon steel. Tie bolts shall be zinc-plated carbon
steel.
B.
Plates - Shall be constructed with electro polished 304 stainless steel. All plates
shall have identical patterns. Provide 10% additional heat transfer surface area to
allow for fouling. Gasketing material shall be nitrile rubber with plate separation fixed
by contact points, not by gaskets.
C.
Pipe Connections - Shall be 316 stainless steel flanged and sized for a maximum for
20 fps water velocity. Connections on the stationary frame are straight nozzles and,
when required, 90° elbow nozzles on the follower frame.
15727-1
11/17
PLATE TYPE HEAT EXHANGER SECTION 15727
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The plate type heat exchanger shall be installed as recommended by the
manufacturer and set above the mechanical room floor on a 4" high concrete pad.
B.
Provide isolation valves on inlet and outlet piping for service purposes. Provide
thermometers and gauges. Thermometers and gauges shall be located on the heat
exchanger side of the service valves.
END OF SECTION
15727-2
11/17
SECTION 15728
SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, section
15010 - General Provisions, and section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply
to this section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the shell and tube heat exchanger as shown on the drawings and
specified herein.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The shell and tube heat exchanger shall be manufactured to meet ASME codes and shall
be hydrostatically tested at the factory at pressures higher than the unit will be subjected
to in the field. The ASME "U' symbol shall be stamped on the heat exchanger. Each unit
shall be registered as required with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Inspectors.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in section 15010, 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER
The shell and tube heat exchanger shall be completely factory assembled and shall be of
the type and capacity as shown on the drawings. The heat exchanger shall be
manufactured by BELL & GOSSETT. Units fully equal to the specified unit and
manufactured by ARMSTRONG or TACO are acceptable.
A.
Materials
1.
Shell - steel.
2.
Tubes - copper.
3.
Tube sheets - steel.
4.
Tube supports - steel.
5.
Heads - cast iron or steel.
15728-1
11/17
SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER
SECTION 15728
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The heat exchanger shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and as
detailed on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15728-2
11/17
SECTION 15740
WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
The work covered under this Section shall include providing and installing complete
heat pump unit as shown on the Drawings and herein specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The heat pump unit shall have ARI certified ratings and shall be labeled as
acceptable by an approved safety testing or inspection agency such as Underwriters
Laboratories.
B.
The motor shall be manufactured under NEMA standards.
C.
The coils shall have ARI certified ratings.
D.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.05
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and
Methods, shall apply to this section.
Provide submittals on this equipment in accordance with Section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
EXTRA MATERIAL
A.
Contractor to provide extra heat pump to be turned over to the owner at close of
project. (ENGINEER TO EDIT WHICH UNIT/S WILL BE PROVIDED)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (No Substitutions)
A.
TRANE
B.
DAIKIN
15740-1
11/17
WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
2.02
C.
CARRIER
D.
FLORIDA HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15740
HEAT PUMP UNIT
A.
Provide indoor fan draw-thru type heat pump unit of unitary design. Provide and
install the heat pump unit complete with the type, arrangement, capacities and
accessories as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Units shall be designed
to operate throughout the range of entering fluid temperature of 25 OF to 110 OF
(Extended Range).
1.
Casing for Indoor Units - The housing shall be constructed of heavy sheet
mill galvanized steel adequately reinforced with structural members and
provided with sufficient access panels for proper lubrication and
maintenance. Unit shall be of the arrangement shown on the drawings. Unit
shall include plastic drain pan, positively sloped, with access for cleaning,
and drain connections on both sides. Removable panels in fan and coil
sections shall provide access to all internal parts. All unit panels shall be
insulated. Unit casing may be chemically cleaned, spray painted, baked and
coated with an additional exterior coat of enamel after final assembly in lieu
of mill galvanizing.
2.
Blower Motor - The supply air motor shall be a multi-speed motor with
internal thermal overload protection. Motor bearings shall be permanently
lubricated and sealed. Motors shall be factory wired to the option selected.
Provide a speed tap for field customizing high, medium or low speed.
3.
Motor and Drive - Provide belt or direct drive multi-speed motors. Motor
nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%
with airfoil or BI fans and 20% with forward curved fans. Provide motor
especially designed for quiet operation.
4.
Co-axial Water to Refrigerant Coil - Shall be copper seamless tubing, steel
outer refrigerant gas tube, leak tested to assure there is no cross leakage
between the water tube and the refrigerant gas (steel tube) coil. The
completely drainable coil shall be tested under water at 250 psig. Provide
one piece insulated drain pan.
5.
Sound Attenuation Package - Shall consist of:
a.
16 Gauge compressor enclosure
b.
16 Gauge single wall front panel
c.
Lined compressor enclosure with ½ inch cabinet insulation
d.
Compressor discharge muffler
15740-2
11/17
WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
SECTION 15740
e.
12 Gauge compressor/water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger pan with
second stage of vibration isolation
f.
Compressor vibration isolation
g.
Water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger vibration isolation
h.
Lengthwise unit base stiffeners
i.
3/32-inch Foam gasket sealant placed around the compressor and
end panel perimeter
6.
Filter Section - Filters shall not be integral to the unit. Units shall have duct
mounted filter racks. Filters shall be 2" pleated MERV 8.
7.
Isolation - Provide factory installed internal spring isolators or field installed
external housed type spring isolators for fans and compressors. Install
external isolators in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
8.
Provide control interface including contactor for Automatic Temperature
Control interface, and unit disconnect. Disconnect shall meet the
requirements of National Electrical Code Article 430.
9.
Temperature Controls - Automatic temperature controls shall be furnished
under Section 15900.
10.
Expansion Valve - Water source systems shall include an expansion valve
flow metering device. The thermal expansion valve shall allow the unit to
operate with an entering fluid temperature from 25 to 110̊F, and entering air
temperatures from 40 to 90̊F. The valve shall be designed to meter
refrigerant flow through the circuitry to achieve desired heating or cooling.
11.
Refrigerant Piping - Copper tubing shall be seamless and conform to
American Society of Testing (ASTM) B743.
12.
Refrigeration Circuits - All units shall contain a sealed R-410A refrigerant
circuit including a hermetic scroll compressor, bi-directional thermal
expansion valve metering device, finned tube air-to-refrigerant heat
exchanger, refrigerant reversing valve, coaxial tube-in-tube water to
refrigerant heat exchanger, liquid line filter drier and service ports.
Compressor shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Compressor
motors shall be equipped with overload protection. Refrigerant reversing
valves shall be pilot operated sliding piston type with replaceable
encapsulated magnetic coils energized only during cooling cycle.
13.
Unit Controls - Controls and safety devices will be factory wired and mounted
within the unit. Controls shall include fan relay, compressor contactor, 24V
15740-3
11/17
WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
SECTION 15740
transformer, reversing valve coil and solid state lock-out controller. The
controller shall include the following features: diagnostic LED’s, low pressure
bypass time delay (to prevent nuisance low pressure lock-outs during
operation with low fluid temperatures), anti short cycle time delay, random
start time delay and one time intelligent reset.
14.
Unit shall be equipped with a condensate overflow switch. Upon activation,
the unit shall turn off the compressor.
15.
Provide with each heat pump one flexible hose assembly kit. Kit shall have
stainless steel hoses automatic control valve, Y-strainer with PT port, drain
valves, and supply and return shut-off ball valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install the heat pump units as shown on the drawings and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.
The first unit installed will be considered the typical mock up and shall require
notification, inspection and approval by the designated owner representative
and/or architect and engineer before any additional installations will be
allowed.
2.
The heat pump unit fan speed shall be adjusted in the field to deliver the
amount of air as stated on the drawings by adjusting the motor speed.
3.
The filters shall be changed after the construction dust has been eliminated
and before final inspection. Provide two sets of spare filters.
4.
Provide grease fittings extensions where necessary to have the grease fitting
accessible.
5.
Provide one complete set of belts for each water source heat pump.
6.
Piping to each unit to include ball valves, balance valve, balance fitting and
flexible hose for supply and return.
7.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, and fan belt size
to be included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit
designation, filter/belt size and the number of filters/belts required for each
unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list,
distributed to:
a.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115
Gatehouse Rd, Suite 3500, Falls Church, Virginia, 22042.
15740-4
11/17
WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
b.
SECTION 15740
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance
Services, 5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032.
END OF SECTION
15740-5
11/17
SECTION 15745
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install electric duct heater as shown on the drawings and as specified
herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The electric duct heater shall have published ratings and be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings
are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER
The electric duct heater shall be of the type, capacity and voltage shown on the drawings.
The duct heater shall be manufactured by INDEECO. D u c t heaters fully equal to
the specified manufacturer and manufactured by BRASCH or TPI are acceptable.
A.
Type – Shall be of the open type using wire constructed of 80% nickel and 20%
chromium supported in ceramic bushings. The heating wire for each step shall
be strung across the entire face of the coil to prevent stratification when
operating at less than full capacity. Maximum watts density shall not exceed 35
watts per 1 sq. in. of wire surface.
15745-1
11/17
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS
SECTION 15745
B.
Trim – All terminals and nuts shall be constructed of stainless steel, and terminal
insulators and bracket bushings shall be constructed of ceramic and securely
positioned.
C.
Test – Heating coils shall be tested for twice the rated voltage plus 1000 volts, or
2000 volts whichever is greater. After the heater is built, the manufacturer’s quality
control inspection shall test the heater for the following: Ohm reading to verify
capacity, voltage, phase, control voltage and tightness of terminals.
D.
Casing – shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge galvanized steel with
vertical galvanized steel supports 4” on center gusseted and spot welded. A
solid cover shall be provided on the terminal box to minimize dust in the terminal
box. The terminal box shall be recessed when installed in air handling units.
Mounting provisions shall be flanged or slip-type as shown in the equipment
schedule.
E.
Safety Features – Shall include an automatic reset thermal cutout wired in series
with the control circuit and heat timers (fusible links) wired in series with the power
legs. All of the safety devices shall be serviceable through the terminal box without
removing the heater from the duct.
F.
Built-in Features – Shall include contactors, transformers, interlock relay, fusing
to meet NEC requirements and lugs sized to receive specified conductors. All
built-in components shall be factory wired and mounted on the heating coil in an
integral terminal box. The unit shall be complete with terminal strip for electrical
connections.
G.
The duct heater shall be controlled as shown on the drawings or in the
Automatic Temperature Control Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The electric duct heater shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15745-2
11/17
SECTION 15746
ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install complete with all accessories the electric wall heater as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The electric wall heater shall have published ratings and be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings
are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ELECTRIC WALL HEATER
The electric wall heater shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings. The wall
heater shall be manufactured by MARKEL. W all heaters fully equal to the specified
manufacturer and manufactured by BERKO or QMARK are acceptable.
A.
Unit Casing - Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel, phosphatized for
rust resistance and finished with baked enamel. All hardware used in the casing
shall be plated for rust resistance. Cabinets shall be equipped with a removable
front access to the interior.
B.
Front Cover - Shall be of the louver type, 16 gauge steel. Discharge grille shall direct
the air downward to floor.
15746-1
11/17
ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS
SECTION 15746
C.
Motors - Shall be permanently lubricated for constant operation. All motors shall be
provided with built-in, automatic reset thermal overload protection. All motors shall
be rated for voltage indicated.
D.
Heating Elements - Elements shall be constructed of high quality, nickel chrome
resistance coils embedded in a refractory material and enclosed within a steel
sheath. The sheath shall have spirally wound, extended fins for high heat transfer
and reduced operating temperature. The elements shall be housed in a heavy
gauge, steel enclosure
E.
Wiring - All wiring in the heating element circuit shall consist of high temperature,
heat resistant wire, fully enclosed within metal boxes or conduit for complete
mechanical/electrical protection.
F.
Standard Controls - Provide low voltage controls (24volt) by the manufacturer to
interface with the division15900 ATC system. Wall heater shall be controlled as
outlined in the Automatic Temperature Control section 15900. Each unit shall be
provided with: An automatic reset, and a built-in fan delay switch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The electric wall heater shall be installed complete with all accessories in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15746-2
11/17
SECTION 15747
INDUCTION TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods
shall apply to this section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install complete with all accessories the induction terminal units as shown
on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The induction terminal units shall have published ratings.
B.
All induction terminal units shall be tested by an independent Nationally
recognized Testing Laboratory for performance and sound levels.
C.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTAL
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings
are submitted.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
INDUCTION TERMINAL UNITS
The induction terminal units shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings.
The units shall be manufactured by NUCLIMATE.
A.
General - Induction terminal unit shall be constant volume primary air flow unit
designed to induce a secondary airflow within the conditioned space using the
primary conditioned air supply. Units shall be designed for ceiling installation with
factory supplied hanging brackets. The unit shall be capable of inducing the
secondary airflow within the conditioned space using the velocity pressure of the
primary airflow. This secondary air must flow directly from the room to the unit
and shall not use the ceiling as a return air plenum. Induction units using the
ceiling plenum as a return air path are not acceptable.
15747-1
11/17
INDUCTION TERMINAL UNITS
SECTION 15747
B.
Connections – Units shall be equipped with a round duct primary air intake, one
air plenum, an air induction nozzle plate, a supply and return chilled water piping
connection, one supply and return hot water piping connection, one 3/4”
condensate drain connection, and one combination supply/return air grille for a
full 360 degree coanda effect room air distribution. The grille shall have a
removable center core to provide full access to the return air side of the coil
C.
Casing - The entire unit shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal.
The primary air plenum and nozzles shall be designed and configured to provide
uniform air distribution to the nozzles with low noise operation.
D.
Induction Nozzles - Induction nozzles shall be aerodynamically designed and
made of food grade plastic having a tapered discharge for low noise levels.
E.
Water Coil Assembly
F.
1.
Coils shall be of the hot water type utilizing aluminum fins and copper
tubes.Coils shall be factory leak tested at 350 psi water. Coil connections
shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2.
The water coil assembly shall consist of a two row copper tube and
aluminum fins coil for cooling and a one row coil for heating.
Condensate Pan
1.
A piped condensate pan with a trap shall be provided by the induction unit
manufacturer.
2.
Provide factory installed float control safety switch in condensate drain
pans. Float shall close the chilled water coil control valve upon activation.
G.
Air Diffuser - The unit shall be matched up to a supply/return diffuser to evenly
distribute the mixed primary air in a 360 degree coanda effect air distribution
pattern. The diffuser shall fit into a standard ceiling grid. The center grille center
portion of the diffuser for return air shall be removable for access to interior of
unit without tools. The primary air connection is a single duct collar which directs
the primary air to the nozzles.
H.
Filters shall be concealed and accessible. They shall be the throwaway type and
1” thick.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The induction terminal units shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the
drawings. The first unit installed will be considered the typical mock up and shall
15747-2
11/17
INDUCTION TERMINAL UNITS
SECTION 15747
require notification, inspection and approval by designated owner representative
and/or architect and engineer before any additional installations will be allowed.
B.
Install induction terminal units in ceiling in such a manner as to allow easy
access to all control.
C.
Using the hanging brackets on each unit supplied by the manufacturer, support
induction terminal units to supporting structure using field supplied threaded rod
or other secure hanging system.
D.
Provide primary supply air connection and seal with duct sealer after installation.
E.
Filters - Shall be changed at the end of the construction period and before the
final inspection.
F.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter sizes to be included in
the O&M manuals. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies
of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church,
VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia 22032.
END OF SECTION
15747-3
11/17
SECTION 15748
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install complete with all accessories the electric unit heater as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The electric unit heater shall have published ratings and be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTAL
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER
The electric unit heater shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings. The unit
heater shall be manufactured by TRANE. Unit heaters fully equal to the specified
manufacturer and manufactured by QMARK, SINGER, BERKO, ERINCRAFT, or MARKEL
are acceptable.
A.
Unit Casing – Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel, zinc coated for rust
resistance and finished with baked enamel. All hardware used in the casing shall be
plated for rust resistance. Enclosures shall be equipped with elements, contactor
and built-in controls.
B.
Discharge – Shall be of the louver type. Discharge grille shall be adjustable to direct
the air downward to floor.
15748-1
11/17
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
SECTION 15748
C.
Elements – Shall consist of helically coiled nickel chromium alloy resistance wire
embedded and completely surrounded in magnesium oxide, enclosed and swagged
into corrosion resistant sheaths to which are permanently attached corrosion
resistant steel fins.
D.
Motors – Shall be totally enclosed industrial rated, single phase, permanently
lubricated and equipped with thermal overload protection with automatic reset. Units
rated 20 KW and less shall have shaded pole motors. Those over 20 KW shall have
permanent split capacitor motors.
E.
Fan Blade – Shall be of the axial flow type designed for high efficiency and quiet
operation. Fan speed shall not exceed 1750 rpm.
F.
Thermal Overload Protection – All heaters shall be equipped with a manual reset
thermal cutout which disconnects elements and motors in the event normal operating
temperatures are exceeded.
G.
Wiring – Heaters shall be designed for a single supply circuit, with elements, motor
and control circuits sub-divided and fused to conform to the current National
Electrical Code, Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. Standard. All three phase heaters shall have balanced phases.
H.
Controls – The unit heater shall be provided with low voltage (24v) controls by the
manufacturer to interface with Division 15900 ATC system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The electric unit heater shall be installed complete with all accessories in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15748-2
11/17
SECTION 15749
ELECTRIC CABINET UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install cabinet unit heater as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The cabinet unit heater shall have published ratings and be UL listed and bear the
UL label.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
The cabinet unit heater shall be completely factory assembled and of the type, capacity and
voltage shown on the drawings. The cabinet unit heater shall be manufactured by QMARK.
Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured by TRANE, STERLING,
RITTLING, BERKO or AIRTHERM are acceptable.
A.
Cabinet: All cabinets shall be constructed of galvanized steel panels, acoustically
and thermally insulated with glass fiber blanket material. The cabinet shall be
constructed of a minimum of 16-gauge steel on top and sides with 18 gauge front
panels. Front panels of horizontal cabinet unit heaters shall be provided with a
restraining device or hinges which hold this front panel securely when servicing. The
interior chassis shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel and
coated with rust inhibiting paint. Cabinet shall have baked enamel finish with color
selected
from
manufacturer's
selection
chart
by
the
Architect.
B.
Filters: Shall be one (1) inch thick throwaway type.
15749-1
11/17
ELECTRIC CABINET UNIT HEATERS
SECTION 15749
C.
Motor and Fan: Shall be direct driven, forward curved, centrifugal, double width type
design for quiet operation. The motor shall be multi-speed, permanent split
capacitor. Motor shall have built-in thermal overload protection. The electric input
shall not exceed those listed on drawings.
D.
Controls: Fan control shall be from multi-speed fan switch located in cabinet unless
otherwise noted. The cabinet unit heater shall be provided with low voltage (24v)
controls by the manufacturer to interface with Division 15900 ATC system.
E.
Electric Heating Coil: The coil shall be finned tube metal sheated type with extended
fins for high heat transfer and reduced operating temperature. The elements shall
be enclosed in a heavy gauge steel enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The cabinet unit heaters shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall be
stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
C.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter sizes to be included in the
O & M manuals. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the
list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction
8115 Gatehouse Rd., Suite 3500, Falls Church, VA 22042.
Services,
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
END OF SECTION
15749-2
11/17
SECTION 15750
VALANCE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install complete with all accessories the valance heating and cooling system as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The valance shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide the capacities
scheduled on the drawings.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTAL
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
VALANCE
The valance shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings. The valance shall be
manufactured by EDWARDS ENGINEERING or ENVIROTHERM. The valance unit shall
include a heat transfer element, element support structure, support brackets, ceiling baffle,
condensate drain pan, and drain connections.
A.
HEAT TRANSFER ELEMENT The heat transfer element shall be a plate fin coil with
aluminum fins on copper tubes. Plastic slides shall be attached to the fins at 3'-O"
spacing and be held in place by the element support structure. The heat transfer
element circuiting shall be such that the total water side pressure drop will not
exceed fifteen feet of water at flow rates specified on the valance schedule. The heat
transfer element shall have supply and return connections in accordance with
valance connection details.
15750-1
11/17
VALANCE SYSTEM
SECTION 15750
B.
ELEMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURE The longitudinal support for the valance unit
shall be provided by the element support structure. All components, including drain
pan, ceiling baffle and heat transfer element, shall be supported from this structure.
The support structure shall consist of two aluminum channels facing inward and
enclosing the heat transfer element. Cross bracing shall be provided as required to
offer lateral support. The support structure shall run the length of the valance and
shall rest on the valance support brackets.
C.
SUPPORT BRACKETS Wall Brackets: The valance unit shall be supported by 14
gauge steel wall brackets located at each end of the unit. The brackets shall be selfpositioning, fitting directly into the junction of the outside wall and the ceiling. The
wall brackets shall provide support directly to the element support structure and be
covered by sheet rock; alternative surface mounted bracket available but is not selfpositioning. Intermediate Ceiling Brackets: Intermediate aluminum ceiling brackets
shall be provided on all valance units when the length of the valance is greater than
sixteen feet. The spacing of the intermediate ceiling brackets shall be maintained at
about twelve feet center-to-center and shall not exceed sixteen feet. The
intermediate ceiling brackets shall be located along the center line of the element
support structure and shall be firmly supported to the ceiling or other substantial
overhead structure. The intermediate bracket shall provide support directly to the
element support structure.
D.
CEILING BAFFLE The aluminum ceiling baffle shall be pre-painted and shall be
adjustable to fit tightly against the ceiling.
E.
CONDENSATE DRAIN PANS The streamline valance condensate drain pan shall
be constructed of pre-painted 0.032 aluminum. The drain pan shall be lined with
closed cell insulation having a solid waterproof surface, said surface facing the heat
transfer element. OR The square valance condensate drain pan shall be constructed
of pre-painted 0.032 aluminum outer pan and inner pan. The inner drain pan shall be
lined with closed cell insulation having a solid waterproof surface, said surface facing
the heat transfer element.
F.
DRAIN CONNECTION The exterior drain connection shall be of molded plastic and
shall be affixed to the drain pan with a mechanical seal. The drain shall include a
length of flexible tubing for connection to the drain risers. OR The interior drain
connection shall be an integral part of the valance pan and shall be affixed to the
drain pan with a mechanical seal and be properly caulked with a silicon type sealant.
The drain shall include a length of flexible tubing for connection to the drain risers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The valance shall be installed complete with all accessories in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
15750-2
11/17
VALANCE SYSTEM
B.
SECTION 15750
The first unit installed will be considered the typical mock up and shall require
notification, inspection and approval by the designated owner representative and/or
architect and engineer before any additional installations will be allowed.
END OF SECTION
15750-3
11/17
SECTION 15751
HOT WATER FINNED TUBE RADIATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install complete with all accessories the hot water finned tube radiation as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The hot water finned tube radiation shall have published ratings and be certified by
IBR.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTAL
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
HOT WATER FINNED TUBE RADIATION
The hot water finned tube radiation shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings.
The finned tube radiation shall be manufactured by STERLING. Finned tube radiation fully
equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured by VULCAN, or RITTLING are
acceptable.
A.
Enclosure - shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel and shall mount into a continuous
roll-formed captive channel mounting strip which permits hinge type mounting and
access at the top and invisible fastening onto a rigid, 14 gauge steel enclosure
brackets at the bottom. Enclosure brackets shall be spaced at not more than 4-foot
intervals. Front panels shall be individually removable to facilitate cleaning, servicing
or replacement. All accessories shall fasten to the enclosure assembly in a manner,
which prevents contact with the back wall during installation. Cabinet air outlets of
sheet metal shall be recessed and framed. Enclosure shall have baked enamel
finish with color selection by Architect.
15751-1
11/17
HOT WATER FINNED TUBE RADIATION B.
SECTION 15751
Heating Element - Copper tube aluminum fin element types, as indicated on plans,
shall have integral fin collars which space the fins and provide fin-to-tube surface
firmly bonded by mechanical expansion of the tube. Elements shall be positively
positioned front-to-back, with provisions for silent horizontal expansion and
contraction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The hot water finned tube radiation shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15751-2
11/17
SECTION 15752
HORIZONTAL PIPE ENCLOSURE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install complete with all accessories the radiation enclosure and horizontal
enclosure as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The horizontal pipe enclosure shall be factory manufactured.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
HORIZONTAL PIPE ENCLOSURE
The horizontal enclosure shall be of the type and as detailed as shown on the drawings. The
enclosures shall be manufactured by STERLING. Enclosures fully equal to the specified
manufacturer and manufactured by CUSTOM ENCLOSURE, TRANE, VULCAN, RITTLING
or MARK-HOT are acceptable.
A.
Enclosure - Shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel and shall mount into a continuous
roll-formed captive channel mounting strip which permits hinge type mounting and
access at the top and invisible fastening onto rigidized, 14 gauge steel enclosure
brackets at the bottom. Enclosure brackets shall be spaced at not more than 4-foot
intervals. Front panels shall be individually removable to facilitate cleaning, servicing
or replacement. All accessories shall fasten to the enclosure assembly in a manner,
which prevents contact with the back wall during installation. Cabinet air outlets of
sheet metal shall be recessed and framed. Enclosure shall have baked enamel
finish with color selection by Architect. Arrangement shall be as detailed on the
drawings.
15752-1
11/17
HORIZONTAL PIPE ENCLOSURE
SECTION 15752
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The horizontal pipe enclosure shall be installed complete with all accessories in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15752-2
11/17
SECTION 15753
HOT WATER CONVECTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install hot water convectors as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The hot water convectors shall have published ratings.
1.04
SUBMITTAL
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
HOT WATER CONVECTORS
The hot water convectors shall be of type and capacity shown on the drawings. The
convectors shall be manufactured by STERLING. Convectors fully equal to the specified
manufacturer and manufactured by VULCAN, RITTLING or TRANE are acceptable.
A.
Enclosure - Cabinet front and top panels shall be 14-gauge steel. End panels shall
be reinforced 18 gauge. Front panel shall have horizontal stiffening channel.
Cabinet backs shall be phosphatized, galvanized; front, top and sides shall be
phosphatized and painted inside and out with one coat of gray primer. Provide
baked enamel finish with color selection by architect. Fronts shall be secured in
place by quick opening slide bolts or camlock fasteners. Convector styling shall
match fin-tube enclosure styling. All cabinets shall have recessed framed air outlets.
Provide damper blade with a vandal resistant, allen head external operator.
B.
Heating Element - Shall be constructed of aluminum fins, ribbed steel side plates, fin
tube supports and copper tubes expanded and rolled into cast iron headers. Fins
shall have integral fin collars, which space the fins and provide fin-to-tube surface
firmly bonded to the tube by mechanical expansion of the tube. All elements shall
withstand 150-lb. air pressure factory tested under water.
15753-1
11/17
HOT WATER CONVECTORS
SECTION 15753
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The hot water convectors shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
15753-2
11/17
SECTION 15754
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install cabinet unit heater as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The cabinet unit heater shall have published ratings and be UL listed and bear the
UL label.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
The cabinet unit heater shall be completely factory assembled and of the type, capacity and
voltage shown on the drawings. The cabinet unit heater shall be manufactured by TRANE.
Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured by STERLING, RITTLING
or AIRTHERM are acceptable.
A.
Cabinet: All cabinets shall be constructed of galvanized steel panels, acoustically
and thermally insulated with glass fiber blanket material. The cabinet shall be
constructed of a minimum of 18-gauge steel on top and sides with 16 gauge front
panels. Front panels of horizontal cabinet unit heaters shall be provided with a
restraining device or hinges which hold this front panel securely when servicing.The
interior chassis shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel and
coated with rust inhibiting paint. Cabinet shall have baked enamel finish with color
selected from manufacturer's selection chart by the Architect.
B.
Filters: Shall be one (1) inch thick throwaway type. Two complete set of spare filters
15754-1
11/17
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
SECTION 15754
shall be supplied in addition to the set used during construction.
C.
Motor and Fan: Shall be direct driven, forward curved, centrifugal, double width type
design for quiet operation. The motor shall be multi-speed, permanent split
capacitor. Motor shall have built-in thermal overload protection. The electric input
shall not exceed those listed on drawings.
D.
Controls: Fan control shall be from multi-speed fan switch located in cabinet unless
otherwise noted. The cabinet unit heater shall be provided with low voltage (24v)
controls by the manufacturer to interface with Division 15900 ATC system. It shall
have a strap on hot water aquastat located on the hot water supply to prevent the fan
from running when hot water is not present.
E.
Hot Water Heating Coil: The coil shall be factory tested and shall be suitable for
working pressures up to 250 psig. Automatic air vents shall be provided. Coils shall
be of copper tube/aluminum fin construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The cabinet unit heaters shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The first unit installed will be
considered the typical mock up and shall require notification, inspection and approval
by designated owner representative and/or architect and engineer before any
additional installations will be allowed.
B.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before final inspection.
C.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter sizes to be included in the
O & M manuals. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the
list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction
8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church VA 22042.
Services,
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
END OF SECTION
15754-2
11/17
SECTION 15755
HOT WATER DUCT COIL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010 General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install hot water duct coil as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The hot water duct coil shall have published ratings by an acceptable manufacturer.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
HOT WATER DUCT COILS
The hot water duct coils shall be of the type, and capacity shown on the drawings. The units
shall be manufactured by TRANE. Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and
manufactured by CARRIER, AIRTHERM, OR DUNHAM BUSH are acceptable.
A.
Duct Flange - Shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Cast brass supply and
return pipe tap connections shall be furnished for each coil.
B.
Coil - The coil shall be constructed on a single serpentine tube and shall be
constructed of copper with at least .031" thick walls. Aluminum fins at least .015"
thick shall be mechanically attached to the coil by expansion. All connections and Ubends shall be electrically induction-brazed to the tube. The coil shall be tested for
150 psi.
C.
The duct coils shall be controlled by a sensor. (See Div 15900)
15755-1
11/17
HOT WATER DUCT COIL
SECTION 15755
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The hot water duct coil shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings. The unit shall be mounted at maximum
height. The first unit installed will be considered the typical mock up and shall require
notification, inspection and approval by designated owner representative and/or architect
and engineer before any additional installations will be allowed.
END OF SECTION
15755-2
11/17
SECTION 15760
HOT WATER UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010 General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install hot water unit heater as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The hot water unit heater shall have published ratings by an acceptable
manufacturer.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
HOT WATER UNIT HEATERS
The hot water unit heaters shall be of the type, capacity and voltage shown on the drawings.
The unit heaters shall be manufactured by AIRTHERM. Unit heaters fully equal to the
specified manufacturer and manufactured by TRANE, STERLING, RITTLING or TED REED
THERMAL are acceptable.
A.
Casing - Shall be constructed of heavy gauge furniture steel. It shall be
phosphatized and completely dip painted with heavy-duty baked enamel. Cast brass
supply and return pipe tap connections shall be bolted to corners of the back.
B.
Coil - The coil shall be constructed on a single serpentine tube and shall be
constructed of copper with at least .031" thick walls. Aluminum fins at least .015"
thick shall be mechanically attached to the coil by expansion. All connections and Ubends shall be electrically induction-brazed to the tube. The coil shall be tested for
100 psi.
15760-1
11/17
HOT WATER UNIT HEATERS
SECTION 15760
C.
Fan and Motor - Shall be selected for quiet operation. The fan shall be factory
balanced and the motor shall have permanent lubricated bearings and inherent
protection.
D.
The unit shall have louvers or diffusers as shown on the drawings.
E.
The unit heater shall be provided with low voltage (24v) controls by the manufacturer
to interface with Division 15900 ATC system. It shall have a strap on hot water
aquastat located on the hot water return to prevent the fan from running when hot
water is not present.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The hot water heater shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings. The unit shall be mounted for maximum
headroom.
END OF SECTION
15760-2
11/17
SECTION 15761
FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install complete the fan coil units as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The fan coil units shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and be rated in
accordance with ARI Standards 440-81.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
Provide and install fan coil units of the type and capacity as shown on the drawings and
specified herein. The fan coil units shall be manufactured by TRANE. Fan coil units fully
equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured by CARRIER, DAIKIN or
INTERNATIONAL, are acceptable providing they meet connection limitations.
2.02
FAN COIL UNITS
A.
Assembly Description - The unit shall consist of a finished room cabinet with
configuration as shown, access openings, discharge and intake grilles, toe space
base, connection pockets, noted coils, drain pan, fan and motor assembly, filter and
control box.
15761-1
11/17
FAN COIL UNITS
B.
SECTION 15761
Cabinet
1.
The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel panels, acoustically and
thermally insulated with glass fiber blanket material. The cabinet shall be
constructed of a minimum of 18-gauge steel on top and sides with 16 gauge
front panels. The interior chassis shall be constructed of not less than 16
gauge galvanized steel and shall be coated with rust inhibiting paint. Cabinet
shall have baked enamel finish with color selected from manufacturer's
selection chart by the Architect.
2.
The discharge grille shall be integral stamped metal unless noted otherwise.
C.
Coils - Shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless
copper tubes, with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil and supports. Coils shall
be factory tested at 300 psi. Coil connections shall be at opposite ends. Hot water
coils shall be placed in a pre-heat position in all units.
D.
Drain pan shall be an IAQ type non-corrosive, positively sloped, insulated and
cleanable drain pan. It shall fit under the coil and control valves and be sized to
collect the water from all component chilled surfaces. Pan insulation shall be
selected to prevent condensation on pan surfaces.
E.
Motor and Fan - Shall be direct driven, forward curved, centrifugal, double width
type, quiet operating design. The motor shall be multi-speed, permanent split
capacitor, continuous duty, high efficiency type. Motor shall have built-in thermal
overload protection. The electric inputs shall not exceed those listed on drawings.
F.
Filters shall be concealed and accessible without removing front panel. They shall
be the throwaway type and 1” thick.
G.
Controls - The fan shall be controlled with a multi-speed fan switch with auxiliary taps
located in an accessible lockable end compartment. The temperature controls shall
be as shown in Section 15900 - Automatic Temperature Controls.
H.
All floor mounted fan coil units shall be provided with a sub-base.
I.
All horizontal, semi-recessed fan coil units shall be provided with a telescoping
ceiling panel with hinged access and intake grille.
J.
Provide factory installed float control safety switch in condensate drain pans. Float
shall stop unit upon activation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The fan coil units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings. Install sub-bases on all floor15761-2
11/17
FAN COIL UNITS
SECTION 15761
mounted units. The first unit installed will be considered the typical mock up and
shall require notification, inspection and approval by the designated owner
representative and/or architect and engineer before any additional installations will
be allowed.
B.
Piping - Shall be as described in Section 15701. Provide supply and return ball
valves, manual air vents and drain plugs.
C.
Filters - Shall be changed at the end of the construction period and before the final
inspection.
D.
Provide a minimum 18” long section of removable horizontal pipe enclosure as
described in Section 15752, for floor mounted units that can not be piped from
opposite ends, to locate valves in. Provide end caps.
E.
Provide spare fuses for fan coil units for each size of fuse used in accordance with
the following schedule:
Spares Required
Number of Fan Coil Units
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
over 40
2
4
6
8
10
F.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before the final inspection. The other set of filters shall be
stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
G.
Provide a typed list of all the different fan coil units and their filter sizes to be included
in the O & M manuals. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies
of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction
8115 Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
Services,
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
END OF SECTION
15761-3
11/17
SECTION 15765
UNIT VENTILATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install, complete, the unit ventilator as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The unit ventilator shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed or be tested by an
accepted independent testing agency.
B.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
UNIT VENTILATOR
Provide and install unit ventilator(s) of the type and capacity as shown on the drawings and
specified herein. The unit ventilator shall be manufactured by TRANE. Unit ventilators fully
equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured by CARRIER or DAIKIN are
acceptable providing they meet the specification requirements.
A.
Assembly Description - The unit shall consist of a finished room cabinet with
configuration as shown, access openings, discharge and intake grilles, toe space
base, connection pockets, noted coils, drain pan, fan and motor assembly, damper
assembly, outside air inlet, filter and control box and factory supplied extension
cabinet for housing shutoff and control valves.
B.
Cabinet
1.
The cabinet shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel panels, acoustically and
15765-1
11/17
UNIT VENTILATOR
SECTION 15765
thermally insulated with glass fiber blanket material. All exposed edges shall
be rounded. The interior chassis shall be constructed of not less than 16
gauge galvanized steel and shall be coated with rust inhibiting paint. Cabinet
shall have baked enamel finish with color selected from manufacturer's
selection chart by the Architect.
2.
Front panels shall be removable in sections. They shall be secured by allen
wrench operated quick open fasteners. The cabinet shall have a separate
space for piping and wiring crossover. Provide access opening for
adjustment and service access.
3.
Return air intake grille shall be bottom front face located or recessed in toe
space slotted kick plate type.
4.
Discharge air grille shall be top mounted, continuous; round edged steel bars
with 10 degrees vertical deflection.
C.
The coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless
copper tubes, with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil and supports. Coils shall
be factory tested at 300 psi. Coils connections shall be at opposite ends. Hot water
coils shall be placed in a pre-heat position in all units. Chilled water coil connections
shall be on the opposite end from the electrical connections. 2-pipe systems shall
have coil connections on the opposite end from the electrical connections.
D.
The drain pan shall be an IAQ type non-corrosive positively sloped and cleanable
drain pan. It shall fit under the coil and control valves and be sized to collect the
water from all future component chilled surfaces. Pan insulation shall be selected to
prevent condensation on pan surfaces.
E.
Motor and Fan - Shall be direct driven, forward curved, centrifugal, double width
type, quiet operating design. The motor shall be multi-speed, permanent split
capacitor, continuous duty, high efficiency type. Motor shall have built-in thermal
overload protection. The electric inputs shall not exceed those listed on drawings.
F.
The filters shall be concealed and accessible without removing front panel. They
shall be the throwaway type and 1” thick.
G.
Controls - The fan shall be controlled with a multi-speed fan switch with auxiliary taps
located in an accessible lockable end compartment. The temperature controls shall
be as shown in Section 15900 - Automatic Temperature Controls.
H.
Provide factory installed float control safety switch in condensate drain pans. Float
shall stop unit upon activation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
15765-2
11/17
UNIT VENTILATOR
3.01
SECTION 15765
INSTALLATION
A.
The unit ventilator shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
B.
Piping - Shall be as described in Section 15701. Provide supply and return gate
valves, manual air vents and drain plugs.
C.
Filters - Shall be changed at the end of the construction period and before the final
inspection.
D.
Provide spare fuses for unit ventilators for each size of fuse used in accordance with
the following schedule:
NUMBER OF VENTILATORS
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
Over 40
E.
F.
SPARES REQUIRED
2
4
6
8
10
Provide a typed list of all the different unit ventilators and their filter sizes to be
included in the O & M manuals. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two
additional copies of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction
8115 Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
Services,
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032.
The unit ventilators shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings. The first unit installed will be
considered the typical mock-up and shall require notification, inspection and
approval by the designated owner representative and/or architect and engineer
before any additional installations will be allowed.
END OF SECTION
15765-3
11/17
SECTION 15769
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and
Methods shall apply to this section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
B.
The system shall deliver the specified air volume at the static pressure
scheduled.
C.
The unit shall be constructed to provide smooth interior surfaces and to limit the
casing leakage at less than 1% of the specified air volume at operating static.
D.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with CSA C22.2 and UL 1812 and shall
carry the ETL label of approval.
E.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with industrial design practices.
F.
Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
G.
Airflow data shall comply with AMCA 210 method of testing.
H.
Cabinet and exterior components shall be tested and certified weatherproof.
I.
All units shall be 100% factory tested.
J.
All effectiveness data of heat and energy recovery components shall be certified
by the ARI 1060 certification program directory.
K.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
15769-1
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
SECTION 15769
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
The rooftop unit shall be manufactured by VALENT. Units fully equal to the specified
manufacturer and manufactured by GREENHECK or AAON are acceptable.
2.02
EQUIPMENT
A.
General - Factory assembled, consisting of fan and motor assemblies (supply
and exhaust), compressor section, heat wheel, all necessary dampers, hoods,
plenums, filters, drain pans, wiring and controls. Unit shall be stand-alone
controlled with all control devices provided by the unit manufacturer. Unit shall
have single point power connection.
B.
Unit Cabinet
1.
The rooftop unit is to be installed outdoors by the mechanical contractor.
Indoor units weatherized for outdoor use are not acceptable.
2.
All unit panels are fixed with zinc plated hexagonal head type screws
complete with a washer and rubber gasket for a weatherproof assembly.
Self-drilling, self-tapping screws are used and therefore no tools are
required from the unit interior for panel removal. These panels allow for
fast service to all major components.
3.
All panel joints must be caulked with a weatherproof silicone. The silicone
used must be clear to match any color surfaces. After application, the
silicone must react with atmospheric moisture to produce a formed-inplace silicone rubber glazing and curtain wall seal.
4.
The unit base frame shall be constructed from a bolted, structural formed
G90 galvanized steel with internal structural cross members properly
sized to allow rigging and handling of the unit. All major components shall
be supported by the base without sagging or pulsating. Lifting lugs shall
be provided and strategically located to allow equilibrium during lifting.
5.
Unit construction consists of an insulated 14 gauge galvanized structural
frame complete with die cast aluminum corners. The rigid frame provides
stable construction allowing for panel removal without affecting the unit
integrity. Panels shall be double wall construction using 2" thick mineral
wool insulation 1.5 lbs/ft3 density, 18 gauge galvanized steel exterior
panels (satin coat finish) and 26 gauge G90 galvanized steel inner liner.
The unit shall be designed to resist any snow, ice and wind loads, as well
as seismic loads in compliance with the National Building Code. Single
wall construction with coated insulation will not be acceptable. Exposed
insulation edges in the air stream will not be acceptable.
15769-2
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
C.
SECTION 15769
6.
Internal partition wall shall be insulated and constructed the same as the
unit cabinet.
7.
Full size access door(s) to allow for periodic maintenance and inspections
must be provided for all serviceable components. Serviceable
components include but are not limited to coils, heat exchanger, damper
sections, motor sections, compressor sections, and piping enclosures.
Doors shall be double wall construction made of 18 gauge galvanized
steel on both outer and inner liner for maximum rigidity. Door insulation is
the same as the unit panels. Provide doors with heavy duty corrosion
resistant aluminum hinges that allow the door to open at 180°.
Compression type handles are operable from both sides of the unit
access door(s) and neoprene resilient bubble gaskets for an enclosure
that is sealed tight shall also be provided. Plastic latch hinges are not
acceptable.
8.
Outdoor constructed units shall have a pitched roof to dissipate water
accumulation. Rain gutters must be provided above access doors. All roof
joint seams are "T" shape construction, minimum height of 1.5", sealed
and encapsulated by a metal strip.
9.
All weather hoods for outdoor constructed units shall be provided with
birdscreen and rain gutters. Hoods may ship loose for field assembly.
10.
Recessed, double-sloped drain pans shall be made of formed sections of
stainless steel. Drain pans are sloped with a threaded drain pipe
connection of 1 1/2" in diameter ending outside through the structural
base channel. All drain pan corners shall be welded.
11.
Paint
a.
Outdoor constructed units shall have one coat of primer and two
coats of enamel paint.
b.
All galvanized steel surfaces that require paint shall be made of
satin coat-finished galvanized steel of the specified gauge(s).
c.
All galvanized steel surfaces without any paint shall be made of
G90 galvanized steel of the specified gauges.
d.
All unit surfaces that require paint must be cleaned and free from
all oil, dirt, and other contaminants before painting.
Energy Recovery Heat Wheel
1.
Heat Wheels shall comply with UL standards.
15769-3
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
D.
SECTION 15769
2.
Heat Wheel - Provide aluminum or polymer transfer media, flame spread
rating of not more than 25, and smoke developed rating of not more than
50, and shall be independently tested in accordance with ASTM standard
E-84. Rotor media shall be independently tested in accordance with
ASHRAE Standards. It shall allow laminar flow (but not radial) at usual
velocities and prevent leakage, bypassing and cross contamination by
cross flow within wheel. Size the transfer media to allow passage of 300
micron particles without fouling or clogging. Treat media with nondegrading desiccant that is bacteriostatic, non-corroding, and non-toxic.
No asbestos material will be allowed. Wheel shall not condense water
directly or require a condensate drain for summer or winter operation.
Performance rating shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 1060.
3.
Provide casing seals on periphery of rotor as well as on duct divider and
purge section. Seals are to be adjustable, of extended life materials, and
effective in limiting air leakage.
4.
Wheel shall be supported by ball or roller bearings and belt driven by a
fractional horsepower, totally enclosed, NEMA Standard motor through a
close coupled positively lubricated speed reducer, or gear/chain speed
reduction. Wheel motor shall be controlled by a manufacturer provided
variable frequency drive.
5.
Unit shall be constructed of heavy gage steel to insure rigidity and
stability. Casing side panels shall be removable to insure easy access to
internal parts. Provide integral flanges for flanged duct connection and
provide lifting holes or lugs.
6.
Provide rotation sensor to monitor energy recovery wheel rotation.
Fans
1.
Fan performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed
or rotation, and efficiency shall be factory tested and shall comply with the
requirements of AMCA 210.
2.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for
continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower in accordance with AMCA 300.
3.
Fans shall be of centrifugal type, rigidly braced and reinforced to help
prevent vibration or pulsation. Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be
in accordance with the standard sizes adopted by AMCA.
4.
Fan and motors shall be mounted inside the unit casing with 1" (minimum
90% efficiency) deflection spring vibration isolators and supplied with
neoprene flexible connections.
15769-4
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
5.
Fans shall be selected for a stable operation, at least 20% under the fan’s
first critical speed.
6.
Units shall be equipped with non-overloading, airfoil, SWSI plenum fan,
Arrangement 3 (AMCA labeled) supply and exhaust fans to provide
scheduled airflows against static pressures indicated.
Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished, and completed
with a corrosion resistant coating. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.
7.
E.
SECTION 15769
8.
Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease-lubricated, self-aligning ball or
pillow block type. Bearing shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life
(L-50) in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum operating speed in
accordance with AFBMA 9 regulations.
9.
Fan drives shall be designed for a 1.4 service factor. Drives are factory
mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment made before unit startup.
10.
Belt drives with motor pulley shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors
up to and including 10 HP. Fan pulleys shall be fixed pitch.
Motors
1.
All motors are internal to the unit casing and are mounted on an
adjustable base allowing for belt alignment and tensioning.
2.
Fan motors shall be heavy duty, 1800 rpm, high efficiency (E-pact
Series), open drip proof (ODP), NEMA Design B Class F insulation and
1.15 service factor. Motors shall be constant speed operable at field
voltage: 460 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
3.
Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to accelerate the drive loads
satisfactorily.
4.
Motor sizes shall be minimum size indicated in the equipment schedule. If
not indicated, large enough so that the drive load will not require the
motor to operate in the service factor range.
5.
Temperature rating shall be 122°F (50°C) maximum temperature rise at
104°F (40°C) ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation).
6.
Motor construction shall be NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose,
continuous duty, Design B.
a.
Bases shall be adjustable.
b.
Bearings shall be:
15769-5
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
1)
2)
3)
c.
F.
G.
SECTION 15769
Ball or roller bearing with inner and outer shaft seals.
Grease lubricated.
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other
drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motors.
Energy efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112-B. If efficiency
is not specified, motors shall give a higher efficiency than
"average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE
Standard 112-B.
Filters
1.
Filters shall be UL 900 Class II.
2.
Outside and return air inlet shall be equipped with galvanized steel racks
that permit slide out removal of filters (side access) for units equal or
smaller than 78", and universal holding frames with upstream access for
units taller than 78".
3.
Filter banks shall be arranged for flat orientation. The air velocity shall not
exceed 500 fpm through each filter bank.
4.
Unit shall include 2" disposable type air filters, 25-30% DSE efficiency,
consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media encased in
fiberboard cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to
provide media support. Airflow resistance with clean media shall not
exceed 0.28 inch w.g. at a face velocity of 500 fpm and filter arrestance
efficiency of 90% based on ASHRAE Test Standard 52.
Dampers
1.
Air leakage through a 48" x 48" damper shall not exceed 10.3 cfm/sq.ft.
against 4 in. wg. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air
leakage data to be certified under AMCA certified rating program.
2.
Dampers are designed for operation in temperatures ranging between 40°F and 212°F.
3.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary dampers. Dampers for outside
air intake, exhaust air and all other dampers required for the system
including the dampers for defrost (if required).
4.
Intake outside air dampers are opposed blade type and exhaust air
dampers are parallel blade type. For other dampers, see manufacturer's
recommendations.
15769-6
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
H.
SECTION 15769
5.
Outside air dampers and bypass dampers shall be motorized. Provide
damper actuators with 24 VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
6.
Exhaust air dampers shall be gravity backdraft type. Provide damper
actuators with 24 VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
7.
Damper construction shall be as follows:
a.
Damper frame shall be extruded aluminum.
b.
Blades shall be extruded aluminum.
c.
Dampers shall be opposed blade type or parallel blades where
indicated
d.
Damper blade ends shall be sealed with neoprene flexible edge
seals complete with bottom and top blade wiper seals.
e.
Frame and blades shall be non-insulated.
Direct Expansion Cooling Section
1.
Compressors - Shall be quiet-running hermetic, scroll-type. They shall be
mounted in an isolated compartment to be serviceable without affecting
airflow, and mounted on neoprene isolators to minimize vibration
transmission and noise. Unit shall be capable of full modulation to
maintain space temperature.
2.
Condenser and Evaporator Coils - Shall have copper tubes with
permanently expanded aluminum fins. Evaporator coils shall be mounted
on a stainless steel drain pan. Condenser coils shall be provided with
hail/ vandal guards to protect the coils.
3.
Provide factory mounted sensor between the evaporator coil and the hot
gas reheat coil for connection to the ATC system.
4.
Thermal Expansion Valves - Shall provide refrigerant control.
5.
Standard features of the packaged direct expansion cooling include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Liquid-Line Filter Drier
High Pressure Manual Reset Cutout
Low Pressure Auto-Reset Cutout
Time Delay Relay for Compressor Protection
Service/Charging Valves
Moisture Indicating Sight Glass
15769-7
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
SECTION 15769
I.
Indirect Gas Fired Heating Section - Shall be 80% efficient, ETL Listed for
outdoor installation to ANSI Standard Z83.8 - 2002, CGA approved per 2.6 2002 and have a blow through fan design. Furnace shall operate with natural gas
and have a power venting system. The burner and heat exchanger shall be
constructed of aluminized steel. Standard furnace features shall include main gas
pressure regulator, main gas valve, fully modulating electronic controls to
maintain discharge temperature, direct spark ignition system, high limit, and a 24volt control transformer.
J.
Hot Gas Reheat for Dehumidification - Hot gas reheat coils, piping, and
modulating controls shall be factory installed for humidity control.
K.
Roof curb: Roof curb shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer for field
assembly. Curb shall consist of formed 18 gauge galvanized steel sections.
Manufacturer's curb is standard double wall, 14" in height, un-insulated. Unit
base design is made for recessed curb installation. Stiffeners will be provided for
field assembly when required. Pitch roof curb to match building roof. Provide
wood nailer. Curb shall be one piece. Two piece curbs are not acceptable. See
Detail 5-4.2 on sheet M4.2 for critical dimensions.
L.
Temperature Controls shall be provided by the unit manufacturer.
1.
Shall be provided to accomplish control sequence as outlined in the
automatic temperature control section of specifications. All temperature
controls shall be factory installed, wired, and programmed by the
manufacturer or see item 3 below.
2.
Manufacturer shall provide an interface which will allow the Owner's
energy management system to access the control points shown on the
points list. This interface shall be in complete compliance with the current
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard #135. Provide any coordination as required to
facilitate this interface into the Owner's EMS. Provide all necessary
protocol documentation and gateway hardware and software (if required)
such that the section 15900 system suppliers may successfully create a
communication interface between the control system furnished in this
section of the specification and the 15900 control system. Provide an
adequate level of technical support to guide the section 15900 personnel
towards completion of subject communication interface. Protocol must
support reading/writing status and analog and digital point information
from this section of the specification. All documentation, gateway
hardware and software, and required technical support are understood to
be included in the bid.
3.
Temperature Controls shall be accomplished by either of the following
methods:
15769-8
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
M.
2.03
SECTION 15769
a.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with the ATC
to accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications.
b.
Field installed controls provided by the section 15900 contractor is
acceptable provided the control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications is met.
A water level sensing device shall be factory provided in the unit condensate pan
which shall shut down the unit in the event this device’s level is exceeded.
Device shall be located in a readily accessible location.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
N.
All electrical controls shall be ETL listed and the entire unit shall be factory wired
in accordance with the National Electrical Code Standard.
O.
The outdoor constructed units shall be supplied with a weatherproof non-fused
main power disconnect switch. A single point power connection shall be provided
for all units.
P.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary high voltage components as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor starters on all high voltage motors for constant speed applications.
Thermal protection on all high voltage motors.
Fuses and fuse holders.
All necessary control transformers.
Q.
Unit shall be completed with all necessary relays, time delay, damper actuators
with auxiliary switches (as required).
R.
Terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Low voltage is
24V.
S.
Fan access doors are equipped with a momentary interrupt switch that shuts off
the unit when a protected door is opened. These switches can be removed if belt
guards are installed on the fan assembly.
T.
An integral control panel shall be provided having a hinged access door and an
approved locking device.
U.
All control devices, except those not mounted directly to the unit, shall be factory
mounted and wired. Control panel shall have a labeled strip to land all wires for
field installed control components.
V.
All components are fully wired and 100% tested prior to shipping.
15769-9
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
SECTION 15769
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory Start-up - The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent. Manufacturer shall provide on-site startup and
commissioning assistance through job completion. Complete installation and
startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions. This shall
include a factory startup for factory provided control devices as well as
configuring control points for other DO devices. Service representative shall
completely configure all control devices.
B.
Demonstration - Engage manufacturer or factory authorized service
representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and
maintain individual units and complete system. This shall include training of the
Owner's energy management department representatives as to establish control
system programming, scheduling routines, alarm reporting, system topography,
communication protocols and password level assignments.
C.
The rooftop units shall be installed complete with all accessories in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations, as listed in the specifications and as
shown on the drawings.
D.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction
dust has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall
be stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
E.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter and belt sizes to be
included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter
size and the number of filters required for each unit, and belt size and number of
belts for each unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies
of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church,
VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
F.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each rooftop unit.
G.
Provide one spare set of belts per unit per drive.
15769-10
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND
COOLING UNITS WITH ENTHALPY WHEELS
H.
SECTION 15769
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee
or Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 1/2" white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15769-11
11/17
SECTION 15770
PACKAGE TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Furnish permanently installed electric cooling/hot water packaged terminal air conditioner of
size and capacity shown on drawing. Conditioner shall consist of a room cabinet-wall
sleeve, Heating/Cooling chassis, control module, and outside air louver.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The packaged units shall have published ratings and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PACKAGED TERMINAL UNIT
The thru-wall unit shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings. The units shall
be manufactured by TRANE. Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and
manufactured by DAIKIN, CARRIER or FRIEDRICH are acceptable.
A.
Outside Air Louver - Shall be anodized extruded aluminum with finish selected by
Architect. Louver shall be easily installed from inside of building.
B.
Room Cabinet-Wall Sleeve - Shall be entirely constructed of zinc-coated,
phosphatized steel. Top and sides shall be 18 gauge with baked epoxy corrosion
resistant finish. Base pan shall be 16 gauge dipped in thermo-setting plastic,
epichlorhydrin bisphenol, and baked to form a continuous film of corrosion
protection. Discharge grilles shall be four-position stamped aluminum. Front panel
shall be capable of being opened and/or removed without the use of tools.
C.
Heating-Cooling Chassis - Shall be a slide-in, plug-in chassis with self-contained
refrigerant cycle consisting of compressor, condenser fan and coil, evaporator fan
and coil, hot water coil, refrigerant tubing and controls, electrical and operating
controls, pressure ventilation system and condensate removal system.
15770-1
11/17
PACKAGE TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONING UNITS D.
SECTION 15770
1.
Compressor shall be welded hermetic, internally and externally vibration
isolated. Refrigeration control shall provide full cooling capacity at ambient
temperatures down to 35 degrees F without evaporator coil freeze-up,
compressor short-cycling or slugging. Refrigerant shall be 410A.
2.
Evaporator and condenser fans shall be driven by one two-speed,
permanent split capacitor, permanently lubricated fan motor located in
conditioned air stream.
3.
Heating coil shall be serpentine hot water type. The coil shall be constructed
of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes with
continuous fin collars and sleeved coil and supports. Coils shall be factory
tested at 300 psi. Provide supply and return gate valves, automatic air vents
and drain plugs. Provide hailguard at coils.
Operating Controls - Shall be provided in a separable, plug-in module as part of the
cooling chassis. Control module shall consist of self-contained adjustable
thermostat, with OFF-HEAT-COOL-HIGH-LOW selector switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The packaged unit shall be installed complete with all accessories in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
B.
New filters shall be installed after construction is over and before the final inspection.
C.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter sizes to be included in the
O & M manuals. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the
list, distributed to:
1. Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115 Gatehouse
Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
2. Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032.
END OF SECTION
15770-2
11/17
SECTION 15771
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to
this section.
1.02
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The packaged units shall have published ratings and shall be UL listed, conforms to
the current International Energy Conservation Code and current ASHRAE standards.
B.
Construct gas fired heating sections in accordance with AGA safety standards and
provide AGA label.
C.
Factory start-up-The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a factory
approved start-up agent.
D.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNIT
The rooftop unit shall be of the type and capacity shown the drawings. The units shall be
manufactured by TRANE. Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured
by CARRIER or DAIKIN are acceptable.
A.
Packaged Assembly: Unit shall consist of a completely assembled, piped, wired and
tested unit composed of a weatherproof enclosure that is insulated with foil faced
insulation having a thickness of 1” and a density of 1 pound with all edges sealed
and hinged gasketed locking access doors and, non-corrosive, sloped, cleanable
insulated IAQ type condensate drain pan centrifugal blower with belt drive air
handling section, low velocity throwaway filter section complete direct expansion air
cooled cooling system section, single point power connection and gas fired or hot
water heating section all mounted on one base with additional roof adapting
15771-1
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
SECTION 15771
components and accessories as required in this specification or as shown on the
plans.
B.
Enclosure: Shall be heavy gauge zinc-coated steel with baked enamel finish and
shall be completely weatherized for outdoor installation.
C.
Air Handling Section: Fan shall have forward curved blades, belt driven with
adjustable motor sheaves. The motor and fan shall have permanently lubricated ball
bearings. The motor shall have thermal overload protection.
D.
Filter Section: Shall fit into integral racks inside casing. Maximum velocity through
filter 350 fpm. Filters shall be throwaway, 2" thick pleated with 35% efficiency, and a
MERV rating of 8. Two complete sets of spare filters shall be supplied in addition to
the set used during construction.
E.
Cooling Section: Shall have vibration isolated hermetic compressor(s), copper tube
aluminum fin air cooled condensing coil and propeller type condenser fans directconnected to inherently protected motors. Provide metal hail / vandal guards to
protect the condenser coil fins. Complete system shall be factory de-hydrated,
tested and charged. Refrigeration cycle shall include condenser and evaporator fan
compressor cutouts, 24-volt transformers, low and high pressure cutouts, liquid line
solenoid valves for system pump-down and compressor protection cutout with reset.
Units rated 10 tons and above shall have 50% capacity reduction capability. Units
with a cooling capacity of 54 MBH and greater shall be equipped with an economizer
cycle and shall include industry standard acceptable low leakage outside air damper.
Refrigerant shall be R-410A.
F.
Hot Water Heating Coils: Shall be ARI certified non-freeze type pitched within the
ductwork for proper drainage. Headers shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel.
Maximum work pressure limit of coil shall be 175 psig at 400 degrees F. Coils shall
be within unit or remote in ductwork as shown on plans. When in unit, piping to coils
shall be within unit.
G.
Heat Exchangers: Provide manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat
exchangers and burners, designed for minimum of 2-stage operation. Provide single
gas connection.
1.
H.
Gas Controls.
Provide the following controls:
Redundant gas valves
Intermittent pilot ignition
Electronic spark ignition system
High limit cutout
Flame rollout switch
Economizer Control: Provide economizer control consisting of return and outside air
dampers, outside air filter, fully modulating electric control system with enthalpy
control, and adjustable mixed-air thermostat. Design system for 100% outside air
capability. Provide automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy control
15771-2
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
SECTION 15771
device. Units without economizer cycle shall have 25% motorized outside air
damper. Units which are scheduled for demand ventilation shall be configured to
accept a control signal from the Automatic Temperature Control system for control of
the outside air damper to accomplish the demand ventilation sequence as described
in division 15900.
I.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided for control of the refrigeration cycle,
refrigeration safeties, heating cycle, heating safeties and economizer (if applicable).
The Automatic Temperature Control contractor shall furnish controls for temperature
control and energy management routines. The unit manufacturer shall provide a
terminal strip for control wiring terminations.
J.
Accessories: Units shall include the following accessories:
1.
All units 15 tons and larger shall have vibration isolation roof curb assembly.
All other units shall have vibration isolation roof curb assembly, when shown
on drawings. Pre-fabricated aluminum or galvanized steel curbs 14" high
shall be provided to match the rooftop unit. The curb shall be flashed to
match the roofing system. Provide wood nailer. The rooftop unit and curb
shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Roof curbs shall be one piece;
two piece curbs will not be accepted.
2.
Units with a cooling capacity less than 54 MBH shall have two-position,
motorized outside air dampers (25% minimum) and low ambient control to
0*F. Accessories shall be of the same manufacturer as the rooftop unit.
3.
Units with cooling capacities of 54 MBH or greater shall have economizer
cycle and 100% barometric relief.
4.
All damper actuators shall be spring return type (for loss of power).Units
using means other than true spring return are not acceptable.
5.
Conventional thermostat interface for connection to the automatic
temperature control system.
6.
Accessories shall be of the same manufacturer as the rooftop unit.
7.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan
which will shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded.
Condensate float shall be located in a readily accessible location.
8.
Units with Hot Gas Reheat, provide factory mounted sensor between
evaporator coil and hot gas reheat coil for connection to the ATC system.
Signal to be coordinated with the Division 15900 contractor.
9.
Units with Demand Control Ventilation capabilities shall be furnished with an
outdoor airflow monitoring device. This device shall be compatible with the
15771-3
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
SECTION 15771
Building Automation System (BAS) such that the outdoor airflow volume shall
be set in Cubic Feet per Minute (CFM) and displayed on the BAS graphics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory Start-up – The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
B.
The packaged rooftop unit shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as indicated in the
specifications and as shown on the drawings.
C.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall be
stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
D.
Provide one spare fan belt for each air handling unit.
E.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, and belt sizes to be
included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size
belt size and the number of filters and belts required for each unit. In addition to this,
submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction
8115 Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
Services,
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032.
F.
Supply and return air ductwork connecting to package rooftop units setting on steel
framing shall have flexible connections in the ductwork located inside the building,
just below the roofline or inside of wall for horizontal discharge units. Package
rooftop units setting on roof curbs which discharge horizontally shall have the flexible
connection located within the building.
G.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each package rooftop unit.
H.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 1/2" white letters which read:
15771-4
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
SECTION 15771
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15771-5
11/17
SECTION 15772
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEAT PUMP UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Furnish permanently installed electric cooling/heating packaged rooftop heat pump
conditioner of size and capacity shown on drawing.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The packaged units shall have published ratings and be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories.
B.
Factory Start-up – The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
C.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEAT PUMP UNIT
The rooftop heat pump unit shall be of the type and capacity shown on the drawings. The
units shall be manufactured by TRANE. Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and
manufactured by CARRIER or DAIKIN are acceptable.
A.
Packaged Assembly: Conditioner shall consist of a completely assembled, piped,
wired and tested unit composed of weatherproof enclosure with resealable hinged
access panels, centrifugal blower with belt drive air handling section, low velocity
throwaway filter section, complete direct expansion air to air reverse cycle heat pump
system section completely prewired and interlocked and all mounted on one base
with additional roof adapting components and accessories as required in this
specification or as shown on plans. Roof curb shall be by the same manufacturer.
15772-1
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEAT PUMP UNITS
SECTION 15772
B.
Enclosure: Shall be heavy gauge zinc-coated steel with baked enamel finish and
shall be completely weatherized for outdoor installation.
C.
Air Handling Section: Fan shall have forward curved blades, belt driven with
adjustable motor sheaves. The motor and fan shall have permanently lubricated ball
bearings. The motor shall have thermal overload protection.
D.
Filter Section: Shall fit into integral racks inside casing. Maximum velocity through
filter 350 FPM. Filters to be throwaway type, pleated, 2" thick, 35% efficient, and a
MERV rating of 8. Provide unit with 25% motorized outside air damper.
E.
Heating/Cooling Section: Shall have vibration isolated hermetic compressor(s),
copper type aluminum fin air cooled condenser/evaporator coil and propeller type
outdoor fans direct connected to inherently protected motors. Provide metal hail /
vandal guards to protect coil fins. Complete system shall be factory dehydrated,
tested and charged. Refrigeration cycle control shall include condenser and
evaporator fan and compressor contractors, 24-volt transformers, low and high
pressure cutouts, refrigerant and charging valves, reversing valve, automatic defrost
control, low ambient control, suction line accumulator, and compressor protection
cutout with reset. Provide an IAQ type sloped cleanable non-corrosive insulated
condensate drain pan. Refrigerant shall be 410A.
F.
Supplementary Electric Heating Coil: Shall be enclosed nickel-chromium wire
heating element. Heating section shall contain built-in contractors, thermal cutouts,
interlock relays and box, and line voltage terminal blocks with lugs. Heaters shall be
UL listed.
G.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided for control of the refrigeration cycle,
refrigeration safeties, heating cycle, heating safeties and economizer (if applicable).
The Automatic Temperature Control contractor shall furnish controls for temperature
control and energy management routines. The unit manufacturer shall provide a
terminal strip for control wiring terminations.
H.
Pre-fabricated aluminum or galvanized steel curbs 14" high shall be provided to
match the heat pump unit. The curb shall be flashed to match the roofing system.
The heat pump unit and curb shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Provide
wood nailer. All units shall set on curbs unless indicated differently on drawings.
Roof curbs shall be one piece; two piece curbs will not be accepted.
I.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which will
shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Condensate float shall
be located in a readily accessible location.
J.
Units with Hot Gas Reheat, provide factory mounted sensor between evaporator coil
and hot gas reheat coil for connection to the ATC system.
K.
Units with Demand Control Ventilation capabilities shall be furnished with an outdoor
15772-2
11/17
PACKAGE ROOFTOP HEAT PUMP UNITS
SECTION 15772
airflow monitoring device. This device shall be compatible with the Building
Automation System (BAS) such that the outdoor airflow volume shall be set in Cubic
Feet per Minute (CFM) and displayed on the BAS graphics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory Start-up – The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
B.
The packaged rooftop heat pump unit shall be installed complete with all accessories
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as listed in the
specifications and as shown on the drawings.
C.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall be
stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
D.
Provide one spare fan belt for each unit.
E.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their fan belt sizes and their filter sizes to
be included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter
size and the number of filters required as well as belt size and number of belts for
each unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list,
distributed to:
F.
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction
8115 Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
Services,
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 1/2" white letters which read:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15772-3
11/17
SECTION 15773
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
(Self-Contained)
(Engineer to edit for Job specific application)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The system shall deliver the specified air volume at the static pressure scheduled.
B.
The unit shall be constructed to provide smooth interior surfaces and to limit the
casing leakage at less than 1% of the specified air volume at operating static.
C.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with CSA C22.2 and UL 1812 and shall carry
the ETL label of approval.
D.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with industrial design practices.
E.
Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
F.
Airflow data shall comply with AMCA 210 method of testing.
G.
Cabinet and exterior components shall be tested and certified weatherproof.
H.
All units shall be 100% factory tested.
I.
All effectiveness data of heat and energy recovery components shall be certified by
the ARI 1060 certification program directory.
J.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
Section 15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
15773-1
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
SECTION 15773
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Energy recovery unit(s) shall be manufactured by GREENHECK, VALENT,
INNOVENT AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT, AAON, or SEASONS FOUR.
EQUIPMENT
A.
General - Factory assembled, consisting of fan and motor assemblies (supply and
exhaust), compressor section, heat wheel, all necessary dampers, hoods, plenums,
filters, drain pans, wiring and controls. Unit shall be stand-alone controlled with all
control devices provided by the unit manufacturer Unit shall have single point power
connection.
B.
Unit Cabinet
1.
The energy recovery unit is to be installed outdoors by the mechanical
contractor. Indoor units weatherized for outdoor use are not acceptable.
2.
All unit panels are fixed with zinc plated hexagonal head type screws
complete with a washer and rubber gasket for a weatherproof assembly.
Self-drilling, self-tapping screws are used and therefore no tools are required
from the unit interior for panel removal. These panels allow for fast service to
all major components.
3.
All panel joints must be caulked with a weatherproof silicone. The silicone
used must be clear to match any color surfaces. After application, the
silicone must react with atmospheric moisture to produce a formed-in-place
silicone rubber glazing and curtain wall seal.
4.
The unit base frame shall be constructed from a bolted, structural formed
G90 galvanized steel with internal structural cross members properly sized to
allow rigging and handling of the unit. All major components shall be
supported by the base without sagging or pulsating. Lifting lugs shall be
provided and strategically located to allow equilibrium during lifting.
5.
Unit construction consists of an insulated 14 gauge galvanized structural
frame complete with die cast aluminum corners. The rigid frame provides
stable construction allowing for panel removal without affecting the unit
integrity. Panels shall be double wall construction using 2" thick mineral wool
insulation 1.5 lbs/ft3 density, 18 gauge galvanized steel exterior panels (satin
coat finish) and 26 gauge G90 galvanized steel inner liner. The unit shall be
designed to resist any snow, ice and wind loads, as well as seismic loads in
compliance with the National Building Code. Single wall construction with
coated insulation will not be acceptable. Exposed insulation edges in the air
stream will not be acceptable.
15773-2
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
C.
SECTION 15773
6.
Internal partition wall shall be insulated and constructed the same as the unit
cabinet.
7.
Full size access door(s) to allow for periodic maintenance and inspections
must be provided for all serviceable components. Serviceable components
include but are not limited to coils, heat exchanger, damper sections, motor
sections, compressor sections, and piping enclosures. Doors shall be double
wall construction made of 18 gauge galvanized steel on both outer and inner
liner for maximum rigidity. Door insulation is the same as the unit panels.
Provide doors with heavy duty corrosion resistant aluminum hinges that allow
the door to open at 180°. Compression type handles operable from both
sides of the unit access door(s) and neoprene resilient bubble gaskets for an
enclosure that is sealed tight shall also be provided. Plastic latch hinges are
not acceptable.
8.
Outdoor constructed units shall have a pitched roof to dissipate water
accumulation. Rain gutters must be provided above access doors. All roof
joint seams are "T" shape construction, minimum height of 1.5", sealed and
encapsulated by a metal strip.
9.
All weather hoods for outdoor constructed units shall be provided with
birdscreen and rain gutters. Hoods may ship loose for field assembly.
10.
Recessed, double-sloped drain pans shall be made of formed sections of
stainless steel. Drain pans are sloped with a threaded drain pipe connection
of 1 1/2" in diameter ending outside through the structural base channel. All
drain pan corners shall be welded.
11.
Paint
a.
Outdoor constructed units shall have one coat of primer and two
coats of enamel paint.
b.
All galvanized steel surfaces that require paint shall be made of satin
coat-finished galvanized steel of the specified gauge(s).
c.
All galvanized steel surfaces without any paint shall be made of G90
galvanized steel of the specified gauges.
d.
All unit surfaces that require paint must be cleaned and free from all
oil, dirt, and other contaminants before painting.
Energy Recovery Heat Wheel
1.
Heat Wheels shall comply with UL standards.
2.
Heat Wheel - Provide aluminum or polymer transfer media, flame spread
rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than 50
15773-3
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
SECTION 15773
and shall be independently tested in accordance with ASTM standard E-84.
Rotor media shall be independently tested in accordance with ASHRAE
Standards. It shall allow laminar flow (but not radial) at usual velocities and
prevent leakage, bypassing and cross contamination by cross flow within
wheel. Size the transfer media to allow passage of 300 micron particles
without fouling or clogging. Treat media with non-degrading desiccant that is
bacteriostatic, non-corroding and non-toxic. No asbestos material will be
allowed. Wheel shall not condense water directly or require a condensate
drain for summer or winter operation. Performance rating shall be in
accordance with ARI Standard 1060.
3.
Provide casing seals on periphery of rotor as well as on duct divider and
purge section. Seals are to be adjustable, of extended life materials and
effective in limiting air leakage.
4.
Wheel shall be supported by ball or roller bearings and belt driven by a
fractional horsepower, totally enclosed, NEMA Standard motor through a
close coupled positively lubricated speed reducer, or gear/chain speed
reduction. Wheel motor shall be controlled by a manufacturer provided
variable frequency drive.
5.
Unit shall be constructed of heavy gage steel to insure rigidity and stability.
Casing side panels shall be removable to insure easy access to internal
parts. Provide integral flanges for flanged duct connection and provide lifting
holes or lugs.
6.
Provide rotation sensor to monitor energy recovery wheel rotation.
.
D.
Fans
1.
Fan performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed or
rotation, and efficiency shall be factory tested and shall comply with the
requirements of AMCA 210.
2.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for
continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower in accordance with AMCA 300.
3.
Fans shall be of centrifugal type, rigidly braced and reinforced to help prevent
vibration or pulsation. Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in
accordance with the standard sizes adopted by AMCA.
4.
Fan and motors shall be mounted inside the unit casing with 1" (minimum
90% efficiency) deflection spring vibration isolators and supplied with
neoprene flexible connections.
15773-4
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
E.
SECTION 15773
5.
Fans shall be selected for a stable operation, at least 20% under the fans
first critical speed.
6.
Units shall be equipped with non-overloading, airfoil, SWSI plenum fan,
Arrangement 3 (AMCA labeled) supply and exhaust fans to provide
scheduled airflows against static pressures indicated.
7.
Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished, and completed with a
corrosion resistant coating. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.
8.
Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease-lubricated, self-aligning ball or pillow
block type. Bearing shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-50) in
excess of 200,000 hours at maximum operating speed in accordance with
AFBMA 9 regulations.
9.
Fan drives shall be designed for a 1.4 service factor. Drives are factory
mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment made before unit start-up.
10.
Belt drives with motor pulley shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors up
to and including 10 HP. Fan pulleys shall be fixed pitch.
Motors
1.
All motors are internal to the unit casing and are mounted on an adjustable
base allowing for belt alignment and tensioning.
2.
Fan motors shall be heavy duty, 1800 rpm, high efficiency (E-pact Series),
open drip proof (ODP), NEMA Design B with Class F insulation and 1.15
service factor. Motors shall be constant speed operable at field voltage: 460
volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
3.
Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to accelerate the drive loads
satisfactorily.
4.
Motor sizes shall be minimum size indicated in the equipment schedule. If
not indicated, large enough so that the drive load will not require the motor to
operate in the service factor range.
5.
Temperature rating shall be 122°F (50°C) maximum temperature rise at
104°F (40°C) ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation).
6.
Motor construction shall be NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose,
continuous duty, Design B.
a.
Bases shall be adjustable.
b.
Bearings shall be:
15773-5
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
c.
F.
G.
SECTION 15773
1)
Ball or roller bearing with inner and outer shaft seals.
2)
Grease lubricated.
3)
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other
drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motors.
Energy efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112-B. If efficiency is
not specified, motors shall give a higher efficiency than "average
standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112-B.
Filters
1.
Filters shall be UL 900 Class II.
2.
Outside and return air inlet shall be equipped with galvanized steel racks that
permit slide out removal of filters (side access) for units equal or smaller than
78", and universal holding frames with upstream access for units taller than
78".
3.
Filter banks shall be arranged for flat orientation. The air velocity shall not
exceed 500 fpm through each filter bank.
4.
Unit shall include 2" disposable type air filters, 25-30% DSE efficiency,
consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media encased in fiberboard
cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to provide media
support. Airflow resistance with clean media shall not exceed 0.28 inch w.g.
at a face velocity of 500 fpm and filter arrestance efficiency of 90% based on
ASHRAE Test Standard 52.
Dampers
1.
2.
Air leakage through a 48" x 48" damper shall not exceed 10.3 cfm/sq.ft.
against 4 in. wg. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air
leakage data to be certified under AMCA certified rating program.
Dampers are designed for operation in temperatures ranging between -40°F
and 212°F.
3.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary dampers. Dampers for outside air
intake, exhaust air and all other dampers required for the system, including
the dampers for defrost (if required).
4.
Intake outside air dampers are opposed blade type and exhaust air dampers
are parallel blade type. For other dampers, see manufacturer's
recommendations.
15773-6
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
H.
SECTION 15773
5.
Outside air dampers shall be motorized. Provide damper actuators with 24
VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
6.
Exhaust air dampers shall be gravity backdraft type. Provide damper
actuators with 24 VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
7.
Dampers construction shall be as followed:
a.
Damper frame shall be extruded aluminum.
b.
Blades shall be extruded aluminum.
c.
Dampers shall be opposed blade type or parallel blades where
indicated
d.
Damper blade ends shall be sealed with neoprene flexible edge
seals complete with bottom and top blade wiper seals.
e.
Frame and blades shall be non-insulated.
Direct Expansion Cooling Section
1.
Compressors - Shall be quiet-running hermetic, digital scroll-type. They shall
be mounted in an isolated compartment to be serviceable without affecting
airflow, and mounted on neoprene isolators to minimize vibration
transmission and noise. Unit shall be capable of full modulation to maintain
discharge temperature. Refrigerant shall be R-410-A.
2.
Condenser and Evaporator Coils - Shall have copper tubes with permanently
expanded aluminum fins. Evaporator coils shall be mounted on a stainless
steel drain pan. Condenser coils shall be provided with hail/ vandal guards to
protect the coils. Provide factory mounted sensor between evaporator coil
and hot gas reheat coil for connection to the ATC system.
3.
Thermal Expansion Valves - Shall provide refrigerant control.
4.
Standard features of the packaged direct expansion cooling include:
a.
Liquid-Line Filter Drier
b.
High Pressure Manual Reset Cutout
c.
Low Pressure Auto-Reset Cutout
d.
Time Delay Relay for Compressor Protection
e.
Service/Charging Valves
15773-7
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
f.
SECTION 15773
Moisture Indicating Sight Glass
I.
Indirect Gas Fired Heating Section - Shall be 80% efficient, ETL Listed for outdoor
installation to ANSI Standard Z83.8 - 2002, CGA approved per 2.6 - 2002 and have
a blow through fan design. Furnace shall operate with natural gas and have a power
venting system. The burner and heat exchanger shall be constructed of aluminized
steel. Standard furnace features shall include main gas pressure regulator, main gas
valve, minimum 10:1 turn down electronic modulation controls to maintain discharge
temperature, direct spark ignition system, high limit, and a 24-volt control
transformer.
J.
Hot Gas Reheat for Dehumidification - Hot gas reheat coils, piping, and modulating
controls shall be factory installed for humidity control.
K.
Roof curb shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer for field assembly. Curb shall
consist of formed 18 gauge galvanized steel sections. Manufacturer’s curb is
standard double wall, 14” in height, un-insulated. Unit base design is made for
recessed curb installation. Stiffeners will be provided for field assembly when
required. Pitch roof curb to match building roof. Provide wood nailer. Curb shall be
one piece. Two piece curbs are not acceptable. See detail for critical dimensions.
L.
Temperature Controls shall be provided by the unit manufacturer.
1.
Shall be provided to accomplish control sequence as outlined in the
automatic temperature control section of specifications. All temperature
controls shall be factory installed, wired, and programmed by the
manufacturer or see item 3 below.
2.
Manufacturer shall provide an interface which will allow the Owner’s energy
management system to access the control points shown on the points list.
This interface shall be in complete compliance with the current
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard #135. Provide any coordination as required to
facilitate this interface into the Owner’s EMS. Provide all necessary protocol
documentation and gateway hardware and software (if required) such that
the section 15900 system suppliers may successfully create a
communication interface between the control system furnished in this section
of the specification and the 15900 control system. Provide an adequate level
of te4chnical support to guide the section 15900 personnel towards
completion of subject communication interface. Protocol must support
reading/writing status and analog and digital point information from this
section of the specification. All documentation, gateway hardware and
software, and required technical support are understood to be included in the
bid.
3.
Temperature Controls shall be accomplished by either of the following
methods:
15773-8
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
M.
2.03
SECTION 15773
a.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with the ATC to
accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic Control
section of specifications.
b.
Field installed controls provided by the section 15900 contractor is
acceptable provided the control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications is met.
A water level sensing device shall be factory provided in the unit condensate pan
which will shall shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Device
shall be located in a readily accessible location.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.
All electrical controls shall be ETL listed and the entire unit shall be factory wired in
accordance with the National Electrical Code Standard.
B.
The outdoor constructed units shall be supplied with a weatherproof non-fused main
power disconnect switch. A single point power connection shall be provided for all
units.
C.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary high voltage components as follows:
1.
Variable frequency drives shall be provided on supply, return, and exhaust
fan motors. Motors shall operate at constant speed. Fan airflow capacity
shall be balanced by manually adjusting the variable frequency drives.See
specification section 15905 for variable frequency drives.
2.
Thermal protection on all high voltage motors.
3.
Fuses and fuse holders.
4.
All necessary control transformers.
D.
Unit shall be completed with all necessary relays, time delay, damper actuators with
auxiliary switches (as required).
E.
Terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Low voltage is 24V.
F.
Fan access doors are equipped with a momentary interrupt switch that shuts off the
unit when a protected door is opened. These switches can be removed if belt guards
are installed on the fan assembly.
G.
An integral control panel shall be provided having a hinged access door and an
approved locking device.
15773-9
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
SECTION 15773
H.
All control devices, except those not mounted directly to the unit, shall be factory
mounted and wired. Control panel shall have a labeled strip to land all wires for field
installed control components.
I.
All components are fully wired and 100% tested prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory Start-up – The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent. Manufacturer shall provide on-site startup and
commissioning assistance through job completion. Complete installation and startup
checks according to manufacturers written instructions. This shall include a factory
startup for factory provided control devices as well as configuring control points for
other DO devices. Service representative shall completely configure all control
devices and establish remote internet connectivity with the owner’s energy
management department web server.
B.
Demonstration - Engage manufacturer or factory-authorized service representative
to train Owners maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain individual
units and complete system. This shall include training of the owner’s energy
management department representatives as to establish control system
programming, scheduling routines, alarm reporting, system topography,
communication protocols and password level assignments.
C.
The energy recovery units shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as listed in the specifications
and as shown on the drawings.
D.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall be
stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
E.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter and belt sizes to be
included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size
and the number of filters required for each unit, and belt size and number of belts for
each unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list,
distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church, VA
22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
15773-10
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
SECTION 15773
F.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each energy recovery unit.
G.
Provide one spare set of belts per unit per drive.
H.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Tag is to be screwed or riveted to unit.
Identification tag shall be black with engraved 1/2" white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15773-11
11/17
SECTION 15774
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to
this section.
1.02
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The system shall deliver the specified air volume at the static pressure scheduled.
B.
The unit shall be constructed to provide smooth interior surfaces and to limit the
casing leakage at less than 1% of the specified air volume at operating static.
C.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with CSA C22.2 and UL 1812 and shall carry
the ETL label of approval.
D.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with industrial design practices.
E.
Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
F.
Airflow data shall comply with AMCA 210 method of testing.
G.
Cabinet and exterior components shall be tested and certified weatherproof.
H.
All units shall be 100% factory tested.
I.
All effectiveness data of heat and energy recovery components shall be certified by
the ARI 1060 certification program directory.
J.
Factory Start-Up – The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
K.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the division
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900, 1,.03 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
15774-1
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS SECTION 15774
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Energy recovery unit(s) shall be supplied by Innovent Air Handling Equipment,
Valent, Seasons Four , Greenheck and AAON.
EQUIPMENT
General: Factory assembled, consisting of fan and motor assemblies (supply and exhaust),
Flat Plate Heat Exchanger, Heat Recovery Wheel, all necessary dampers, hoods, plenums,
filters, drain pans, wiring and controls. Unit shall be stand-alone controlled with all control
devices provided by the unit manufacturer or control contractor. Unit shall have single point
power connection.
A.
Unit Cabinet:
1.
The energy recovery unit is to be installed outdoors by the mechanical
contractor. Indoor units weatherized for outdoor use are not acceptable.
2.
All unit panels are fixed with zinc plated hexagonal head type screws
complete with a washer and rubber gasket for a weatherproof assembly.
Self-drilling, self-tapping screws are used and therefore no tools are required
from the unit interior for panel removal. These panels allow for fast service to
all major components.
3.
All panel joints must be caulked with a weatherproof silicone. The silicone
used must be clear to match any color surfaces. After application, the
silicone must react with atmospheric moisture to produce a formed-in-place
silicone rubber glazing and curtain wall seal.
4.
The unit base frame shall be constructed from a bolted, structural formed
G90 galvanized steel with internal structural cross members properly sized to
allow rigging and handling of the unit. All major components shall be
supported by the base without sagging or pulsating. Lifting lugs shall be
provided and strategically located to allow equilibrium during lifting.
OPTIONS:
• Structural formed G90 galvanized steel (8" [203mm] high) with 6"
[152mm] fiberglass insulation (R24)
• Structural "C" channel (5" [127mm] high) with fiberglass insulation
(R16)
• All lifting lugs shall be removable after rigging and installation of
the unit
5.
Unit construction consists of an insulated 14 gauge galvanized structural
frame complete with die cast aluminum corners. The rigid frame provides
stable construction allowing for panel removal without affecting the unit
integrity. Panels shall be double wall construction using 2" thick mineral wool
insulation 1.5 lbs/ft3 density, 18 gauge galvanized steel exterior panels (satin
15774-2
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS SECTION 15774
coat finish) and 26 gauge G90 galvanized steel inner liner. The unit shall be
designed to resist any snow, ice and wind loads, as well as seismic loads in
compliance with the National Building Code. Single wall construction with
coated insulation will not be acceptable. Exposed insulation edges in the air
stream will not be acceptable.
Insulating Value
Type of Insulation
Mineral wool (3.5 pcf)
Urethane
Thickness
2" [51mm]
R8.6
R14.8
6.
Internal partition wall shall be insulated and constructed the same as the unit
cabinet.
7.
Full size access door(s) to allow for periodic maintenance and inspections
must be provided for all serviceable components Serviceable components
include but are not limited to Coils, Heat Exchanger, Damper sections, Motor
sections and piping enclosures. Doors shall be double wall construction
made of 18 gauge galvanized steel on both outer and inner liner for
maximum rigidity. Door insulation is the same as the unit panels. Provide
doors with heavy duty corrosion resistant aluminum hinges that allow the
door to open at 180°. Compression type handles are operable from both
sides of the unit access door(s) and neoprene resilient bubble gaskets for an
enclosure that is sealed tight shall also be provided. Plastic latches and
hinges are not acceptable.
8.
Outdoor constructed units shall have a pitched roof to dissipate water
accumulation. Rain gutters must be provided above access doors. All roof
joint seams are "T" shape construction, minimum height of 1.5", sealed and
encapsulated by a metal strip.
9.
All weather hoods for outdoor constructed units are provided with birdscreen
and rain gutters. Hoods may ship loose for field assembly.
10.
Recessed, double-sloped drain pans shall be made of formed sections of
steel. Drain pans are sloped with a threaded drain pipe connection of 1 1/2"
in diameter ending outside through the structural base channel. All drain pan
corners shall be welded.
11.
Paint:
a.
Outdoor constructed units shall have one coat of primer and two
coats of enamel paint.
b.
All galvanized steel surfaces that require paint shall be made of satin
coat-finished galvanized steel of the specified gauge(s).
15774-3
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS B.
C.
SECTION 15774
c.
All galvanized steel surfaces without any paint shall be made of G90
galvanized steel of the specified gauges.
d.
All unit surfaces that require paint must be cleaned and free from all
oil, dirt and other contaminants before painting.
Flat Plate Heat Exchanger
1.
The flat plate heat exchanger assembly shall be CERTIFIED to ARI Standard
1060 and tested in accordance to ASHRAE 84-91.
2.
The flat plate heat exchanger shall be cross-flow type made of 6 mil
embossed pure aluminum designed to maximize the efficiency and the
cleanability while minimizing the pressure loss.
3.
The flat plate heat exchanger shall be sectioned within the unit to allow for a
section replacement without requiring any lifting devices.
4.
Access to all four sides of the flat plate heat exchanger for cleaning and
inspection shall be provided.
5.
An access section with a sloped IAQ drain pan shall be provided upstream
and downstream of the flat plate heat exchanger allowing for service,
collection of condensate and cleaning of the flat plate heat exchanger
without allowing any standing water to be contained within the unit cabinet.
Energy Recovery Heat Wheel (Engineer to edit)
1.
Heat Wheels shall comply with UL standards.
2.
Heat Wheel - Provide aluminum or polymer transfer media, flame spread
rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than 50
and shall be independently tested in accordance with ASTM standard E-84.
Rotor media shall be independently tested in accordance with ASHRAE
Standards. It shall allow laminar flow (but not radial) at usual velocities and
prevent leakage, bypassing and cross contamination by cross flow within
wheel. Size the transfer media to allow passage of 300 micron particles
without fouling or clogging. Treat media with non-degrading desiccant that is
bacteriostatic, non-corroding and non-toxic. No asbestos material will be
allowed. Wheel shall not condense water directly or require a condensate
drain for summer or winter operation. Performance rating shall be in
accordance with ARI Standard 1060.
3.
Provide casing seals on periphery of rotor as well as on duct divider and
purge section. Seals are to be adjustable, of extended life materials and
effective in limiting air leakage.
15774-4
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS D.
E.
SECTION 15774
4.
Wheel shall be supported by ball or roller bearings and belt driven by a
fractional horsepower, totally enclosed, NEMA Standard motor through a
close coupled positively lubricated speed reducer, or gear/chain speed
reduction.
5.
Unit shall be constructed of heavy gage steel to insure rigidity and stability.
Casing side panels shall be removable to insure easy access to internal
parts. Provide integral flanges for flanged duct connection and provide lifting
holes or lugs.
Defrost Strategies (Engineer to edit)
1.
The traversing defrost system is DDC controlled. Independent traversing
dampers with actuators and bypass damper (if free-cooling is required). This
defrost strategy allows for the recovery of energy while the unit is in defrost.
2.
Recirculation defrost including outside air, exhaust air and recirculation
dampers with actuators and the appropriate controls.
3.
Exhaust only defrost including outside air and exhaust air dampers with
actuators and the appropriate controls.
4.
Face and bypass defrost including face and bypass dampers with actuators
and the appropriate controls. Bypass may also be used for free-cooling in
summer operation (if required).
Fans:
1.
Fan performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed or
rotation and efficiency shall be factory tested and shall comply with the
requirements of AMCA 210.
2.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for
continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower in accordance with AMCA 300.
3.
Fans shall be of centrifugal type, rigidly braced and reinforced to help prevent
vibration or pulsation. Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in
accordance with the standard sizes adopted by AMCA.
4.
Fan and motors shall be mounted inside the unit casing with 1" (minimum
90% efficiency) deflection spring vibration isolators and supplied with
neoprene flexible connections.
5.
Fans shall be selected for a stable operation, at least 20% under the fans
first critical speed.
15774-5
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS F.
SECTION 15774
6.
Units shall be equipped with non-overloading, airfoil, SWSI plenum fan,
Arrangement 3 (AMCA labeled) supply and exhaust fans to provide
scheduled airflows against static pressures indicated.
7.
Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and completed with a
corrosion resistant coating. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.
8.
Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease-lubricated, self-aligning ball or pillow
block type. Bearing shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-50) in
excess of 200,000 hours at maximum operating speed in accordance with
AFBMA 9 regulations.
9.
Fan drives shall be designed for a 1.4 service factor. Drives are factory
mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment made before unit start-up.
10.
Belt drives with motor pulley shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors up
to and including 10 HP. Fan pulleys shall be fixed pitch.
Motors:
1.
All motors are internal to the unit casing and are mounted on an adjustable
base allowing for belt alignment and tensioning.
2.
Fan motors shall be heavy duty, 1800 rpm, high efficiency (E-pact Series),
open drip proof (ODP), NEMA Design B with Class F insulation and 1.15
service factor. Motors shall be constant speed operable at field voltage: 460
Volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
3.
Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to accelerate the drive loads
satisfactorily.
4.
Motor sizes shall be minimum size indicated in the equipment schedule. If
not indicated, large enough so that the drive load will not require the motor to
operate in the service factor range.
5.
Temperature rating shall be 122°F (50°C) maximum temperature rise at
104°F (40°C) ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation).
6.
Motor construction shall be NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose,
continuous duty, Design B.
a.
Bases shall be adjustable.
b.
Bearings shall be:
1).
2).
3).
Ball or roller bearing with inner and outer shaft seals.
Grease lubricated.
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other
drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motors.
15774-6
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS c.
G.
H.
SECTION 15774
Energy efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112-B. If efficiency is
not specified, motors shall give a higher efficiency than "average
standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112-B.
Filters:
1.
Filters shall be UL 900 Class II.
2.
Outside and return air inlet shall be equipped with galvanized steel racks that
permit slide out removal of filters (side access) for units equal or smaller than
78”, and universal holding frames with upstream access for units taller than
78”.
3.
Filter banks shall be arranged for flat orientation. The air velocity shall not
exceed 500 fpm through each filter bank.
4.
Unit shall include 2" disposable type air filters, 25-30% DSE efficiency,
consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media encased in fiberboard
cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to provide media
support. Airflow resistance with clean media shall not exceed 0.28 inch w.g.
at a face velocity of 500 fpm and filter arrestance efficiency of 90% based on
ASHRAE Test Standard 52.
Dampers:
1.
Air leakage through a 48" x 48" damper shall not exceed 10.3 cfm/sq.ft.
against 4 in. wg. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air
leakage data to be certified under AMCA certified rating program.
2.
Dampers are designed for operation in temperatures ranging between -40°F
and 212°F.
3.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary dampers. Dampers for outside air
intake, exhaust air and all other dampers required for the system, including
the dampers for defrost (if required).
4.
Intake outside air dampers are opposed blade type and exhaust air dampers
are parallel blade type. For other dampers, see manufacturer's
recommendations.
5.
Outside air dampers shall be motorized. Provide damper actuators with 24
VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
6.
Exhaust air dampers shall be gravity backdraft type. Provide damper
actuators with 24 VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
7.
Dampers construction shall be as followed:
15774-7
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS I.
SECTION 15774
a.
Damper frame shall be extruded aluminum.
b.
Blades shall be extruded aluminum.
c.
Dampers shall be opposed blade type or parallel blades where
indicated
d.
Damper blade ends shall be sealed with neoprene flexible edge
seals complete with bottom and top blade wiper seals.
e.
Frame and blades shall be non-insulated.
Coils – General Information:
1.
Acceptable coils shall have ARI Standard 410 certification and bear the ARI
symbol. Coil manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.
2.
Coils shall be submerged in water and tested with a minimum of 315 psi air
pressure for standard copper tube coils. Coils must display a tag with the
inspector's identification as proof of testing.
3.
Tubes shall have a nominal thickness of 0.020" unless otherwise specified.
4.
Fins shall be made of 0.0075" thick aluminum unless otherwise specified.
5.
Tubing, return bends and headers shall be constructed from UNS 12200
seamless copper conforming to ASTM B75 and ASTM B251 for standard
pressure applications. Coil return headers shall be equipped with factory
installed 1.2" fpt air vent connection placed at the highest point available on
the face of the header (except for evaporator coils).
6.
Casings and endplates shall be made of 16 gauge galvanized steel, meeting
ASTM A527 unless otherwise noted. Double flanged casings on the top and
bottom of finned height are to be provided to allow for stacking of the coils.
On applications where cooling coils are stacked, use an intermediate drain
pan to dissipate water accumulation. All drain lines shall be field trapped as
per manufacturer's recommendations. A water level sensing device shall be
provided in the unit condensate pan which will shut down the unit in the event
this devices level is exceeded.
7.
Piping, control valve and valve operator shall be supplied and installed by
others.
a.
Hot Water Coils:
15774-8
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS b.
SECTION 15774
1)
Coils shall be designed to withstand 250 psi maximum
operating pressure and a maximum steam temperature of
300°F (149°C) for standard duty copper tube coils.
2)
Coil tube size and wall thickness is 5/8" x 0.020" [16 x 0.5mm]
standard for copper.
3)
Standard construction fluid connections are male pipe thread
(MPT) and constructed from red brass conforming to ASTM
B43 or Schedule 40 steel pipe as a minimum.
Chilled Water Coils:
1)
Coils shall be designed to withstand 250 psi maximum
operating pressure and a maximum fluid temperature of
300°F for standard duty copper tube coils.
2)
Coil tube size and wall thickness is 5/8" x 0.020" standard for
copper.
3)
Standard construction fluid connections are male pipe thread
(MPT) and constructed from red brass conforming to ASTM
B43 or Schedule 40 steel pipe as a minimum.
J.
Roofcurb: Roofcurb shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer for field assembly.
Curb shall be one piece; two piece curbs will not be accepted. Curb shall consist of
formed 18 gauge galvanized steel sections. Manufacturer’s curb is standard double
wall, 18" in height, 2" thick fiberglass insulation. Unit base design is made for
recessed curb installation. Stiffeners will be provided for field assembly when
required. Pitch roofcurb to match building roof. Provide wood nailer.
K.
Sound Ratings:
1.
The sound power rating (re: 10-12 watts) leaving the energy recovery unit
under the tabulated conditions shall not exceed the following in any octave
band:
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS SOUND POWER BY OCTAVE
BAND 10-12 WATTS at Specified AirFlow and Static Pressure
Octave Band
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mid Frequency **ENGINEER TO LIST CORRESPONDING NUMBERS**
ERU-1
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
ERU-2
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
15774-9
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS L.
SECTION 15774
2.
Energy recovery unit sound ratings shall be based on tests in a sound
laboratory reverberant room strictly conforming to ASHRAE Standard 36-62,
in accordance with AMCA 300 procedures. Sound data must be accurate to
within + 5 db @ 63 Hz, + 4 db @ 125 Hz, + 2 db from 250-2000 Hz, + 3 db @
4000 Hz and above.
3.
Where the manufacturer's sound power data is not published, an officer of
the company must certify that sound data conforms to the above
requirements. If the manufacturer does not have acoustical facilities in
accordance with the above requirements, the contractor must submit certified
data that the specified operating conditions, to determine sound power levels
by octave band
Temperature Controls shall be accomplished by either of the following methods:
1.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with the ATC to
accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic Temperature Control
section of specifications.
2.
Field installed controls provided by the section 15900 contractor is
acceptable provided the control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications is met.
The control contractor must have the ability to interface with and control the
factory supplied outside airflow monitoring assembly.
M.
2.03
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which will
shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Condensate float shall
be located in a readily accessible location.
:
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.
All electrical controls shall be ETL listed and the entire unit shall be factory wired in
accordance with the National Electrical Code Standard.
B.
The outdoor constructed units shall be supplied with a weatherproof non-fused main
power disconnect switch. A single point power connection shall be provided for all
units.
C.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary high voltage components as follows:
1.
Variable frequency drives shall be provided on supply, return and exhaust
fan motors. Motors shall operate at constant speed. Fan speed shall be
adjustable through the variable frequency drive. See specification section
15905 for variable frequency drives.
2.
Thermal protection on all high voltage motors.
15774-10
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS SECTION 15774
3.
Fuses and fuse holders.
4.
All necessary control transformers.
D.
Unit shall be completed with all necessary relays, time delay, damper actuators with
auxiliary switches (as required).
E.
The automatic unit start-up is provided as standard via an external dry contact
provided by others (ex: Building management system, DDC controller, time clock,
etc.).
F.
Terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Low voltage is 24V.
G.
Fan access doors are equipped with a momentary interrupt switch that shuts off the
unit when a protected door is opened. These switches can be removed if belt guards
are installed on the fan assembly.
H.
An integral control panel shall be provided having a hinged access door and an
approved locking device.
I.
All control devices, except those not mounted directly to the unit, shall be factory
mounted and wired. Control panel shall have a labeled strip to land all wires for field
installed control components.
J.
All components are fully wired and 100% tested prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory Start-up- The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
B.
The energy recovery units shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as listed in the specifications
and as shown on the drawings.
C.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall be
stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
D.
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter sizes to be included in the
O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size and the number
of filters required for each unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional
copies of the list, distributed to:
15774-11
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS SECTION 15774
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services 8115
Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
E.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each energy recovery unit.
F.
Provide one spare belt per unit.
G.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 1/2 " white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY: (contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES: (month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15774-12
11/17
SECTION 15775
PACKAGE VAV ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
(Engineer to edit heating system used)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The packaged units shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standards 210/240 and
340/360. Unit shall be designed in accordance with UL standards. Unit shall comply
with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004 sections 5 and 7 as well as
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 section 6.
B.
Construct gas fired heating sections in accordance with AGA safety standards and
provide AGA label. Unit shall comply with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.
C.
Factory start-up- the manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a factory
approved start-up agent.
D.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the
section15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PACKAGED VAV ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNIT
The rooftop unit shall be of the type and capacity shown the drawings. The units shall be
manufactured by TRANE. Units fully equal to the specified manufacturer and manufactured
by CARRIER or DAIKIN are acceptable.
A.
Packaged Assembly: Unit shall consist of a completely assembled, piped, wired and
tested unit composed of; a weatherproof enclosure with hinged gasketed locking
access doors and a non-corrosive, sloped, cleanable, insulated, IAQ type
condensate drain pan, centrifugal blower with belt drive air handling section, low
velocity throwaway filter section, complete direct expansion air cooled cooling system
section, single point power connection, and gas fired or hot water heating section all
15775-1
11/17
PACKAGE VAV ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
SECTION 15775
mounted on one base with additional roof adapting components and accessories as
required in this specification or as shown on the plans.
B.
Enclosure: Shall be heavy gauge zinc-coated steel with baked enamel finish and
shall be completely weatherized for outdoor installation. The unit roof shall be cross
broken and/or sloped to assure drainage. Access to compressors, controls, blower
section, heating section and other items needing periodic checking or maintenance
shall be through hinged access doors. All access doors shall have gaskets and
provide a weather tight seal. The air handling section of the unit shall have ½
minimum non-eroding fiberglass insulation.
C.
Fan Section: Fan shall have forward curved blades, belt driven with adjustable
motor sheaves. The motor and fan shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings.
The motor shall have thermal overload protection. Supply air flow modulation shall
be by a factory installed variable frequency drive. ( see section 15905 for acceptable
drive manufacturer)
D.
Filter Section: Shall fit into integral racks inside casing. Maximum velocity through
filter 350 fpm. Filters shall be pleated, 2" thick rigid extended surface, 35% efficient
and a MERV rating of 8 throwaway type. Two complete sets of spare filters shall be
supplied in addition to the set used during construction.
E.
Cooling Section: Shall have vibration isolated scroll or hermetic compressor(s),
copper tube aluminum fin air cooled condensing coil and propeller type condenser
fans direct-connected to inherently protected motors. Provide metal hail/vandal
guards to protect the condenser coil fins. Complete system shall be factory dehydrated, tested and charged. Refrigeration cycle shall include condenser and
evaporator fan compressor cutouts, 24-volt transformers, low and high pressure
cutouts, crankcase heaters, liquid line solenoid valves for system pump-down and
compressor protection cutout with reset. Refrigerant shall be 410A. Units rated 10
tons and above shall have 50% capacity reduction capability. Units with a cooling
capacity of 54 MBH and greater shall be equipped with an economizer cycle and
shall include low leakage outside air damper.
F.
Hot Water Heating Coils: Shall be ARI certified non-freeze type pitched within the
ductwork for proper drainage. Headers shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel.
Maximum work pressure limit of coil shall be 175 psig at 400 degrees F. Coils shall
be within unit or remote in ductwork as shown on plans. When in unit, piping to coils
shall be within unit.
G.
Gas Fired Furnace: Provide manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat
exchangers and burners, designed for fully modulating operation to maintain
discharge temperature. Provide single gas connection.
15775-2
11/17
PACKAGE VAV ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
1.
Gas Burner Controls.
Provide the following controls:
SECTION 15775
Redundant gas valves
Intermittent pilot ignition
Electronic spark ignition system
High limit cutout
Flame rollout switch
H.
Hot Gas Reheat for Dehumidification - Hot gas reheat coils, piping and fully
modulating controls shall be factory installed for humidity control.
I.
Economizer Control: Provide economizer control consisting of return and outside air
dampers, outside air filter, fully modulating electronic control system with reference
enthalpy control and adjustable mixed-air thermostat. Design system for 100%
outside air capability. Provide automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy
control device. Units without economizer cycle shall have 25% motorized outside air
damper.
J.
Temperature Controls: Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with
the ATC to accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic Temperature
Control section of specifications.
K.
1.
Manufacturer shall provide a interface device which will allow the Owner’s
energy management system to access the control points required by the
specification section 15900. Provide any coordination as required to facilitate
this interface with the Owners energy management system. Provide all
necessary protocol documentation and gateway hardware and software (if
required) such that the section 15900 system supplier may successfully
create a communication interface between the control system furnished in
this section of the specification and the15900 control system. Provide an
adequate level of technical support to guide the section 15900 personnel
towards completion of subject communication interface. Protocol must
support reading status and analog and digital point information from this
section of the specification. All documentation, gateway hardware and
software, and required technical support are understood to be included in the
bid.
2.
Unit shall be equipped an electronic supply air discharge temperature
controller with zone, return and outdoor air reset capabilities.
Accessories: Units shall include the following accessories:
1.
All units 15 tons and larger shall have vibration isolation roof curb assembly.
All other units shall have vibration isolation roof curb assembly, when shown
on drawings. Pre-fabricated aluminum or galvanized steel curbs 14" high
shall be provided to match the rooftop unit. The curb shall be flashed to
match the roofing system. Provide wood nailer. The rooftop unit and curb
shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
15775-3
11/17
PACKAGE VAV ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
SECTION 15775
2.
Units with a cooling capacity less than 54 MBH shall have two-position,
motorized outside air dampers (25% minimum) and low ambient control to 0
deg F. Accessories shall be of the same manufacturer as the rooftop unit.
3.
Units with cooling capacities of 54 MBH or greater shall have economizer
cycle and 100% barometric relief. Units that incorporate a modulating power
exhaust based on building static or economizer damper position are
acceptable.
4.
All damper actuators shall be spring return type (for loss of power). Actuators
using means other than true spring return are not acceptable.
5.
Provide a factory installed outside air flow monitoring device to ensure
minimum outside air flow requirements are met. This device shall
compensate the outside air flow in relation to supply air percentage as it
increases and decreases.
6.
Provide extended grease lines for all fan bearings.
7.
Accessories shall be of the same manufacturer as the rooftop unit.
8.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan
which will shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded.
Condensate float shall be located in a readily accessible location.
9.
Roof curbs shall be one piece; two piece curbs will not be accepted.
10.
Provide factory mounted sensor between evaporator coil and hot gas reheat
coil for connection to the ATC system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory start-up- The manufacturer shall supply a complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
B.
The packaged vav rooftop unit shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as indicated in the
specifications and as shown on the drawings.
C.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction dust
has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall be
stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
D.
Provide one spare fan belt for each packaged vav rooftop unit.
15775-4
11/17
PACKAGE VAV ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
E.
SECTION 15775
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, and belt sizes to be
included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size
belt size and the number of filters and belts required for each unit. In addition to this,
submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction
8115 Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
Services,
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
F.
Supply and return air ductwork connecting to package rooftop units setting on steel
framing shall have flexible connections in the ductwork located inside the building,
just below the roofline. Package VAV rooftop units setting on roof curbs which
discharge horizontally shall have the flexible connection located within the building.
G.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each package rooftop unit.
H.
Warranty Tag - The contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 1/2 “white letters which reads:
UNIT # (unit number)
INSTALLED BY: (contracting company’s name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES: (month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES: (month/day/year)
I. Tag is to be screwed or riveted to unit.
END OF SECTION
15775-5
11/17
SECTION 15776
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply
to this section.
1.02
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The system shall deliver the specified air volume at the static pressure scheduled.
B.
The unit shall be constructed to provide smooth interior surfaces and to limit the
casing leakage at less than 1% of the specified air volume at operating static.
C.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with CSA C22.2 and UL 1812 and shall
carry the ETL label of approval.
D.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with industrial design practices.
E.
Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
F.
Airflow data shall comply with AMCA 210 method of testing.
G.
Cabinet and exterior components shall be tested and certified weatherproof.
H.
All units shall be 100% factory tested.
I.
All effectiveness data of heat and energy recovery components shall be certified
by the ARI 1060 certification program directory.
J.
Factory Start-up - The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
K.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
15776-1
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15776
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Energy recovery unit(s) shall be supplied by GREENHECK, INNOVENT AIR
HANDLING EQUIPMENT, SEASONS 4, VALENT and AAON.
EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Factory assembled, consisting of fan and motor assemblies (supply and
exhaust), heat wheel, all necessary dampers, hoods, plenums, filters, drain pans,
wiring and controls. Unit shall be stand-alone controlled with all control devices
provided by the unit manufacturer or control contractor. Unit shall have single point
power connection.
B.
Unit Cabinet:
1.
The energy recovery unit is to be installed outdoors by the mechanical
contractor. Indoor units weatherized for outdoor use are not acceptable.
2.
All unit panels are fixed with zinc plated hexagonal head type screws
complete with a washer and rubber gasket for a weatherproof assembly.
Self-drilling, self-tapping screws are used and therefore no tools are
required from the unit interior for panel removal. These panels allow for fast
service to all major components.
3.
All panel joints must be caulked with a weatherproof silicone. The silicone
used must be clear to match any color surfaces. After application, the
silicone must react with atmospheric moisture to produce a formed-in-place
silicone rubber glazing and curtain wall seal.
4.
The unit base frame shall be constructed from a bolted, structural formed
G90 galvanized steel with internal structural cross members properly sized
to allow rigging and handling of the unit. All major components shall be
supported by the base without sagging or pulsating. Lifting lugs shall be
provided and strategically located to allow equilibrium during lifting.
5.
Unit construction consists of an insulated 14 gauge galvanized structural
frame complete with die cast aluminum corners. The rigid frame provides
stable construction allowing for panel removal without affecting the unit
integrity. Panels shall be double wall construction using 2" thick mineral
wool insulation 1.5 lbs/ft3 density, 18 gauge galvanized steel exterior
panels (satin coat finish) and 26 gauge G90 galvanized steel inner liner.
The unit shall be designed to resist any snow, ice and wind loads, as well
as seismic loads in compliance with the National Building Code. Single wall
construction with coated insulation will not be acceptable. Exposed
insulation edges in the air stream will not be acceptable.
15776-2
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15776
INSULATING VALUE
TYPE OF INSULATION
2" THICKNESS
Mineral wool (3.5 pcf)
R8.6
Urethane
R14.8
6.
Internal partition wall shall be insulated and constructed the same as the
unit cabinet.
7.
Full size access door(s) to allow for periodic maintenance and inspections
must be provided for all serviceable components. Serviceable components
include but are not limited to Coils, Heat Exchanger, Damper sections,
Motor sections and piping enclosures. Doors shall be double wall
construction made of 18 gauge galvanized steel on both outer and inner
liner for maximum rigidity. Door insulation is the same as the unit panels.
Provide doors with heavy duty corrosion resistant aluminum hinges that
allow the door to open at 180°. Compression type handles are operable
from both sides of the unit access door(s) and neoprene resilient bubble
gaskets for an enclosure that is sealed tight shall also be provided. Plastic
latches hinges are not acceptable.
8.
Outdoor constructed units shall have a pitched roof to dissipate water
accumulation. Rain gutters must be provided above access doors. All roof
joint seams are "T" shape construction, minimum height of 1.5", sealed and
encapsulated by a metal strip.
9.
All weather hoods for outdoor constructed units are provided with
birdscreen and rain gutters. Hoods may ship loose for field assembly.
10.
Recessed, double-sloped drain pans shall be made of formed sections of
steel. Drain pans are sloped with a threaded drain pipe connection of 1 1/2"
in diameter ending outside through the structural base channel. All drain
pan corners shall be welded.
11.
Paint:
a.
Outdoor constructed units shall have one coat of primer and two
coats of enamel paint.
b.
All galvanized steel surfaces that require paint shall be made of
satin coat-finished galvanized steel of the specified gauge(s).
c.
All galvanized steel surfaces without any paint shall be made of
G90 galvanized steel of the specified gauges.
15776-3
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
d.
C.
D.
SECTION 15776
All unit surfaces that require paint must be cleaned and free from all
oil, dirt and other contaminants before painting.
Energy Recovery Heat Wheel
1.
Heat Wheels shall comply with UL standards.
2.
Heat Wheel - Provide aluminum or polymer transfer media, flame spread
rating of not more than 25, and smoke developed rating of not more than
50, and shall be independently tested in accordance with ASTM standard
E-84. Rotor media shall be independently tested in accordance with
ASHRAE Standards. It shall allow laminar flow (but not radial) at usual
velocities and prevent leakage, bypassing and cross contamination by
cross flow within wheel. Size the transfer media to allow passage of 300
micron particles without fouling or clogging. Treat media with
non-degrading desiccant that is bacteriostatic, non-corroding, and
non-toxic. No asbestos material will be allowed. Wheel shall not condense
water directly or require a condensate drain for summer or winter
operation. Performance rating shall be in accordance with ARI Standard
1060.
3.
Provide casing seals on periphery of rotor as well as on duct divider and
purge section. Seals are to be adjustable, of extended life materials, and
effective in limiting air leakage.
4.
Wheel shall be supported by ball or roller bearings and belt driven by a
fractional horsepower, totally enclosed, NEMA Standard motor through a
close coupled positively lubricated speed reducer, or gear/chain speed
reduction.
5.
Unit shall be constructed of heavy gage steel to insure rigidity and stability.
Casing side panels shall be removable to insure easy access to internal
parts. Provide integral flanges for flanged duct connection and provide
lifting holes or lugs.
Integral Water Cooled Heat Pump
1.
Unit shall be provided with a complete integral factory piped and wired
mechanical refrigeration system consisting of: scroll compressors, an ARI
rated air-refrigerant coil, a UL listed water refrigerant coil, service valves,
expansion valves, 4-way reversing valve, high/low pressure switches,
anti-recycle timers, compressor contactors, suction accumulator, liquid
receiver, line filter-drier, pressure ports, and sight glass shall be factory
provided and installed. Hermetic scroll compressors shall be used,
mounted on RIS vibration isolators, and provided with a sumpheater. Water
refrigerant coil shall be of brazed plate stainless steel type. Air-refrigerant
coil is constructed of seamless copper tube primary surface and rippled
15776-4
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15776
aluminum plate fin secondary surface. Air refrigerant coil core is tested with
315 psig air pressure under warm water and guaranteed for 250 psig
working pressure. All brazed plate heat exchangers, refrigerant specialties
and refrigerant piping shall be factory insulated as required by the
manufacturer to avoid sweating.
2.
E.
Modulating Hot Gas Reheat
1.
F.
Integral heat pump system shall be capable of modulating the cooling and
heating capacity to maintain specified discharge air temperature
Water/R-410A heat exchangers shall be provided with an entering fluid
side strainer, leaving fluid side freeze stat, and fluid flow proving switch.
Fluid flow valves and actuators shall be provided by the installing
contractor and installed in the field. Field installed water piping must be
field insulated.
Unit shall be provided with a factory mounted and piped hot gas reheat coil,
3-way valve, and modulating gas control valve.
Fans
1.
Fan performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed
or rotation and efficiency shall be factory tested and shall comply with the
requirements of AMCA 210.
2.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for
continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower in accordance with AMCA 300.
3.
Fans shall be of centrifugal type, rigidly braced and reinforced to help
prevent vibration or pulsation. Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in
accordance with the standard sizes adopted by AMCA.
4.
Fan and motors shall be mounted inside the unit casing with 1" (minimum
90% efficiency) deflection spring vibration isolators and supplied with
neoprene flexible connections.
5.
Fans shall be selected for a stable operation, at least 20% under the fans
first critical speed.
6.
Units shall be equipped with non-overloading, airfoil, SWSI plenum fan,
Arrangement 3 (AMCA labeled) supply and exhaust fans to provide
scheduled airflows against static pressures indicated.
7.
Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and completed with
a corrosion resistant coating. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.
15776-5
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
G.
SECTION 15776
8.
Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease-lubricated, self-aligning ball or pillow
block type. Bearing shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-50) in
excess of 200,000 hours at maximum operating speed in accordance with
AFBMA 9 regulations.
9.
Fan drives shall be designed for a 1.4 service factor. Drives are factory
mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment made before unit
start-up.
10.
Belt drives with motor pulley shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors
up to and including 10 HP. Fan pulleys shall be fixed pitch.
Motors
1.
All motors are internal to the unit casing and are mounted on an adjustable
base allowing for belt alignment and tensioning.
2.
Fan motors shall be heavy duty, 1800 rpm, high efficiency (E-pact Series),
open drip proof (ODP), NEMA Design B with Class F insulation and 1.15
service factor. Motors shall be constant speed operable at field voltage:
460 Volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
3.
Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to accelerate the drive loads
satisfactorily.
4.
Motor sizes shall be minimum size indicated in the equipment schedule. If
not indicated, large enough so that the drive load will not require the motor
to operate in the service factor range.
5.
Temperature rating shall be 122°F (50°C) maximum temperature rise at
104°F (40°C) ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation).
6.
Motor construction shall be NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose,
continuous duty, Design B.
a.
Bases shall be adjustable.
b.
Bearings shall be:
c.
1)
Ball or roller bearing with inner and outer shaft seals.
2)
Grease lubricated.
3)
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other
drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motors.
Energy efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112-B. If efficiency is
15776-6
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15776
not specified, motors shall give a higher efficiency than "average
standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard
112-B.
H.
I.
Filters
1.
Filters shall be UL 900 Class II.
2.
Outside and return air inlet shall be equipped with galvanized steel racks
that permit slide out removal of filters (side access) for units equal or
smaller than 78", and universal holding frames with upstream access for
units taller than 78".
3.
Filter banks shall be arranged for flat orientation. The air velocity shall not
exceed 500 fpm through each filter bank.
4.
Unit shall include 2" disposable type air filters, 25-30% DSE efficiency,
consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media encased in
fiberboard cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to provide
media support. Airflow resistance with clean media shall not exceed 0.28
inch w.g. at a face velocity of 500 fpm and filter arrestance efficiency of
90% based on ASHRAE Test Standard 52.
Dampers
1.
Air leakage through a 48" x 48" damper shall not exceed 10.3 cfm/sq.ft.
against 4 in. wg. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air
leakage data to be certified under AMCA certified rating program.
2.
Dampers are designed
between -40°F and 212°F.
3.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary dampers. Dampers for outside air
intake, exhaust air and all other dampers required for the system, including
the dampers for defrost (if required).
4.
Intake outside air dampers are opposed blade type and exhaust air
dampers are parallel blade type. For other dampers, see manufacturer's
recommendations.
5.
Outside air dampers shall be motorized. Provide damper actuators with 24
VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
6.
Exhaust air dampers shall be gravity backdraft type. Provide damper
actuators with 24 VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
7.
Dampers construction shall be as followed:
for
15776-7
operation
in
temperatures
ranging
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15776
a.
Damper frame shall be extruded aluminum.
b.
Blades shall be extruded aluminum.
c.
Dampers shall be opposed blade type or parallel blades where
indicated
d.
Damper blade ends shall be sealed with neoprene flexible edge
seals complete with bottom and top blade wiper seals.
e.
Frame and blades shall be non-insulated.
J.
Roof curb: Roof curb shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer for field assembly.
Curb shall consist of formed 18 gauge galvanized steel sections. Manufacturer's
curb is standard double wall, 14" in height, un-insulated. Unit base design is made
for recessed curb installation. Stiffeners will be provided for field assembly when
required. Pitch roof curb to match building roof. Provide wood nailer. Curb shall be
one piece. Two piece curbs are not acceptable.
K.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which
will shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Condensate float
shall be located in a readily accessible location.
L.
Provide factory mounted sensor between evaporator coil and hot gas reheat coil
for connection to the ATC system.
M.
Temperature Controls
1.
Shall be provided to accomplish control sequence as outlined in the
automatic temperature control section of specifications. All temperature
controls shall be factory installed, wired, and programmed by the
manufacturer or see item 3 below.
2.
Manufacturer shall provide an interface which will allow the Owner's energy
management system to access the control points shown on the points list.
This interface shall be in complete compliance with ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard #135-1995. Provide any coordination as required to facilitate
this interface into the Owner's EMS. Provide all necessary protocol
documentation and gateway hardware and software (if required) such that
the section 15900 system suppliers may successfully create a
communication interface between the control system furnished in this
section of the specification and the 15900 control system. Provide an
adequate level of technical support to guide the section 15900 personnel
towards completion of subject communication interface. Protocol must
support reading/writing status and analog and digital point information from
this section of the specification. All documentation, gateway hardware
and software, and required technical support are understood to be included
in the bid.
15776-8
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
3.
2.03
SECTION 15776
Temperature Controls shall be accomplished by either of the following
methods:
a.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with the ATC
to accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications.
b.
Field installed controls provided by the section 15900 contractor is
acceptable provided the control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications is met.
c.
The control contractor must have the ability to interface with and
control the factory supplied outside airflow monitoring assembly.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.
All electrical controls shall be ETL listed and the entire unit shall be factory wired in
accordance with the National Electrical Code Standard.
B.
The outdoor constructed units shall be supplied with a weatherproof non-fused
main power disconnect switch. A single point power connection shall be provided
for all units.
C.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary high voltage components as follows:
1.
Variable frequency drives shall be provided on supply, return, and exhaust
fans. Motors shall operate at constant speed. Fan speed shall be
adjustable through the variable frequency drive. See specification section
15905 for variable frequency drives.
2.
Thermal protection on all high voltage motors.
3.
Fuses and fuse holders.
4.
All necessary control transformers.
D.
Unit shall be completed with all necessary relays, time delay, damper actuators
with auxiliary switches (as required).
E.
The automatic unit start-up is provided as standard via an external dry contact
provided by others (ex: Building management system, DDC controller, time clock,
etc.).
F.
Terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Low voltage is 24V.
15776-9
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15776
G.
Fan access doors are equipped with a momentary interrupt switch that shuts off
the unit when a protected door is opened. These switches can be removed if belt
guards are installed on the fan assembly.
H.
An integral control panel shall be provided having a hinged access door and an
approved locking device.
I.
All control devices, except those not mounted directly to the unit, shall be factory
mounted and wired. Control panel shall have a labeled strip to land all wires for
field installed control components.
J.
All components are fully wired and 100% tested prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory Start-up - The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
B.
The energy recovery units shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as listed in the
specifications and as shown on the drawings.
C.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction
dust has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall
be stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
D.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each energy recovery unit.
E.
Provide one spare belt per unit.
F.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, and belt sizes to be
included in the O&M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter
size, belt size, and the number of filters and belts required for each unit. In
addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list, distributed to:
G.
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church,
VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia 22032.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee
or Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 3 " white letters which reads:
15776-10
11/17
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15776
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15776-11
11/17
SECTION 15821
CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the Cabinet and Ceiling Exhaust Fans as shown on the drawings and
specified herein.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Exhaust fan shall have Certified Rating Seal by AMCA and shall be UL listed.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS
The exhaust fan shall consist of a centrifugal type fan with a direct drive motor. Fan shall be
of the low sound level type. Motor speed shall not exceed 1100 rpm. The manufacturer
shall be PENN VENTILATOR COMPANY. Fans fully equal to the specified manufacturer by
GREENHECK, ACME, JENCOFAN, CARNES, US FAN or LOREN COOK are acceptable.
2.02
HOUSING
Shall be acoustically insulated and shall be provided with a backdraft damper, motor
vibration isolation and electrical connections. Factory air inlet grille shall be provided on
ceiling exhaust fans. Cabinet fans shall be arranged for inline duct mounting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The exhaust fans shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and as
shown on the drawings.
B.
Fans shall be controlled as outlined in the Automatic Temperature Control section.
END OF SECTION
15821-1
11/17
SECTION 15822
UTILITY VENT SETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the Utility Vent Set (UVS) as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Utility vent sets shall have Certified Rating Seal by AMCA and shall be UL Listed.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
UTILITY VENT SETS
The utility vent sets shall be of the type, capacity and drive (belt drive or direct drive), and
location as shown on the drawings. The utility vent sets shall be manufactured by TRANE,
PEERLESS or NEW YORK BLOWER provided they are fully equal to the specified
manufacturer shown on the drawings.
A.
Type - The utility vent set shall consist of a centrifugal type fan with backward
inclined or forward curved blades, as noted. Fan shall be of the non-overloading
type. Motor shall be belt-drive, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Belt Drive Units - Shall have a variable speed sheave pulley.
C.
Vibration Isolators - Shall be provided as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer for quiet operation.
D.
Starter - Provide a manual starter for single-phase units and magnetic across-theline starter for three phase units. The starter shall have ON-OFF and red running
lights. See Section 15050 - 2.07.
E.
Control - The fan shall be controlled as outlined in the Temperature Control section
of the specifications or as shown on the drawings.
15822-1
11/17
UTILITY VENT SETS
SECTION 15822
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
1.
The utility vent sets shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and as
shown on the drawings.
2.
Provide one set of spare belts for each utility vent set.
VARIABLE SHEAVE PULLEY
If the belt drive utility vent sets do not have a variable speed sheave pulley, the contractor
shall provide and install pulley and belts to meet the air flow requirements as shown on the
drawings.
END OF SECTION
15822-2
11/17
SECTION 15827
AIR CURTAIN FLY FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010 General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the fly fans as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The fly fan shall have Certified Rating Seal by AMCA or published data by an acceptable
manufacturer and shall be UL listed.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FLY FANS
The fly fans shall be of the type, capacity and voltage shown on the drawings. The fly fans
shall be manufactured by MARS. Fans fully equal to the specified manufacturer and
manufactured by FANTECH, POWERED AIRE or BERNER MINIVEIL are acceptable.
A.
Cabinet - Shall be suitable for exposed indoor wall mounting and manufactured of
polycarbonate or satin anodized aluminum painted with color selected by Architect.
The air shall enter the fan through a horizontal louvered inlet grille. Air shall be
diffused through a nozzle that extends the entire width of the unit and is equipped
with air directional control vanes. Velocity control shall be through two speed motor
control or adjustable intake louver damper control.
B.
Fan and Motor - Shall be direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal, continuous duty
type with permanent lubricated sealed ball bearings and automatic thermal overload
protection. The fans shall be selected for quiet operation with motor speed not
exceeding 1750 rpm.
15827-1
11/17
AIR CURTAIN FLY FANS
SECTION 15827
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The fly fans shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and as shown
on the drawings.
B.
Fans shall be controlled through a door switch provided under Division 16.
END OF SECTION
15827-2
11/17
SECTION 15830
POWER ROOF VENTILATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install the Power Roof Ventilator as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Power roof ventilators shall have Certified Rating Seal by AMCA or published data by an
acceptable manufacturer and shall be UL listed.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
POWER ROOF VENTILATOR
The power roof ventilator shall be the type, capacity and drive (belt drive or direct drive), and
be located as shown on the drawings. Power roof ventilator shall be manufactured by PENN
VENTILATOR COMPANY. Ventilators fully equal to the specified manufacturer and
manufactured by AEROVENT, CARNES, JENCOFAN, GREENHECK, ACME, US FAN or
LOREN COOK are acceptable.
A.
Fan - Shall be provided with a backward inclined centrifugal wheel that has been
statically and dynamically balanced. The bearings shall be heavy duty, self-aligning,
sealed ball bearings. The motor and fan assembly shall be isolated from the base
with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
B.
Belt drive ventilators shall have variable speed sheave pulley to adjust the speed of
the ventilator.
C.
Motor - Shall be installed in a totally enclosed weatherproof housing outside of the
air stream. The motor shall have sealed ball bearings and be internally thermally
protected.
15830-1
11/17
POWER ROOF VENTILATOR SECTION 15830
D.
Disconnect Switch - A factory wired non-fused toggle type disconnect switch shall be
located under the housing of the unit.
E.
Starter - Provide a magnetic across-the-line starter for three phase units. The starter
shall have ON-OFF-AUTO switch and red running light. See Section 15050 - 2.07.
F.
Pre-fabricated aluminum or galvanized steel curbs 12" high shall be provided to
match the power roof ventilator. The curb shall be flashed to match the roofing
system. Provide wood nailer. The power roof ventilator and curb shall be provided
by the same manufacturer. Backdraft dampers shall be mounted in the curb and
shall be full size of the opening.
G.
Accessories shall be provided as shown on the drawings. Such accessories shall be
of the same manufacturer as the ventilators. All ventilators shall have gravity type
backdraft dampers.
H.
Unit shall be controlled as described in the Automatic Temperature Control section
of the specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The power roof ventilator shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer
and as shown on the drawings. Backdraft damper shall be mounted on rails inside
the curb and within the manufacturers recommended minimum distance from the
fan. The power roof ventilator shall be secured to the roof curb using like fasteners,
fasteners shall be self tapping stainless steel with a 5/16 hex head, 2 inches in
length. The number of fasteners used shall be per the manufacturers’
recommendations.
B.
VARIABLE SHEAVE PULLEY
If the belt drive power roof ventilators do not have a variable speed sheave pulley,
the contractor shall provide and install pulley and belts to meet the air flow
requirements as shown on the drawings.
C.
Provide one spare fan belt for each unit.
D.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their fan belt sizes to be included in the
O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, belt size and the number
of belts required for each unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional
copies of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115
Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church VA 22042.
15830-2
11/17
POWER ROOF VENTILATOR 2.
SECTION 15830
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
END OF SECTION
15830-3
11/17
SECTION 15834
AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include providing and installing, complete, the air
handling unit as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The air-handling unit shall have ARI certified ratings and shall be labeled as
acceptable by an approved safety testing or inspection agency such as Underwriters
Laboratories.
B.
The motor shall be manufactured under NEMA standards.
C.
The coils shall have ARI certified ratings.
D.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in section 15010, 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
AIR HANDLING UNIT
The air-handling unit shall be provided and installed complete with the type, arrangement,
capacities and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified herein. The airhandling unit shall be manufactured by Trane. Air handling units manufactured by Carrier or
DAIKIN are acceptable providing all aspects of the specifications are met.
A.
Casing - The housing shall be constructed of heavy sheet mill galvanized steel
adequately reinforced with structural members and provided with sufficient access
panels for proper lubrication and maintenance. Unit shall be of the arrangement
shown on the drawings. Unit shall include one piece drain pan with 1/2" foamed-in15834-1
11/17
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15834
place, cellular insulation extending under coil and fan sections with drain
connections on both sides. Hinged panels in fan, coil, filter and mixing box sections
shall provide access to all internal parts. All unit panels shall be insulated with 1" foil
faced glass fiberboard. Unit casing may be chemically cleaned, spray painted, baked
and coated with an additional exterior coat of enamel after final assembly in lieu of
mill galvanizing.
B.
Fans - Shall be double-inlet air foil type. All fans shall be statically and dynamically
balanced and tested after being installed in factory-assembled fan sections.
Permanently sealed prelubricated 200,000 hour life ball bearings shall be mounted
externally on all units so bearings can be served without dismantling the unit.
C.
Motor and Drive:
1.
Shall be belt drive with guard and adjustable motor sheave. Motor
nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%
with airfoil. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially
designed for quiet operation. Provide and install VFD Variable Frequency
Drive.
2.
Motor speed for VAV units shall be controlled by a variable frequency drive.
All VFD’s shall be factory installed by the manufacturer.
D.
Chilled Water Coil - Shall be pitched within the casing for proper drainage. It shall
be the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tube type, with drawn and belled
collars mechanically expanded to seamless copper tubes. The completely drainable
coil shall be tested under water at 250 psig. Provide an IAQ type sloped cleanable
non-corrosive one piece insulated drain pan.
E.
Hot Water Heating Coil - Shall be pitched within the casing for proper drainage. Coil
shall be furnished with metering orifices in the supply header to insure equal
distribution of hot water to each tube. The coil shall be tested at 250 psig under
water. The hot water coil shall be placed in a pre-heat position on all chilled water
systems and downstream on a DX system, except for VAV type unit.
F.
Mixing Box - Low Leak Dampers - The mixing box shall be a product of the air
handling unit manufacturer with the arrangement as shown on the drawings. The
return air and outside air dampers shall be sized for 100% air, shall be
interconnected, and shall be as follows:
1.
Return Air Damper - The parallel blades shall be brake formed and secured
to a minimum of 5/8" diameter steel-rods rotating in nylon bushings and
mounted in rigid steel damper frames. The frame shall be constructed of a
minimum 13-gauge sheet steel and the blades of a minimum double 22
gauge sheet steel.
2.
Outside Air Damper - Opposed Blade - The outside air damper supplied by
the air handling unit manufacturer shall not be used. Mount one of the
15834-2
11/17
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15834
following dampers on the mixing box: ARROW-FOIL model OBDAF-207,
AIR BALANCE model AC-116 or RUSKIN model CD-50.
G.
Filter Section - Low velocity medium capacity filter section shall be a matching part of
the unit with access through hinged doors on both sides. Combination mixing
box/filter sections are not acceptable. Filters shall be 2" FARR 30/30 medium
efficiency, pleated, disposable type. Each filter shall consist of a non-woven cotton
fabric media, media support grid and enclosing frame. The filter media shall have an
average efficiency of 30-35% on ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76. It shall have an
average arrestance of not less than 92% in accordance with that test standard. The
filter shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as Class 2. Two complete sets of
spare filters shall be supplied in addition to the set used during construction.
H.
Filter Gauge - Shall be a manometer type with an operating range of 0 - 3" w.c.
Furnish one for each air-handling unit. Prototype - DWYER.
I.
Isolation - Provide factory installed internal spring isolators or field installed external
housed type spring isolators for all air handling units. Install external isolators in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Acceptable external isolator
manufacturers: MASON INDUSTRIES, PEABODY NOISE CONTROL, VIBRATION
ELIMINATOR COMPANY, or VIBRATION MOUNTINGS and CONTROLS.
J.
Starter - Provide magnetic line voltage starter with HAND-OFF-AUTO switch and red
running light. See Electric Motor Starters, section 15050 - 2.07.
K.
Sound Ratings
1.
The sound power rating (re: 10-12 watts) leaving the air handling unit under
the tabulated conditions shall not exceed the following in any octave band:
AIR HANDLING UNITS SOUND POWER BY OCTAVE BAND
10-12 WATTS at Specified AirFlow and Static Pressure
Octave Frequency
Mid Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ENGINEER TO LIST CORRESPONDING NUMBERS
AHU #1
AHU #2
AHU #3
AHU #nth
2.
Air handling unit sound ratings shall be based on tests in a sound laboratory
reverberant room strictly conforming to ASHRAE Standard 36-62, in
15834-3
11/17
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15834
accordance with AMCA 300 procedures. Sound data must be accurate to
within + 5 db @ 63 Hz, + 4 db @ 125 Hz, + 2 db from 250-2000 Hz, + 3 db @
4000 Hz and above.
3.
L.
Temperature Controls –
1.
M.
Where the manufacturer's sound power data is not published, an officer of
the company must certify that sound data conforms to the above
requirements. If the manufacturer does not have acoustical facilities in
accordance with the above requirements, the contractor must submit certified
data that the specified units have been tested in an approved independent
acoustics lab, capable of testing equipment at specified operating conditions,
to determine sound power levels by octave band.
All controls shall be provided by the BAS contractor under section 15900.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which will
shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Condensate float shall
be located in a readily accessible location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The air handling units shall be installed as shown on the drawings and as recommended by
the manufacturer.
A.
The air handling unit fan speed shall be adjusted to deliver the amount of air as
stated on the drawings by adjusting the motor sheave. If the proper amount of air
cannot be obtained by this adjustment, the contractor shall provide and install new
motor sheave and belts to obtain the proper amount of air.
B.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each air-handling unit. The filters shall be changed after the
construction dust has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of
filters shall be stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
C.
Provide one spare belt for each air handling unit.
D.
Provide grease fitting extensions where necessary to have the grease fitting
accessible.
E.
The mixing box dampers shall be checked by the owners representative after the
damper motors have been installed and before the final inspection to make sure that
the dampers are closing properly.
F.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their fan belt sizes and their filter sizes to
be included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter
15834-4
11/17
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15834
size and the number of filters belt sizes and number of belts required for each unit.
In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list, distributed to:
G.
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115
Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 1/2 " white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15834-5
11/17
SECTION 15835
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, section
15010 - General Provisions and section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall
apply to this section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include providing and installing complete the
chilled water/hot water air handling unit as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The air handling unit shall have ARI certified ratings and shall be labeled as
acceptable by an approved safety testing or inspection agency such as
Underwriters Laboratories.
B.
The motors shall be manufactured under NEMA standards.
C.
All wiring shall conform to the National Electric Code (NEC).
D.
The coils shall have ARI certified ratings.
E.
Factory Start-up – The manufacture shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
F.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
AIR HANDLING UNIT
The air handling unit shall be provided and installed complete with the type,
arrangement, capacities and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified
herein. The air handling unit shall be manufactured by TRANE. Air handling units
15835-1
11/17
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15835
manufactured by CARRIER or DAIKIN are acceptable providing all aspects of the
specifications are met. No substitutions.
A.
Casing -The housing shall be constructed of heavy sheet mill galvanized steel
adequately reinforced with structural members and provided with sufficient
access panels for proper lubrication and maintenance. Unit shall be of the
arrangement shown on the drawings. Units shall be fully gasketed for weather
protection. Piping to the roof mounted units shall be totally within the unit curb.
Unit shall include one-piece, cellular insulation extending under coil and fan
sections with drain connections on both sides. The double wall panels shall be
two inches thick with 18 gauge mill galvanized steel outer wall and 22 gauge mill
galvanized inner wall. Panels shall be individually removable for access and
maintenance. The insulation shall be two inches thick fiberglass with 1.5 PCF
density. Hinged, gasketed, double wall, insulated access doors shall be provided
for access to all fan, filter, coil, energy recovery wheel sections and piping
enclosures. Unit casing may be chemically cleaned, spray painted, baked and
coated with an additional exterior coat of enamel after final assembly in lieu of
mill galvanizing.
B.
Fans - Shall be airfoil type. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced
and tested after being installed in factory-assembled fan sections. Permanently
sealed prelubricated 200,000 hour life ball bearings shall be mounted externally
on all units so bearings can be served without dismantling the unit.
C.
Motor and Drive
1.
Provide belt drive with guard and adjustable motor sheave. Motor
nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of
5% with airfoil. Provide oil resistant type belts. Provide motor especially
designed for quiet operation.
2.
Motor speed (for VAV units) shall be controlled by variable frequency
drives. All variable frequency drives shall be factory installed by the
manufacturer. See section 15905 for acceptable manufacturers.
D.
Chilled Water Coil - Shall be pitched within the casing for proper
drainage. It shall be the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tube
type, with drawn and belled collars mechanically expanded to seamless
copper tubes. The completely drainable coil shall be tested under water
at 250 psig. Provide one piece sloped, non-corrosive, cleanable stainless
steel or plastic IAQ type insulated drain pan. A water level sensing device
shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which will shut down the unit
in the event this devices level is exceeded.
E.
Hot Water Heating Coil - Shall be pitched within the casing for proper drainage.
Coil shall be furnished with metering orifices in the supply header to insure equal
distribution of hot water to each tube. The coil shall be tested at 250 psig under
15835-2
11/17
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15835
water. The hot water coil shall be placed in a pre-heat position on chilled water
systems and downstream on a DX system.
F.
Energy Recover Heat Wheel (If so equipped);
1.
Heat Wheels shall comply with UL standards.
2.
Heat Wheel - Provide aluminum or polymer transfer media, flame spread
rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than
50 and shall be independently tested in accordance with ASTM standard
E-84. Rotor media shall be independently tested in accordance with
ASHRAE Standards. It shall allow laminar flow (but not radial) at usual
velocities and prevent leakage, bypassing and cross contamination by
cross flow within wheel. Size the transfer media to allow passage of 300
micron particles without fouling or clogging. Treat media with nondegrading desiccant that is bacteriostatic, non-corroding and non-toxic.
No asbestos material will be allowed. Wheel shall not condense water
directly or require a condensate drain for summer or winter operation.
Performance rating shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 1060.
3.
Provide casing seals on periphery of rotor as well as on duct divider and
purge section. Seals are to be adjustable, of extended life materials and
effective in limiting air leakage.
4.
Wheel shall be supported by ball or roller bearings and belt driven by a
fractional horsepower, totally enclosed, NEMA Standard motor through a
close coupled positively lubricated speed reducer, or gear/chain speed
reduction.
5.
Unit shall be constructed of heavy gage steel to insure rigidity and
stability. Casing side panels shall be removable to insure easy access to
internal parts. Provide integral flanges for flanged duct connection and
provide lifting holes or lugs.
G. Air Dampers - Opposed Blade - Air dampers shall be one of the following
models: ARROW-FOIL model OBDAF-207, AIR BALANCE model AC-116, or
RUSKIN model CD-50.
H.
Outside Air Damper (for VAV units) - Provide factory installed damper/airflow
monitoring assembly for maintaining a constant quantity of outside air. Assembly
shall consist of factory mounted TRANE Traq low leak dampers that both
modulate and measure airflow.
I. Filter Section - Low velocity medium capacity filter section shall be a matching
part of the unit with access through hinged doors on both sides. Combination
mixing box/filter sections are not acceptable. Filters shall be 2" FARR 30/30
medium efficiency, pleated, disposable type. Each filter shall consist of a nonwoven cotton fabric media, media support grid and enclosing frame. The filter
15835-3
11/17
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15835
media shall have an average efficiency of 30-35% on ASHRAE Test Standard
52-76. It shall have an average arrestance of not less than 92% in accordance
with that test standard. The filter shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as
Class 2. Two complete sets of spare filters shall be supplied in addition to the
set used during construction.
J.
Isolation - Provide factory installed internal spring isolators or field installed
external housed type spring isolators for all air handling units. Install external
isolators in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Acceptable
external isolator manufacturers: MASON INDUSTRIES, PEABODY NOISE
CONTROL,
VIBRATION
ELIMINATOR
COMPANY,
or
VIBRATION
MOUNTINGS and CONTROLS.
K.
Roof Curb - Provide pre-fabricated aluminum or galvanized steel 14" high curbs
to match the unit. Provide wood nailer. The curb shall be flashed to match the
roofing system. The unit and curb shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
Roof curbs shall be one piece; two piece curbs will not be accepted.
L.
Starter - Provide magnetic line voltage starter with HAND-OFF-AUTO switch, red
running light, and auxiliary contacts for all motors. See Electric Motor Starters,
Section 15050 - 2.07. All starters shall be factory installed by the manufacturer.
M.
Wiring - All units shall have single point power connections. The units shall be
completely pre-wired at the factory, including all motors, starters, variable
frequency drives, internal transformers, actuators, and controls.
N.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which
will shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Condensate
float shall be located in a readily accessible location.
O. Temperature Controls
1.
Shall be provided to accomplish control sequence as outlined in the
automatic temperature control section of specifications. All temperature
controls shall be factory installed, wired and programmed by the
manufacturer or see item 3 below.
2.
Manufacturer shall provide an interface which will allow the Owner's
energy management system to access the control points shown on the
points list.
This interface shall be in complete compliance with
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard #135-2000.
Provide any coordination as
required to facilitate this interface into the Owner's EMS. Provide all
necessary protocol documentation and gateway hardware and software
(if required) such that the section 15900 system suppliers may
successfully create a communication interface between the control
system furnished in this section of the specification and the15900 control
system. Provide an adequate level of technical support to guide the
section 15900 personal towards completion of subject communication
15835-4
11/17
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15835
interface. Protocol must support reading / writing status and analog and
digital point information from this section of the specification. All
documentation, gateway hardware and software, and required technical
support are understood to be included in the bid.
3.
Temperature Controls shall be accomplished by either of the following
methods:
a.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with the ATC
to accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications.
b.
Field installed controls provided by the division 15900 contractor is
acceptable provided the control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications is met.
The control contractor must have the ability to interface with and
control the factory supplied outside airflow monitoring assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The air handling units shall be installed as shown on the drawings and as recommended
by the manufacturer.
A.
Factory Start-up – The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent.
B.
The air handling unit fan speed shall be adjusted to deliver the amount of air as
stated on the drawings by adjusting the motor sheave. If the proper amount of
air cannot be obtained by this adjustment, the contractor shall provide and install
new motor sheave and belts to obtain the proper amount of air.
C.
Provide a spare belt for each air handling unit.
D.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each air handling unit. The filters shall be changed after the
construction dust has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set
of filters shall be stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
E.
Provide grease fittings extensions where necessary to have the grease fitting
accessible.
F.
Provide a typed list of all the different air handling units their filter sizes and their
belt sizes to be included in the O&M manuals. The list shall include the unit
designation, filter size and belt size the number of filters and belts required for
15835-5
11/17
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 15835
each unit in addition to this submit to the Owner two copies of the list distributed
to:
1. Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115
Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
2. Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia 22032.
3. Include list in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.
G.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee
or Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 1/2 " white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15835-6
11/17
SECTION 15836
ROOF MOUNTED MAKEUP AIR UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include providing and installing complete the roof
mounted makeup air unit as shown on the drawing and specified herein.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The unit fan shall have ARI certified ratings and be UL listed.
B.
The motor shall be manufactured under NEMA standards.
C.
The coils shall have ARI certified ratings.
D.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. The controls
coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop drawings are
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ROOF MOUNTED MAKEUP AIR UNIT
The roof mounted makeup air unit shall be provided and installed complete with the type,
arrangement, capacities and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified therein.
The unit shall be manufactured by INNOVENT AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT. Units
manufactured by DES CHAMPS or ENGINEERED AIR are acceptable providing all aspects
of the specifications are met.
A.
Casing – The housing shall be constructed of heavy sheet mill galvanized steel
adequately reinforced with structural members and provided with sufficient access
panels for proper weatherproofing, lubrication and maintenance. Unit shall be of the
arrangement shown on the drawings. Provide internal piping pocket within casing to
coils. Piping to the units shall be totally within the unit curb. External pipe chases,
15836-1
11/17
ROOF MOUNTED MAKEUP AIR UNIT
SECTION 15836
including those mounted on the units, are not acceptable. Unit shall include onepiece, cellular insulation extending under coil and fan sections with drain
connections on both sides. The double wall panels shall be two inches thick with 18
gauge mill galvanized steel outer wall and 22 gauge mill galvanized inner wall.
Panels shall be individually removable for access and maintenance. The insulation
shall be two inches thick fiberglass with 1.5 PCF density. Hinged, gasketed, double
wall, insulated access doors shall be provided for access to fan, filter, coil, damper,
and heat exchanger sections. Unit casing may be chemically cleaned, spray
painted, baked and coated with an additional exterior coat of enamel after final
assembly in lieu of mill galvanizing.
B.
Fans – Shall be double-inlet airfoil type. All fans shall be statically and dynamically
balanced and tested after being installed in factory-assembled fan sections.
Permanently sealed prelubricated 200,000 hour life ball bearings shall be mounted
externally on all units so bearings can be serviced without dismantling the unit.
C.
Motor and Drive - Shall be belt drive with guard and adjustable motor sheave. Motor
nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5% with
airfoil. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially designed for
quiet operation.
D.
Isolation – Fans and motors shall be mounted on spring isolated unitary bases,
flexibly connected to the unit casing.
E.
Chilled Water Coil – Shall be pitched within the casing for proper drainage. It shall
be the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tube type, with drawn and belled
collars mechanically expanded to seamless copper tubes. The completely drainable
coil shall be tested under water at 250 psig. Provide one piece IAQ type insulated
drain pan. Drain pan shall be sloped toward the condensate drain connection drain
pan shall be non-corrosive and cleanable. All piping and isolation valves to coils
shall be inside unit casing. Chilled water pipes exposed to the air stream shall be
insulated with ¾” armaflex or equal.
F.
Hot Water Heating Coil – Shall be pitched within the casing for proper drainage. It
shall be the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tube type, with drawn and
belled collars mechanically expanded to seamless copper tubes. The completely
drainable coil shall be tested under water at 250 psig. The hot water coil shall be
placed in a pre-heat position on chilled water systems and downstream on a DX
system. All piping and isolation valves to coils shall be inside unit casing. Hot water
pipes exposed to the airstream shall be insulated with ¾” armaflex or equal.
G.
Heat Exchanger – Shall be a flat plate air-to-air type with no moving parts. Plates
shall be made of 0.008” thick aluminum and shall be constructed to withstand 10” of
differential pressure between air paths. Entire transfer surface shall be accessible
for inspection and cleaning without removing the exchanger. Provide one piece IAQ
type insulated drain pan. Drain pan shall be sloped toward the condensate drain
connection. Drain pan shall be non-corrosive and cleanable.
H.
Outside Air Damper – Shall be low leakage opposed blade type with 16-gauge frame
15836-2
11/17
ROOF MOUNTED MAKEUP AIR UNIT
SECTION 15836
and 16 gauge blades. Maximum blade width 8”. Provide neoprene seals at all blade
edge and side meeting surfaces so that air leakage shall be no more than 1% at 4”
static pressure. Provide teflon or oil impregnated bronze shaft bearings and
standard finish. Provide one of the following dampers: ARROW-FOIL model
OBDAF-207, AIR BALANCE model AC116, or RUSKIN model CD-50.
I.
Filter Section – Low velocity medium capacity filter section shall be a matching part
of the unit with access through hinged doors on both sides. Filters shall be 2” FARR
30/30, medium efficiency, pleated, disposable type. Each filter shall consist of a
non-woven cotton fabric media, media support grid, and enclosing frame. The filter
media shall have an average efficiency of 30-35% of ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76.
It shall have an average arrestance of not less than 92% in accordance with that test
standard. The filter shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories as Class 2. Two
complete sets of spare filters shall be supplied.
J.
Starter – Provide magnetic line voltage starter with HAND-OFF-AUTO switch and red
running light and auxiliary contacts. See Electric Motor Starters, Section 15050 –
2.07.
K.
Temperature Controls shall be accomplished by either of the following methods:
1.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with the ATC to
accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic Temperature Control
section of specifications.
2.
Field installed controls provided by the section 15900 contractor are
acceptable provided the control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications is met.
The control contractor must have the ability to interface with and control the
factory supplied outside airflow monitoring assembly.
L.
Pre-fabricated aluminum or galvanized steel curbs 14” high shall be provided to
match the roof mounted makeup air unit. The curb shall be flashed to match the
roofing system. The unit and curb shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Roof
curbs shall be one piece; two piece curbs will not be accepted.
M.
Provide inlet hood with moisture eliminator.
N.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which
will shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Condensate float
shall be located in a readily accessible location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The roof mounted makeup air unit shall be installed as shown on the drawings and as
recommended by the manufacturer.
15836-3
11/17
ROOF MOUNTED MAKEUP AIR UNIT
SECTION 15836
A.
The unit fan speed shall be adjusted to deliver the amount of air as stated on the
drawings by adjusting the motor sheave. If the proper amount of air cannot be
obtained by this adjustment, the contractor shall provide and install new motor
sheave and belts to obtain the proper amount of air.
B.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided with each unit. The filters shall be
changed after the construction dust has been eliminated and before final inspection.
The other set of filters shall be stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
C.
Provide one spare belt for each air handling unit.
D.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, and belt sizes are to be
included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size
and the number of filters required for each unit as well as belt size and number of
belts. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list,
distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115
Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032.
E.
Provide grease-fitting extensions where necessary to have the grease fitting
accessible.
F.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each roof mounted makeup air unit.
G.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or
Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Identification tag shall be black with
engraved 1/2 " white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15836-4
11/17
SECTION 15837
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods
shall apply to this section.
1.02
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The system shall deliver the specified air volume at the static pressure scheduled.
B.
The unit shall be constructed to provide smooth interior surfaces and to limit the
casing leakage at less than 1% of the specified air volume at operating static.
C.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with CSA C22.2 and UL 1812 and shall
carry the ETL label of approval.
D.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with industrial design practices.
E.
Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
F.
Airflow data shall comply with AMCA 210 method of testing.
G.
Cabinet and exterior components shall be tested and certified weatherproof.
H.
All units shall be 100% factory tested.
I.
All effectiveness data of heat and energy recovery components shall be certified
by the ARI 1060 certification program directory.
J.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
15837-1
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
SECTION 15837
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Makeup air unit(s) shall be supplied by GREENHECK, INNOVENT AIR
HANDLING EQUIPMENT, SEASONS 4, VALENT and AAON.
EQUIPMENT
A.
General - Factory assembled, consisting of fan and motor assemblies (supply and
exhaust), compressor section, flat plate heat exchanger, all necessary dampers,
hoods, plenums, filters, drain pans, wiring and controls. Unit shall be stand-alone
controlled with all control devices provided by the unit manufacturer. Unit shall
have single point power connection.
B.
Unit Cabinet
1.
The makeup air unit is to be installed outdoors by the mechanical
contractor. Indoor units weatherized for outdoor use are not acceptable.
2.
All unit panels are fixed with zinc plated hexagonal head type screws
complete with a washer and rubber gasket for a weatherproof assembly.
Self-drilling, self-tapping screws are used and therefore no tools are
required from the unit interior for panel removal. These panels allow for fast
service to all major components.
3.
All panel joints must be caulked with a weatherproof silicone. The silicone
used must be clear to match any color surfaces. After application, the
silicone must react with atmospheric moisture to produce a formed-in-place
silicone rubber glazing and curtain wall seal.
4.
The unit base frame shall be constructed from a bolted, structural formed
G90 galvanized steel with internal structural cross members properly sized
to allow rigging and handling of the unit. All major components shall be
supported by the base without sagging or pulsating. Lifting lugs shall be
provided and strategically located to allow equilibrium during lifting.
5.
Unit construction consists of an insulated 14 gauge galvanized structural
frame complete with die cast aluminum corners. The rigid frame provides
stable construction allowing for panel removal without affecting the unit
integrity. Panels shall be double wall construction using 2" thick mineral
wool insulation 1.5 lbs/ft3 density, 18 gauge galvanized steel exterior
panels (satin coat finish) and 26 gauge G90 galvanized steel inner liner.
The unit shall be designed to resist any snow, ice and wind loads, as well
as seismic loads in compliance with the National Building Code. Single wall
construction with coated insulation will not be acceptable. Exposed
insulation edges in the air stream will not be acceptable.
15837-2
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
C.
SECTION 15837
6.
Internal partition wall shall be insulated and constructed the same as the
unit cabinet.
7.
Full size access door(s) to allow for periodic maintenance and inspections
must be provided for all serviceable components. Serviceable components
include but are not limited to coils, heat exchanger, damper sections, motor
sections, compressor sections, and piping enclosures. Doors shall be
double wall construction made of 18 gauge galvanized steel on both outer
and inner liner for maximum rigidity. Door insulation is the same as the unit
panels. Provide doors with heavy duty corrosion resistant aluminum hinges
that allow the door to open at 180°. Compression type handles are
operable from both sides of the unit access door(s) and neoprene resilient
bubble gaskets for an enclosure that is sealed tight shall also be provided.
Plastic latch hinges are not acceptable.
8.
Outdoor constructed units shall have a pitched roof to dissipate water
accumulation. Rain gutters must be provided above access doors. All roof
joint seams are "T" shape construction, minimum height of 1.5", sealed and
encapsulated by a metal strip.
9.
All weather hoods for outdoor constructed units shall be provided with
birdscreen and rain gutters. Hoods may ship loose for field assembly.
10.
Recessed, double-sloped drain pans shall be made of formed sections of
stainless steel. Drain pans are sloped with a threaded drain pipe
connection of 1 1/2" in diameter ending outside through the structural base
channel. All drain pan corners shall be welded.
11.
Paint
a.
Outdoor constructed units shall have one coat of primer and two
coats of enamel paint.
b.
All galvanized steel surfaces that require paint shall be made of
satin coat-finished galvanized steel of the specified gauge(s).
c.
All galvanized steel surfaces without any paint shall be made of
G90 galvanized steel of the specified gauges.
d.
All unit surfaces that require paint must be cleaned and free from all
oil, dirt, and other contaminants before painting.
Flat Plate Heat Exchanger
1.
The flat plate heat exchanger assembly shall be CERTIFIED to ARI
Standard 1060 and tested in accordance to ASHRAE 84-91.
15837-3
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
D.
SECTION 15837
2.
The flat plate heat exchanger shall be cross-flow type made of 6 mil
embossed pure aluminum designed to maximize the efficiency and the
cleanability while minimizing the pressure loss.
3.
The flat plate heat exchanger shall be sectioned within the unit to allow for
a section replacement without requiring any lifting devices.
4.
Access to all four sides of the flat plate heat exchanger for cleaning and
inspection shall be provided.
5.
An access section with a sloped IAQ drain pan shall be provided upstream
and downstream of the flat plate heat exchanger allowing for service,
collection of condensate and cleaning of the flat plate heat exchanger
without allowing any standing water to be contained within the unit cabinet.
Fans
1.
Fan performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed
or rotation, and efficiency shall be factory tested and shall comply with the
requirements of AMCA 210.
2.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for
continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower in accordance with AMCA 300.
3.
Fans shall be of centrifugal type, rigidly braced and reinforced to help
prevent vibration or pulsation. Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in
accordance with the standard sizes adopted by AMCA.
4.
Fan and motors shall be mounted inside the unit casing with 1" (minimum
90% efficiency) deflection spring vibration isolators and supplied with
neoprene flexible connections.
5.
Fans shall be selected for a stable operation, at least 20% under the fan=s
first critical speed.
6.
Units shall be equipped with non-overloading, airfoil, SWSI plenum fan,
Arrangement 3 (AMCA labeled) supply and exhaust fans to provide
scheduled airflows against static pressures indicated.
7.
Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished, and completed with
a corrosion resistant coating. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.
8.
Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease-lubricated, self-aligning ball or pillow
block type. Bearing shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-50) in
excess of 200,000 hours at maximum operating speed in accordance with
AFBMA 9 regulations.
15837-4
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
E.
SECTION 15837
9.
Fan drives shall be designed for a 1.4 service factor. Drives are factory
mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment made before unit
start-up.
10.
Belt drives with motor pulley shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors
up to and including 10 HP. Fan pulleys shall be fixed pitch.
Motors
1.
All motors are internal to the unit casing and are mounted on an adjustable
base allowing for belt alignment and tensioning.
2.
Fan motors shall be heavy duty, 1800 rpm, high efficiency (E-pact Series),
open drip proof (ODP), NEMA Design B Class F insulation and 1.15 service
factor. Motors shall be constant speed operable at field voltage: 460 volts,
60 Hz, 3 phase.
3.
Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to accelerate the drive loads
satisfactorily.
4.
Motor sizes shall be minimum size indicated in the equipment schedule. If
not indicated, large enough so that the drive load will not require the motor
to operate in the service factor range.
5.
Temperature rating shall be 122°F (50°C) maximum temperature rise at
104°F (40°C) ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation).
6.
Motor construction shall be NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose,
continuous duty, Design B.
a.
Bases shall be adjustable.
b.
Bearings shall be:
c.
1)
Ball or roller bearing with inner and outer shaft seals.
2)
Grease lubricated.
3)
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other
drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motors.
Energy efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112-B. If efficiency is
not specified, motors shall give a higher efficiency than "average
standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard
112-B.
15837-5
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
F.
G.
SECTION 15837
Filters
1.
Filters shall be UL 900 Class II.
2.
Outside and return air inlet shall be equipped with galvanized steel racks
that permit slide out removal of filters (side access) for units equal or
smaller than 78", and universal holding frames with upstream access for
units taller than 78".
3.
Filter banks shall be arranged for flat orientation. The air velocity shall not
exceed 500 fpm through each filter bank.
4.
Unit shall include 2" disposable type air filters, 25-30% DSE efficiency,
consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media encased in
fiberboard cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to provide
media support. Airflow resistance with clean media shall not exceed 0.28
inch w.g. at a face velocity of 500 fpm and filter arrestance efficiency of
90% based on ASHRAE Test Standard 52.
Dampers
1.
Air leakage through a 48" x 48" damper shall not exceed 10.3 cfm/sq.ft.
against 4 in. wg. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air
leakage data to be certified under AMCA certified rating program.
2.
Dampers are designed
between -40°F and 212°F.
3.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary dampers. Dampers for outside air
intake, exhaust air and all other dampers required for the system including
the dampers for defrost (if required).
4.
Intake outside air dampers are opposed blade type and exhaust air
dampers are parallel blade type. For other dampers, see manufacturer's
recommendations.
5.
Outside air dampers shall be motorized. Provide damper actuators with 24
VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
6.
Exhaust air dampers shall be gravity backdraft type. Provide damper
actuators with 24 VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
7.
Dampers construction shall be as followed:
for
operation
in
temperatures
a.
Damper frame shall be extruded aluminum.
b.
Blades shall be extruded aluminum.
15837-6
ranging
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
H.
I.
SECTION 15837
c.
Dampers shall be opposed blade type or parallel blades where
indicated
d.
Damper blade ends shall be sealed with neoprene flexible edge
seals complete with bottom and top blade wiper seals.
e.
Frame and blades shall be non-insulated.
Direct Expansion Cooling Section
1.
Compressors - Shall be quiet-running hermetic, scroll-type. They shall be
mounted in an isolated compartment to be serviceable without affecting
airflow, and mounted on neoprene isolators to minimize vibration
transmission and noise. Refrigerant shall be R-410A. Unit shall be
capable of full modulation to maintain discharge temperature.
2.
Condenser and Evaporator Coils - Shall have copper tubes with
permanently expanded aluminum fins. Evaporator coils shall be mounted
on a stainless steel drain pan. Condenser coils shall be provided with hail/
vandal guards to protect the coils.
3.
Thermal Expansion Valves - Shall provide refrigerant control.
4.
Standard features of the packaged direct expansion cooling include:
a.
Liquid-Line Filter Drier
b.
High Pressure Manual Reset Cutout
c.
Low Pressure Auto-Reset Cutout
d.
Time Delay Relay for Compressor Protection
e.
Service/Charging Valves
f.
Moisture Indicating Sight Glass
Indirect Gas Fired Heating Section - Shall be 80% efficient, ETL Listed for outdoor
installation to ANSI Standard Z83.8 - 2002, CGA approved per 2.6 - 2002 and
have a blow through fan design. Furnace shall operate with natural gas and have a
power venting system. The burner and heat exchanger shall be constructed of
aluminized steel. Standard furnace features shall include main gas pressure
regulator, main gas valve, fully modulating electronic controls to maintain
discharge temperature, direct spark ignition system, high limit, and a 24-volt
control transformer.
15837-7
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
J.
Hot Gas Reheat for Dehumidification - Hot gas reheat coils, piping, and modulating
controls shall be factory installed for humidity control.
K.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which
will shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Condensate float
shall be located in a readily accessible location.
L.
Provide factory mounted sensor between evaporator coil and hot gas reheat coil
for connection to the ATC system.
M.
Roof curb: Roof curb shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer for field assembly.
Curb shall consist of formed 18 gauge galvanized steel sections. Manufacturer's
curb is standard double wall, 14" in height, un-insulated. Unit base design is made
for recessed curb installation. Stiffeners will be provided for field assembly when
required. Pitch roof curb to match building roof. Provide wood nailer. Curb shall be
one piece. Two piece curbs are not acceptable.
N.
Temperature Controls shall be accomplished by either of the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
2.03
SECTION 15837
Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with the ATC to
accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic Temperature
Control section of specifications.
Field installed controls provided by the section 15900 contractor are
acceptable provided the control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications is met.
The control contractor must have the ability to interface with and control the
factory supplied outside airflow monitoring assembly.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.
All electrical controls shall be ETL listed and the entire unit shall be factory wired in
accordance with the National Electrical Code Standard.
B.
The outdoor constructed units shall be supplied with a weatherproof non-fused
main power disconnect switch. A single point power connection shall be provided
for all units.
C.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary high voltage components as follows:
1.
Motor starters on all high voltage motors for constant speed applications.
2.
Thermal protection on all high voltage motors.
3.
Fuses and fuse holders.
4.
All necessary control transformers.
15837-8
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
SECTION 15837
D.
Unit shall be completed with all necessary relays, time delay, damper actuators
with auxiliary switches (as required).
E.
Terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Low voltage is 24V.
F.
Fan access doors are equipped with a momentary interrupt switch that shuts off
the unit when a protected door is opened. These switches can be removed if belt
guards are installed on the fan assembly.
G.
An integral control panel shall be provided having a hinged access door and an
approved locking device.
H.
All control devices, except those not mounted directly to the unit, shall be factory
mounted and wired. Control panel shall have a labeled strip to land all wires for
field installed control components.
I.
All components are fully wired and 100% tested prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Factory Start-up - The manufacturer shall supply complete factory start-up by a
factory approved start-up agent. Manufacturer shall provide on-site startup and
commissioning assistance through job completion. Complete installation and
startup checks according to manufacturer=s written instructions. This shall
include a factory startup for factory provided control devices as well as configuring
control points for other DO devices. Service representative shall completely
configure all control devices and establish remote internet connectivity with the
Owner's energy management department web server.
B.
Demonstration - Engage manufacturer or factory authorized service
representative to train Owner=s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and
maintain individual units and complete system. This shall include training of the
Owner's energy management department representatives as to establish control
system programming, scheduling routines, alarm reporting, system topography,
communication protocols and password level assignments.
C.
The makeup air units shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as listed in the
specifications and as shown on the drawings.
D.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction
dust has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall
be stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
15837-9
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - SELF CONTAINED
E.
SECTION 15837
Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter and belt sizes to be
included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter
size and the number of filters required for each unit, and belt size and number of
belts for each unit. In addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of
the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church,
VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
F.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each makeup air unit.
G.
Provide one spare set of belts per unit per drive.
H.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee
or Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Tag is to be screwed or riveted to unit.
Identification tag shall be black with engraved 3" white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15837-10
11/17
SECTION 15838
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section
15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply
to this section.
1.02
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The system shall deliver the specified air volume at the static pressure scheduled.
B.
The unit shall be constructed to provide smooth interior surfaces and to limit the
casing leakage at less than 1% of the specified air volume at operating static.
C.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with CSA C22.2 and UL 1812 and shall
carry the ETL label of approval.
D.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with industrial design practices.
E.
Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
F.
Airflow data shall comply with AMCA 210 method of testing.
G.
Cabinet and exterior components shall be tested and certified weatherproof.
H.
All units shall be 100% factory tested.
I.
All effectiveness data of heat and energy recovery components shall be certified
by the ARI 1060 certification program directory.
J.
Equipment installer shall attend a controls coordination meeting with the section
15900 contractor as described in 15900, 1.03.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010, 1.04. The
controls coordination meeting described in 15900, 1.03 shall be held before the shop
drawings are submitted.
15838-1
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15838
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Energy recovery unit(s) shall be supplied by GREENHECK, INNOVENT AIR
HANDLING EQUIPMENT, SEASONS 4, VALENT and AAON.
EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Factory assembled, consisting of fan and motor assemblies (supply and
exhaust), Flat Plate Heat Exchanger, all necessary dampers, hoods, plenums,
filters, drain pans, wiring and controls. Unit shall be stand-alone controlled with all
control devices provided by the unit manufacturer or control contractor. Unit shall
have single point power connection.
B.
Unit Cabinet
1.
The energy recovery unit is to be installed outdoors by the mechanical
contractor. Indoor units weatherized for outdoor use are not acceptable.
2.
All unit panels are fixed with zinc plated hexagonal head type screws
complete with a washer and rubber gasket for a weatherproof assembly.
Self-drilling, self-tapping screws are used and therefore no tools are
required from the unit interior for panel removal. These panels allow for fast
service to all major components.
3.
All panel joints must be caulked with a weatherproof silicone. The silicone
used must be clear to match any color surfaces. After application, the
silicone must react with atmospheric moisture to produce a formed-in-place
silicone rubber glazing and curtain wall seal.
4.
The unit base frame shall be constructed from a bolted, structural formed
G90 galvanized steel with internal structural cross members properly sized
to allow rigging and handling of the unit. All major components shall be
supported by the base without sagging or pulsating. Lifting lugs shall be
provided and strategically located to allow equilibrium during lifting.
5.
Unit construction consists of an insulated 14 gauge galvanized structural
frame complete with die cast aluminum corners. The rigid frame provides
stable construction allowing for panel removal without affecting the unit
integrity. Panels shall be double wall construction using 2" thick mineral
wool insulation 1.5 lbs/ft3 density, 18 gauge galvanized steel exterior
panels (satin coat finish) and 26 gauge G90 galvanized steel inner liner.
The unit shall be designed to resist any snow, ice and wind loads, as well
as seismic loads in compliance with the National Building Code. Single wall
construction with coated insulation will not be acceptable. Exposed
insulation edges in the air stream will not be acceptable.
15838-2
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15838
INSULATING VALUE
TYPE OF INSULATION
2" THICKNESS
Mineral wool (3.5 pcf)
R8.6
Urethane
R14.8
6.
Internal partition wall shall be insulated and constructed the same as the
unit cabinet.
7.
Full size access door(s) to allow for periodic maintenance and inspections
must be provided for all serviceable components. Serviceable components
include but are not limited to Coils, Heat Exchanger, Damper sections,
Motor sections and piping enclosures. Doors shall be double wall
construction made of 18 gauge galvanized steel on both outer and inner
liner for maximum rigidity. Door insulation is the same as the unit panels.
Provide doors with heavy duty corrosion resistant aluminum hinges that
allow the door to open at 180°. Compression type handles are operable
from both sides of the unit access door(s) and neoprene resilient bubble
gaskets for an enclosure that is sealed tight shall also be provided. Plastic
latches hinges are not acceptable.
8.
Outdoor constructed units shall have a pitched roof to dissipate water
accumulation. Rain gutters must be provided above access doors. All roof
joint seams are "T" shape construction, minimum height of 1.5", sealed and
encapsulated by a metal strip.
9.
All weather hoods for outdoor constructed units are provided with
birdscreen and rain gutters. Hoods may ship loose for field assembly.
10.
Recessed, double-sloped drain pans shall be made of formed sections of
steel. Drain pans are sloped with a threaded drain pipe connection of 1 1/2"
in diameter ending outside through the structural base channel. All drain
pan corners shall be welded.
11.
Paint:
a.
Outdoor constructed units shall have one coat of primer and two
coats of enamel paint.
b.
All galvanized steel surfaces that require paint shall be made of
satin coat-finished galvanized steel of the specified gauge(s).
15838-3
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
C.
D.
SECTION 15838
c.
All galvanized steel surfaces without any paint shall be made of
G90 galvanized steel of the specified gauges.
d.
All unit surfaces that require paint must be cleaned and free from all
oil, dirt and other contaminants before painting.
Flat Plate Heat Exchanger
1.
The flat plate heat exchanger assembly shall be certified to ARI Standard
1060 and tested in accordance to ASHRAE 84-91.
2.
The flat plate heat exchanger shall be cross-flow type made of 6 mil
embossed pure aluminum designed to maximize the efficiency and the
cleanability while minimizing the pressure loss.
3.
The flat plate heat exchanger shall be sectioned within the unit to allow for
a section replacement without requiring any lifting devices.
4.
Access to all four sides of the flat plate heat exchanger for cleaning and
inspection shall be provided.
5.
An access section with a sloped IAQ drain pan shall be provided upstream
and downstream of the flat plate heat exchanger allowing for service,
collection of condensate and cleaning of the flat plate heat exchanger
without allowing any standing water to be contained within the unit cabinet.
Integral Water Cooled Heat Pump
1.
Unit shall be provided with a complete integral factory piped and wired
mechanical refrigeration system consisting of: scroll compressors, an ARI
rated air-refrigerant coil, a UL listed water refrigerant coil, service valves,
expansion valves, 4-way reversing valve, high/low pressure switches,
anti-recycle timers, compressor contactors, suction accumulator, liquid
receiver, line filter-drier, pressure ports, and sight glass shall be factory
provided and installed. Hermetic scroll compressors shall be used,
mounted on RIS vibration isolators, and provided with a sumpheater. Water
refrigerant coil shall be of brazed plate stainless steel type. Air-refrigerant
coil is constructed of seamless copper tube primary surface and rippled
aluminum plate fin secondary surface. Air refrigerant coil core is tested with
315 psig air pressure under warm water and guaranteed for 250 psig
working pressure. All brazed plate heat exchangers, refrigerant specialties
and refrigerant piping shall be factory insulated as required by the
manufacturer to avoid sweating.
Provide factory mounted sensor between evaporator coil and hot gas
reheat coil for connection to the ATC system.
15838-4
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
2.
E.
Integral heat pump system shall be capable of modulating the cooling and
heating capacity to maintain specified discharge air temperature.
Water/R-410A heat exchangers shall be provided with an entering fluid
side strainer, leaving fluid side freeze stat, and fluid flow proving switch.
Fluid flow valves and actuators shall be provided by the installing
contractor and installed in the field. Field installed water piping must be
field insulated.
Modulating Hot Gas Reheat
1.
F.
SECTION 15838
Unit shall be provided with a factory mounted and piped hot gas reheat coil,
3-way valve, and modulating gas control valve.
Fans
1.
Fan performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed
or rotation and efficiency shall be factory tested and shall comply with the
requirements of AMCA 210.
2.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for
continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower in accordance with AMCA 300.
3.
Fans shall be of centrifugal type, rigidly braced and reinforced to help
prevent vibration or pulsation. Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in
accordance with the standard sizes adopted by AMCA.
4.
Fan and motors shall be mounted inside the unit casing with 1" (minimum
90% efficiency) deflection spring vibration isolators and supplied with
neoprene flexible connections.
5.
Fans shall be selected for a stable operation, at least 20% under the fans
first critical speed.
6.
Units shall be equipped with non-overloading, airfoil, SWSI plenum fan,
Arrangement 3 (AMCA labeled) supply and exhaust fans to provide
scheduled airflows against static pressures indicated.
7.
Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and completed with
a corrosion resistant coating. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.
8.
Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease-lubricated, self-aligning ball or pillow
block type. Bearing shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-50) in
excess of 200,000 hours at maximum operating speed in accordance with
AFBMA 9 regulations.
15838-5
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
G.
SECTION 15838
9.
Fan drives shall be designed for a 1.4 service factor. Drives are factory
mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment made before unit
start-up.
10.
Belt drives with motor pulley shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors
up to and including 10 HP. Fan pulleys shall be fixed pitch.
Motors
1.
All motors are internal to the unit casing and are mounted on an adjustable
base allowing for belt alignment and tensioning.
2.
Fan motors shall be heavy duty, 1800 rpm, high efficiency (E-pact Series),
open drip proof (ODP), NEMA Design B with Class F insulation and 1.15
service factor. Motors shall be constant speed operable at field voltage:
460 Volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
3.
Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to accelerate the drive loads
satisfactorily.
4.
Motor sizes shall be minimum size indicated in the equipment schedule. If
not indicated, large enough so that the drive load will not require the motor
to operate in the service factor range.
5.
Temperature rating shall be 122°F (50°C) maximum temperature rise at
104°F (40°C) ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation).
6.
Motor construction shall be NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose,
continuous duty, Design B.
a.
Bases shall be adjustable.
b.
Bearings shall be:
c.
1)
Ball or roller bearing with inner and outer shaft seals.
2)
Grease lubricated.
3)
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other
drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motors.
Energy efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112-B. If efficiency is
not specified, motors shall give a higher efficiency than "average
standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard
112-B.
15838-6
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
H.
I.
SECTION 15838
Filters
1.
Filters shall be UL 900 Class II.
2.
Outside and return air inlet shall be equipped with galvanized steel racks
that permit slide out removal of filters (side access) for units equal or
smaller than 78", and universal holding frames with upstream access for
units taller than 78".
3.
Filter banks shall be arranged for flat orientation. The air velocity shall not
exceed 500 fpm through each filter bank.
4.
Unit shall include 2" disposable type air filters, 25-30% DSE efficiency,
consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media encased in
fiberboard cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to provide
media support. Airflow resistance with clean media shall not exceed 0.28
inch w.g. at a face velocity of 500 fpm and filter arrestance efficiency of
90% based on ASHRAE Test Standard 52.
Dampers
1.
Air leakage through a 48" x 48" damper shall not exceed 10.3 cfm/sq.ft.
against 4 in. wg. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air
leakage data to be certified under AMCA certified rating program.
2.
Dampers are designed
between -40°F and 212°F.
3.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary dampers. Dampers for outside air
intake, exhaust air and all other dampers required for the system, including
the dampers for defrost (if required).
4.
Intake outside air dampers are opposed blade type and exhaust air
dampers are parallel blade type. For other dampers, see manufacturer's
recommendations.
5.
Outside air dampers shall be motorized. Provide damper actuators with 24
VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
6.
Exhaust air dampers shall be gravity backdraft type. Provide damper
actuators with 24 VAC drive voltage. 0-10 VDC modulation.
7.
Dampers construction shall be as followed:
for
operation
in
temperatures
a.
Damper frame shall be extruded aluminum.
b.
Blades shall be extruded aluminum.
15838-7
ranging
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
c.
Dampers shall be opposed blade type or parallel blades where
indicated
d.
Damper blade ends shall be sealed with neoprene flexible edge
seals complete with bottom and top blade wiper seals.
e.
Frame and blades shall be non-insulated.
J.
Roof curb - Roof curb shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer for field assembly.
Curb shall consist of formed 18 gauge galvanized steel sections. Manufacturer's
curb is standard double wall, 18" in height, 2" thick fiberglass insulation. Unit base
design is made for recessed curb installation. Stiffeners will be provided for field
assembly when required. Pitch roof curb to match building roof. Curb shall be
provided with wood nailer. Curb shall be one piece. Two piece curbs are not
acceptable.
K.
Temperature Controls shall be accomplished by either of the following methods:
L.
2.03
SECTION 15838
1.
Factory built-in controls shall be provided to interface with the ATC to
accomplish control sequence as outlined in Automatic Temperature
Control section of specifications.
2.
Field installed controls provided by the section 15900 contractor are
acceptable provided the control sequence as outlined in Automatic
Temperature Control section of specifications is met.
3.
The control contractor must have the ability to interface with and control the
factory supplied outside airflow monitoring assembly.
A water level sensing device shall be provided in the unit condensate pan which
will shut down the unit in the event this devices level is exceeded. Condensate float
shall be located in a readily accessible location.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.
All electrical controls shall be ETL listed and the entire unit shall be factory wired in
accordance with the National Electrical Code Standard.
B.
The outdoor constructed units shall be supplied with a weatherproof non-fused
main power disconnect switch. A single point power connection shall be provided
for all units.
C.
Unit shall be equipped with all necessary high voltage components as follows:
1.
Motor starters on all high voltage motors for constant speed applications.
2.
Thermal protection on all high voltage motors.
15838-8
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
3.
Fuses and fuse holders.
4.
All necessary control transformers.
SECTION 15838
D.
Unit shall be completed with all necessary relays, time delay, damper actuators
with auxiliary switches (as required).
E.
The automatic unit start-up is provided as standard via an external dry contact
provided by others (ex: Building management system, DDC controller, time clock,
etc.).
F.
Terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Low voltage is 24V.
G.
Fan access doors are equipped with a momentary interrupt switch that shuts off
the unit when a protected door is opened. These switches can be removed if belt
guards are installed on the fan assembly.
H.
An integral control panel shall be provided having a hinged access door and an
approved locking device.
I.
All control devices, except those not mounted directly to the unit, shall be factory
mounted and wired. Control panel shall have a labeled strip to land all wires for
field installed control components.
J.
All components are fully wired and 100% tested prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The makeup air units shall be installed complete with all accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as listed in the
specifications and as shown on the drawings.
B.
Two sets of spare filters shall be provided in addition to the set used during
construction with each unit. The filters shall be changed after the construction
dust has been eliminated and before final inspection. The other set of filters shall
be stored in the respective mechanical rooms or spaces.
C.
Provide one set of spare fuses for each makeup air unit.
D.
Provide one spare belt per unit.
E.
Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, and belt sizes to be
included in the O&M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter
size, belt size, and the number of filters and belts required for each unit. In
addition to this, submit to the Owner two additional copies of the list, distributed to:
15838-9
11/17
MAKEUP AIR UNIT - HEAT PUMP
F.
SECTION 15838
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church,
VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia 22032.
Warranty Tag - The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee
or Warranty tag to the exterior of each unit. Tag is to be screwed or riveted to unit.
Identification tag shall be black with engraved 1/2" white letters which reads:
UNIT #
(unit number)
INSTALLED BY:
(contracting company's name)
WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
COMPRESSOR WARRANTY EXPIRES:
(month/day/year)
END OF SECTION
15838-10
11/17
SECTION 15840
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section of the specifications shall include furnishing and
installing the ductwork, accessories, associated items and all necessary connections to
outlets, inlets and equipment required for a complete system as shown on the drawings and
hereinafter specified.
1.03
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Galvanized sheet metal shall meet the requirements of ASTM A653 and A924
standards.
B.
Ductwork and duct accessories shall meet the requirements and recommendations
of SMACNA standards, SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction (Advanced
Level), UL-181 standard and ASHRAE recommendations.
C.
The installation of ductwork and duct accessories shall comply with NFPA standard
90A and state and local codes.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on ductwork materials and accessories as described in Section
15010 - 1.04. Shop drawings are not required for duct layouts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
DUCTWORK SYSTEM CLASSIFICATION
For determination of ductwork construction criteria, all ductwork systems shall be classified
as either low or medium pressure according to the following velocities or pressures. In all
cases the higher of the two values shall be used to determine the system classification
unless other overriding considerations are established on the drawings or in the
specifications. A ductwork system is defined as, the complete run of a supply, return,
exhaust, or intake air system, each classified individually.
15840-1
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
2.02
2.03
SECTION 15840
A.
Ductwork systems with any portion having an average cross-sectional velocity up to
and including 2000 FPM and not exceeding 2" w.g. maximum static pressure at any
point in the system shall be classified as low pressure.
B.
Ductwork systems with any portion having an average cross-sectional velocity
exceeding 2000 FPM or exceeding 2" w.g. maximum static pressure at any point in
the system shall be classified as medium pressure.
C.
All Variable Air Volume (VAV) supply air duct systems and all air duct systems
outside exposed to weather regardless of velocity and pressure conditions are
classified as medium pressure and shall be constructed in compliance with
SMACNA's three (3) inch pressure classification, formerly 'High Pressure Duct
Construction Standard.' Joints and seams shall be sealed as described in this
specification.
DUCT MATERIALS
A.
All ductwork, housings, dampers, access doors and all other duct related
accessories shall be formed from galvanized steel sheets unless otherwise noted.
B.
All angles used for reinforcement, support, hanging and other construction uses shall
be galvanized steel and shall be equal to that used for ductwork. Galvanized angle
iron shall be used where required by SMACNA standards.
DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION
A.
The low pressure ductwork as defined in Article 2.01 shall be constructed in
accordance with the one (1) inch pressure classification, as described in SMACNA’s
“HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”.
B.
Ductwork classified as other than low pressure shall be constructed in accordance
with the three (3) inch pressure classification, as described in SMACNA’s “HVAC
Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”.
C.
Duct sizes are shown on the drawings in inches. The dimensions given establish the
free or unobstructed area required on the inside of the duct. In case a duct size is
not shown the dimensions shall be requested from the Architect.
D.
The ductwork shall be fabricated from field measurements to avoid conflict with
beams, columns, pipes and other obstructions. Where necessary to avoid
obstructions, the ductwork shall be transformed, divided or moved to one side as
long as the free area is not reduced and such changes meet the approval of the
Architect.
E.
The minimum thickness of the sheet metal shall be either as described in SMACNA’s
“HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible” or as shown in the
following table:
15840-2
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15840
DUCT CONSTRUCTION MINIMUM SHEET METAL GAUGES
RECTANGULAR DUCTS
Maximum side
(inches)
Steel
(Minimum Galvanized
Sheet Gauge)
Thru 12"
13" - 30"
31" - 54"
55" - 84"
Over 84"
26 (0.022 inches)
24 (0.028 inches)
22 (0.034 inches)
20 (0.040 inches)
18 (0.052 inches)
Aluminum
(Minimum B & S Gauge)
24 (0.020 inches)
22 (0.025 inches)
20 (0.032 inches)
18 (0.040 inches)
16 (0.051 inches)
ROUND DUCTS
Diameter
(inches)
SPIRAL SEAM DUCT
Steel
(Minimum Galvanized
Sheet Gauge)
LONGITUDINAL SEAM DUCT
Steel
(Minimum Galvanized
Sheet Gauge)
Thru 12"
13" - 18"
19" - 28"
29" - 36"
37" - 52"
28 (0.019 in.)
26 (0.022 in.)
24 (0.028 in.)
22 (0.034 in.)
20 (0.040 in.)
26 (0.022 in.)
24 (0.028 in.)
22 (0.034 in.)
20 (0.040 in.)
18 (0.052 in.)
FITTINGS
Steel
(Minimum Galvanized
Sheet Gauge)
26 (0.022 in.)
24 (0.028 in.)
22 (0.034 in.)
20 (0.040 in.)
18 (0.052 in.)
F.
When required, heavier ductwork shall be installed to meet the requirements of the
UL Fire Resistance Index.
G.
Where indicated on the drawings or where insufficient space is available for round
ductwork, flat oval ductwork may be used. The conversion from round duct sizes to
flat oval should be made on an equivalent pressure loss basis, not on an equal
cross-sectional area. The flat oval ducts shall be constructed in accordance with
current SMACNA standards.
H.
Rectangular Duct Section Connections - Shall be as described in the SMACNA
Standards. Contractor may use zero leakage four corner bolted companion angle
transverse joint as manufactured by DUCTMATE INDUSTRIES, INC. or
LOCKFORMER. Joint shall be constructed of galvanized steel with bolting corner
pieces, roll formed double wall mating angles, gasketing, mastic sealer and snap-on
flange cover cleats.
15840-3
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
2.04
2.05
2.06
SECTION 15840
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A.
Where shown on the drawings provide flexible ductwork between branch ducts and
terminals or air outlets. It shall be of a low or medium pressure to match duct system
served.
B.
Ductwork
1.
Insulated flexible ductwork shall be factory pre-insulated duct composed of a
corrosion-resistant reinforcing wire or band helix permanently bonded and
enclosed in polyester film, covered with 1 1/2", 3/4 pound density fiberglass
insulation blanket sheathed in a vapor barrier of aluminum polyester film
laminated to glass mesh, elastomer back coated. The flexible duct shall be
rated for a minimum working velocity of 2000 fpm, shall be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 air duct
material and shall comply with NFPA standard No. 90A.
2.
Taps for flexible ductwork shall be high efficiency gasketed air-tite type with
manual damper
C.
The maximum length of flexible duct connection shall be ten feet., or as otherwise
shown.
D.
Flexible ductwork shall not be used for return air or exhaust air ductwork.
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A.
Duct Access Doors shall be provided in both the low and medium pressure duct
systems as shown on the contract drawings and as specified.
B.
Access doors shall be constructed as shown in SMACNA standards for the
appropriate pressure classification. Door shall be the same gauge and material as
the duct. All access doors shall be hinged, except where a removable type is
required.
C.
The minimum size of all access doors shall be 20" x 14" except where the duct is
less than 16", in which case one dimension shall be 20" and the other 2" less than
the duct width.
D.
Access doors shall be provided in the following locations: At the linkage side of
automatic dampers; at the manual volume control dampers; at smoke detection
heads; fire dampers; and any other service, balance or control device requiring
periodic maintenance.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS AT FAN
A.
Flexible connections shall be provided at the inlet and outlet connection for each fan,
15840-4
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15840
between ductwork and inlet and outlet collars.
2.07
2.08
B.
Each flexible connection shall be designed to allow one inch of free movement and
shall be completely air tight and shall have sewed and cemented seams.
C.
Flexible connections for low-pressure ductwork shall be in accordance with
SMACNA standards. Material shall be neoprene coated glass fabric, 30 oz. per
square yard.
D.
Flexible connections for medium pressure ductwork shall be the same as for low
pressure except additional reinforcing shall be provided as required by the operating
pressure of the system.
E.
Flexible connections to any roof mounted equipment shall not be exposed to the
elements. Flexible connections shall be located inside the building just below the
roofline. For side discharge units the flexible connection shall be located inside the
building just inside the wall.
TURNING VANES
A.
Any square elbow ductwork 18 inches or over in width shall require turning vanes of
galvanized steel.
B.
Vanes for Low and Medium Pressure Systems: Shall be as shown in SMACNA
standards for appropriate pressure classification.
C.
Vane lengths shall not exceed 36" for low-pressure systems or 48" for medium
pressure systems. Where greater lengths are required, separate banked sections
shall be provided.
FIRE, SMOKE AND CEILING DAMPERS.
A.
Fire dampers, also known as flame retarding or primary dampers, may be of the
individual folded blade type, the continuous folded stainless steel one piece curtain
type, the pivoted single blade type or the pivoted multi-blade type, providing they
bear a UL label for the complete assembly. Dampers shall be sized so that folded or
open blades do not restrict the duct free area given by the duct dimensions.
Dampers shall have a positive lock in the closed position. Fusible links shall be UL
listed and marked 160oF.
B.
Ceiling dampers, also known as radiation shielding or secondary dampers, may be
of the single blade spring loaded guillotine type, the continuous folded stainless steel
one piece curtain type or the folded approved fire retardant fabric type provided they
bear a UL label for the complete assembly. Single protected pivoted blade type
ceiling damper constructed in accordance with the requirements of specific UL
ceiling assemblies and SMACNA standards and subject to field acceptance may be
used where permitted by the conditions of the specific UL ceiling assembly used.
Dampers shall be sized so that folded or open blades do not restrict the duct free
15840-5
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15840
area given by the duct dimensions. Dampers shall have a positive lock in the closed
position. Fusible links shall be UL listed and marked 160oF.
2.09
C.
Smoke dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A & 92A and UL5555.
Smoke dampers shall be UL Class I smoke damper, normally open and
automatically operated by a 120 volt, electric actuator. Provide airfoil style blades.
Elevated temperature rating shall be 350°F. Smoke damper shall operate upon
activation of smoke detector and re-settable by a locally mounted momentary contact
switch.
D.
All dampers shall be installed in sleeves a minimum of two gauges heavier than the
connecting ductwork unless noted otherwise. Sleeves shall be mounted within and
secured to wall, floor, ceiling or other structural penetration. Dampers shall be
positioned only as permitted in the UL listing. Connecting ductwork shall be joined to
the sleeve so that in the event of damage to the duct system it will break away
leaving the fire damper and sleeve intact in the structural penetration. When
necessary to avoid obstructions and after acceptance by the Architect, damper
dimensions may be different from the connecting ductwork providing the required
free area is maintained and 15o maximum transitions are used.
E.
Provide UL listed, photoelectric, 120 volt smoke detector for use with smoke damper
and 120 volt, reset switch, (normally on, momentary off) mounted within sight of the
damper and detector. This switch shall reset the damper and the detector. Smoke
detectors shall be rated for air velocities of 500 to 4000 fpm and have integral,
auxiliary contacts for “ALARM” and “TROUBLE” annunciation to the fire alarm
system.
MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
Manual Volume Control Dampers in ducts not exceeding 12" on the longest side shall be as
shown in SMACNA Duct Standards. For ducts over 12", dampers of the opposed multiblade type shall be used. Dampers shall be galvanized steel, swivel end bearings at one
end of the blade, and quadrant with level and lock-screw at the opposite end. Multi-blade
dampers shall have steel washers at ends of damper rods with self-aligning blade
interconnecting hardware.
2.10
COATED DUCT LINER
A.
Duct Liner: Low-Pressure Ductwork
1.
All plenums and transfer ducts shall receive duct liner. Supply air ductwork
shall receive duct liner from the fan discharge to 20 feet downstream from
the fan discharge or as otherwise shown. Return air duct work shall receive
duct liner from the fan suction to 20 feet upstream from the fan suction or as
otherwise shown. All supply air discharge ductwork from fan coil units shall
receive duct liner.
15840-6
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
B.
SECTION 15840
2.
Duct liner shall be designed for use as an acoustical and thermal insulation
for sheet metal heating and cooling ducts and plenums. The duct liner shall
have a density of 1.5 pounds per cubic foot a "K" factor not to exceed .24 @
50oF mean temperature and a minimum NRC rating of .75. The minimum
duct liner thickness shall be 1 inch.
3.
Duct liner shall be designed for use as an acoustical and thermal insulation
for sheet metal heating and cooling ducts and plenums. The duct liner shall
have a density of 1.5 pounds per cubic foot a "K" factor not to exceed .24 @
50oF mean temperature and a minimum NRC rating of .75. The minimum
duct liner thickness shall be 1 inch.
4.
Duct liner air stream surface shall be coated with an immobilized, EPAregistered antimicrobial agent so it will not support microbial growth. Duct
liner shall be Johns Manville Linacoustic RC. Duct liners with similar
characteristics will be considered as long as all aspects of the specifications
are met.
Duct Liner: Medium Velocity
1.
All rectangular supply/return air duct and all air duct outside exposed to
weather shall receive duct liner. Rectangular supply air duct shall receive
duct liner from the fan discharge to 20 feet downstream from the discharge
or as otherwise shown. Return air duct work shall receive duct liner from the
fan suction to 20 feet upstream from the fan suction or as otherwise shown.
2.
Duct liner shall be designed for use as an acoustical and thermal insulation
for sheet metal heating and cooling ducts. The duct liner shall have a
density of 1.5 lbs./cu. ft., a 'K' factor not to exceed .24 @ 50 degrees F mean
temperature and a minimum NRC rating of .95. The minimum duct liner
thickness shall be 2 inches.
3.
Duct liner air stream surface shall be coated with an immobilized, EPAregistered antimicrobial agent so it will not support microbial growth. Duct
liner shall be Johns Manville Linacoustic RC. Duct liners with similar
characteristics will be considered as long as all aspects of the specifications
are met.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
The ductwork, fittings, access doors, flexible connections, turning vanes, hangers
and supports, fire dampers, volume dampers and other accessories shall be
installed as recommended by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Ductwork
shall not be supported from bottom chords of bar joists, bridging between bar joists
or from metal decks. Ductwork shall be supported from the top chords of bar joists.
15840-7
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
3.02
SECTION 15840
B.
All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made by this contractor for beams,
columns or other obstructions of the building or the work of other contractors,
whether or not same is indicated. Where necessary to avoid obstructions, the ducts
shall be transformed, divided or moved to one side with the required free area being
maintained, all as approved or directed by the Architect.
C.
Flexible ducts shall be secured to the metal ductwork, terminal units and supply
diffusers by use of a 3/4" minimum width stainless steel drawband pulled tight with
an adjusting worm drive type screw. Flexible duct insulation shall be properly sealed
at connections to maintain vapor seal/barrier.
D.
All duct dimensions shown on the drawings are inside clear dimensions. The duct
sizes of ducts with duct liner shall be increased accordingly.
DUCT LINER
Duct Liner Application: Coated duct liner shall be cut to assure overlapped and compressed
longitudinal corner joints. Apply liner with coated surface facing the air stream and adhere
with 100% coverage of fire retardant adhesive. Coat all exposed leading edges and all
transverse joints with fire retardant adhesive. The liner shall be additionally secured with
mechanical fasteners which shall compress the duct liner sufficiently to hold it firmly in place
as follows:
3.03
A.
Low Velocity to 2000 FPM: Fasteners shall start within 3" of the upstream transverse
edge of liner and 3" from the longitudinal joints and shall be spaced at a maximum of
12" o.c. around the perimeter of the duct, except that they may be a maximum of 12"
from a corner break. Elsewhere they shall be a maximum of 18" o.c. except that they
shall not be more than 6" from a longitudinal joint of liner nor 12" from a corner
break. Coat all exposed joints with a fire retardant adhesive.
B.
Medium Velocity from 2000 FPM to 4000 FPM - Fasteners shall start within 3" of the
upstream transverse edges of the liner and 3" from the longitudinal joints shall be
spaced at a maximum of 6" o.c. around the perimeter of the duct, except that they
may be a maximum of 6" from a corner break. Elsewhere they shall be a maximum
of 16" o.c. except that they shall not be more than 6" from a longitudinal joint of liner
nor 12" from a corner break.
C.
In addition to adhesive edge coating of transverse joints, any longitudinal joints shall
be similarly coated with adhesive.
WATERPROOFING DUCTWORK ABOVE ROOF
A.
Exposed ductwork shall be waterproofed with a prefabricated self-adhering, sheettype waterproofing membrane as manufactured by Venture Tape and offered as
VentureClad-1579CW series. Additional manufacturers will be considered providing
all aspects of the specifications are met.
15840-8
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
B.
MATERIALS:
1.
Prefabricated, Self-Adhering, Sheet-Type Waterproofing Membrane.
a.
C.
SECTION 15840
Description:
1)
Top Layer: Stucco-embossed, UV-resistant aluminum
weathering surface.
2)
Middle Layer: Double layer of high-density polyethylene
reinforcement.
3)
Bottom Layer: Uniform layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive,
protected by disposable silicone release paper.
4)
Heat Aging, ASTM D 794:
deterioration.
5)
Tear Resistance, ASTM D 1424, Average: 660 grams.
6)
Elongation, ASTM D 412, Minimum: 450 percent.
7)
Low Temperature Flexibility, 1,000,000 Cycles at -10
Degrees F, 1,200 Cycles at 20 Degrees F: No cracking.
8)
Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E 96: 0.009 perms.
9)
Flame Spread Index, ASTM E 84.0.
10)
Smoke Density Index, ASTM E 84.5.
11)
Wind-Driven Rain, SFBC TAS-110-95, 100 mph: No leakage
or failure.
12)
UV Stability: Excellent.
No visible blistering or
SURFACE PREPARATION AND APPLICATION.
1.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Ensure tops of ducts have sufficient slope to eliminate ponding water.
3.
Remove dirt, dust, oil, grease, hand oils, processing lubricants, moisture,
frost, and other contaminants that could adversely affect adhesion of
waterproofing membrane.
15840-9
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
3.04
3.05
SECTION 15840
4.
Ensure surfaces are clean and dry.
5.
Apply membrane to clean, dry, primed metal ductwork and foil-faced rigid
insulation boards. Do not apply over wet or nonrigid insulation.
6.
Apply membrane in accordance with manufacturer's air, material, and
surface temperature requirements.
7.
Apply firm, uniform pressure with hand roller to entire membrane to ensure
proper adhesion. Concentrate pressure at seams and on underside of
ductwork.
8.
Apply membrane to ducts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
9.
Apply membrane shingle fashion to shed water over, not against laps.
10.
Do not terminate membrane on bottom of duct.
11.
Apply minimum 3-inch side laps and minimum 6-inch end laps for ductwork
applications.
DUCT SEALING FOR VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEMS
A.
All supply/return air metal and flexible duct joints shall be sealed with water based
brush on duct sealant such as FLEX-GRIP 550 as manufactured by Hardcast, Inc.or
UNI-FLEX as manufactured by McGill AirSeal LLC and applied in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions.
B.
Where zero leakage transverse joints as manufactured by DUCTMATE
INDUSTRIES or LOCKFORMER are used to join rectangular duct sections
additional sealing is not required at those joints unless leakage is revealed during
pressure tests.
LEAKAGE
A.
All low pressure supply, return and outside air ductwork shall be tested and made
substantially airtight at static pressure indicated for the system before covering with
insulation or concealing in masonry. Substantially airtight shall be construed to
mean that no air leakage is noticeable through the senses of feeling or hearing at all
duct joints. Supply, return and outside air transverse duct joints shall be sealed a
water based brush on duct sealant such asFLEX-GRIP550 as manufactured by
HARDCAST or UNI-FLEX as manufactured by McGill LLC.
B.
The entire medium pressure ductwork system, including duct runouts to the variable
air volume control units, shall be pressure tested for leakage at three (3) inches
ductwork static pressure. Perform leakage tests in accordance with the SMACNA
HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual, using test forms equivalent to those outlined in
manual. Tests shall be observed by the Architect, Engineer and owner's
15840-10
11/17
DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15840
representative. A test log shall be maintained by the contractor which will contain the
results of systems tested and approval from test observer. Copies of the test log will
be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.
3.06
CLEANING/STORAGE
Every effort should be made to ensure the components of the ductwork systems are kept
clean and free of dust and debris. Stocked ductwork shall be stored in areas which are away
from dust producing operations. Lined ductwork shall be stored in areas
which
are
substantially weather-tight. Should any portion of lined ductwork become water saturated
during storage or installation identified sections will be removed and replaced at no
additional cost to the owner. As ductwork is being installed any open ductwork shall be
temporarily sealed to prevent the ductwork from being contaminated with construction
debris or dust. Temporary filter media shall be installed on the return systems of any
equipment which is required to be run as a temporary control during the construction period.
Temporary filters shall be monitored and changed frequently to ensure the cleanliness of the
ducted systems.
After completing installation of ductwork, entire system shall be cleaned of rubbish, plaster,
dirt and any other debris. After installation of equipment and connections are made on fan,
and before any grilles are installed, entire system shall be blown out with dampers and
outlets wide open.
3.07
DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished under and interconnected between the auxiliary
contacts and the fire alarm system by the Division 16 contractor and installed under this
section. The duct smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, NFPA requirements and local fire marshal requirements. Duct smoke
detectors shall be mounted to allow full access for service.
3.08
FIRE, SMOKE AND CEILING DAMPERS
A.
Provide fire dampers where ducts pass through fire-rated components and where
required by the local authority. Install in accordance with local codes, NFPA,
SMACNA-FSR and manufacturers requirements.
B.
Demonstrate the re-setting of the smoke damper and smoke detector to the Fire
Marshal and the owner’s representative.
C.
All interlock wiring between the 120 volt power supply and devices listed in this
section shall be installed under this section. All wiring shall conform to the
requirements of Division 16.
END OF SECTION
15840-11
11/17
SECTION 15845
KITCHEN HEAT AND GREASE REMOVAL HOOD
(Engineer shall coordinate with the Architect to ensure the existing or specified equipment will physically fit under the proposed hood while maintaining factory
recommended clearances and by at least a six inch overhang in all directions)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install a complete Type I kitchen vapor removal system as outlined herein and
as shown on the drawings. System shall consist of a sheetmetal hood, sheetmetal exhaust,
and make-up air ductwork, and a wet chemical extinguishing system. Exhaust fan is
specified separately.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The complete system shall conform to all state and local codes and to the requirements of
the National Sanitation Foundation and the latest revisions of the National Fire Protection
Association Standards Nos. 96 and 17 entitled "Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden
Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment" and "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems".
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
KITCHEN RANGE HOOD
The kitchen range hood shall be manufactured by a firm that specializes in hood
construction. The proposed manufacturer shall have done similar work for a minimum of 5
years and shall submit descriptive documentation for his capabilities and past experience
with similar installations. Detailed drawings showing the proposed hood construction shall
be submitted for approval before fabrication is begun. Premanufactured hoods by Captivaire
or an equivalent manufacturer are acceptable. The kitchen range hood shall have capacity
and dimensions as shown on the drawings.
A.
Hood - Shall be fabricated of 18 gauge stainless steel with all seams and joints
having liquidtight continuous external weld. Refer to mechanical drawings for hood
dimensions. Provide stainless steel enclosure panels (skirt) to close off the area
between the top of the hood and the ceiling. The inside bottom lip of the kitchen
15845-1
11/17
KITCHEN HEAT AND GREASE REMOVAL HOOD
SECTION 15845
hood shall angle up at 45 degrees to the vertical face of the hood to prevent a
debris-catching horizontal surface.
B.
Grease filters and filter rack shall be stainless steel single sided type as
manufactured by FARR or AMERICAN AIR FILTER. Provide removable drip tray,
fasteners, holding frame, closure and filters.
C.
Exhaust Ductwork - Shall be fabricated of material and gauges noted below. All
seams and joints shall be constructed with liquidtight continuous external weld.
Ductwork shall have provisions for cleanout.
1.
D.
E.
Ductwork shall be 16 gauge galvanized or 18 gauge stainless steel with
welds or braze ground smooth.
Make-up Air Ductwork - Shall be fabricated of material and gauges noted below.
1.
Ductwork above the ceiling to the intake shall be 20 gauge galvanized.
2.
Ductwork above the roof shall be painted with one coat of black asphaltum.
3.
Provide motorized damper at outside air intake opening. Interlock to open
when exhaust fan operates.
4.
Motorized dampers shall be low leakage opposed blade galvanized steel
type with 16 gauge frame and 16 gauge blades. Maximum blade width 8".
Provide neoprene seals at all blade edge and side meeting surfaces so that
air leakage shall be no more than 2% at 3" static pressure. Provide Teflon or
oil impregnated bronze shaft bearings and standard finish. Prototype PENN VENTILATOR Model OBD-8. Motorized dampers fully equal to
damper specified and manufactured by RUSKIN, AIR BALANCE, ARROW or
CARNES will be acceptable.
Fire Control System - Shall be wet chemical pre-engineered, piped, fixed nozzle type
manufactured by the ANSUL COMPANY. It shall be specifically U/L Listed for the
hazard and shall be installed in conformance with NFPA standards.
1.
System Design - Shall provide for protection of duct systems, grease removal
devices and hoods, and cooking equipment such as fat fryers, ranges,
griddles and broilers. All sources of fuel and heat to the cooking equipment
shall be automatically shut off upon operation of the system.
2.
Operation - Shall be capable of manual operation and automatic operation
controlled by a suitably listed system of detection and actuation.
15845-2
11/17
KITCHEN HEAT AND GREASE REMOVAL HOOD
SECTION 15845
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The kitchen range hood shall be installed complete with all accessories in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15845-3
11/17
SECTION 15846
KITCHEN HEAT REMOVAL HOOD
(For Elementary and Middle School)
(Engineer shall coordinate with the Architect to ensure the existing or specified equipment will physically fit under the proposed hood while maintaining factory
recommended clearances and by at least a six inch overhang in all directions)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
Provide and install a complete kitchen heat removal system as outlined herein and as shown
on the drawings. System shall consist of a stainless steel hood, sheetmetal exhaust air
ductwork. Exhaust fan is specified separately.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The complete system shall conform to all state and local codes and to the requirements of
the National Sanitation Foundation and the latest revisions of the National Fire Protection
Association Standards No. 96.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
KITCHEN HOOD
The kitchen hood shall be manufactured by a firm that specializes in hood construction. The
proposed manufacturer shall have done similar work for a minimum of 5 years and shall
submit descriptive documentation for his capabilities and past experience with similar
installations. Detailed drawings showing the proposed hood construction shall be submitted
for approval before fabrication is begun. Premanufactured hoods by Greenheck, Captivaire
or an equivalent manufacturer are acceptable. The kitchen heat removal hood shall have
capacity and dimensions as shown on the drawings.
A.
Hood - Shall be fabricated of 18 gauge stainless steel, with interior of the hood
sealed and shall provide a smooth surface that is readily cleanable and water tight.
Refer to mechanical drawings for hood dimensions. Provide stainless steel
enclosure panels (skirt) to close off the area between the top of the hood and the
ceiling. The inside bottom lip of the kitchen hood shall angle up at 45 degrees to the
vertical face of the hood to prevent a debris-catching horizontal surface. Refer to
15846-1
11/17
KITCHEN HEAT REMOVAL HOOD
SECTION 15846
mechanical drawings for hood dimensions.
B.
Exhaust ductwork – Ductwork above the hood and through the roof to the exhaust
fan shall be 22 gauge galvanized. Ducts subject to positive pressure shall be
constructed, joined and sealed in the approved manner.
C.
Lights – Hood shall have U/L listed, vapor proof, incandescent light fixtures.
D.
Controls – Hood shall have integral switch panel with separate switches for the light
and the exhaust fan. Exhaust fan switch shall have and indicating light.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
The kitchen range hood shall be installed complete with all accessories in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15846-2
11/17
SECTION 15847
KITCHEN MAKEUP AIR UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
1.03
1.04
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 15010 - General Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and
Methods shall apply to this Section.
Install a complete factory assembled kitchen makeup air unit with a direct gas fired
preheater.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to AMCA Bulletins regarding construction and testing. Fans shall bear
AMCA certified rating seal.
B.
Provide fans with U/L label. Provide furnaces design-certified by the American
Gas Association (AGA) and bear the AGA label.
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
The kitchen makeup air unit shall be manufactured by GREENHECK. Units fully equal to
the specified manufacturer by CAPTIVEAIRE are acceptable.
2.02
KITCHEN VENTILATION UNITS
A.
Supply:
1.
Filtered makeup air units shall have belt driven double width/double inlet,
forward curved centrifugal type supply fans. The entire fan and motor
assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent noise
transmission. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty, ball
bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the
specified voltage, phase and enclosure. The fan shaft shall be ground
and polished steel mounted in heavy duty, sealed ball bearings. Bearings
shall be selected for a minimum average life in excess of 200,000 hours of
maximum cataloged operating speeds. Pulleys shall be of the fully
machined, cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and
15847-1
11/17
KITCHEN MAKEUP AIR UNIT
SECTION 15847
motor shafts. Motor sheaves shall be adjustable for final system
balancing. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven
horsepower.
B.
2.
Fan wheels shall be of the forward curved type, constructed of heavy
gauge steel and statically and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth,
vibration free operation.
3.
Housing construction shall be heavy gauge galvanized steel with
removable panels for access to fan and tempering unit components, filters
and controls.
4.
Filter Section - Low velocity medium capacity filter section shall be a
matching part of the unit with access through hinged doors on both sides.
Filters shall be 2" FARR 30/30, medium efficiency, pleated, disposable
type. Each filter shall consist of a non-woven cotton fabric media, media
support grid and enclosing frame. The filter media shall have an average
efficiency of 30-35% of ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76. It shall have an
average arrestance of not less than 92% in accordance with that test
standard. The filter shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories as Class
2. Two complete sets of spare filters shall be supplied.
5.
The prewired control center shall include, but not be limited to, an integral
master disconnect switch with fuse blocks for main power connection,
magnetic motor starters with thermal overloads and manual reset, fused
115 volt control transformer, and distribution terminal control strip for
control wiring connection. All electrical components shall be U/L listed,
Approved or Classified where applicable and wired in compliance with the
National Electrical Code. Wiring shall be complete, requiring only
one-point field connection for power service and one-point field connection
for low voltage.
Exhaust:
1.
Roof exhaust fans shall be of the belt drive, upblast, vertical discharge
type. Housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. The
windband shall have a rolled bead and additional structural members for
added strength. The fan wheel shall be of the backward inclined,
centrifugal type, constructed of aluminum and statically and dynamically
balanced for smooth, vibration free operation.
2.
Motors and drives shall be isolated from the airstream. Motors shall be
permanently lubricated, heavy duty, ball bearing type, carefully matched to
the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure.
Motors shall be cooled by air drawn from outside the exhaust airstream.
3.
The fan shaft shall be ground and polished steel mounted on heavy duty
ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum average life in
excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speeds.
15847-2
11/17
KITCHEN MAKEUP AIR UNIT
C.
D.
SECTION 15847
4.
Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely
attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Motor sheaves shall be
adjustable for final system balancing. Drives shall be sized for a minimum
of 150% of driven horsepower. The entire fan and motor assembly shall
be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent noise transmission.
5.
The roof exhaust fans shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seals for air
and sound performance.
Heater:
1.
Provide a direct gas fired preheater. The preheater shall be supplied as
an integral part of the makeup air unit.
2.
The heater shall include, but not be limited to, a cast iron and stainless
steel burner, gas valve with sensor, main and pilot electric gas valves and
pressure regulators, main and pilot manual shutoff valves, an air flow
switch, high limit control, flame safeguard control, flame rod, and electronic
ignition pilot.
Roof Curb: Provide prefabricated 12" roof curb lined with fiberglass insulation.
Provide heavy gauge galvanized steel equipment supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Supply and install sheaves as necessary for final air balancing.
B.
Set roof mounted fans on curbs. Provide acoustic insulation on duct to below roof
line and on fan inlet plenum, and drip pan for collecting condensation.
C.
Provide a spare fan belt for each makeup air unit.
D.
Provide a typed list of all the different makeup air units and their filter and fan belt
sizes and submit to the Owner two copies of the list distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, Gatehouse
Administrative Center, 8115 Gatehouse Road, Suite 3500, Falls Church,
VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services,
5025 Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia 22032.
3.
Include list in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION
15847-3
11/17
SECTION 15870
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
The Bidding and Contract Requirements, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15010
- General Provisions and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, shall apply to this
section.
1.02
SCOPE
The work covered under this section shall include various types of air outlets and inlets to be
furnished and installed complete.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Air outlets and inlets shall be rated by a recognized testing agency such as the Air Diffusion
Council, ASHRAE Standard 36-72, Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.,
or an acceptable manufacturer's test laboratory.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
Provide shop drawings on this equipment as described in Section 15010 - 1.04. Shop
drawings shall include proposed uses of all items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS
The grilles, registers and ceiling diffusers shall be provided as shown on the drawings along
with accessories as required. The grilles, registers and ceiling diffusers shall be
manufactured by CARNES, KRUEGER, TITUS, TUTTLE and BAILEY, NAILOR, PRICE or
METALAIRE unless otherwise noted, provided the items are fully equal to the item specified
below.
A.
Supply Air Diffuser, Ceiling, Square: lay-in type, steel, stamped type, fixed pattern,
square louvered face, opposed blade volume damper, equalizing grid, (combination
damper/grid are not acceptable) white powder coat finish. Price model SCD.
B.
Supply Air Louver, Exposed Duct Mounting, Drum Louver: Aluminum, adjustable
pattern, aluminum finish with volume damper. Price model HCD1.
C.
Supply Air Registers: Steel adjustable vanes, double deflection, vertical front vanes,
opposed blade dampers, Aluminum finish. Price model 520D.
15870-1
11/17
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
2.02
D.
Air Extractor: Pivoted adjusting curved blades with adjusting strap. Price model
AE1.
E.
Return Air Grille, Ceiling: Steel individual fixed horizontal face bars, 0° deflection,
white finish, size shall be minimum 12” x 24”. Price model 510HZ.
F.
Return Air Grille, Wall: Steel, individual fixed horizontal face bars, 40° deflection,
heavy duty type, aluminum finish. Price model 91.
G.
Return Air Register, Ceiling: Steel, individual fixed horizontal face bars, 0°
deflection, volume damper, white enamel finish. Price model 510ZD. Exhaust air
register shall be the same except aluminum, Price model 610ZD.
H.
Linear Slot Diffuser: Aluminum, adjustable blades, 1” slot with 1” frame, standard
frame finish white, mounting hardware, 1” end caps at both ends, blank sections as
required. Remove blades when used as a return. Coordinate with drawings for
frame type, number of slots and length. Price model SDS100 Frame 2.
ROOF VENTS - RELIEF OR INTAKE
A.
B.
2.03
SECTION 15870
Roof vents shall have the following features:
1.
Aluminum hood panels.
2.
12” high curb.
3.
Aluminum bird screen.
4.
Counterbalanced gravity backdraft damper.
5.
Motorized damper.
Prototype: GREENHECK model Fabra.
LOUVERS
Louvers shall be furnished under Division 15 unless specified under the architectural
sections.
Stationary Louvers: Shall be extruded aluminum, 4" blade spacing, 45o blades with rain
hook and continuous underside reinforcing bosses. Provide boxed frame for mounting
inside masonry openings and flanged frame for panel wall openings. Provide duct collar,
1/2" mesh aluminum bird screen and clear anodized finish; color selection shall be approved
by Architect. Louver shall meet AMCA test standards for pressure drop and water leakage.
Prototype - ARROW model EA-405-FF. Louvers fully equal to the specified manufacturer
and manufactured by RUSKIN, AIRLINE, AIR BALANCE, UNITED ENERTECH or CARNES
will be acceptable.
15870-2
11/17
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
2.04
SECTION 15870
MOTORIZED DAMPERS
Motorized dampers shall be low leakage opposed blade galvanized steel type with 16 gauge
frame and 16 gauge blades. Maximum blade width 8". Provide neoprene seals at all blade
edge and side meeting surfaces so that air leakage shall be no more than 1% at 4" static
pressure. Provide Teflon or oil impregnated bronze shaft bearings and standard finish.
Prototype: ARROW model 395. Motorized dampers fully equal to damper specified and
manufactured by RUSKIN, AIR BALANCE, PENN VENTILATOR, CESCO, DOWCO,
GREENHECK or CARNES will be acceptable.
2.05
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME CONSTANT VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT
A.
Provide and install fan powered terminals with electrically driven fan and
automatically controlled modulating damper. Unit shall supply a constant volume of
air to the space by mixing of the primary conditioned variable air with ceiling plenum
return air as described herein and shown on the drawings. Capacities shall be as
shown in the equipment schedule.
B.
Air Controlling Assembly - Shall consist of volume regulator, air flow throttling control
device, device operator, and adjustment points, Regulator shall compensate for
static pressure fluctuations by repositioning damper operator and shall act as
reversing relay. Provide normally closed actuators for units with integral heating
coils.
C.
Cabinet shall be galvanized steel wrap around one-piece structural frame with all
exposed edges flanged and interior of discharge section insulated. Mixing section
shall have single blade gasketed minimum leakage damper. Fans shall be
centrifugal forward curved double width mounted on double-shafted three-speed
permanent split capacitor motor. Fan wheels and housing shall be constructed of
noncorrosive material.
D.
Coils - Shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless
copper tubes, with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil and supports. Coils shall
be factory leak tested at a minimum 300 psi.
E.
Unit Supports - Control units and slot type diffusers shall be located as shown on
drawings and shall be independently supported with mounted channel and
SMACNA approved hanger strap.
F.
Filters – Shall be throwaway type.
G.
The Sound Power Levels (10 - 12 watts) generated when producing the specified
cfm shall not exceed the following figures in any octave band.
Octave Band
Center Frequency
Sound Power Level
2
125
73
3
250
69
4
500
66
15870-3
5
1000
59
6
2000
54
7
4000
53
8
8000
56
11/17
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
2.06
SECTION 15870
H.
Fan and damper controls shall be furnished and installed under the Automatic
Temperature Control section of the specification. The division 15900 contractor shall
furnish and ship direct digital controllers to the terminal equipment manufacturer for
factory installation. The division 15900 contractor shall provide the equipment
manufacturer with the necessary wiring diagrams and mounting instructions. The
terminal equipment manufacturer shall furnish transformers, relays, airflow sensors
and enclosures.
I.
Manufacturer – PRICE or acceptable by ENVIRONMENTAL TECHNOLOGIES,
CARRIER, TITUS, TRANE, or TEMPMASTER.
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) EQUIPMENT TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Provide shutoff type air terminal components of an automatically controlled variable
air volume system as described herein and shown on the drawings. The system shall
consist of air modulating control units serving remote diffusers. Capacities shall be
as shown in the equipment schedule.
B.
VAV box manufacturer shall provide all necessary transformers, relays, airflow rings
and enclosures. The division 15900 contractor shall furnish and ship the direct digital
controllers and actuators to the equipment manufacturer for installation. The division
15900 contractor shall provide the equipment manufacturer with the necessary
wiring diagrams and mounting instructions.
C.
Air Control Units- Shall regulate the air volume delivered to diffusers either mounted
on the unit or remotely connected by ductwork. Units shall be constructed of heavy
gauge galvanized steel. All interior surfaces shall be acoustically and thermally
insulated with glass fiber material, surface treated to prevent erosion. Insulation shall
be U/L listed and meet NFPA requirements. Provide hanger holes at all four corners.
Minimum box setting shall be factory adjusted to minimum airflow shown in the
equipment schedule.
D.
Automatic Temperature Control System- Damper operator shall be controlled by a
remote sensor as described in the temperature control section of the specifications.
E.
Air Controlling Assembly- Shall consist of volume regulator, airflow throttling control
device, device operator, and adjustment points. Regulator shall compensate for
static pressure fluctuations by repositioning damper operator and shall act as a
reversing relay. Provide normally open direct acting actuator or provide the
necessary reversing relay to meet this requirement.
F.
Hot Water Coil- Shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to
seamless copper tubes, with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil and supports.
Coil shall be factory leak tested at minimum 300 psi.
G.
Manufacturer- PRICE or acceptable by ENVIRONMENTAL TECHNOLOGIES,
CARRIER, TITUS, TRANE or TEMPMASTER.
15870-4
11/17
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
2.07
SECTION 15870
THERMALLY POWERED VAV DIFFUSER
A.
Thermally powered VAV diffuser shall be a complete VAV terminal and thermostat
self contained in a 24 inch square diffuser. They shall be thermally powered with one
room thermostat / actuator and one changeover thermostat / actuator.
B.
The VAV diffusers shall have a thumbwheel and temperature scale to adjust the
cooling setpoint and another thumbwheel and temperature scale for the heating
setpoint. The adjustment shall be above the hinge down panel. Each setpoint shall
be separately adjustable between 70°F and 78°F.
C.
In the cooling mode, the VAV diffuser shall open on a rise in room temperature and
in the heating mode; it shall close on a rise in room temperature. The changeover
thermostat shall be factory installed and adjusted to engage the heating mode when
the supply air temperature rises above 80°F and return to cooling mode when the
supply air temperature falls below 68°F. During the changeover, the diffuser shall
close, or if a minimum flow is set, go to the minimum.
D.
All VAV diffusers shall have a dial and scale to adjust minimum flow between 5 CFM
and 50% of maximum flow without tools. Minimum flow shall be factory set at 10%. A
fixed maximum flow stop shall be factory set for the fully open air flow of the
specified inlet size.
E.
All VAV diffusers shall have a lever which will open the damper for balancing without
tools. The balancing lever shall be accessible from the outside of the diffuser without
folding down the appearance panel or removing any part of the diffuser.
F.
Acceptable manufacturers – ACCUTHERM “Thermafuser”, PRICE “Varitherm”, or
THERMAL PRODUCTS “Variflow”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS, AND LOUVERS - INSTALLATION
A.
The grilles, registers and ceiling diffusers shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Dampers shall be installed where shown and
where required to balance the air system.
B.
Before locating grilles and ceiling diffusers, check the Architectural and Electrical
drawings to make sure that there is no conflict with floor moldings, electrical outlets,
lighting fixtures or any other obstruction. Low sidewall grilles and registers shall be
mounted with the bottom edge eight inches above the floor with the vanes turned
down. High sidewall grilles and registers shall be mounted six inches below the
ceiling or as shown on architectural drawings.
C.
Air extractors shall be provided and installed as shown on the drawings. Provisions
shall be made to adjust air extractor from the exterior of the ductwork. When air
extractor is installed, no damper for the register is required.
15870-5
11/17
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
3.02
SECTION 15870
LOUVERS
Supply air, exhaust air and combustion air louvers shall be installed as shown on the
drawings. The louvers shall be furnished under Division 15 unless specified under the
architectural section. The louvers shall be provided with 1/2" aluminum bird screen, duct
collars where required, and be installed in a manner where no water will enter the building.
3.03
TERMINAL UNIT
A.
Shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations. For the
Variable Air Volume Terminal Units, the first unit installed will be considered the
typical mock up and shall require notification, inspection and approval by designated
owner representative and/or architect and engineer before any additional
installations will be allowed.
B.
Filters - Shall be changed at the end of the construction period and before the final
inspection. Provide a typed list of all the different units and their filter sizes to be
included in the O & M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size
and the number of filters required for each unit. In addition to this, submit to the
Owner two additional copies of the list, distributed to:
1.
Project Manager, Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115
Gatehouse Road Suite 3500 Falls Church VA 22042.
2.
Coordinator, Mechanical Maintenance Division, Maintenance Services, 5025
Sideburn Road, Fairfax, Virginia, 22032
END OF SECTION
15870-6
11/17
SECTION 15900
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................2
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK ..........................................................................................2
WORK BY OTHERS ....................................................................................................4
PROCUREMENT ........................................................................................................8
QUALITY ASSURANCE ..............................................................................................8
DEFINITIONS..............................................................................................................9
SYSTEM SOFTWARE-GENERAL.............................................................................11
SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................11
DELIVERABLES........................................................................................................15
CONSTRUCTION AND WARRANTY MAINTENANCE ....................................................18
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .................................................................19
LISTING AND LABELING ..........................................................................................19
LICENSING ...............................................................................................................19
COMMISSIONING.....................................................................................................19
PART 2. PRODUCTS..............................................................................................................20
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................................20
BASIC MATERIALS, INTERFACE DEVICES, AND SENSORS .................................20
DISTRIBUTED DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS AND CONTROL SYSTEM..........42
SYSTEM COMMUNICATION DEVICES ....................................................................50
SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING ..........................................................51
PART 3. EXECUTION .............................................................................................................63
3.01
3.02
3.03
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
GENERAL .................................................................................................................63
BASIC MATERIALS, INTERFACE DEVICES, AND SENSORS .................................66
SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES........................................................................70
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ...................................................................................70
SYSTEM COMMUNICATION DEVICES ..................................................................147
SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING ........................................................148
HVAC SYSTEMS – GENERAL DIAGNOSTICS AND MONITORING .......................164
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.........................................................................................167
15900-1
11/17
SECTION 15900
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
PART 1.
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division-I – General Requirements
for the Construction of this project shall apply to this section.
B.
Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Contractor shall furnish and install a direct digital control (DDC) and building
automation system (BAS) Operator interface graphic software (GUI) and a webbased operator interface. This system shall reside on the owner’s existing
building automation server. The web-based operator interface shall allow access
from a standard web browser. The new DDC/BAS shall utilize electronic sensing;
microprocessor based digital control and electronic actuation of dampers and
valves to perform control sequences and functions specified. The BAS for this
project shall generally consist of monitoring and control of central heating and
cooling plants, air handling systems, terminal equipment, and other
miscellaneous equipment. The extent of Automatic Temperature Control
Systems work is indicated on the drawings, schedules and by requirements of
this section.
B.
Phasing - The project will be completed in phases extending over several years.
The existing control system shall remain operational during the entire period to
keep all existing systems not yet replaced operational.
C.
Single Source Responsibility - The control system shall be completely installed
and placed in operating condition by a firm specializing in this type of work. The
firm shall provide a single source responsibility for all system components,
engineering services, maintenance and warranty. Qualifying conditions are more
fully described in a separate paragraph.
1.
The ATC Contractor shall be qualified and thoroughly experienced in
providing single source responsibility for the Automatic Temperature
Control System.
2.
The ATC Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete design,
installation and proper operation of the system, including but not limited
to: Data and control signal transmission systems, Intelligent field interface
devices (IFID) and interfacing of all system equipment, sensors and
controls, memory units and peripheral devices. The ATC Contractor shall
also coordinate the installation with the security system (i.e. if Master
15900-2
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
controller loses power a general alarm will be generated). This alarm
signal shall be furnished by the security system.
3.
After the installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for the
debugging and calibration of the system, including all software, and
maintenance of the system until the system functions in accordance with
these specifications and successfully completes the final operational
acceptance Test described in this Section.
The Contractor's
responsibilities shall also include all software and software maintenance
during the warranty periods.
4.
The ATC contractor shall coordinate with the mechanical equipment
supplier to successfully create a communication interface with the factory
supplied communication protocol. The ATC contractor shall be
responsible for the mounting of the manufacturer supplied interface
device(s), this includes power wiring, communication wiring, necessary
switches and enclosures. The ATC contractor shall be responsible for the
mounting of VRF centralized and BACnet controllers/devices, in panels
constructed in compliance with 2.02.F of this section.
D.
All documentation required shall be considered as much as part of this contract
as the system installation itself. Its accuracy and applicability shall be considered
for conformance to the specifications.
Expenses incurred due to nonconformance shall be recoverable from the Contractor or his surety according to
the conditions of the Performance Bond. Any system revisions and/or additions
provided for or required under this contract shall be included in this
documentation in the form of updated documents.
E.
Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with
requirements of Division-16 sections:
1.
Power wiring from a dedicated circuit breaker at each 120 Volt panel to a
junction box shall be provided by the Division 16 Contractor. Electrical
circuits for use by the BAS Contractor are shown on the electrical
drawings. This Contractor is responsible for all power wiring from this
junction box to control panels, devices, controllers and components for a
complete and operating system. See plans for details.
2.
Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit
control panels.
3.
Interlock wiring between electrically interlocked devices, sensors, and
between a hand or auto position of motor starters as indicated.
4.
All other electrical wiring, conduit and additional electrical components
required to complete the automatic temperature control system including,
but not limited to, interlocking of motor controllers with all other control
and building system components, power wiring between junction boxes
15900-3
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
and control transformers and power wiring of auxiliary power receptacles,
shall be provided and installed under this section of the specifications.
Wiring shall comply with all requirements of Division 16 of this
specification and the National Electrical Code. It shall be noted that while
every attempt to show the sensor junction box locations on the Division
16 electrical drawings has been made, should a sensor or sensors,
junction box location be inadvertently not shown and said sensor is
required for operation or mentioned in the sequence of operation, the
rough-in of these junction boxes shall be the responsibility of this
contractor.
1.03
F.
Smoke Detectors – Shall be furnished and wired to the fire alarm system by the
Division 16 contractor. Smoke detectors are to be furnished with one set of
normally closed contacts for interface to the equipment starters. They shall be
installed under Division 15 and interlocked to their respective starters under this
section. Fire alarm modules for unit shutdown shall be provided and installed by
the division 16 contractor. It shall interlock with the respective starters under this
section.
G.
Contractor shall provide all LAN interface devices and software to provide an
integrated system connecting Control Units, Operator Interfaces, printers, etc. as
described in this Section. Communications throughout all levels shall be
seamless and reliable.
H.
Furnish and provide all software, programming and dynamic color graphics for a
complete and fully functioning system as specified.
I.
The Owner, and Commissioning Agent, shall work with the Contractor and the
Design Engineer to ensure that the systems, equipment, and interfaces are
installed, tested, and operate per the design intent and contract documents, that
the systems are adequately documented; and that the Owner is adequately
trained on system intent, operation, and maintenance.
J.
Completion - It is the intention of the specifications and drawings to call for
furnished work, tested, and ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is
used, it shall mean "provide and install complete and ready for use".
WORK BY OTHERS
A.
Coordination Meeting - The installer furnishing the DDC network shall meet with
the installer(s) furnishing each of the following products to coordinate details of
the interface between these products and the DDC network. The Owner or his
designated representative shall be present at this meeting. Each installer shall
provide the Owner and all other installers with details of the proposed interface
including Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for BACnet
equipment, hardware and software identifiers for the interface points, network
identifiers, wiring requirements, communication speeds, and required network
accessories. The purpose of this meeting shall be to ensure that there will be no
15900-4
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
unresolved issues regarding the integration of these products into the DDC
network. Submittals for these products shall not be approved prior to the
completion of this meeting.
B.
Variable Refrigerant Flow System (VRF) - The VRF systems shall be provided
with all of the necessary interface hardware, software, and programming required
to support the specified ATC interface. The ATC system is to provide individual
start/stop points to each of the VRF systems as well as the control and
monitoring points listed in the input/output summaries and sequences, at a
minimum. The VRF control panel(s), provided by the VRF manufacturer, will
accept these control points.
1.
The connection to these points, which are listed by preference, shall be
by one of the following methods;
a.
b.
c.
2.
The VRF system manufacturer and installing contractor shall coordinate
and collaborate with the ATC contractor for the following:
a.
b.
c.
C.
BACnet MS/TP network connection.
BACnet/IP network connection.
BACnet over ARCNET network connection.
Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the
equipment manufacturer to support the specified ATC interface.
Start-up coordination with the ATC contractor to verify correct
operation.
Clearly defined termination points in the VRF control panel to
allow ATC interface as specified.
Chiller System - The chiller(s) shall be provided with all of the necessary
interface hardware, software and programming required to support the specified
ATC interface. The ATC system is to provide individual chiller start/stop points to
each of the chillers as well as the control and monitoring points listed in the
input/output summaries and sequences, at a minimum. The chiller control
panel(s), provided by the chiller manufacturer, will accept these control points
and provide start/stop, loading/unloading, staging and sequencing of the
individual compressors.
1.
The connection to these points, which are listed by preference, shall be
by one of the following methods;
a.
BACnet MS/TP network connection.
b.
Hardwired connection such as relay,0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA.
c.
BACnet/IP network connection.
d.
BACnet over ARCNET network connection.
15900-5
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 2.
D.
The chiller manufacturer and installing contractor shall coordinate and
collaborate with the ATC contractor for the following:
a.
Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the
equipment manufacturer to support the specified ATC interface.
b.
Start-up coordination with the ATC contractor to verify correct
operation.
c.
Clearly defined termination points in the OEM control panel to
allow ATC interface as specified.
Energy Recovery Units, Packaged VAV Rooftop Units, Packaged Rooftop Units,
Makeup Air Units, Rooftop Air Handling Units - This equipment shall be furnished
configured to accept control inputs from an external building automation system
controller as listed in the input/output summaries. Factory mounted safeties and
other controls shall not interfere with this controller. Should an interface be
specified,the equipment supplier shall furnish the system with an interface to the
control and monitoring points listed in the input/output summaries.
1.
2.
E.
SECTION 15900
The connection to these points, which are listed by preference, shall be
by one of the following methods:
a.
BACnet MS/TP network connection.
b.
Hardwired connection such as relay,0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA.
c.
BACnet/IP network connection.
d.
BACnet over ARCNET network connection.
The equipment manufacturer and installing contractor shall coordinate
and collaborate with the ATC contractor for the following:
a.
Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the
equipment manufacturer to support the specified ATC interface.
b.
Start-up coordination with the ATC contractor to verify correct
operation.
c.
Clearly defined termination points in the OEM control panel to
allow ATC interface as specified.
Variable Frequency Drives - The variable frequency drive (VFD) supplier shall
furnish VFD’s with an interface to the control and monitoring points listed in the
input/output summaries.
15900-6
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 1.
SECTION 15900
The variable frequency drive manufacturer and installing contractor shall
coordinate and collaborate with the ATC contractor for the following:
a.
Programming and protocols of the mechanical equipment by the
equipment manufacturer to support the specified ATC interface.
b.
Start-up coordination with the ATC contractor to verify correct
operation.
c.
Clearly defined termination points in the OEM control panel to
allow ATC interface as specified.
F.
Control Valves furnished under this section shall be installed under the applicable
piping section under the direction of Section 15900 Contractor who shall be fully
responsible for the proper operation of the valve.
G.
Control Dampers and air flow measuring stations furnished under this section
shall be installed under the applicable air distribution or air handling equipment
section under the direction of Section 15900 Contractor who shall be fully
responsible for the proper operation of the dampers.
H.
Water Pressure Taps, Thermal Wells, Flow Switches, Flow Meters, etc. that shall
have wet surfaces, shall be installed under the applicable piping section under
the direction of Section 15900 Contractor who shall be fully responsible for the
proper installation and application.
I.
Power Monitoring Equipment furnished under this section shall be installed under
the applicable electrical equipment section under the direction of the Division 16
Contractor.
J.
The Division 16 Contractor at the location of the main ATC panels shall provide
one Telecommunications outlet and one Data only outlet. Should the ATC
suppliers system require more than one outlet for their system this requirement
will be the ATC supplier’s responsibility.
K.
Commissioning Agent and owner shall perform the commissioning process to
establish and document the criteria for systems function, performance, and
maintainability and to verify/document compliance with these criteria throughout
the construction, equipment start-up, space turnover, and the initial period of
operation.
L.
The division 16 contractor shall provide a conduit sleeve for all roof top
equipment (not including PRV/EF). The required conduit size shall be
coordinated with the division 15900 contractor.
15900-7
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 1.04
1.05
SECTION 15900
PROCUREMENT
A.
The BAS and digital control and communications components installed, as work
of this contract shall be an integrated distributed processing system of one of the
following manufacturers.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers
1.
Automated Logic Corporation - Interop with WebCtrl access software and
controllers
2.
Delta Controls with ORCAView/ORCAweb software and web access
controls
3.
Trane – Tracer Summit software with web access through a Tracer
Summit Enterprise Server.
4.
Substitutions: NONE
C.
The BAS shall be installed by competent mechanics regularly employed by a
specialty firm that is in the full time business of designing and installing
environmental control systems and is an authorized representative of one of the
prequalified control equipment manufacturers listed.
D.
Acceptable Installers
1.
Engineered Services Inc.
2.
EMS Consultants, Inc.
3.
Boland Trane.
4.
Substitutions: NONE
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ATC System Qualifications: System shall be based on Manufacturer's standard
integrated hardware and software product offering, which has been installed and
fully operational in similar service for 2 years.
B.
Codes and Standards – Refer to most recent issue and/or State Adopted
Standard:
1.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE).
a.
ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2012: Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Systems (BACNET).
15900-8
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 2.
3.
4.
5.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
a.
UL 916 Energy Management Systems.
b.
UL 864 Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems.
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):
a.
NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
b.
NEMA ICS 1: General Standards for Industrial Controls.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control
sequences. NEMA ICS 1: General Standards for Industrial
Controls
b.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).
c.
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code (NEAC).
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
a.
6.
1.06
SECTION 15900
IEEE 142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems.
Electronics Industries Associations (EIA)
a.
EIA 232 Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data
Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data
Interchange.
b.
EIA 485 Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generator and
Receivers for use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ASC – Application Specific Controller Intelligent control panel with limited
capabilities designed for controlling terminal devices.
B.
BAS - Building Automation System - The entire integrated management and
control system
C.
CA - Commissioning Agent and/or Owner
D.
CEF - Cabinet or Ceiling Exhaust Fan
15900-9
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
E.
CHW - Chilled Water
F.
CHWR - Chilled Water Return
G.
CHWS - Chilled Water Supply
H.
CT - Cooling Tower
I.
CUH - Cabinet Unit Heater
J.
CW – Condenser water
K.
CZ - Control Zone
L.
DDC - Direct Digital Control - Microprocessor based control including
Analog/Digital conversion and program logic.
M.
FCPS - Fairfax County Public Schools – The Owner
N.
HW - Hot water
O.
HWS - Hot water supply
P.
HWR- Hot water return
Q.
IFID/CU - Intelligent Field Interface Device/Control Unit, stand alone control
panel, including both primary control units and application specific controllers
R.
O.A. - Outside Air
S.
OEM – Original Equipment Manufacturer
T.
OI - Operator Interface - A device used by the operator to manage the BAS
including OW, POT, and HHD.
U.
OW - Operator Workstation - PC and connected devices used as the central
graphic “front end” to the system.
V.
PCU - Primary Control Unit - Fully featured intelligent stand-alone control panel
residing on the primary LAN.
W.
Physical Point - A point on the BAS that is physically connected to an I/O device
such that a hardware point exists.
X.
POT - Portable Operators Terminal - Laptop PC used both for direct connection
to a CU and for remote dial up connection.
15900-10
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 1.07
1.08
SECTION 15900
Y.
Virtual Point - A point to store values (i.e.: a set point) that do not represent a
physical device.
Z.
AHS - air handling system- any system which supplies conditioned air.
AA.
GUI - Graphical User Interface.
BB.
TU - terminal unit- unitary equipment ( fan coil unit, unit ventilator, valance,
blower coil unit, VAV box etc.).
SYSTEM SOFTWARE-GENERAL
A.
Functionality and Completeness: The Contractor shall furnish and install all
software and programming necessary to provide a complete and functioning
system as specified. The Contractor shall include all software and programming
not specifically itemized in these Specifications, which is necessary to implement,
maintain, operate, and diagnose the system in compliance with these
Specifications.
B.
Configuration: The software shall support the system as a distributed processing
network configuration.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 15010.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control
device, panel, and accessory furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities,
performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include
installation and start-up instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit eight sets of shop drawings for each control system.
Submit a completed drawing for each central plant system, air handling unit,
terminal unit, system, pump, device, etc. with all point descriptors, addresses and
point names indicated. Shop drawings for system control schematics shall be
provided in a format matching the design documents. Provide sample graphic
display screen types. Shop drawings shall be submitted both on paper and
electronic media as an AutoCAD Version 2006 or newer version-drawing file. (All
x reference and font files must be provided on disk also). Each shop drawing
shall contain the following information:
1.
Shop Drawings shall commence with Color-coded small-scale building
plans showing different colors for each HVAC zone.
2.
Shop Drawings shall continue with scaled floor plans; CAD files showing
all mechanical equipment and ducting are to be made available to the
ATC contractor through the General Contractor or Mechanical Contractor
for coordination. Floor plans produced and submitted by the ATC
15900-11
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
contractor are to show the location of all mechanical equipment, all ATC
control panels, all space sensors, all communication/data bus routing,
duct sensors remote from the units such as supply static pressures, etc.
Floor plan drawings are to clearly identify all area ‘zones” and equipment
groupings.
a.
Interior sensors locations noted on the contract drawings may be
diagrammatic. The ATC contractor is responsible for the proper
location/placement of all sensors. Interior sensors are to be
located using the following criteria:
1)
Locations near the entrance door to the space are
preferred.
2)
Locations near return air grills are preferred.
3)
Temperature and Humidity sensors must be located away
from: supply air diffusers, mechanical or electrical
equipment mounted in the room, shelving, lockers and
anything that could adversely effect the sensor function.
4)
Any sensor that must be relocated from the position
identified on the contract drawings must be reviewed with
the Owner and Engineer.
3.
System architecture one-line diagrams, indicating schematic location of
all control units, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc.
Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate protocol, baud
rate, and type of each LAN.
4.
Schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils,
dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment and control devices.
A verbal description of sequence of operation shall be on the same page
as the flow schematic. Once construction is complete, contractor shall
provide an “as built” reprint of the contractual sequence of operation.
5.
All physical points shall be indicated with names, descriptors, and point
addresses identified.
6.
With each schematic, provide a detailed points list on the drawings with
all physical points included.
7.
Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic. Indicate device
identification to match schematic and actual field labeling, quantity, actual
product ordering number, manufacturer, description, size, voltage range,
pressure range, temperature range, etc. as applicable.
15900-12
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 8.
9.
SECTION 15900
The ATC contractor shall submit for review a valve selection chart with
data for each of the following items.
a.
Valve Application or Location (indicate ATC supplied or OEM).
b.
Line Size to Coil.
c.
Coil GPM requirements (Coil requirements are to be based on the
actual coils submitted by the mechanical contractor).
d.
Coil Pressure Drop.
e.
Control Valve Manufacturer and Part Number.
f.
Control Valve Size.
g.
Control Valve Type (Sweat, NPT, Flange).
h.
Control Valve Configuration (2-way, 3-way).
i.
Control Valve CV.
j.
Control Valve Pressure Drop.
k.
Control Valve Close Off Pressure.
l.
Valve Actuator Manufacturer and Part Number.
m.
Valve Actuator Operation (2-position, 0-10 modulating, floating,
etc.).
n.
Valve Actuator Power Source Voltage (24, 120, etc.).
o.
Spring Return (Yes/No).
The ATC contractor shall submit for review a damper selection chart with
data for each of the following items.
a.
Damper Application or Location (indicate ATC supplied or
equipment OEM)
b.
Damper Manufacturer and Part Number
c.
Damper Size/Shape
d.
Damper Torque Requirements
15900-13
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
e.
Damper CFM (requirements are to be based on the actual units
submitted by the mechanical contractor)
f.
Damper Type (Parallel, Opposed)
g.
Damper Actuator Manufacturer and Part Number
h.
Damper Actuator Operation (2-position, 0-10 modulating, floating,
etc.)
i.
Damper Actuator Power Source Voltage (24, 120, etc.)
j.
Damper Actuator Spring Return (Yes/No)
k.
Damper Actuator End Switches (Yes/No/Quantity)
l.
Damper Actuator Mechanical Limit Stops (Yes/No/CFM at stop0
m.
Provide cut sheets and support data for each selected damper
and actuator.
10.
Indicate all required electrical wiring. Electrical wiring diagrams shall
include both ladder logic type diagram for motor starter, control, and
safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination
diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified.
Provide circuit number or panel termination drawings on separate
drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearly
differentiate between portions of wiring that exist, factory-installed and
portions to be field-installed.
11.
Details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling
shown in plan or elevation indicating the installed locations.
12.
Points list including all physical I/O and virtual points. Points list shall be
provided in both hard copy and in electronic format (Quote and Comma
Delimited, ACCESS data table, or EXCEL spreadsheet formats are
acceptable formats)
13.
Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.
14.
Each sheet shall have a title indicating the type of information included
and the HVAC system controlled.
15.
Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.
16.
Legend and list of abbreviations.
17.
Override Panel control zone diagram graphic
15900-14
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS D.
1.09
SECTION 15900
Control Logic Documentation:
1.
Submit control logic graphical flow diagrams (for block type programs) or
program listings and logic flow charts (for line type programs) to
document the control software of all control units.
2.
Control logic shall be annotated to describe how it accomplishes the
sequence of operation. Annotations shall be sufficient to allow an
operator to relate each program component (block or line) to
corresponding portions of the specified Sequence of Operation. Logic
flow charts for line type programs shall graphically show the logic flow of
each application program.
3.
Include a complete and concise written description of each control
sequence and include icon files.
4.
Include control response, settings, setpoints, throttling ranges, gains,
reset schedules, adjustable parameters and limits.
5.
Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.
6.
Each sheet shall have a title indicating the controller designations and the
HVAC system controlled.
7.
Include Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers
8.
For block type programs, any two interconnected blocks that are shown
on one sheet shall be shown with an interconnecting line, with limited use
of references. Any two interconnected blocks that are shown on separate
sheets shall include references to the connected block and the sheet
number where the connected block is located. For line type programs,
any program that calls a subroutine located on a separate sheet shall
reference the line number where the subroutine is located.
9.
Submit one complete set of programming and operating manuals for all
digital controllers concurrently with control logic documentation. This set
shall count toward the required number of Operation and Maintenance
manuals specified below and in Section 01700 and 01730.
DELIVERABLES
A.
Start-Up Checklists: Prior to start up and checkout, provide a sample check sheet
for each type of equipment. Manufacturer’s start up and checkout procedures
shall be included with the checklists. Completed check sheets shall be furnished.
B.
Laminated Control Drawings: Laminated control drawings including system
control schematics, sequences of operation and panel termination drawings,
15900-15
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
shall be provided in panels for major pieces of equipment. Smaller equipment
and terminal unit drawings shall be located in the central plant equipment panel
or mechanical room panel. Laminating film shall be at least 10mil thick.
Drawings for application specific controllers mounted above the ceiling shall be
on plain paper and permanently attached to the inside of the door of the
enclosure. Lamination is not required for these drawings.
C.
D.
ATC/BAS Start Up Report:
1.
Submit Start Up Report documenting that the ATC/BAS has been fully
tested,
adjusted and calibrated and is
ready for final
inspection/demonstration. Report shall include, but shall not be limited to,
completed test sheets and checklists. Required details of the report shall
be as specified in “System Acceptance”, Section 15900, Paragraph 3.09.
2.
For phased construction projects the aforementioned test sheets and
checklists shall be completed and made available to the owner for review
prior to the occupancy of the completed phase.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit four copies for approval of
Operation and Maintenance Manuals bound in hardback, loose leaf binders and
turn over to the Owner prior to the time the systems or equipment test are
performed. Provide an index and tabbed sections. The manual shall be
identified with the contents of the manual on the cover.
1.
Submit maintenance instructions, installation and checkouts procedures
for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory.
2.
Submit BAS system User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each
controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and
workstation peripherals.
3.
Submit BAS system advanced Programming Manuals for each controller
type and for all workstation software.
4.
Include all submittals (product data, shop drawings, control logic
documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides
or manuals, maintenance instructions and spare parts lists) in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
Submit record copies of product data and control shop drawings updated
to reflect the final installed condition in both reproducible hard copy and
electronic format in AutoCAD 2016 (or later) drawing files.
5.
Submit record copies of approved control logic programming and
database on paper and on CD. Accurately record actual setpoints and
settings of controls, all BACnet objects and their properties, and actual
sequence of operation, including changes to programs made after
15900-16
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
submission and approval of shop drawings and including changes to
programs made during specified testing.
6.
Submit record copies of approved project specific graphic software on CD
updated to reflect the final installed condition.
E.
Maintain project record documents throughout the warranty period and submit
record of warranty calls at the end of the warranty period to the Project Manager,
Office of Design and Construction Services, 8115 Gatehouse Road Suite 3500
Falls Church VA 22042.
F.
Project Record Documents
G.
1.
Two weeks prior to the ATC demonstration, provide record documents to
represent the final control configuration with actual set points and tuning
parameters as existed at acceptance.
2.
Record documents shall be modified control drawings with the actual
installed information. Drawings shall be delivered in both reproducible
hard copy and electronic format in AutoCAD 2006 (or later) drawing files.
Provide all supporting files, blocks, fonts, etc. required by the drawings.
3.
Provide final points list as described above.
4.
Provide final detailed wiring diagrams with all wire numbers and
termination points indicated.
5.
Accurately record final sequences and control logic diagrams made after
submission of shop drawings.
Spare Parts
1.
Within 45 days of approved shop drawings provide a complete package
of spare parts as follows:
a.
2.
Computer hardware:
1)
Primary Control Unit (PCU’s)- minimum 1 or 10% of each
type used.
2)
Application Specific Controller- minimum 1 or 10% of each
used.
Provide an itemized listing of the proposed spare parts, for review, prior to
submitting spare parts.
15900-17
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 1.10
SECTION 15900
CONSTRUCTION AND WARRANTY MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
Contractor shall warrant all products and labor for a period of one year after date
of substantial completion. Refer to Section 01740 for clarification. The ATC
system shall not be considered substantially complete until the successful
completion of the final inspection and demonstration. Refer to section 3.08
system acceptance.
The warranty period shall begin only after the successful completion of the ATC
final inspection and demonstration for new construction and renovation projects.
At no cost to the Owner, during the construction and warranty period, the
Contractor shall provide maintenance services for software and hardware
components as specified below:
1.
Maintenance services shall be provided for all devices and hardware
specified in this Section. Service all equipment per the manufacturers
recommendations. All devices shall be calibrated within the last month of
the warranty period.
2.
Emergency Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware
component or failure of any control programming that would result in
property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and
repaired following telephonic notification by the Owner to the Contractor.
3.
a.
Response by telephone to any request for service shall be
provided within one hour of the Owner’s initial telephone request
for service.
b.
In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected
through the telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware
or software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall
be dispatched to the Owner’s site within two (2) hours of the
Owner’s initial telephone request for such services, as specified.
c.
Failure to respond within the described time frames shall be cause
to hold the Contractor liable for damages incurred due to the lack
of response.
Normal Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware
component or failure of any control programming that would not result in
property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and
repaired following telephonic notification by the Owner to the Contractor.
a.
Response by telephone to any request for service shall be
provided within one (1) working hour (contractor specified 40 hr
per week normal working period) of the Owner’s initial telephone
request for service.
15900-18
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS b.
1.11
1.13
1.14
In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected
through the telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware
or software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall
be dispatched to the Owner’s site within one (1) working day of
the Owner’s initial telephone request for such services, as
specified.
4.
Owners Telephonic Request for Service: Contractor shall specify a
maximum of three service technicians’ telephone numbers for Owner to
call in the event of a need for service. At least one of the lines shall be
attended at any given time at all times. One of the three paged
technicians shall respond to every call within 15 minutes.
5.
Technical Support:
Contractor shall provide technical support by
telephone throughout the warranty period.
6.
Preventive maintenance shall be provided throughout the warranty period
in accordance with the hardware component manufacturer’s
requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.12
SECTION 15900
Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device.
Maintain cartons during shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent
equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store
equipment and materials inside and protect from weather.
LISTING AND LABELING
A.
The BAS system and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories
(UL 916) as an Energy Management System.
B.
Only those components which are directly wired to the Building Fire Alarm System shall
be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 864) as a Control Unit and Accessories for
Fire Alarm Systems.
LICENSING
A.
Provide licensing and original software copies for 2 (two) Owner provided
Operator Workstations or Portable Operator Terminals. Include licensing for all
required software packages.
B.
Upgrade all software packages to the release (version) in effect at the end of the
Warranty Period and prior to the end of the Warranty Period.
COMMISSIONING
A.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
15900-19
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 1.
PART 2.
2.01
This contractor shall be responsible for participation and coordination with
the commissioning process as specified in section 01660.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
2.02
SECTION 15900
General:
1.
Materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds without
imperfections or blemishes and shall not be damaged in any way. Used
equipment shall not be used in any way for the permanent installation
except where drawings or specifications specifically allow existing
materials to remain in place.
2.
Provide control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of
valves, dampers, thermostats, relays, controllers, sensors, and other
components as required for complete installation. Except as otherwise
indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard materials and components as
published in their product information; designed and constructed as
recommended by manufacturer, and as required for application indicated.
BASIC MATERIALS, INTERFACE DEVICES, AND SENSORS
A.
All wiring installed in areas with accessible ceilings shall be installed bundled
together and run exposed above the ceilings. Bundles shall be supported by “J”
hooks mounted not more than four feet on center.
B.
COMMUNICATION WIRING:
1.
All wiring shall be in accordance with National Electrical Codes and
Division 16 of this specification. Exposed wiring or cabling installed in
return air plenum ceilings or air cavities shall be rated for that application.
2.
Contractor shall supply all communication wiring between Owners WAN
active hubs and LANIDs/PCUs, between CUs and LANIDs/PCUs and
local and remote peripherals (e.g., operator workstations, printers).
3.
Primary LAN communication wiring shall be 100% individually shielded
pairs.
Communication wiring shall be 24 gauge minimum or of
heavier/lighter gauge if recommended by the PCU manufacturer for the
specific installation requirements, with overall PVC cover, with no splices,
separate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts. Shield shall be terminated
as recommended by PCU manufacturer. Cable shall be single-shielded
pair type suitable for Arcnet (IEEE802.4), Ethernet (IEEE802.3)
15900-20
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS C.
D.
E.
SECTION 15900
4.
Secondary LAN communication wiring shall be 100% individually shielded
pairs.
Communication wiring shall be 24 gauge minimum or of
heavier/lighter gauge if recommended by the PCU manufacturer for the
specific installation requirements, with overall PVC cover, with no splices,
separate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts. Shield shall be terminated
as recommended by PCU manufacturer. Cable shall be single-shielded
pair type suitable for Arcnet (IEEE8802.4), Ethernet (IEEE8802.3),
MS/TP, TP/FT-10.
5.
Data communication wiring from CUs and peripherals (i.e., operator
interface devices, printers, etc.) shall be minimum 4-conductor, 22-gauge
wire, or of heavier/lighter gauge if recommended by control manufacturer,
100% shielded, with PVC cover and RS-232C connectors at both ends.
6.
Contractor may elect to run unshielded cable if noise immunity is ensured
by another means. Contractor shall fully responsible for noise immunity
and rewire with shielded cable if electrical or RF noise affects
SIGNAL WIRING:
1.
Signal wiring to all field devices, including, but not limited to, all sensors,
transducers, transmitters, switches, etc. shall be twisted, 100% shielded
pair, minimum 18-gauge wire, with PVC cover. Run with no splices,
separate from any wiring above thirty (30) volts.
2.
Signal wiring shield shall be grounded at CU end, only as recommended
by the CU manufacturer.
3.
Contractor may elect to run unshielded cable if noise immunity is ensured
by another means. Contractor shall fully responsible for noise immunity
and rewire with shielded cable if electrical or RF noise affects
performance.
LOW VOLTAGE OUTPUT WIRING:
1.
Low voltage control wiring shall be minimum 18-gauge, twisted pair,
stranded, 100% shielded, with PVC cover, separate from any wiring
above thirty (30) volts.
2.
Contractor may elect to run unshielded cable if noise immunity is ensured
by another means. Contractor shall fully responsible for noise immunity
and rewire with shielded cable if electrical or RF noise affects
performance.
CONTROL POWER WIRING:
1.
Power wiring shall be minimum 12-gauge stranded installed in conduit,
separated from any other wiring.
15900-21
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS F.
SECTION 15900
CONTROL PANELS: (PCUS AND ASCS)
1.
Provide control panels with suitable brackets for wall mounting for each
control system. Locate panels for roof top units in areas shown on
drawings. Locate panels in ceilings for unit ventilators, fan coil units,
finned tube radiation, terminal units, variable refrigerant flow units, water
source heat pumps and heating coils. Panels located in ceilings shall be
identified with a nameplate attached with ¼” head, self-tapping screw to
the ceiling grid or access door identifying the equipment. Mounting
control panels for VAV boxes on the VAV box itself is acceptable. See
additional identification requirements in Section 15900, Paragraph 2.02 X,
NAMEPLATES. Control panels may also be factory mounted inside
terminal and packaged units (FCU’s UV’s RTU’s VRF’s WSHP’s etc.)
2.
Indoor enclosures shall meet the requirements of NEMA 250, Type 1.
3.
Outdoor enclosures shall meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 3R.
4.
Wall mounted enclosures below ceiling shall be fabricated panels of 16gage furniture-grade steel, with hinged door and keyed lock. Keyed lock
shall be compatible with Owner’s 2052 key. Enclosures above the ceiling
shall be fabricated panels of 16-gauge steel, with hinged door and coin
lock. All enclosures shall be totally enclosed on four sides with back plate
and shall have manufacturer’s shop painted finish (KELE HC12124).
Junction boxes are not acceptable. Minimum size: 12” x 12”.
5.
Provide UL-listed cabinets for use with line voltage devices.
6.
Control panel shall be completely factory wired, and all electrical
connections made to a separate terminal strip. Field wiring of panels is
not acceptable. Terminal strip is not required on ASCs mounted above
ceiling.
7.
All control components shall be identified.
8.
Complete as-built wiring diagrams shall be mounted in or adjacent to the
panel.
9.
All control wiring shall be run neatly and orderly in open slot wiring duct
with cover. Not required for ASCs above ceiling.
10.
PCU’s shall be provided with a combination disconnect / receptacle with
fuse holder and fuse (KELE part number PRK-FS) mounted within the
enclosure and wired such that when the disconnect is opened, the
receptacle remains energized. Provide single gang wiremold box in
master control panel for punch down of the FCPS data drop.
15900-22
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS G.
ZONE OVERRIDE PANEL
1.
H.
SECTION 15900
Provide a zone override panel located in the custodians office, main
mechanical room or as shown on the drawings. Elementary School
Panels shall include override timers (One for each control zone as shown
on the control zone diagram on the mechanical drawings) mounted below
the control zone graphic. Panels for Middle and High Schools shall
incorporate a Touch Screen (whose graphical pages shall be reproduced
from the control zone diagram as shown on the mechanical drawings)
and shall include one graphically represented timer for each control zone.
Access to each graphically represented timer, shall be through the touch
screen, when individually indexed, and shall allow a 1 to 3 hour override
of that zone. Touch screen shall be mounted below the control zone
graphic. The graphic shall show the outline of the entire school with
multiple floors shown separately. The Contractor shall provide the size
and/or number of panels necessary to include all zones and timers. The
control zones, as shown on the drawings, shall be delineated with each
zone shown in a different color. The number of each zone shall be shown
in its respective areas and the graphic shall be titled “CONTROL
ZONES”. The graphic shall be made of engraved acrylic, phenolic or
micarta with minimum dimensions of 20” x 20”, and shall be made by a
firm specializing in this type of work. Submissions of a professionally
painted graphic panel will be considered. Provide shop drawings on this
graphic panel with the automatic temperature control submittal.
CONTROL VALVES
1.
General: Provide factory fabricated control valves of type, body material
and pressure class indicated. Where type or body material is not
indicated, provide selection as determined by manufacturer for installation
requirements and pressure class, based on maximum pressure and
temperature in piping system. Provide valve size in accordance with
scheduled or specified maximum pressure drop across control valve.
Equip control valves with heavy-duty actuators, with proper shutoff rating
for each individual application. Required close-off pressure for water
valve applications shall be the shutoff head of associated pump. Required
close-off rating of steam valve applications shall be design inlet steam
pressure. For close-off pressure ratings less than 30 psid the minimum
close off shall be 30 psid.
2.
Plug-Type Globe Pattern for Water Service:
a.
Valve Sizing: Modulating valves shall be sized for maximum full
flow pressure drop between 3 and 5 PSIG unless scheduled
otherwise.
15900-23
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS b.
c.
3.
SECTION 15900
Single Seated (Two-way) Valves:
Equal percentage
characteristics. Cage type trim, providing seating and guiding
surfaces for plug on “top and bottom” guided plugs.
Double Seated (Three-way) Valves:
Linear characteristics.
Balanced plug type, with cage type trim providing seating and
guiding surfaces on “top and bottom” guided plugs.
d.
Temperature Rating: 25°F minimum, 250°F maximum.
e.
Body: Bronze, screwed, 250 psi maximum working pressure for
½” to 2”; Cast Iron, flanged, 125 psi maximum working pressure
for 2-1/2” and larger.
f.
Valve Trim: Bronze; Stem: Polished stainless steel.
g.
Packing: Spring Loaded Teflon or Synthetic Elastomer U-cups,
self-adjusting. O-ring packings are unacceptable.
h.
Plug: Brass, bronze or stainless steel, Seat: Brass.
i.
Disc: Replaceable Composition or Stainless Steel Filled PTFE.
j.
Ambient Operating Temperature Limits: -10 to 150°F.
k.
Valves shall be suitable for 200°F water service.
l.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance
requirements approved manufacturers are as follows:
1)
Johnson Controls
2)
Siebe Environmental Controls
3)
Warren
4)
Delta
5)
Belimo
6)
TAC
with
Butterfly Type
a.
Body: Extended neck epoxy coated cast or ductile iron with full
lug pattern, shall have minimum 4” stem extension, ANSI Class
125 or 250 bolt pattern to match specified flanges.
b.
Seat: EPDM.
15900-24
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 4.
SECTION 15900
c.
Disc: Bronze or stainless steel, pinned or mechanically locked to
shaft.
d.
Bearings: Bronze or stainless steel.
e.
Shaft: 300 or 400 series stainless steel.
f.
Cold Service Pressure: 175 psi.
g.
Valves shall be suitable for 200°F water service.
h.
Bubble-tight shutoff to 150 psi.
i.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance
requirements approved manufacturers are as follows:
1)
Jamesbury WS815
2)
3)
Bray Series 31
Keystone AR2
4)
Dezurik BGS
5)
Belimo F6/F7
with
Ball Type
a.
Body: Brass or Bronze, one, two, or three piece design, threaded
ends.
b.
Seat: Reinforced Teflon.
c.
Ball: Stainless steel.
d.
Port: Standard or ‘V’ style.
e.
Stem: Stainless steel, blow out proof design, extended to match
thickness of insulation. Provide stem protective sleeve that allows
operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal on chilled water
service valves.
f.
Cold Service Pressure: 250 psi WOG.
g.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance
requirements approved manufacturers are as follows:
1)
Conbraco
15900-25
with
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS I.
2)
Worcester
3)
Nibco
4)
Jamesbury
5)
PBM
6)
Delta
7)
Belimo
8)
TAC
SECTION 15900
CONTROL DAMPERS
1.
General: Provide factory fabricated automatic control dampers of sizes,
velocity and pressure classes as required for smooth, stable, and
controllable airflow. Dampers not supplied as an integral part of factory
fabricated equipment shall be furnished under this section of the
specifications and shall be installed under the respective sheet metal
specification sections. Provide parallel or opposed blade dampers as
recommended by manufacturers sizing techniques. For dampers located
near fan outlets, provide dampers rated for fan outlet velocity and close
off pressure, and recommended by damper manufacturer for fan
discharge damper service. Required close-off rating of air damper
applications shall be shutoff pressure of associated fan.
2.
General Isolation and Modulating Control Service in rectangular ducts at
velocities not greater than 1500 fpm, differential pressure not greater than
2.5” w.c.
a.
Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
b.
Frames: Galvanized steel, 16 gauge minimum thickness, welded
or riveted with corner reinforcement.
c.
Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches wide by
48 inches long, attached to minimum ½ inch shafts with set
screws, 16 gauge minimum thickness.
d.
Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomer, mechanically attached.
e.
Jamb Seals: Stainless steel.
15900-26
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS J.
SECTION 15900
f.
Shaft Bearings:
Oil impregnated sintered bronze, graphite
impregnated nylon sleeve or other molded synthetic sleeve, with
thrust washers at bearings.
g.
Linkage concealed in frame
h.
Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or graphite
impregnated nylon.
i.
Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of
1500 ft./min. and 1-inch wg.
j.
Maximum Pressure Differential: 2.5 inches wg.
k.
Temperature Limits: 40 to 200°F.
l.
Where opening size is larger than 48 inches wide, or 72 inches
high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with appropriate
intermediate frames, jackshafts and linkages.
m.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance
requirements approved manufacturers are as follows:
1)
Arrow-Foil model OBDAF-207
2)
Air Balance model AC-116
3)
Ruskin model CD-50
4)
Greenheck model VCD-23
with
ACTUATORS
1.
General: Damper, Valve and VAV box actuators/operators not supplied
as an integral part of the factory fabricated equipment shall be furnished
and installed under this section of the specifications. Size actuators and
linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient
reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position
action as specified. All heating valve actuators for valves 11/4”and larger
and OA damper actuators shall have a manual override with spring
return. Required close-off pressure for water valve applications shall be
the shutoff head of associated pump. Required close-off rating of air
damper applications shall be shutoff pressure of associated fan.
Modulating actuators shall have minimum rangeability of 40to1 .Provide
mechanical stops as necessary.
a.
Damper Actuators
1)
Ambient Operating Temperature Limits: -10 to 150°F
15900-27
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS b.
SECTION 15900
2)
Two Position Electric Actuators: Line voltage with spring
return and mechanical stops.
3)
Electronic Actuators: Provide actuators for two position
(24v), 0-5vdc, 0-10vdc, 2-10vdc, 4-20 ma, or 3 position
floating input as required. All actuators shall be spring
return for fail positioning (except VAV box damper
actuators). Actuators shall travel full stroke in less than 90
seconds. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have
positive positioning circuit. Where two actuators are
required in parallel or in sequence provide an auxiliary
actuator driver. Actuators shall have current limiting motor
protection.
Actuators shall have manual override.
Modulating actuators shall have minimum rangeability of
40 to 1.
4)
Close-off Pressure: Provide the minimum torque required,
and spring return for fail positioning (unless otherwise
specifically indicated) sized for required close off pressure.
Required close-off rating of air damper applications shall
be shutoff pressure of associated fan.
5)
Floating Motor: Provide actuators for VAV terminal boxes
primary air dampers as required, sized for required close
off pressure. Actuators shall be 3 wire, 24V 50/60 Hz, 90°
stroke with a maximum travel time of 90 seconds. Torque
switches shall limit travel in CW and CCW directions.
6)
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements approved manufacturers are as follows:
a)
Johnson Controls
b)
Belimo
c)
Delta
Globe Valve Gear Train Actuators
1)
Ambient Operating Temperature Limits: -10 to 140°
regardless of valve media temperature.
2)
Two Position Electric Actuators: Line voltage with spring
return.
3)
Modulating Electronic Actuators: Provide actuators for 05vdc, 0-10vdc, 2-10vdc, 4-20 ma, or 3 position floating
15900-28
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
input as required. Actuators for heating system valves shall
be spring return, normally open, for fail positioning.
Actuators shall travel full stroke in less than 60 seconds.
Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have positive
positioning circuit. Actuators shall have current limiting
motor protection. Actuators shall have manual override.
Modulating actuators shall have minimum rangeability of
40 to 1.
c.
4)
Close-off Pressure: Provide the minimum torque required,
and spring return for fail positioning (unless otherwise
specifically indicated) sized for required close off pressure.
Required close-off pressure for water valve applications
shall be the shutoff head of associated pump. Required
close-off rating of steam valve applications shall be design
inlet steam pressure.
5)
All 24 VAC/VDC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring.
6)
Actuators shall be provided with a minimum ½” conduit
fitting for wiring connections.
7)
Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories 873 listed
and Canadian Standards Association certified for the
application.
8)
Actuator shall have a NEMA Type 1 enclosure, and
actuators located in plenum ceilings shall meet the UL-465
rating for flame/smoke spread.
9)
Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full
stroke cycles at the actuator’s rated torque.
10)
Provide position feedback where required.
11)
For valves 5 inches and larger a battery back-up system is
acceptable for failsafe operations
12)
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements approved manufacturers are as follows:
a)
Johnson Controls
b)
Belimo
c)
Delta
Quarter turn actuators for ball and butterfly valves
15900-29
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15900
1)
Motor: Suitable for 24VAC/VDC, 120 or 240 volt single
phase power supply. Insulation shall be NEMA Class F or
better. Motor shall be rated for 100 percent duty cycle.
Motors shall have inherent overload protection.
2)
Gear Train. Motor output shall be directed to a self-locking
gear drive mechanism. Gears shall be rated for torque
input exceeding motor locked rotor torque. Actuators shall
be spring return for fail positioning for heating system
valves.
3)
Enclosure: Actuator Enclosure shall be NEMA 4 rated,
and shall have a threaded conduit connection for
installation in exposed areas.
Limit Switches: Travel limit switches shall be UL and CSA
approved. Switches shall limit actuator in both open and
closed positions.
4)
5)
Mechanical Travel Stops: The actuator shall include
mechanical travel stops of stainless steel construction to
limit actuator to specific degrees of rotation.
6)
Manual override: Actuators shall have manual actuator
override to allow operation of the valve when power is off.
For valves 4 inches and smaller the override may be a
removable wrench or lever or geared handwheel type. For
larger valves, the override shall be a fixed geared
handwheel type. An automatic power cut-off switch shall
be provided to disconnect power from the motor when the
handwheel is engaged for manual operation.
7)
Valve position indicator: A valve position indicator with
arrow and open and closed position marks shall be
provided to indicate valve position.
8)
Torque Limit Switches: Provide torque limit switches to
interrupt motor power when torque limit is exceeded in
either direction of rotation.
9)
Position Controller:
For valves used for modulating
control,
provide an electronic positioner capable of
accepting 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC,3 position
floating and 135 Ω potentiometer.
10)
Ambient Conditions:
Actuator shall be designed for
operation from –140 to 150 °F ambient temperature with 0100 percent relative humidity.
15900-30
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS K.
L.
SECTION 15900
11)
For valves 5 inches and larger a battery back-up system is
acceptable for failsafe operations.
12)
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements approved manufacturers are as follows:
a)
Belimo
b)
Delta
c)
Johnson Controls
FIELD DEVICES – GENERAL
1.
Provide field devices for input and output of digital (binary), and analog,
signals into PCUs and ASCs. Provide signal conditioning for all field
devices as recommended by field device manufacturers, and as required
for proper operation in the system.
2.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that all field devices
are compatible with CU hardware and software.
3.
Field devices specified herein are generally “two-wire” type transmitters,
with power for the device expected to be supplied from the respective CU.
If the CU provided is not equipped to provide this power, or is not
designed to work with “two-wire” type transmitters, or if field device is to
serve as input to more than one CU, the Contractor shall provide “fourwire” type equal transmitter and necessary regulated DC power supply or
120 VAC power supply, as required.
4.
For field devices specified hereinafter that require signal interface to
CU’s, Contractor shall furnish and install proper device, including 120V
power as required. Such devices shall have accuracy equal to, or better
than, the accuracy listed for respective field devices.
5.
Accuracy, as stated in this Section, shall include combined effects of
nonlinearity, nonrepeatability and hysteresis.
TEMPERATURE SENSORS (TS)
1.
Sensor range: When matched with A/D converter of PCU, or ASC, sensor
range shall provide a resolution of no worse than 0.5°F.
2.
Platinum RTD Sensors shall be 1000Ω two wire type unless provided with
integral transmitter with current or voltage output.
15900-31
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 3.
Room temperature sensor shall be an element contained within a
ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. The LAN broadcast of
sensing values for control to multiple controllers is unacceptable. Provide
slide setpoint adjustment, (2°F up and down), on all sensors except those
located in locker rooms, corridors, auditoriums, gang toilets, and on all
PRV’s, CEF’s, EWH’s and ECH’s. The following sensing elements are
acceptable:
a.
4.
Sensing element – Platinum RTD, or Thermistor, +/- 0.5°F
accuracy at calibration point.
Liquid immersion temperature sensors for hot, chilled and condenser
water systems shall include stainless steel thermowell, sensor and
connection head for wiring connections. Temperature range shall be as
required for resolution indicated in paragraph a) below.
a.
7.
Sensing element – Platinum RTD, Thermistor, or integrated
circuit, +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point.
Averaging duct temperature sensor shall consist of an averaging element,
junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage.
Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in one lineal foot of
sensing element for each square feet of coil face area. Temperature
range as required for resolution indicated in paragraph a) below.
a.
6.
Sensing element – Platinum RTD, Thermistor, or integrated
circuit, +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point.
Single point duct temperature sensor shall consist of sensing element,
junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or
vibration noise. Temperature range as required for resolution indicated in
paragraph a) below. Sensor probe shall be 304 stainless steel. Probe
length shall be selected so that the sensing point is minimum 8” from the
center point of the medium being measured.
a.
5.
SECTION 15900
Sensing element – Platinum RTD, Thermistor, or integrated
circuit, +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point.
Pipe Surface Mount temperature sensor shall include metal junction box
and clamps and shall be suitable for sensing pipe surface temperature
and installation under insulation. Provide thermally conductive paste at
pipe contact point. Sensors shall only be used where specifically called
for or with prior approval of the Owner. Temperature range shall be as
require for resolution indicated in paragraph a) below.
a.
Sensing element – Platinum RTD, Thermistor, or integrated
circuit, +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point.
15900-32
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 8.
Outside air sensors shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and
watertight gasket to prevent water seepage. Temperature range shall be
as require for resolution indicated in paragraph a) below.
a.
M.
Sensing element – Platinum RTD, Thermistor, or integrated
circuit, +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point.
HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS (H)
1.
Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room) or outdoor mounting. Unit
shall be two-wire transmitter utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or
thin film capacitance change humidity sensor. Unit shall produce linear
continuous output of 4-20 mA for percent relative humidity (% rh).
Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and application
criteria:
a.
2.
N.
SECTION 15900
Input Range: 0 to 100% rh.
1)
Accuracy (% rh):
+/- 2% (when used for enthalpy
calculation, dewpoint calculation, dehumidification or
humidifier control) or +/- 3% (monitoring only) between 2090% rh at 77°F, including hysteresis, linearity, and
repeatability.
2)
Sensor Operating Range: as required by application
3)
Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year.
Units shall be General Eastern, Microline, Hy-Cal HT Series, ACI or
Vaisala HM Series. Provide one (1) Calibration Tool Kit per job.
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS (CO2)
1.
Units shall be suitable for duct or wall (room) mounting. Unit shall be two
or four wire transmitter utilizing a non-dispersive infrared sensor. The
cover of the sensor shall be attached by tamperproof fasteners to the
mounting box or plate. Sensor shall have a LED readout. Unit shall
produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA 0-5VDC or 0-10 VDC for
parts per million (ppm) concentration. Sensors shall have the following
minimum performance and application criteria:
a.
Power: 24 VAC or VDC less than 3 VA
b.
Input Range: 0 to 2000 ppm adjustable.
c.
Output Range: 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
15900-33
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 2.
O.
SECTION 15900
d.
Accuracy: ±75 ppm from 0 to 1500 ppm and ±5% above 1500
ppm, including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability.
e.
Repeatability: ±8 ppm
f.
Pressure effect: 0.19% of reading per mm Hg
g.
Long Term Stability: Less than ±20 ppm drift per year.
h.
Calibration Interval: Lifetime or self calibrating.
Units shall be ACI ESENSE- R-5-LCD (wall), or D-5-LCD-D (duct).
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (DP)
1.
General Purpose Water: Two or four wire transmitter, and shall produce
liner continuous output of 4-20 mA 0-5VDC or 0-10VDC output with zero
and span adjustments. Plus or minus 0.5% overall accuracy, 450 psig
(3103 Kpa) maximum static pressure rating, 200 psid maximum
overpressure rating for 6 through 60 psid range, 450 psid for 100 through
300 psid range. Kele & Associates Model W30 series with BVA-5 bypass
valve assembly, Units manufactured by Veris Industries, Modus, or Setra
are acceptable provided they are fully equal to the item specified.
2.
General Purpose Air: Units shall be suitable for duct or unit mounting.
Unit shall be two or four wire transmitter and shall produce linear
continuous output of 4-20mA, 0-5VDC or 0-10VDC.
a.
Loop powered two wire differential capacitance cell type
transmitter
b.
Output: two wire 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.
c.
Overall accuracy: Plus or minus 1%
d.
Minimum range: 0.1 in. w.c.
e.
Maximum range: 10 inches w.c.
f.
Housing: Polymer housing suitable for surface mounting.
g.
Static sensing element: pitot type static pressure sensing tips
similar to Dwyer model A-301 and connecting tubing.
h.
Range: Select for specified setpoint to be between 50% and 75%
full scale.
15900-34
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS P.
2.
R.
S.
i.
Manufacturer: Veris Industries PX Series Kele Model T30,
Modus, or Setra.
j.
Provide LCD Display.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES (DPS)
1.
Q.
SECTION 15900
General Service Air: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint and differential
and snap acting form C contacts rated for the application. Provide static
pressure sensing tips similar to Dwyer model A-301static pressure
sensing tips and connecting tubing.
General Service Water: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint, 2 psig or
adjustable differential, and snap acting form C contacts rated for the
application. 60 psid minimum pressure differential range. 0°F to 160°F
operating temperature range. Switch body pressure rating shall be at
least 150 psig.
PRESSURE SWITCHES (PS)
1.
Diaphragm or bourdon tube with adjustable setpoint and differential and
snap acting form C contacts rated for the application. PS shall be
capable of withstanding 150% of rated pressure.
2.
Acceptable manufacturers subject to meeting the specified requirements:
Square D, ITT Neo-Dyn, ASCO, Penn, Honeywell, and Johnson.
PIPE AND TUBING FOR PRESSURE SENSING AND CONTROL DEVICES
1.
Piping for low pressure air sensing and control devices operating under
30 psig shall be instrument grade polyethylene tubing (plenum rated if
used in plenums), ¼ inch OD, 120 psig working pressure assembled with
brass barbed fittings or ¼ inch type ‘L’ soft copper tubing assembled with
flared type fittings.
2.
Piping for water pressure sensing instruments shall be the same
specification as the main piping up to the instrument isolation valve for
connections ½ inch and larger. 3/8 and ¼ inch connections shall be
made with standard weight threaded red brass pipe between the main
piping and the instrument isolation valve where the main piping is steel.
The instrument isolation valve shall be installed as close as practical to
the main line where accessible, and shall be a ¼ inch minimum size
bronze ball valve rated for 150 psig WOG with stainless steel ball,
blowout proof stem, reinforced Teflon packing and seats. Tubing from the
instrument isolation valve to the device shall be type ‘L’ soft copper tubing
installed with brass flare type fittings.
TRANSDUCERS
15900-35
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 1.
T.
SECTION 15900
Pulse Width Modulating, Voltage or Current to Voltage or Current
a.
Universal Electronic Analog Transducer for all three phase
equipment and digital transducer for all single phase equipment
b.
Electrical Power Supply: 24 VAC or24 VDC
c.
Input: 0-40 mA, 0-4 mA, 0-2 V, 0-20V, 100Ω min to 10kΩ max.,
pulse width modulated or tri-state input.
d.
e.
Output Span: 0-18 VDC or 0-20 VDC – Jumper Selectable
Zero and Span: Adjustable to full range
f.
Action: Direct or Reverse Acting – Jumper Selectable
g.
Operating Humidity & Temperature: 5-95% non-condensing, 32°F
to 150°F
h.
Linearity: <0.1% of span
i.
Enclosure: Polymer designed for surface or panel mount.
j.
Manufacturer: Kele Model UAT-1, PWA-1A
AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
1.
Furnish where indicated on the drawings, insertion type, airflow traverse
probes.
Probes shall utilize multiple total and static pressure
measurement points located along the length of the probe in accordance
with ASHRAE standards and recommendations for duct traverses. The
probes, and placement of the probes, shall provide measurement
accuracy within +- 2% of actual velocity. Probes shall be of cylindrical
cross section and shall indicate no more than a +-3% deviation from the
centerline velocity at a yaw angle of 30 degrees. Probes shall be
aluminum with a hard anodized or rradiate finish. Probes shall be
provided with integral mounting plate, ¼ compression fitting connections,
end mounting rod and be suitable to operate in ambient conditions off
300°F. The probe assemblies shall not have a pressure drop greater
than 10% of the velocity pressure at the maximum design flow. The
probes shall not amplify sound levels in the duct. Submit data indicating
the developed differential pressure and pressure loss at the minimum and
maximum design flows for each duct location. Provide differential
pressure transmitter for measuring velocity, with a range selected to
match the velocity of the maximum design flow for the duct served. The
following schedule is the minimum probe quantities across either the
width or height of the duct sections where the probes are being inserted:
15900-36
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Insertion side
6-10 inches
11-20 inches
21-30 inches
31-45 inches
46-60 inches
61-84 inches
85-120 inches
SECTION 15900
Qty
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Manufacturer: Tek-Air Model T-FP5000, or approved equal.
For outside air, return air or exhaust air measurement, the equipment
manufacturer supplied device is acceptable provided this contractor can
interface and control the device.
U.
CURRENT SWITCHES
1.
2.
Clamp-On Design Current Operated Switch for Motor Status Indication
a.
Range: 1.5 to 150 amps
b.
Trip Point: Adjustable +/- 1 % of range
c.
Switch: Solid state, normally open, 1 to 135 VAC or VDC, 0.3
amps. Zero off state leakage.
d.
Lower Frequency Limit: 6 Hz.
e.
Trip Indication: LED
f.
Approvals: UL, CSA
g.
Max. Cable Size: 350 MCM
h.
Manufacturer: RE Technologies SCS1150A-LED or equal.
Wire Thru and Current Operated Switch for Motor Status Indication
a.
Range: 0 to 200 A continuous amperage rating
b.
Trip Point: Adjustable +/- 1 % of range
c.
Switch: 8A @ 240 Vac resistive, 4A @ 120 Vac tungsten, 2A @
240 Vac inductive (1/2 hp), load control contact power shall be
induced from monitored conductor (minimum conductor current
required to energize relay 5A, max. rating of 135A).
d.
Manufacturer: Veris Industries, Inc.
15900-37
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS e.
V.
Current switches for fractional horsepower motors (terminal
equipment, UV’s FCU’s PRV’s ECH CEF’s etc.) shall be Veris
H120
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CT)
1.
W.
SECTION 15900
Clamp-On Design Current Transformer for Motor Current Sensing
a.
Range: 50 amps minimum, 4000 amps maximum
b.
Accuracy: ±1%
c.
Manufacturer: KELE Model 500T or Veris Industries.
ELECTRIC CONTROL COMPONENTS
1.
Limit Switches (LS): Limit switches shall be UL listed, with adjustable trim
arm. Limit switches shall be as manufactured by Square “D”, Allen
Bradley; SPDT or DPDT type.
2.
Smoke Detectors – Shall be furnished and wired to the fire alarm system
under Division 16. They shall be installed under Division 15 and
interlocked to their respective starters under this section. Fire alarm
modules for unit shut down shall be provided and installed by the division
16 contractor, and interlocked to their respective starters under this
division.
3.
Control Relays: All control relays shall be UL listed, with contacts rated
for the application. Relays shall be mounted inside of an approved
electrical enclosure such as a control panel, equipment control enclosure,
or separate enclosure meeting the requirements specified for control
panels, unless noted otherwise below. Relays mounted in equipment
control enclosures shall be neatly installed in accordance with the
electrical code, securely fastened to the enclosure, and shall be
accessible for maintenance without obstructing access to other
equipment control components.
a.
b.
Control relays for use on electrical systems of 120 volts or less
shall have, as a minimum, the following:
AC coil pull-in voltage range of +10%, -15% or nominal voltage.
c.
Coil sealed volt amperes (VA) not greater than four (4) VA.
d.
Silver cadmium Form C (SPDT) contacts in a dustproof enclosure,
with 8 or 11 pin type plug.
e.
Pilot light indication of power-to-coil and coil retainer clips.
15900-38
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
f.
Coil rated for 50 and 60 Hz service.
g.
Relays shall be KELE or Omron LY series.
h.
Relays used for control (start/stop) of 120V motors, up to 1/3 HP,
shall be rated to break minimum 10 Amps inductive load. Relays
shall be RIB series and mounted externally to the starter or
junction box.
i.
Relays used for stop/start control shall have low voltage coils (30
VAC or less), and shall be provided with transient and surge
suppression devices at the CU interface if required by equipment
manufacturer.
j.
All relays for motor starters and variable frequency drives, electric
heaters, inline pumps, exhaust fans and electric heat trace shall
be RIB series and mounted externally to the starter, drive or
junction box.
k.
All RIB relays shall be mounted on the exterior of the electrical
equipment.
4.
General Purpose Power Contactors. NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose
magnetic contactor. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, enclosure meeting requirements
stated for control panels. Manufacturer shall be Square ‘D’, Cutler
Hammer or Westinghouse.
5.
Control Transformers: Control transformers shall be machine tool type,
and shall be UL and CSA listed. Secondary sides shall have re-settable
overcurrent protection in accordance with the NEC. Transformer shall be
proper size for application, and mounted in minimum NEMA 1 enclosure.
Transformers shall be UL listed and Rated Class 2 when installed in
plenums. Transformers shall be manufactured by Westinghouse, Square
“D” Veris, RIB or Jefferson.
6.
Time Delay Relays (TDR): TDRs shall be capable of on or off delayed
functions, with adjustable timing periods, and cycle timing light. Contacts
shall be rated for the application with a minimum of two (2) sets of Form C
contacts, enclosed in a dustproof enclosure.
a.
TDRs shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span
rating of one million operations. TDRs shall have solid state, plugin type coils with transient suppression devices.
b.
7.
TDRs shall be UL and CSA listed, Crouzet type.
Electric Push Button Switch: Switch shall be momentary contact, oil tight,
push button, with number of N.O. and/or N.C. contacts as required.
15900-39
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
Contacts shall be snap-action type, and rated for minimum 120 VAC
operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen Bradley,
Square ‘D’, Cutler Hammer or Westinghouse.
X.
8.
Pilot Light: Panel-mounted pilot light shall be NEMA ICS 2 oil tight,
transformer type, with screw terminals, push-to-test unit, LED type, rated
for 120 VAC. Unit shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen Bradley,
Square ‘D’, Cutler Hammer or Westinghouse.
9.
Electric Selector Switch (SS): Switch shall be maintained contact, NEMA
ICS 2, oil-tight selector switch with contact arrangement, as required.
Contacts shall be rated for minimum 120 VAC operation. Switch shall be
800T type, as manufactured by Allen Bradley, Square ‘D’, Cutler Hammer
or Westinghouse.
10.
DIGITAL OVERRIDE TIMER - Override Timer: Digital time switch suitable
for wall or panel mounting, 0-3 hour range, 24VAC/VDC, 12mA DC,
41mA AC, with LCD display. Switch shall be TSW-400-24 as
manufactured by Wattstopper.
11.
OVERRIDE TOUCH SCREEN- Configurable, high resolution, TFT
override touch panel suitable for panel mounting as manufactured by
Loytec model LVIS-3ME15-Gx or approved equal. Provide all mounting
hardware.
12.
INDUCTIVE ROTATION SENSOR – Proximity type sensor for rotation
detection (Heat Recovery Wheel), 120-3000 cyc/min, 24..240VAC/DC, 10
mm nominal sensing range. Sensor shall be XSAV12801 as
manufactured by Schneider Electric or approved equal. Include all
manufacturers’ recommended mounting hardware.
NAMEPLATES
1.
Nameplates – Provide engraved phenolic or micarta nameplates for all
equipment, panels, components, and field devices furnished. Each
nameplate shall identify the items, such as “Main HW Flow-DI3”.
Nameplates shall be 1/8 thick, blue, with white center core, and shall be
minimum 1” x 3”, with minimum ¼” high block lettering. Nameplates for
devices smaller than 1” x 3” shall be attached to adjacent surface. Panels
located in ceilings shall be identified with a nameplate screwed (1/4” selftaping), to the ceiling grid. Equipment identification shall be as shown in
the equipment schedules on the drawings. Nameplates shall be applied
to surfaces with mechanical fasteners. Each nameplate shall identify the
function for each device. (Example: RTU-C1 ATC, PRV-4 ATC, Etc.)
Labels for Terminal Equipment shall include the signage # of the
room/space served. (Example VAV-RM100, FCU-RM201) The signage
number shall be the final room number, not the room number from the
construction documents.
15900-40
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
2.
Temperature Sensors – Provide labels on all temperature sensors to
identify the equipment served and the location of the sensor.
Abbreviations used to identify the equipment shall be as listed in
paragraph 1.06 DEFINITIONS. Room numbers used to identify the
locations of sensors shall be the same as those used for the approved
signage schedule, not from construction documents, and shall be
obtained from the Construction Manager, Design and Construction
Services. (Example: VRF-RM 101 FCU-RM100, UV-RM103, etc).
Sensors for equipment not located in classrooms, such as rooftop units,
air-handling units, power roof ventilators, shall be labeled as shown in the
equipment schedules on the drawings. (Example: RTU-C1, AHU-A3,
PRV-4, etc.). Labels shall be BROTHER type “P-TOUCH”, clear tape
with upper case letters, black printing and shall be on the outside of the
sensor cover. The inside of the sensor cover shall also be identified with
permanent marker.
3.
Actuators – Provide labels on all zone damper actuators in multi-zone
units to identify the room the damper serves. When more than one room
is served by a zone damper, the room with the temperature sensor
located in it shall be the referenced room. Room numbers shall be the
same as those used for lockset keying purposes, not from construction
documents, and shall be obtained from the Construction Manager, Design
and Construction Services.
The actuators shall be labeled with
permanent markers.
4.
Warning Labels – In addition to the above, each item of motorized
equipment and associated starters, including air handling units, exhaust
fans, return fans, supply fans, pumps, cooling towers, condensers and
similar equipment shall be provided with a label with wording as follows:
WARNING
EQUIPMENT IS REMOTELY CONTROLLED AND
MAY STOP OR START UNEXPECTEDLY
Lettering shall be red on white base with integral adhesive and peel-off
backing for attaching to existing equipment and shall be minimum 1” x 3”.
The Contractor shall submit a sample of the label material with the
lettering sizes noted for approval prior to installation. Contractor shall
thoroughly clean each item of motorized equipment and starters prior to
application of labels.
Y.
TESTING EQUIPMENT
15900-41
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 1.
2.03
SECTION 15900
Contractor shall test and calibrate all signaling circuits of all field devices
to ascertain that required digital and accurate analog signals are
transmitted, received, and displayed at system operator terminals, and
make all repairs and recalibrations required to complete test. Contractor
shall be responsible for test equipment required to perform these tests
and calibrations. Test equipment used for testing and calibration of field
devices shall be at least twice as accurate as respective field device (e.g.,
if field device is +/-0.5% accurate, test equipment shall be +/-0.25%
accurate over same range).
DISTRIBUTED DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
General: The functional intent of this specification is to allow application of
manufacturer’s standard products while maintaining the integrity and reliability of
the control functions. A Primary Control Unit as specified below is generally fully
featured and customizable whereas the Application Specific Controller refers to a
more cost effect unit designed for lower end applications. Specific requirements
indicated below are required for the respective application.
B.
Standalone Capability: Each Control Unit shall be capable of performing the
required sequence of operation for the associated equipment. All physical point
data and calculated values required to accomplish the sequence of operation
shall originate within the associated IFID/CU with only the exceptions
enumerated below. Listed below are physical point data and calculated values,
which shall allowed to be obtained from, or stored by other IFIDs/Cus via LAN.
1.
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
a.
The system provided shall incorporate hardware resources
sufficient to meet the functional requirements of these
Specifications.
The Contractor shall include all items not
specifically itemized in these Specifications that are necessary to
implement, maintain, and operate the system in compliance with
the functional intent of these Specifications.
b.
The system shall be configured as a distributed processing
network(s) capable of expansion as specified below.
c.
The system architecture shall consist of a single Local Area
Network (LAN) or multi-leveled LANs all which support Control
Units, both local and Remote Operator Interfaces, and LAN
Interface Devices, and Remote Communication Devices. The
following indicates a functional description of the system structure.
1)
Host LAN: high speed LAN used for supervision, and
communication between primary controlling LANs. This
shall be the Owner’s existing WAN. This network shall be
used for communication between buildings only. This
15900-42
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
contractor shall coordinate with division 16 contractor and
owner to provide network connectivity as required. Modem
connections
to
buildings
are
unacceptable.
Communications within building shall be provided by
contractor.
2)
Primary Controller LAN:
High-speed peer-peer LAN
generally used to connect Primary Control Units (PCUswhich generally control central plant equipment, air
handling units) and LANIDs. Acceptable technologies
include:
Arcnet (IEEE802.4), Ethernet (IEEE802.3),
TP/FT-10 (LonTalk), ASHRAE 135-2004 (BACnet).
3)
Secondary Controller LAN: Polling or peer-peer LAN to
support connection of Terminal Control Units/application
specific controllers to LANIDs. Acceptable technologies
include:
ASHRAE 135-2004 (BACnet), Arcnet
(IEEE8802.4), Ethernet (IEEE8802.3), MS/TP, TP/FT-10
(LonTalk), EIA-485 at a minimum speed of 19.2 kbps.
4)
Auto Answer/Auto Dial communications to remote operator
interfaces shall be supported to allow communication with
all levels of the system.
d.
Dynamic Data Access: Any data throughout any level of the
network shall be available to and accessible by all other devices,
IFIDs/Cus, LANIDs, and OI’s, whether directly connected or
connected remotely.
e.
The communication speed between the IFIDs/Cus, LAN interface
devices, and operator interface devices shall be sufficient to
ensure fast system response time under any loading condition.
Contractor shall submit guaranteed response times with shop
drawings including calculations to support the guarantee. In no
case shall delay times between an event, request, or command
initiation and its completion be greater than the following
requirements. Contractor shall reconfigure LAN as necessary to
accomplish these performance requirements.
1)
5 seconds between a Level 1 (critical) alarm occurrence
and enunciation at operator workstation
2)
10 seconds between a Level 2 alarm occurrence and
enunciation at operator workstation
3)
20 seconds between and a Level 3-5 alarm occurrence
and enunciation at operator workstation
15900-43
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS C.
SECTION 15900
4)
10 seconds between an operator command via the
operator interface to change a setpoint and the
subsequent change in the controlling IFIDs/CU
5)
5 seconds between an operator command via the operator
interface to start/stop a device and the subsequent
command to be received at the controlling IFIDs/CU
6)
10 seconds between a change of value or state of an input
and it being updated on the operator interface
7)
10 seconds between an operator selection of a graphic
and it completely painting the screen and updating at least
10 points
f.
Polling Secondary LANs shall operate at a minimum baud rate of
19200 BPS. Application and node restrictions for polling LANs
based on application and communication speed are specified in
“Distributed Direct Digital Controllers and Control System”.
g.
The operator interface shall provide for overall system
supervision, operator interface, management report generation,
alarm annunciation, remote monitoring and back up and loading of
software and data to be stored in either Flash, EEPROM or
EPROM Memory.
h.
The primary and secondary control units shall monitor, control,
and provide the field interface for all points specified. Each PCU or
ASC shall be capable of performing all specified energy
management functions, and all Distributed Digital Control (DDC)
functions, independent of other PCUs or ASCs and operator
interface devices as more fully specified in “Distributed Direct
Digital Controllers and Control System”.
i.
Interruptions or fault at any point in the primary or secondary LAN
shall not interrupt communications between other nodes on the
network. If a primary LAN is severed, two separate networks shall
be formed and communications within each network shall continue
uninterrupted.
j.
All line drivers, signal boosters, and signal conditioners etc. shall
be provided as necessary for proper data communication.
PRIMARY CONTROL UNITS (PCUs) ( PCU’s shall control HW/CHW/CW
systems, AHU, ERU,MAU and RTU equipment)
1.
PCUs shall provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC functions.
Each unit shall have its own internal RAM, non-volatile memory,
microprocessor, A/D converters, regulated power supply, power
15900-44
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
conditioning equipment, wiring terminal strips, ports for connection of
operating interface devices, and control enclosure. PCUs shall be
programmable from an operator workstation, portable operators terminal,
or hand held operating device. PCU shall contain sufficient memory for
all specified global control strategies, user defined reports and trending,
communication programs, and central alarming.
2.
PCUs shall communicate over the primary high speed, local area
network. They shall perform overall system coordination, accept control
programs, perform automated HVAC functions, control peripheral devices
and perform all necessary mathematical and logical functions. The
controller shall be a microprocessor. PCUs shall share information with
the entire network of PCUs and ASCs for full global control. Each
controller shall permit multi-user operation from multiple workstations and
portable operator terminals connected either locally or over the Primary
network.
3.
Each PCU must be capable of standalone direct digital operation utilizing
its own processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, A to D conversion,
real time clock/calendar and voltage transient and lightning protection
devices. All PCUs shall be protected from any memory loss due to a loss
of power by storing data using non-volatile memory.
4.
The PCU shall provide for point mix flexibility and expandability. This
requirement may be met via either a family of expander boards, modular
input/output configuration, or a combination thereof. Any expansion
devices shall connect directly to the microprocessor bus and receive the
same functionality as that on the main board. Alternatively slave panels
may be used for point expansion provided they are located immediately
adjacent to the PCU.
5.
All PCU point data, algorithms and application software shall be
modifiable from the Operator Workstation.
6.
Each PCU shall execute application programs, calculations, and
commands via a microprocessor resident in the PCU. The database and
all application programs for each PCU shall be stored in non-volatile or
battery backed volatile memory within the PCU and shall be able to
upload/download to/from the Operator Workstation.
Application
programs, calculations, and commands resident in other controllers, with
the exception of global information (further defined in this specification),
and transmitted to the PCU for execution is unacceptable.
7.
PCU shall provide buffer for holding alarms, messages, trends etc.
8.
Each PCU shall be connected to the Primary LAN communicating to/from
other PCUs. Each PCU shall include self-test diagnostics, which allow
15900-45
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
the PCU to automatically alarm any malfunctions, or alarm conditions that
exceed desired parameters as determined by programming input.
9.
Each PCU shall contain both software and hardware to perform full
DDC/PID control loops.
10.
Input-Output Processing
a.
Digital Outputs (DO): Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24
VAC or VDC, 1 amp maximum current, each configurable as
normally open or normally closed. Each output shall have a HOA
switch to allow for override and a LED to indicate the operating
mode of the output. Position feed back to the controller shall be
provided to indicate when the switches are not in the automatic
mode. Status shall be monitored and will inform any time
automatic control operation has been inhibited. Override activity
shall be collected for reports. If these HOA switches are not
provided on the main board they shall be provided via isolation
relays within the control enclosure. Each DO shall be discrete
outputs from the PCU’s board (multiplexing to a separate
manufacturer’s board is unacceptable). LCD displays at the PCU
that incorporate output override capability shall be acceptable in
lieu of HOA switches with LED’s. Systems which require the use
of a laptop computer to be connected to the device for override
capability are not acceptable. Provide suppression to limit
transients to acceptable levels.
b.
Analog Inputs (AI): O-5VDC, 0-10VDC; 0-20VDC, and 0-20 mA.
Provide signal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for
each input. Each input shall be a discrete input to the PCU’s board
(multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable
unless specifically indicated otherwise). A/D converters shall have
a minimum resolution of 12 bits.
c.
Digital Inputs (DI): Monitor dry contact closures. Accept pulsed
inputs of at least one per second. Source voltage for sensing
shall be supplied by the PCU and shall be isolated from the main
board. Software multiplexing of an AI and resistors may only be
done in non-critical applications and only with prior approval of
Architect/Engineer.
d.
Universal Inputs (UI-AI or DI): To serve as either AI or DI as
specified above.
e.
Electronic Analog Outputs (AO): voltage mode, 0-5VDC and 010VDC; current mode (4-20 mA). Provide zero and span
calibration and circuit protection. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)
analog via a DO and transducer is acceptable unless stipulated
15900-46
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
otherwise for a given control loop.
Transducer shall be
programmable for normally open, normally closed, or hold last
position and shall allow adjustable timing. Each DO shall be
discrete outputs from the PCU’s board (multiplexing to a separate
manufacturers board is unacceptable). D/A converters shall have
a minimum resolution of 10 bits.
11.
f.
Pulsed Inputs: Capable of counting up to 8 pulses per second with
buffer to accumulate pulse count. Pulses shall be counted at all
times.
g.
A communication port for operator interface through a terminal
shall be provided in each PCU. It shall be possible to perform all
program and database back-up, system monitoring, control
functions, and PCU diagnostics through this port. Standalone
PCU panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without
interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected
printers, or workstations.
h.
Each PCU shall be equipped with loop tuning algorithm for
precise, proportional, integral, derivative (PID) control. Loop
tuning tools provided with the Operator workstation software are
acceptable. In any case, tools to support loop tuning must be
provided such that P, I, and D gains are automatically calculated.
i.
All analog output points shall have a selectable failure setpoint.
The PCU shall be capable of maintaining this failure setpoint in
the event of a system malfunction that causes loss of PCU control,
or loss of output signal, as long as power is available at the PCU.
The failure setpoint shall be selectable on a per point basis.
j.
Slope intercepts and gain adjustments shall be available on a per
point basis.
PCU Power Loss:
a.
Upon a loss of power to any PCU, the other units on the network
shall not in any way be affected.
b.
Upon a loss of power to any PCU, the Direct Digital Control
software, the database parameters, and all other programs and
data shall be backed-up and stored in either Flash, EEPROM and
EPROM memory.
c.
Upon restoration of power within the specified battery backup
period, the PCU shall resume full operation without operator
intervention. The PCU shall automatically reset its clock such that
proper operation of any time dependent function is possible
15900-47
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
without manual reset of the clock. A return to normal message
shall indicate the PCU is back under normal power. All monitored
functions shall be updated.
12.
D.
PCU Failure:
a.
Primary LAN Data Transmission Failure: PCU shall continue to
operate in stand alone mode.
PCU shall store loss of
communication alarm along with the time of the event. All control
functions shall continue with the global values programmable to
either last value or a specified value. Peer PCU’s shall recognize
the loss, report alarm (level one) and reconfigure the LAN.
b.
PCU Hardware Failure: PCU shall cease operation and terminate
communication with other devices. All outputs shall go to their
specified fail position.
13.
Each PCU shall be equipped with firmware resident self-diagnostics for
sensors and be capable of assessing an open or shorted sensor circuit
and taking an appropriate control action (close valve, damper, etc.).
14.
PCU’s may include LAN communications interface functions for
controlling secondary controlling LANs. Refer to System Communications
Devices for requirements if this function is packaged with the PCU.
15.
A minimum of four levels of password protection shall be provided for
direct connection to each PCU.
APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC) (ASCs shall control FCU, UV,
FTR, VAV,EF, BCU, Terminal devices etc…)
1.
ASCs shall include Unitary Controllers (UC), and Terminal Equipment
Controllers (TEC), which provide intelligent, limited stand-alone control of
HVAC equipment. Each unit shall have its own internal RAM, non-volatile
memory and shall continue to operate all local control functions in the
event of a loss of communications on the secondary LAN. Refer to stand
alone requirements by application specified in Section 2.03. In addition, it
shall be able to share information with every other PCU and ASC on the
entire network.
2.
Each ASC shall include self-test diagnostics that allow the ASC to
automatically relay to the PCU, LAN Interface Device or workstation, any
malfunctions or abnormal conditions within the ASC or alarm conditions of
inputs that exceed desired parameters as determined by programming
input.
15900-48
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
3.
Application programs, calculations, and commands resident in other
controllers, with the exception of global information (further defined in this
specification), and transmitted to the ASC for execution is unacceptable.
4.
Each ASC shall contain both software and hardware to perform full
DDC/PID control loops.
5.
Each ASC must be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation utilizing
its own processor, non-volatile memory, input/output, minimum 10 bit A to
D conversion, voltage transient and lightning protection devices. All
volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least fifty (50) hrs with a
battery life of five years.
6.
All point data; algorithms and application software within an ASC shall be
modifiable from the Operator Workstation, Portable Operators Terminal
and Hand Held Device.
7.
ASC Input-Output Processing
a.
Digital Outputs (DO): Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24
VAC or VDC, 1 amp maximum current. Each configurable as
normally open or normally closed. Each DO shall be discrete
outputs from the ASC’s board (multiplexing to a separate
manufacturer’s board is unacceptable). Provide suppression to
limit transients to acceptable levels.
b.
Analog Inputs (AI): O-5VDC, 0-10VDC; 0-20VDC, and 0-20 mA.
Provide signal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for
each input. Each input shall be a discrete input to the SCU’s board
(multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable
unless specifically indicated otherwise). A/D converters shall have
a minimum resolution of 10 bits.
c.
Digital Inputs (DI): Monitor dry contact closures. Accept pulsed
inputs of at least one per second. Source voltage for sensing
shall be supplied by the ASC and shall be isolated from the main
board.
d.
Universal Inputs (UI-AI or DI): To serve as either AI or DI as
specified above.
e.
Electronic Analog Outputs (AO) as required by the application:
voltage mode, 0-5VDC and 0-10VDC; current mode (4-20 mA).
Provide zero and span calibration and circuit protection. Pulse
Width Modulated (PWM) analog via a DO and transducer is
acceptable unless stipulated otherwise for a given control loop.
Transducer shall be programmable for normally open, normally
closed, or hold last position and shall allow adjustable timing.
15900-49
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
Each AO shall be discrete outputs from the ASC’s board
(multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable).
D/A converters shall have a minimum resolution of 8 bits.
2.04
SYSTEM COMMUNICATION DEVICES
A.
LOCAL AREA NETWORK Interface Devices (LANID)
1.
The LANID shall be a microprocessor-based communications device,
which acts as a gateway between the Host LAN, Primary LAN, Secondary
LAN, an operator interface, or printer. These may be provided within a
PCU or as a separate device. LANID shall automatically report alarm
conditions, download trend data, etc. as required elsewhere in these
specifications.
2.
The LANID shall perform information translation between the Host LAN,
Primary LAN, and the Secondary LAN, supervise communications on a
polling secondary LAN, and shall be applicable to systems in which the
same functionality is not provided in the PCU. In systems that the LANID
is a separate device, it shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM,
battery, real time clock, communication ports and, power supply as
specified for a primary control unit. Each gateway shall be mounted in a
lockable enclosure.
3.
Each LANID shall support interrogation, full control, and all utilities
associated with all PCU’s on the Primary LAN, all ASCs connected to all
secondary LANs under the Primary LAN, and all points connected to
those PCUs and ASCs.
4.
Upon loss of power to a LANID, all programs and data shall be stored in
either Flash, EEPROM or EPROM memory.
5.
LANIDs shall support communications to the remote OW and POT.
LANID functionality shall support
a.
Automatic dial out to report alarm conditions, download trend data,
etc. as required elsewhere in these specifications.
b.
multiple retries for unsuccessful connection
c.
multiple number dial out
d.
buffering of incoming and outgoing data
e.
automatic answer
f.
uploading and downloading of control unit programs
15900-50
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 6.
2.05
SECTION 15900
The LANID shall be transparent to control functions and shall not be
required to control information routing on the Primary LAN
SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING
A.
CU SOFTWARE
1.
2.
PCU Software Residency: Each PCU as defined below shall be capable
of control and monitoring of all points physically connected to it. All
software including the following shall reside and execute at the PCU
a.
Real Time Operating System software
b.
Real Time Clock/Calendar and network time synchronization
c.
PCU diagnostic software
d.
LAN Communication software
e.
Direct Digital Control software
f.
Alarm Processing and Buffering software
g.
Energy Management software
h.
Data Trending, Reporting, and Buffering software
i.
I/O (physical and virtual) database
j.
Remote Communication Software unless its resident in a LANID
on the primary LAN.
ASC Software Residency: Each ASC as defined below shall be capable
of control and monitoring of all points physically connected to it. As a
minimum, software including the following shall reside and execute at the
ASC. Other software to support other required functions of the ASC may
reside at the master PCU or LANID with the restrictions/exceptions per
application provided in “Distributed Direct Digital Controllers and Control
System”.
a.
Real Time Operating System software
b.
Real Time Clock/Calendar and network time synchronization
c.
ASC diagnostic software
d.
LAN Communication software
15900-51
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
e.
Direct Digital Control software
f.
Control software applicable to the unit it serves shall support a
single mode of operation
g.
I/O (physical and virtual) database.
3.
Stand Alone Capability: PCU/ASC shall continue to perform all functions
independent of a failure in other PCUs/ASCs or other communication
links to other PCUs/ASCs. Trends and runtime totalization shall be
retained in memory. Runtime totalization shall be available on all digital
input points that monitor electric motor status.
4.
Operating System: CU’s shall include a real time operating system
resident in ROM. This software shall execute independently from any
other devices in the system. It shall support all specified functions. It
shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override
of control functions
5.
Network Communications: Each CU shall include software that supports
the networking of CUs on a common communications trunk that forms the
respective LAN. Network support shall include the following:
6.
a.
Primary LAN shall be a high speed peer to peer network designed
and optimized for control system communication. If a Primary
LAN communications trunk is severed, PCUs shall reconfigure
into two separate LANs and continue operations without
interruption.
b.
CU communication software shall include error detection,
correction, and re-transmission to ensure data integrity.
c.
Operator/System communication software shall facilitate
communications between other PCUs, all subordinate ASCs,
gateways and LAN Interface Devices or Operator Workstations.
Software
shall
allow
point
interrogation,
adjustment,
addition/deletion, and programming while the CU is on line and
functioning without disruption to unaffected points. The software
architecture shall allow networked CUs to share selected physical
and virtual point information throughout the entire system.
Point Database: Point/system database creation and modification shall
be via a user friendly, menu driven program. System software shall
support virtual or logic point (points not representing a physical I/O)
creation. Software shall support virtual points with all services specified
herein. Database software shall support definition of all parameters
specified in Part III of this section for a given point type. If database does
15900-52
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
not support all these parameters software module shall be created and
attached to the points which accomplish the respective function.
7.
Diagnostic Software: CU software shall include diagnostic software that
checks memory and communications and reports any malfunctions.
8.
Alarm/Messaging Software: CUs software shall support alarm/message
processing and buffering software as more fully specified below.
9.
Application Programs: CUs shall support and execute application
programs as more fully specified below. All Direct Digital Control
software, Energy Management Control software, and functional block
application programming software templates shall be provided in a
“ready-to-use” state, and shall not require (but shall allow) Owner
programming. Line programs shall supply preprogrammed functions to
support these energy management and functional block application
algorithms. All functions shall be provided with printed narratives and/or
flow diagrams to document algorithms and how to modify and use them.
All programs shall reside in the controller serving the equipment being
controlled.
10.
Security: CU software shall support multiple level password access
restriction as more fully specified below.
11.
Direct Digital Control: CU shall support application of Direct Digital
Control Logic. All logic modules shall be provided pre-programmed with
written documentation to support their application. Provide the following
logic modules as a minimum:
12.
a.
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Control with analog, PWM
and floating output
b.
Two Position control (Hi or Low crossing with deadband)
c.
Single Pole double throw relay
d.
Delay Timer (delay on make, delay on break, and interval)
e.
Hi/Low Selection
f.
Reset or Scaling Module
g.
Logical Operators (And, Or, Not, Xor)
Psychrometric Parameters: CU software shall provide preprogrammed
functions to calculated and present psychrometric parameters (given
temperature and relative humidity) including the following as a minimum:
Enthalpy, Wet Bulb Temperature,
15900-53
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 13.
Updating/Storing Application Data: Site specific programming residing in
volatile memory shall be uploadable/downloadable from an operator
interface connected either locally, to the primary LAN or remotely via Host
LAN. Initiation of an upload or download shall include all of the following
methods; manually, scheduled, and automatically upon detection of a loss
or change.
14.
Restart: System software shall provide for orderly shut down upon loss of
power and automatic restart upon power restoration. Volatile memory
shall be retained, outputs shall go to programmed fail (open, closed, or
last) position. Equipment restart shall include a user definable time delay
on each piece of equipment to stagger the restart. Loss of power shall be
alarmed at operator interface indicating date and time.
15.
Misc. Calculations: System software shall automate calculation of
psychometric functions, calendar functions, kWh/kW and flow
determination and totalization from pulsed or analog inputs, curve-fitting,
look-up table, input/output scaling, time averaging of inputs and A/D
conversion coefficients.
16.
PID Loop Tuning: Contractor shall provide a software tool for tuning PID
loops. This tool shall preferably be provided as an integral part of the
system software or graphic software package. Loop response trends
shall be used to calculate suggested P, I, and D gains in the units used in
the manufacturers PID algorithms. The following are acceptable:
17.
B.
SECTION 15900
a.
Manual Tuning that accepts either automatic or manual amplitude
and response time inputs and calculates PID gains for automatic
or manual entry into control module.
b.
Self Tuning algorithm that periodically upsets the process and
automatically adjusts the PID gains.
c.
Adaptive Tuning that continuously monitors natural disturbances
in the process and adjusts the PID gains accordingly. This
algorithm must include a user definable noise band to inhibit
adjustments.
Trending Software: CU software shall support alarm/message processing
and buffering software as more fully specified below.
PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION
1.
The application software shall be user programmable.
2.
This specification generally requires a programming convention that is
logical, easy to learn, use, and diagnose. General approaches to
15900-54
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
application programming shall be provided by one, or a combination, of
the following conventions:
3.
C.
a.
Database Creation: provide templates customized for point type,
to support input of individual point information.
b.
Graphical Block Programming: Manipulation of graphic icon
“blocks”, each of which represents a subroutine, in a
functional/logical manner forming a control logic diagram. Blocks
shall allow entry of adjustable settings and parameters via pop-up
windows. Provide a utility that shall allow the graphic logic
diagrams to be directly compiled into application programs. Logic
diagrams shall be viewable either off-line, or on-line with real-time
block output values.
c.
Functional Application Programming: Pre-programmed application
specific programs that allow/require-limited customization via “fill
in the blanks” edit fields. Typical values would be setpoints gains,
associated point names, alarm limits, etc.
d.
Line Programming: Text programming in a language similar to
BASIC or FORTRAN designed specifically for HVAC control.
Subroutines or functions for energy management applications,
setpoints, and adjustable parameters shall be customizable, but
shall be provided preprogrammed and documented.
Provide a means for testing and/or debugging the control programs both
off-line and on-line.
ENERGY MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS
1.
System shall perform all of the following energy management routines via
preprogrammed function blocks or template programs.
a.
Time of Day Scheduling
b.
Calendar Based Scheduling
c.
Holiday Scheduling
d.
Countywide Schedules
e.
Individual Building Schedules
f.
Snow Day Schedules and Override Schedules
g.
Custom Group/Area/Zone Scheduling
15900-55
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 2.
D.
E.
SECTION 15900
h.
Temporary Schedule Overrides
i.
Optimal Start/Optimal Stop-based on space temperature offset,
outdoor air temperature, and building heating and cooling
capacitance factors as a minimum
j.
Night Setback and Morning Recovery Control with ventilation only
during occupancy.
k.
Night Purge ventilation cycle to use the cool night/morning air to
pre-cool the space prior to occupancy.
l.
Economizer Control (enthalpy)
m.
Peak Demand Limiting / Load Shedding
n.
Dead Band Control
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for
operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator
customization. All programs shall reside in the controller serving the
equipment being controlled.
PASSWORD PROTECTION
1.
Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the
Owners authorized BAS Administrator to limit workstation control, display
and database manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each
user, based upon an assigned user name with a unique password.
2.
Passwords shall restrict access to all control units
3.
Each user name shall be assigned to a discrete access level. A minimum
of four levels of access shall be supported.
Alternatively, a
comprehensive list of accessibility/functionality items shall be provided for
enabling/disabling for each user. See Section 3.07.C.
4.
A minimum of 100 user names shall be supported.
5.
Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for the
access level assigned to their user name.
6.
User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be
provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving interface device
software on-line.
ALARM/MESSAGE REPORTING
15900-56
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 1.
SECTION 15900
Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarms
and messages to operator devices and memory files. Each PCU shall
perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize
operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic,
and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall a PCU’s ability to
report alarms be affected by either operator activity at an Operator
Workstation or local handheld device or by communications with other
panels on the network. To eliminate nuisance and invalid alarms and
messages, alarms and messages shall not be reported if the software
algorithm or point is inactive. See section 3.06 paragraph E line 9 for
alarms during the construction and warranty period.
a.
Alarm Descriptor: Each alarm or point change shall include the
point’s English language description, and the time and date of
occurrence. In addition to the alarm’s descriptor and the time and
date, the user shall be able to print, display and store an alarm
message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct
operator response.
b.
Alarm Prioritization: The software shall allow users to define the
handling and routing of each alarm by their assignment to discrete
priority levels. A minimum of five priority levels shall be provided.
For each priority level, users shall have the ability to enable or
disable an audible tone whenever an alarm is reported and
whenever an alarm returns to normal condition. Users shall have
the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each individual
alarm and for each priority level.
c.
Alarm Report Routing:
Each alarm priority level shall be
associated with a unique user-defined list of operator devices
including any combination of local or remote workstations, printers
and workstation disk files. All alarms associated with a given
priority level shall be routed to all of the operator devices on the
user-defined list associated with that priority level. For each
priority level, alarms shall be automatically routed to a default
operator device in the event that alarms are unable to be routed to
any operator device assigned to the priority level.
d.
Auto-Dial Alarm Routing: For alarm priority levels that include a
remote workstation (accessed by modem) or alpha-numeric
pagers as one of the listed reporting destinations, the PCU shall
initiate a call to report the alarm, and shall terminate the call after
alarm reporting is complete. System shall be capable of multiple
retries and buffer alarms until a connection is made. If no
connection is made, system shall attempt connection to an
alternate dial-up workstation. System shall also be able to dial
multiple pagers upon alarm activation.
15900-57
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS e.
F.
SECTION 15900
Alarm Acknowledgment: For alarm priority levels that are directed
to a workstation screen, an indication of alarm receipt shall be
displayed immediately regardless of the application in use at the
workstation, and shall remain on the screen until acknowledged by
a user having a password that allows alarm acknowledgment.
Upon acknowledgment, the complete alarm message string
(including date, time, and user name of acknowledging operator)
shall be stored in a selected file on the workstation hard disk.
TRENDING
1.
The software shall be capable of displaying historical data in both a
tabular or graphical format. The requirements of this trending capability
shall include the following:
a.
All points listed in the Input/Output summaries and all physical
points and calculated variables shall be trended.
b.
In the graphical format, the trend shall plot at least 4 different
values for a given time period superimposed on the same graph.
The 4 values shall be distinguishable by using unique colors. In
printed form the 4 lines shall be distinguishable by different line
symbology. Displayed trend graphs shall indicate the engineering
units for each trended value.
c.
The time period for each trend shall be for a minimum of seven
days and shall be user selectable.
d.
The trended value range shall be user selectable.
e.
All points shall be included in series for commissioning purposes.
2.
Control Loop Performance Trends: CUs incorporating PID control loops
shall also provide high resolution sampling capability in less than six
second increments for verification of control loop performance.
3.
Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the CU, and
uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall
occur based upon user-defined interval, manual command, or when the
trend buffers become full. Trended data shall include one row of
descriptive column headings with all subsequent data in a contiguous
stream. All trend data shall be available one of the following disk file
formats:
a.
Quote and Comma separated text
b.
Microsoft ACCESS database
15900-58
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS c.
G.
H.
I.
SECTION 15900
Microsoft EXCEL spreadsheet.
TOTALIZATION
1.
The software shall support totalizing analog, digital, and pulsed inputs
and be capable of accumulating, storing, and converting these totals to
engineering units used in the documents. These values shall generally
be accessible to the Operator Interfaces to support management
reporting functions.
2.
Totalization of electricity use/demand shall allow application of totals to
different rate periods, which shall be user definable.
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULING
1.
Provide a graphic utility for user-friendly operator interface to adjust
equipment operating schedules.
2.
Scheduling feature shall include multiple seven-day master schedules,
plus holiday schedule, each with start time and stop time. Features shall
also include countywide schedules, individual building schedules, custom
group schedules within a building consisting of multiple pieces of
equipment, snow day schedules, and override schedules. All schedules
shall be individually editable for each day and holiday.
3.
Scheduling feature shall allow for each individual equipment unit to be
assigned to one of the master schedules.
4.
Timed override feature shall allow an operator to temporarily change the
state of scheduled equipment. An override command shall be selectable
to apply to an individual unit, all units assigned to a given master
schedule, or to all units in a building. Timed override shall terminate at
the end of an operator selectable time, or at the end of the scheduled
occupied/unoccupied period, whichever comes first. A password level
that does not allow assignment of master schedules shall allow timed
override features.
5.
A yearly calendar feature shall allow assignment of holidays and
automatic reset of system real time clocks for transitions between daylight
savings time and standard time.
OPERATOR INTERFACE GRAPHIC SOFTWARE (Graphical User Interface)
1.
Graphic software shall facilitate user friendly interface to all aspects of the
System Software specified above as well as in sections 3.07 and 3.08
(System Software And Programming). The intent of this specification is to
require a graphic package that provides for intuitive operation of the
systems without extensive training and experience. Graphic software
15900-59
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
shall make maximum use of colors, graphics, icons, embedded images
and dynamic symbols. It shall facilitate logical and simple system
interrogation, modification, configuration, and diagnosis. This interface
shall provide the web browser the same view of the system, in terms of
graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, trends, point override etc., and the
same interface methodology. Functions of this interface shall be identical
when accessed via the web based browser and shall not require the use
of proprietary software.
2.
The home screen of the graphic software shall have a “button icon” which
shall provide a Web gateway to the VRF control software in the VRF
central controller.
3.
Graphic software shall support multiple simultaneous screens to be
displayed and resizable in a “Windows” like environment and shall include
a tree view (similar to “Windows Explorer”). All except text entry functions
shall be executable with a mouse.
4.
Graphic software shall provide for multitasking such that third party
programs can be used while the Operator Workstation Software is on line.
Provide the ability to alarm graphically even when operator is in another
software package.
5.
Operating system software shall be Windows, the latest release and
version supported by the manufacturer.
6.
The software shall allow for Owner creation of user defined, color graphic
displays of geographic maps, building plans, floor plans and mechanical
and electrical system schematics. These graphics shall be capable of
displaying all point information from the database including any attributes
associated with each point (e.g., engineering units, etc.). In addition,
operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from
a graphic through the use of the mouse. The user shall have the ability to
import AutoDesk AutoCAD Release 2006 (or newer version) generated
files as background displays.
7.
Screen Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access
the various system graphic screens via a graphical penetration scheme
by using the mouse to select from menus or “button” icons. Each graphic
screen shall be capable of having a unique list of other graphic screens
that are directly “linked” through the selection of a menu item or button
icon.
8.
Dynamic Data Displays:
Dynamic physical point values shall
automatically updated at a minimum frequency of 3 updates per minute
without operator intervention. Point value fields shall be displayed with a
color code depicting normal, abnormal, override and alarm conditions.
15900-60
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
9.
Point Override Feature: Each displayed point shall be individually
enabled/disabled to allow mouse driven override of digital points or
changing of analog points. Such overrides or changes shall occur in the
control unit, not just in the workstation software. The graphic point
override feature shall be subject to password level protection. Points that
are overridden shall be reported as an alarm, and shall be displayed in a
coded color. The alarm message shall include the operator’s user name.
A list of points that are currently in an override state shall be available
through menu selection.
10.
Dynamic Symbols: Provide a selection of standard symbols, which
change in appearance based on the value of an associated point.
11.
a.
Analog symbol: Provide a symbol that represents the value of an
analog point as the length of a line or linear bar.
b.
Digital symbol: Provide symbols such as switches, pilot lights,
rotating fan wheels, etc. to represent the value of digital input and
output points as appropriate. Animation for any operating
machinery shall only represent digital inputs, and not outputs, in
order to provide an accurate equipment status.
c.
Point Status Color: Graphic presentations shall indicate different
colors for different point statuses. (For instance, green = normal,
red = alarm, gray (or???) for non-response.
d.
Use dynamic zone background colors (thermograph) to indicate
thermal comfort based on temperature offset from setpoint on the
zone graphic display screens. The colors are as follows:
Red
Dark Blue
5 DEG F or more below setpoint
4 DEG F below setpoint
Light Blue
2 DEG F below setpoint
Green
Satisfied
Yellow
2 DEG F above setpoint
Orange
Red
4 DEG f above setpoint
5 DEG F or more above setpoint
Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be
provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete new or existing
system graphic displays.
a.
The contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens
and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g.
fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), mechanical system
components (e.g., pumps, chillers, cooling towers, boilers, etc.),
15900-61
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal
reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.
b.
J.
1)
Define symbols
2)
Position items on graphic screens
3)
Attach physical points, virtual points or setpoints to a
graphic
4)
Define background screens
5)
Define connecting lines and curves
6)
Locate, orient and size descriptive text
7)
Define and display colors for all elements
8)
Establish correlation between symbols or text and
associated system points or other displays.
9)
Create hot spots or link triggers to other graphic displays or
other functions in the software.
WORKSTATION DATA REPORTING AND STORAGE
1.
K.
The graphic development package shall use a mouse to allow the
user to perform the following:
Workstation software shall support Microsoft Dynamic Data Exchange
(DDE) and Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to facilitate historical
data access from popular spreadsheet and database programs (e.g.,
Microsoft EXCEL and ACCESS). Data storage format shall be directly
importable to the application without manual parsing. Programs external
to the graphic software are acceptable to meet this requirement.
REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER WORKSTATION GRAPHIC SOFTWARE
1.
Remote graphic operator software shall provide all the functionality
specified for the local graphic software. It shall communicate with the
Primary and Host LAN via a hardwired connection.
2.
Software shall not require graphic images to be sent across the Host LAN
or phone lines. Graphic images shall reside on the remote operator
workstation hard drive. Terminal emulation software such as PC
Anywhere, Carbon Copy, ProComm, PolyPM II, etc. are not acceptable.
15900-62
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS L.
M.
3.
Software shall be capable of connecting to the Host LAN or initiating
phone calls to the primary LAN, upon user command, to perform all
specified functions. Software shall be capable of connecting to the
primary LAN in accordance with user-programmed time schedules to
upload trend and report data. Software shall be capable of receiving calls
or connections from the primary LAN in accordance with userprogrammed time schedules to report alarms and upload trend and report
data. Software shall automatically terminate the connection whenever all
applications requiring communication are closed.
4.
The combination of Remote Personal Computer Workstation Software,
PCU software, and LAN Interface Device software shall provide the ability
for seamless automatic upload of trend data and reports to the remote
workstation. The feature shall allow for disk storage of continuous
historical trend and report data without gaps or duplications.
TAB & CX PORTABLE OPERATORS TERMINAL
1.
Contractor shall provide a portable operator’s terminal or hand held
device to facilitate TAB and calibration. This device shall support all
functions and allow querying and editing of all parameters required for
proper calibration and start up.
2.
Connections shall be provided local to the device being calibrated. For
instance, for VAV boxes, connection for the operator’s terminal shall be at
the wall sensor.
SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
1.
PART 3.
3.01
SECTION 15900
During warranty period, contractor shall be responsible to maintain,
change, modify, correct, and optimize all software upon request by the
Owner. During this period, when software problems cause comfort or
equipment problems, contractor shall implement corrective measures
within two hours of notification by Owner.
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
INSPECTION
1.
B.
Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS
15900-63
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS C.
SECTION 15900
1.
General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings.
2.
Refer to additional requirements in other sections of this specification.
3.
On projects which have phased construction the BAS for each phase
shall be functional prior to completion and turnover of the phase, network
connectivity shall be established and graphics shall be remotely available.
If the location of the master IFID/CU is not yet established a protected
temporary location will be chosen in which to mount the master IFID/CU
until such time that the permanent location is established. A temporary
network connection will be provided (coordinate with owner).
IFID/CU QUANTITY AND LOCATION
1.
Individual Digital Control Stations (DCS) are referenced to indicate
allocation of points to each DCS and DCS location. Digital control
stations shall consist of one or multiple IFIDs/CUs to meet requirements
of this specification.
2.
Where a DCS is referenced, Contractor shall provide at least one
IFID/CU, and additional IFIDs/Cus as required, in sufficient quantity to
meet the requirements of this Specification. Restrictions in applying CUs
are specified in “Distributed Direct Digital Controllers and Control System”
(Section 15900, Paragraph 2.03B & 2.03C). If the control contractor
wishes to further distribute panels to other locations, control contractor is
responsible for extending power to that location. Furthermore, Contractor
is responsible for ensuring adequate locations for the panels that do not
interfere with other requirements of the project and maintain adequate
clearance for maintenance access and to comply with local codes. DCS’s
shall be installed in locations, as specified in Section 15900, Paragraph
2.03.E, CONTROL PANELS. DSC’s provided by the equipment
manufacturer and factory installed within the equipment control enclosure
are acceptable. Locate panels for roof top units in areas shown on the
drawings. Locate panels in ceilings for unit ventilators, fan coil units, fin
tube radiation, terminal devices, and heating coils. Panels located in
ceilings shall be identified with a nameplate attached with ¼” head,selftapping screw to the ceiling grid or access door identifying the equipment.
Mounting control panels for VAV boxes on the VAV box itself is
acceptable. See additional identification requirements in Section 15900,
Paragraph 2.02 x, NAMEPLATES. No DCS’s may be located in other
areas without prior approval of the Owner.
3.
Stand Alone Functionality:
Provide IFIDs/CUs so that all points
associated with and common to one air handling unit or other complete
stand alone system/equipment shall reside within a single control unit.
See related restriction in “Distributed Direct Digital Controllers and Control
System”. When referring to the IFID/CU as pertains to the standalone
15900-64
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
functionality, reference is specifically made to the processor. One
processor shall execute all the related functions. I/O point expander
boards may be added to expand the point capacity of the IFID/CU.
Where any I/O point expansion devices are connected to the main
controller board via a communication sub LAN, that communication sub
LAN shall be dedicated to that controller and include no other devices
including secondary controllers. The sub-LAN communication speed
shall be the same or higher than the main controller LAN.
4.
Contractor shall locate DCSs as referenced. It is the Contractor’s
responsibility to provide enough IFIDs/Cus to ensure a completely
functioning system, according to the point list and sequence of
operations.
5.
Contractor shall provide a minimum of the following:
6.
a.
One DCS (including at least one PCU) in the central control panel.
b.
One IFID/CU for each air handler located in applicable mechanical
room.
c.
One IFID/CU shall be provided for each terminal unit unless
indicated otherwise.
IFID/CU Mounting – see Section 15900, paragraph 2.02F
a.
IFIDs/CUs that control equipment located above accessible
ceilings shall be mounted in an enclosure or on the equipment and
shall be rated for plenum use within a suitable enclosure.
b.
IFIDs/CUs that control equipment located in occupied spaces shall
be mounted above the ceiling and shall be rated for plenum use
within a suitable enclosure or factory mounted on unit.
c.
IFIDs/CUs that control equipment mounted in a mechanical room
may either be mounted on the equipment or on the wall of the
mechanical room within a locking enclosure.
d.
IFIDs/CUs that control equipment mounted outside shall be
located in a mechanical/utility space within a locking enclosure.
e.
IFIDs/CUs shall be suitable for operation in the ambient
temperatures that may be encountered in the location they are
installed. CU’s located in ambient conditions must be approved by
the Owner. CU’s that are not suitable shall be replaced and at no
cost to the Owner.
15900-65
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS f.
D.
3.02
IFIDs/CUs mounted above ceilings shall be mounted no higher
than 12” above the ceiling grid to the bottom of the control
enclosure. All IFIDs/CUs mounted above ceilings shall have a
nameplate attached to the ceiling grid.
SURGE PROTECTION
1.
E.
SECTION 15900
The Contractor shall furnish and install power supply surge protection,
filters, etc. for proper operation and protection of all PCUs, SCUs operator
interfaces, printers, and other hardware and interface devices. All
equipment shall be capable of handling voltage variations 10% above or
below measured nominal value, with no affect on hardware, software,
communications, and data storage.
CONTROL POWER SOURCE AND SUPPLY
1.
Power wiring from dedicated circuit breaker at each 120 Volt panel to a
junction box shall be provided by the Division 16 Contractor. Electrical
circuits for use by the BAS Contractor are shown on the electrical
drawings. This Contractor is responsible for all power wiring from this
junction box to control panels, devices, controllers and components for a
complete and operating system. If the control contractor wishes to further
distribute panels to other locations, control contractor is responsible for
extending power to that location. Furthermore, contractor is responsible
for ensuring adequate locations for the panels that do not interfere with
other requirements of the project and maintain adequate clearance for
maintenance access.
2.
All other electrical wiring, conduit, devices, transformers, components,
etc. required for a complete BAS system including interlocking of
controllers, equipment etc. shall be provided under this Section.
Mechanical equipment supplied power transformers may be utilized if
they are factory furnished and designed to be used with the control
system. Mechanical equipment supplied power transformers shall not be
utilized for non factory supplied control systems.
BASIC MATERIALS, INTERFACE DEVICES, AND SENSORS
A.
INSPECTION
1.
B.
Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS
1.
General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings. Install
15900-66
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
electrical components and use electrical products complying with
requirements of National Electric Code and all local codes.
2.
Control Wiring: The term “control wiring” is defined to include providing of
wire, cable, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting
and connection of electric control devices.
a.
Wiring System: Install complete wiring system for electric control
systems. Conceal wiring except in mechanical rooms and areas
where other conduit and piping are exposed. Wiring run in walls
shall be run in electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
Install in
accordance with National Electrical Code and Division 16 of this
Specification. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and
doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie
and support conductors neatly. Wiring shall be run without splices.
Any and all junction box covers shall be marked “ATC”. Relays
controlling equipment located above ceiling shall be located a
maximum of 6” above acoustical ceiling tile. In areas without
acoustical ceilings, relays shall be located a maximum 12’ above
finished floor. Wiring terminations which do not terminate at a
terminal strip shall be made using insulated compression type
connectors. Wiring terminations which do not terminate at a
terminal strip shall be made using insulated compression type
connectors.
b.
Control Wiring Conductors: Install control wiring conductors,
without splices between terminal points, color-coded. Install in
neat workmanlike manner, securely fastened.
Install in
accordance with National Electrical Code and Division 16 of this
Specification.
c.
Communication wiring, signal wiring and low voltage control wiring
shall be installed separate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts.
Signal wiring shield shall be grounded at IFID/CU end only, as
recommended by the IFID/CU manufacturer.
d.
Primary LAN Communication wiring shield shall be terminated as
recommended by IFID/CU manufacturer and owners active hub
manufacturer.
e.
Communication wiring shall be run without splices.
f.
Install all control wiring external to panels in electric metallic tubing
or raceway. However, communication wiring, signal wiring and
low voltage control wiring may be run without conduit in
concealed, accessible locations if noise immunity is ensured.
Accessible locations are defined as areas inside mechanical
equipment enclosures, such as heating and cooling units,
15900-67
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
instrument panels etc.; suspended ceilings with easy access. Tie
and support conductors neatly on “J” hooks. Conductors shall be
pulled tight and be installed as high as practically possible in
ceiling cavities. Conductors shall not be installed between the top
cord of a joist or beam and the bottom of roof decking. Contractor
shall be fully responsible for noise immunity and rewire in conduit
if electrical or RF noise affects performance.
g.
Number-code or color-code conductors appropriately for future
identification and servicing of control system. Code shall be as
indicated on approved installation drawings.
h.
Provide power disconnect switch in the interior for all main control
panels.
3.
Electric conduit ( EMT/IMC ect.) shall not be run exposed on the floor
slab.
4.
Control Valves:
Install so that actuators and wiring and tubing
connections are accessible. Where possible, install with valve stem axis
vertical, with operator side up. Where vertical stem position is not
possible, or would result in poor access, valves may be installed with
stem horizontal, if in accordance with manufacturer’s written
recommendation. Do not install valves with stem below horizontal, or
down. Adjust and verify proper valve stroke operation to assure proper
shut-off and full flow.
5.
Liquid immersion wells shall be installed on or below the horizontal axis of
the pipe. Temperature sensor shall be installed with thermally conductive
paste within the well.
6.
Space Sensors:
Install in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. The cover of the sensor shall be attached by
tamperproof fasteners to the recessed mounting box or plate. Provide
insulated base. Classrooms shown with multiple units shall have one
room sensor except those with folding partitions shall have separate
sensors for each unit. Mount all sensors at 4’-0” AFF. Sensors located in
Cafeterias, Gymnasiums, storage rooms and electric rooms shall be
mounted at 5’-6” AFF. Sensors in corridors and group bathrooms shall be
mounted at 6’-8” AFF. Provide welded wire enclosures securely mounted
to the wall in gymnasiums, locker rooms, gang toilets, and corridors, for
all temperature, humidity and CO₂sensors. Sensors located in storage
rooms and electric rooms, provide a locking metal enclosure. Submit a
sample space sensor for approval prior to installation.
7.
Averaging Temperature Sensors: Cover no more than one square feet
per linear foot of sensor length. Adequately support with coil clips.
15900-68
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
8.
Relative humidity sensors: Provide element guard as recommended by
manufacturer for high velocity installations.
9.
Provide pressure snubbers for water pressure sensing devices and
switches where necessary to eliminate pressure transients causing
unwanted control signal noise or switch operation.
10.
Differential Pressure Switch (Air & Water):
Adjust switches as
recommended by the manufacturer and so that setpoint is within the
operating range of the device being sensed.
11.
Differential Pressure Transmitters: Provide four valve bypass
arrangement to protect against over pressure damaging the transmitter.
Provide pressure gauges after the isolation valves, but before the
transmitter device to assist in device calibration.
12.
Flow Switches: Where possible, install in a straight run of pipe at least 6
diameters in length to minimize false indications.
13.
Current Switches for Motor Status Monitoring: Adjust so that setpoint is
below minimum operating current and above motor no load current.
14.
Air Flow Measuring Stations (AFM) shall be installed under the applicable
air distribution or air handling equipment section under the direction of
Section 15900 Contractor who shall be fully responsible for the proper
installation of the AFM. Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer’s
suggested installation requirements and recommendations. The AFM
shall be installed in an unobstructed straight length of duct (except those
installations specifically designed for installation in fan inlet). Any
deviations from the recommended minimum installation requirements
shall be approved by the Owner prior to installation.
15.
Supply Duct / Building Pressure Transmitters:
a.
General: Install pressure tips, per manufacturer’s installation
instructions, or with at least 4 “round equivalent” duct diameters of
straight duct with no takeoffs upstream. Install static pressure tips
securely fastened with tip facing upstream in accordance with
manufacturer’s installation instructions. Locate the transmitter
within a weather tight section of the equipment served at an
accessible location to facilitate service / calibration. Extend piping
from transmitter to pickup device.
b.
VAV System ‘Down-Duct’ Transmitters: Locate static pressure
tips approximately 2/3 of the way to the most remote terminal in
the air system with no branch takeoffs within five feet. Locate the
transmitter within a weather tight section of the equipment served
15900-69
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
at an accessible location to facilitate service / calibration. Extend
piping from transmitter to pickup device.
c.
3.03
SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES
A.
3.04
Building Static Transmitter: Locate static remote pickup as shown
or within zone away from any appurtenance which could affect
reading. Locate the transmitter within a weather tight section of
the equipment served at an accessible location to facilitate service
/ calibration. Extend piping from transmitter to pickup device.
INSTALLATION
1.
Set up and configure Operator Workstations at the school and at the
Energy Management Department Offices, Sideburn Maintenance Support
Facility and the Edison Maintenance Support Facility. Install all software
and verify that the systems are fully operational via Host LAN.
2.
Set up portable operator terminals and configure them as remote and/or
local workstations. Install all software and verify that the systems are fully
operational via Host LAN and dial-up connection from a remote location,
as well as directly connected at IFIDs/Cus.
3.
Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A.
General:
1.
Provide the operating sequence described in detail in the following
paragraphs. The sequence shall not be deviated from unless a proposed
change is submitted with justifying reasons approved by FCPS and a
Change Order is issued. Inability of the proposed control system logic to
produce the desired sequence is not grounds for approval of a change.
Furnish adequate programming capability for the sequence outlined
below.
2.
Equipment Response Time – Operating program shall be arranged so
that system components such as valve, damper and VAV box operators
shall require no more than 12 minutes elapse time to complete a totally
closed to totally open position cycle if space conditions are such that
continued movement in one direction is necessary.
3.
System operation printouts shall be accurate and sufficiently detailed to
establish that the specified sequence is being affected.
15900-70
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
4.
Control shall be direct digital Owner programmable microprocessor
located in the field, unless otherwise specified.
5.
Equipment listed in the following Input/Output Summaries shall have the
necessary electric and electronic equipment, material and supplies added
to accomplish the indicated actions. Present time clock functions shall be
done by the IFID.
6.
Provide all equipment listed in the following input/output summaries with
individual override switches located in the custodians office or as shown
on drawings.
7.
All points indicated in the Input/Output summaries shall be displayed on
the proper computer graphic display screen.
8.
Scheduling Terminology: When control zones are scheduled throughout
the day, the following defines the terminology used:
a.
Day or Occupied Period: period of time when the building is in use
and occupied. This period is defined as follows:
Elementary Schools – 6:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday – Friday
SACC zone – 6:00a.m. to 6:30 p.m. Monday - Friday
Middle Schools – 6:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday – Friday
High and Secondary Schools
With Adult ED – 6:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. Monday – Friday
Without Adult ED – 6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Monday – Friday
Exclude all County holidays. Systems shall be fully operational
throughout this period and ventilation air shall be continuously
introduced.
b.
Night or Unoccupied period: period of time when the building or
zone is not in use and unoccupied. Ventilation air shall not be
introduced. Systems shall be off except to maintain a night
setting.
c.
Occupancy During Construction: New equipment shall run during
the period of time when spaces are turned over. This period is
defined as follows:
d.
All Schools – 6:00 a.m. to 12:00 p.m. Monday – Saturday.
e.
Systems shall be fully operational throughout this period and
ventilation air shall be continuously introduced.
15900-71
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
9.
Where any sequence or occupancy schedule calls for more than one
motorized unit to start simultaneously, the BAS start commands shall be
staggered by 5 second (adj.) intervals to minimize inrush current.
10.
Alarm messages specified throughout the sequences are assigned to
discrete priority levels. Priority levels dictate the handling and destination
of alarm reports, and are defined in Section 3.07.E.
11.
All setpoints, deadbands, PID gains, throttling ranges, requests etc. shall
be adjustable and shall be easily modifiable, with the proper password
level, from the operator interface or via a function block menu. For all
setpoints, deadbands, throttling ranges, requests etc., it is unacceptable
to have to modify programming statements to change the setpoint.
12.
Each analog output shall include, as an integral function, a ramp control
algorithm that limits the rate of change of an output on an increase in
value or a decrease in value. These values shall be adjustable from the
graphic screen.
13.
Where reset action is specified in a sequence of operation, but a reset
schedule is not indicated on the drawings, one of the following methods
shall be employed:
a.
Contractor shall determine a proportional (P) fixed reset schedule,
which shall result in stable operation and shall maintain the
primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance.
Reset range maximum and minimum values shall limit the setpoint
range.
b.
A floating reset (utilizing integral (I)) algorithm shall be used which
increments the secondary variable setpoint (setpoint of control
loop being reset) on a periodic basis to maintain primary variable
setpoint. The recalculation time and reset increment shall be
chosen to maintain the primary variable within the specified
maximum allowable variance.
Reset range maximum and
minimum values shall limit the setpoint range.
c.
Primary variable shall control the devices directly using a PID
feedback control loop without resetting the secondary variable.
However, the control devices shall still modulate as necessary to
maintain upper and lower limits on the secondary variable.
Proportional band, integral gain, and derivative term shall be
selected to maintain the primary variable within the specified
maximum allowable tolerance while minimizing overshoot and
setting time. Reset range maximum and minimum values shall
limit the setpoint range. Contractor shall gain prior approval for
implementing this method of reset.
15900-72
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
14.
A floating reset algorithm shall be used which increments the secondary
variable (e.g., supply air temperature or duct pressure) setpoint on a
periodic basis to maintain primary variable (e.g. space temperature)
setpoint. The reset increment shall be determined by the quantity of
“need heat” or “need cool” requests from individual ASC’s. An ASC’s
“need heat” virtual point shall activate whenever the zone’s space
temperature falls below the currently applicable (occupied or unoccupied)
heating setpoint minus a fixed value that is adjustable. An ASC’s “need
cool” virtual point shall activate whenever the zone’s space temperature
rises above the currently applicable (occupied, unoccupied, or economy)
cooling setpoint plus a fixed value that is adjustable. The recalculation
time and reset increment shall be chosen to maintain the primary variable
within the specified maximum allowable variance while minimizing
overshoot and setting time. Reset range maximum and minimum values
shall limit the setpoint range.
15.
Where a supply air temperature, duct pressure, or differential water
pressure setpoint is specified to be reset by valve or damper position of
the zone or zones calling for the most cooling/heating, the following
method shall be employed:
16.
a.
A floating reset algorithm shall be used which increments the
secondary variable (e.g., supply air temperature, pipe or duct
pressure) setpoint on a periodic basis to maintain primary variable
(e.g. cooling valve, heating valve, damper position) setpoint of
85% open. The reset increment shall be calculated based on the
average position of the quantity of the worst (most open
valve/damper) zone(s) as specified. The recalculation time, reset
increment and control device position influence shall be chosen to
maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum
allowable variance while minimizing overshoot and setting time.
The BAS analog output value shall be acceptable as indicating the
position of the control device.
b.
Rather than continuously calculating the average of the quantity of
worst valve/damper positions, a method similar to the one
described above may be employed whereby the “need heat” or
“need cool” virtual point shall increment by one unit each time a
zone’s valve/damper position rises to greater than 95%. The
quantity of “need heat” or “need cool” points shall then be the
basis for reset.
Where “prove operation” of a device (generally controlled by a digital
output) is indicated in the sequence, it shall require that the BAS shall,
after an adjustable time delay after the device is commanded to operate
(feedback delay), confirm that the operational via the status input. If the
status point does not confirm operation after the time delay or thereafter
for an adjustable time delay (debounce delay) while the device is
15900-73
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
commanded to run, an alarm shall be enunciated audibly and via an
alarm message at the operator interface and print at the alarm printers. A
descriptive message shall be attached to the alarm message indicating
the nature of the alarm and actions to be taken. Contractor shall provide
messages to meet this intent.
17.
Program adjustable maximum rates of change for increasing and
decreasing output from the following analog output points:
a.
Speed control of variable speed drives (acceleration 0 to 100
percent speed in 30 seconds, deceleration 100 to 0 percent speed
in 10 seconds, unless noted otherwise)
b.
Chiller supply water setpoint reset (limit to ±1°F per 5 minutes
unless noted otherwise)
c.
Chiller demand limit to 10% per minute unless noted otherwise)
18.
Wherever a value is indicated to be dependent on another value (i.e.:
setpoint plus 5°F) BAS shall use that equation to determine the value.
Providing a virtual point that the operator must set is unacceptable. In
this case, three virtual points shall be provided: One to store the
parameter (5°F); one to store the setpoint; and one to store the value that
is the result of the equation.
19.
Sequenced Heating and Cooling: BAS shall control the heating and
cooling coils, mechanical cooling and heating and air side economizer as
detailed for the particular equipment. Program logic shall directly prohibit
the mechanical cooling and heating to be energized as well as the
heating source to be energized and economizer damper to be open (or
above minimum) simultaneously unless specifically noted. This does not
apply to cooling and reheat valves that are used simultaneously for
dehumidification.
20.
Mixed Air Low Override: BAS shall override the signal to the OA damper
via a proportional only loop to maintain a minimum mixed air temperature
of 45°F (adj.) (loop shall output 0% at 45°F which shall be passed to the
output via a software programmed low selector).
21.
Smoke Safety: Upon indication of smoke by a smoke detector, the
mechanical unit shall be de-energized by a hardwired interlock. OA
dampers cooling valve and heating valve shall spring to the failsafe
position.
22.
Abbreviations used in the input/output summaries and sequences:
ACWC
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLER
15900-74
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AHU
SECTION 15900
AIR HANDLING UNIT (INCLUDES CONSTANT VOLUME
AND VARIABLE VOLUME)
AHS
AIR HANDLING SYSTEM
BCU
BLOWER COIL UNIT
CEF
CABINET OR CEILING EXHAUST FAN
CHW
CHILLED WATER
CONF
CONFIRMATION
C.R.
CLASSROOM
CT
COOLING TOWER
CU
CONDENSING UNIT
CUH
CABINET UNIT HEATER
CZ
CONTROL ZONE
DAT
DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
DPS
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
ECON
ECONOMIZER
EF
EXHAUST FAN
ERU
ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT
EBB
ELECTRIC BASE BOARD HEATER
ECH
ELECTRIC CABINET UNIT HEATER
EDH
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER
EWH
ELECTRIC WALL HEATER
EW
ENTHALPY WHEEL
FTR
FIN TUBE RADIATOR
FCU
FAN COIL UNIT
15900-75
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15900
FZ STAT
FREEZESTAT
HEX
HEAT EXCHANGER
HW
HOT WATER
HRW
HEAT RECOVERY WHEEL
IFID
INTELLIGENT FIELD INTERFACE DEVICE
MAU
MAKE-UP AIR UNIT
O.A.
OUTSIDE AIR
OAT
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
PRV
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
RAHU
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNIT
RAT
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE
RTU
ROOFTOP UNIT (INCLUDES CONSTANT VOLUME AND
VARIABLE VOLUME)
RTW
ROOFTOP UNIT WITH ENTHALPY WHEEL
RWC
REMOTE HOT WATER COIL
SF
SUPPLY FAN
SC
SELF-CONTAINED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
TEMP
TEMPERATURE
TW
TOWER WATER
TWU
THRU-WALL UNIT
UH
UNIT HEATER
UV
UNIT VENTILATOR
UV
UTILITY VENT SET
VAL
VALANCE
15900-76
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS VAVTU
VAV TERMINAL UNIT
VFD
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
VRF
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW
WCWC
WATER COOLED WATER CHILLER
WSHP
WATER SORCE HEAT PUMP
SECTION 15900
Notes:
1)
Provide the required number of inputs and outputs in each
classroom or space to comply with the sequence of operations
specified in Part 3, Execution, Paragraph 3.04 whether or not they
are shown in the summaries.
2)
When equipment is supplied and wired by the factory as a
complete product, the factory points shall be acceptable for
monitoring and control provided that all aspects of this
specification and sequences are met.
3)
The setpoints listed in the following sequences are recommended
values. All setpoints shall be field adjusted during the
commissioning period to meet the requirements of the actual field
conditions.
15900-77
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
ACTION
ANALOG
INPUTS
1.
SECTION 15900
SPACE/EQUIP
LOCATION
RESPONSE
REMARKS
NORTH WALL
O. A.
TEMP/HUMIDITY
NOTE #5
2.
BOILER ROOM
HW SUPPLY
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #1
3.
BOILER ROOM
HW RETURN
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #1,13
4.
BOILER
HW SUPPLY
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #3
5.
BOILER ROOM
CHW SUPPLY
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #1,17
6.
BOILER ROOM
CHW RETURN
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #1,17
7.
BOILER ROOM
TW SUPPLY
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #1,3
8.
BOILER ROOM
TW RETURN
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #1,3
9.
SPACE TEMP.
1 EACH ROOM
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #2
10.
HYDRONIC LOOP
SUPPLY
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #19
11.
HYDRONIC LOOP
RETURN
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #20
12.
HYDRONIC LOOP
DIFF PRESS
NOTE #16
13.
SPACE TEMP.
1 EACH ROOM
TEMP. ADJUST
NOTE #2
14.
MAU/ERU
RETURN DUCT
HUMIDITY
NOTE #3
15.
RTW/RTU/AHU/MAU/
KFP/UV/FCU/ERU/ RWC/
BCU/VAV TERMINAL UNIT/
WSHP
SUPPLY AIR
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #3
16.
RTU/AHU/RTW
RETURN AIR
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #3
17.
RTU/AHU/RTW
MIXED AIR
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #3
18.
AHU/RTU
SUPPLY AIR
STATIC PRESS
NOTE #3
19.
FAN STARTER
FLOW CONF.
NOTE #3 18
20.
RTW/RTU/AHU/MAU/MZU/
ERU
BOILER ROOM
PUMPS
FLOW CONF.
NOTE #4
21.
RTU/MAU/CT
FAN STARTER
FLOW CONF.
NOTE #3
22.
CT
PUMP STARTER
FLOW CONF
NOTE #3
ON WALL
CO 2 CONC.
NOTE #3,6
23.
GYM/CAFETERIA
AUDITORIUM /LECTURE
PIPING (2
LOCATIONS)
15900-78
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15900
24.
AHU/ RTU/RTW
25.
RTW/RTU/MAU/ERU
26.
RTW/RTU/MAU/ERU
HOT GAS RE-HEAT COIL
27.
RTW/RTU/MAU/ERU
EVAPORATOR COIL
28.
RTU
DUCT HEATER
29.
RTW/MAU/ERU
COMPRESSOR
30.
RTW/MAU/ERU
GAS VALVE
31.
VRF SYSTEM
EACH ROOM
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #21
ON WALL
TEMPERATURE
NOTES#3,22
32.
EBB/EWH,ECH,EDH, PRV,
CEF
OUTSIDE AIR
HOT GAS RE-HEAT
DISCHARGE AIR
FLOW
NOTE #3
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #3
PERCENTAGE OF
MODULATION CAPABILITY
LEAVING EVAPORATOR
COIL TEMPERATURE
DISCHARGE AIR
TEMPERATURE
PERCENTAGE OF
MODULATION CAPABILITY
PERCENTAGE OF
MODULATION CAPABILITY
NOTE #3
NOTE #3
NOTE #3
NOTE #3
NOTE #3
33.
COMM ROOM
ON WALL
TEMPERATURE
NOTE #8
34.
WALK-IN-REFRIGERATOR
ON WALL
TEMP/ALARM
NOTE #9
35.
WALK-IN-FREEZER
ON WALL
TEMP/ALARM
NOTE# 10
36.
CT BASIN
TOWER BASIN
TEMP/ALARM
NOTE#3,16
37.
RTW/RTU
ON WALL
HUMIDITY
NOTE#3
38.
AHU
RETURN AIR
HUMIDITY
NOTE#3
39.
RTW/AHU/ERU
EXHAUST AIR
TEMP.
NOTE#3
TEMP.
NOTE#3
TEMP.
NOTE #3
DIFF PRESS
NOTE#16
CFM
NOTE#3
STATIC PRESS
NOTE #3
ENTHALPY WHEEL
40.
RTW/AHU/ERU
DISCHARGE (TWO
LOCATIONS)
ENTHALPY WHEEL
41.
ERU/RTW
INLET (TWO
LOCATIONS)
42.
HW / CHW SYSTEM
43.
VAV TERMINAL UNIT
44.
BLDG STATIC PRESS.
RECIRCULATING
PUMP INLET
IN BOX
15900-79
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
45.
(TEMPERED AND HOT
PIPING SYSTEM
TEMP
NOTE #1
WATER)
46.
AT IFID
SPARES
47.
HUMIDIFIER
ON WALL
(5% OF TOTAL
POINTS)
HUMIDITY
NOTE #3
NOTES:
1.
BOILER RM. OR MECHANICAL ROOM SEE PLANS.
2.
ONE PER CLASSROOM OR SPACE.
3.
ONE PER UNIT.
4.
TRANSDUCER – ONE PER PUMP.
5.
MOUNT ON SHADED WALL WITH SHIELD.
6.
READOUT IN PARTS PER MILLION WITH 4-20 mA SIGNAL.
7.
MZU’S SHALL HAVE ONE PER EACH ZONE.
8.
SPACE TEMPERATURE MONITOR.
9.
ANNUNCIATE A LEVEL 1 ALARM IF TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE 40°F (ADJ.)
FOR MORE THAN 10 MINUTES (ADJ.).
10.
ANNUNCIATE A LEVEL 1 ALARM IF TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE 15°F (ADJ.)
FOR MORE THAN 30 MINUTES (ADJ.).
11.
PROVIDE THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS IN EACH
CLASSROOM OR SPACE TO COMPLY WITH THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
SPECIFIED IN PART 3, EXECUTION, PARAGRAPH 3.04.
12.
ALL RELAYS WITH THE EXCEPTIONS OF BOILERS, HOT WATER PUMPS,
DOMESTIC HOT WATER PUMPS, AND HEAT TRACE, SHALL BE WIRED
NORMALLY OPEN.
13.
LOCATE ON SYSTEM SIDE OF 3-WAY VALVE.
14.
LOCATE SENSOR 2/3 DISTANCE OF LONGEST DUCT RUN.
15.
ANNUNCIATE A LEVEL ONE ALARM IF BASIN TEMPERATURE DROPS BELOW
32DEG F FOR MORE THAN FIFTEEN MINUTES.
16.
AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.
17.
PROVIDE FOR PRIMARY SYSTEM, SECONDARY SYSTEM AND ALL ZONES.
18.
ONE PER FAN (SUPPLY, EXHAUST).
19.
LOCATE IN THE DISCHARGE OF RECIRCULATING PUMPS.
15900-80
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15900
20.
LOCATE IN RETURN TO BOILER ROOM, BEFORE BOILERS OR COOLING TOWER.
21.
THROUGH BACnet INTERFACE TO EACH VRF UNIT.
22.
FOR PRV AND CEF UNITS LABELLED “SENSOR” ON EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE.
15900-81
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
ACTION
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
1.
SPACE/EQUIP
BOILER ROOM
SECTION 15900
LOCATION
3 WAY HW VALVE MODULATION
BOILER SYSTEM
HEATING WATER
CONTROL PANEL
SETPOINT
3.
RTU/AHU/MAU/ERU
4.
2.
RESPONSE
REMARKS
NOTE #1
MODULATION
NOTE #1
HW VALVE
MODULATION
NOTE #1
AHU/MAU/ERU
CHW VALVE
MODULATION
NOTE #1
5.
FCU/UV/BCU/VAL
HW VALVE
MODULATION
NOTE #1
6.
FCU/UV/BCU/VAL
CHW VALVE
MODULATION
NOTE #1
7.
FTR/ RWC
HW VALVE
MODULATION
NOTE #1
8.
BOILER ROOM
3 WAY TW VALVE MODULATION
NOTE #1
9.
VAV
DAMPER
MODULATION
NOTE #1
10.
RTW/RTU/MAU/AHU/ERU
O. A. DAMPER
MODULATION
NOTE #2
11.
RTW/RTU/MAU
RELIEF DAMPER
MODULATION
NOTE #2
12.
AHU/RTU
VFD
MODULATION
NOTE #1
13.
VAVTU
HW VALVE
MODULATION
NOTE #1
14.
VFD
MODULATION
NOTE#1
15.
AHU/ERU
OA BYPASS
MODULATION
NOTE#1
16.
AHU/ERU
EX AIR BYPAS
MODULATION
NOTE#1
17.
RTW/RTU/MAU/ERU
MODULATION
NOTE#1
18.
RTW/RTU/ERU/KFP
GAS HEAT
MODULATION
NOTE#1
19.
RTW/ERU/MAU
COMPRESSOR
MODULATION
NOTE#1
20.
VRF SYSTEM
EACH ROOM
21.
ACWC/WCWC
22.
AT IFID
EF/PUMP/CT
FAN/HRW
HOT GAS REHEAT
VALVE
CHILLER RETURN
TEMP
SPARES
15900-82
TEMP
SETPOINT
RESET
NOTE #5
NOTE#1
(5% OF TOTAL
POINTS)
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 23.
ERU/RTW
SECTION 15900
ENTHALPHY
WHEEL
ENABLE
NOTE #1
MODULATION
NOTE #1
ENTHALPY WHEEL
24.
ERU/RTW
SUPPLY FAN
RETURN FAN
NOTES:
1.
ONE PER UNIT AND DEVICE.
DRAWINGS.
BOILER ROOM OR MECHANICAL ROOM. SEE
2.
ONE PER UNIT ECONOMIZE CYCLE.
3.
PROVIDE THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS IN ECAH
CLASSROOM OR SPACE TO COPLY WITH THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
SPECIFIED IN PART 3, EXECUTION, PARAGRAPH 3.04.
4.
ALL RELAYS WITH THE EXCEPTIONS OF BOILERS, HOT WATER PUMPS, AND
HEAT TRACE SHALL BE WIRED NORMALLY OPEN.
5.
THROUGH BACNet INTERFACE TO EACH VRF UNIT.
15900-83
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15900
ACTION
DIGITAL
INPUTS
SPACE/EQUIP
LOCATION
RESPONSE
REMARKS
1.
BOILER ROOM
BOILERS
STATUS
NOTE #1
2.
MAIN IFID
ZONEOVERRIDE
STATUS
NOTE #3
3.
MAIN IFID
BOILERS
ALARM
NOTE #4,5
4.
MAIN IFID
ACWC
ALARM
NOTE #4
5.
MAIN IFID
WCWC
ALARM
NOTE #4
6.
MAIN IFID
CZ
ALARM
NOTE #3
FAN/UNIT
STATUS
NOTE #4
CHILLER/ACWC/
PUMP
WCWC
REQUEST
FAN
STATUS
NOTE #4
STATUS
NOTE#4
ROTATION
NOTE#4
ALARM
NOTE#4
ALARM
NOTE#4
STATUS
NOTE#4
UV/FCU/BCU/
7.
PRV’s/CEF’s/
ECH/EWH/EBB/
EDH
8.
9.
10.
MAIN IFID
UTILITY
VENTSET
CHILLER
CHILLER/ACWC/
WCWC
NOTE #4
HEAT RECOVERY
11.
EW/HRW
WHEEL MOTION
SENSOR
12.
13.
14.
AHU/RTU/MAU/
ERU/WSHP
AHU/RTU/MAU/
ERU/WSHP/RTW
CHW PUMP
HW COIL FZSTAT
CONDENSATE
OVERFLOW
SWITCH
SELECTOR
SWITCH
15900-84
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
15.
TW PUMP
SELECTOR
SWITCH
MAU/
SHUT OFF OR
ERU/WSHP/
BYPASS VALVE
BOILERS/CT
END SWITCH
17.
RTU/MAU/ERU
COMPRESSOR
18.
KW
16.
19.
DOMESTIC
RECIRC PUMP
ELEC. METER
SWITCHEGER
PUMP
SECTION 15900
STATUS
NOTE#4
STATUS
NOTE#4
STATUS
NOTE #8
PULSE
NOTE#4
STATUS
NOTE#4
ON/OFF
20.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
21.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
22.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
23.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
24.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
25.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
26.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
27.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
28.
AT IFID
SPARES
29.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
ALARM
NOTE #10
30.
VRF SYSTEM
COND. UNIT
ALARM
NOTE #4, 5
15900-85
STATUS
MODE STATE
FAN SPEED
STATE
AIR DIRECTION
STATE
ALARM SIGNAL
HIGH ROOM
TEMP ALARM
LOW ROM
TEMP ALARM
ERROR CODE
NOTE#9
NOTE#9
NOTE#9
NOTE#9
NOTE#9
NOTE#9
NOTE#9
NOTE#9
(5% OF TOTAL
POINTS)
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
NOTES:
1.
ONE PER UNIT, BURNER STATUS ON/OFF.
ROOM. SEE PLANS.
2.
ONE PER IFID.
3.
ONE PER CONTROL ZONE.
4.
ONE PER UNIT.
5.
ANY ALARM.
6.
PROVIDE THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS IN EACH
CLASSROOM OR SPACE TO COMPLY WITH THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
SPECIFIED IN PART 3, EXECUTION, PARAGRAPH 3.04.
7.
ALL RELAYS WITH THE EXCEPTIONS OF BOILERS, HOT WATER PUMPS, AND
HEAT TRACE SHALL BE WIRED NORMALLY OPEN.
8.
ONE PER COMPRESSOR. FOR UNITS WITH MULTIPLE COMPRESSORS.
9.
THROUGH BACnet INTERFACE TO EACH VRF UNIT.
10.
DIGITAL INPUT TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO SHUT DOWN ERU AND ASSOCIATED
VRF UNITS.
15900-86
BOILER ROOM OR MECHANICAL
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
ACTION
DIGITAL
OUTPUTS
1.
SECTION 15900
SPACE/EQUIP
LOCATION
RESPONSE
REMARKS
BOILER
PUMPS
STOP/START
NOTE #1
2.
ACWC
UNIT
STOP/START
NOTE #1
3.
WCWC
UNIT
STOP/START
NOTE #1
4.
CT
FAN
STOP/START
NOTE #1
5.
CT
SPRAY PUMP
STOP/START
NOTE #1
6.
CT
DAMPER
STOP/START
NOTE #1
7.
RTU/AHU/MAU/ /
ERU/KFP/RTW
FANS: SUPPLY /RETURN
STOP/START
NOTES
#1,4,5
8.
WSHP/MAU/ERU
OPEN/CLOSE
NOTE #1
9.
BOILERS/CT
SHUT OFF or BYPASS
VALVE
BYPASS VALVE
OPEN/CLOSE
NOTE #1
10.
CZ
PRV/UVS/EF
STOP/START
NOTE #2, 6
11.
CZ
FCU/TWU
STOP/START NOTES #2,4
12.
CZ
UV
STOP/START NOTES #2,4
13.
CZ
FAN
STOP/START
NOTE #2
UNIT
STOP/START
NOTE#1
/EXHAUST
ECH,
14.
EDH/EBB/EWH/
EUH
15.
RTU/RTW/ERU
HEAT
CYCLE
NOTE #3,11
16.
RTU/RTW/ERU
COOL
CYCLE
NOTE #3,11
17.
CU
COOL
CYCLE
NOTE #3,11
O. A. DAMPER
OPEN/CLOSE
NOTE #1
O. A. DAMPER
LOCKOUT
NOTE #1
UNIT
LOCKOUT
NOTE #1
RTU/AHU/MAU/
18.
19.
ERU/RTW
RTU/AHU/MAU/
ERU/RTW
20.
EUH, ECH, EWH,
EDH/EBB
15900-87
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 21.
RTU/AHU/MAU/
SECTION 15900
RELIEF AIR VENT
OPEN/CLOSE
NOTE #1
ERU/RTW
22.
ACWC/CT
HEAT TRACE
ON/OFF
23.
HRW
HEAT RECOVERY
ON/OFF
NOTE#1
WHEEL
24.
HEX
3-WAY HEX VALVE
OPEN/CLOSE
NOTE#1
25.
AT IFID
SPARES
SECURITY
NOTE#7
ALARM
26.
DOMESTIC
PUMP
STOP/START
NOTE#1
RECRIC.PUMP
27.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
ON/OFF
NOTE#10
28.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SET MODE
NOTE#10
29.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
PROHIBIT
NOTE#10
ON/OFF AT RM
CONTROL
30.
VRF SYSTEM
SYSTEM
PROHIBIT
NOTE#10
MODE AT RM
CONTROL
31.
AT IFID
SPARES
(5% OF TOTAL
POINTS)
32.
HUMIDIFIER
UNIT
STOP/START
NOTE #1
33.
VRF SYSTEM
UNIT
SHUTDOWN
NOTE #13
NOTES:
1.
ONE PER UNIT. BOILER ROOM OR MECHANICAL ROOM. SEE PLANS.
2.
EQUIPMENT WITHIN ZONE PER ZONE.
3.
PROVIDE A DIGITAL OUTPUT POINT FOR EACH HEATING AND COOLING STAGE.
CONNECT TO FACTORY BUILT-IN CONTROLS.
4.
RTU/AHU FAN LOCKOUT BY SMOKE DETECTOR SHALL BE INDEPENDENT OF
IFID CONTROL.
5.
PROVIDE TWO DIGITAL OUTPUT POINTS FOR SECURITY. (SECURITY 1 – COMM
RM; SECURITY 2 – FREEZER)
15900-88
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
6.
PROVIDE THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS IN EACH
CLASSROOM OR SPACE TO COMPLY WITH THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
SPECIFIED IN PART 3, EXECUTION, PARAGRAPH 3.04.
7.
ALL RELAYS WITH THE EXCEPTIONS OF BOILERS, HOT WATER PUMPS,
DOMESTIC HOT WATER PUMPS, AND HEAT TRACE, SHALL BE WIRED
NORMALLY OPEN.
8.
THROUGH BACnet INTERFACE TO EACH VRF UNIT.
9.
PROVIDE A DIGITAL OUTPUT POINT FOR EACH HEATING STAGE.
10.
FOR EACH UNIT CONTROLLED BY A SPACE SENSOR.
11.
SHUT DOWN UPON FIRE ALARM ACTIVATION.
B.
For renovation projects Existing equipment - Shall be replaced and in first class
operating condition to function as outlined below. Refer to drawings for
mechanical equipment to remain.
C.
Boiler-Burner Unit - The boiler with burners shall be manually selected for
operation and shall remain in constant operation during the heating season.
Burner shall cycle to maintain water temperature setting of the built-in aquastat.
The system hot water supply temperature shall be controlled by the boiler bypass three-way valve. Valve shall be modulated by the local indoor/outdoor
controller with 1 1/2 to 1 reset ratio. Controller shall reset the supply water
temperature in response to changes in outside temperatures at 20oF outside =
180oF Boiler Water.
D.
Hot Water Heating Zone Control
1.
Pump shall be controlled through the time clock function and energized
when the outside air temperature drops below 62oF through the central
control panel. The outside air sensor bulb shall be on a shaded wall,
insulating mounting and shall be protected by a sunshield. The outside air
sensor shall be wired directly to the master controller or the heating
controller.
2.
Time Clock Operation
a.
Day or Occupied Clock Position - Heating pump or pumps shall be
energized and operate constantly.
b.
Night or Unoccupied Clock Position - Heating pump shall be deenergized.
15900-89
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 3.
SECTION 15900
c.
In the night position, when any sensor falls below its setting of
55°F, it shall override the time clock function and return the
heating pump to operation until the sensor setting is satisfied.
d.
All hot water valves shall reference the associated heating water
pump run status and shall be enabled when pump status is active.
All hot water valves shall remain disabled when associated
heating water pump status is not active.
Freeze Protection unoccupied mode
a.
If the outside air temperature falls below 40Deg F the heating
pump shall energize to circulate heating water throughout the
building. Roof top air handling equipment heating valves shall
cycle to maintain a mixed air temperature of 45 Deg F (adj), the
fans shall remain off with the outside air dampers closed.
b.
On a continued fall of the outside air temperature to at or below 20
Deg F a programmed override shall run the building in the day
heating mode with all outside air dampers closed. Make up air
units shall remain off.
4.
Manual Operation - Timer override switches, one for each building control
zone, shall be indexed to move the heat pump or pumps to day operation.
This position shall override the time clock.
5.
Space temperature controls shall operate while pump is running.
6.
System Failures:
a.
Upon loss of communication associated equipment shall maintain
space temperature.
b.
Should any type of hot water system failure occur (i.e. boilers,
pumps, hot water reset) all outside air dampers shall close, all
exhaust fans, PRV’s and 100% Outside Air units shall turn off.
c.
When any unit is off, all spring return chill water valve and outside
air damper actuators shall fail closed, all hot water valve actuators
shall fail open via a hard wired interlock thru the supply fan
auxiliary contacts. All hot water valve actuators for rooftop air
handling units shall remain active to maintain a mixed air
temperature of 45* (adj.) when the outside air temperature is at or
below 40* deg F.
The time delay for pump changeover shall be one minute.
15900-90
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
7.
The two primary pumps shall operate utilizing a lead/lag strategy. The
lead pump shall run first. On failure of the lead pump, the lag pump shall
run and the lead pump shall remain active. For systems equipped with
VFD’s On decreasing differential pressure, the lag pump shall stage on
and run in unison with the lead pump to maintain differential pressure
setpoint. The Fail Safe of the VFD driven hot water pumps shall be
accomplished by wiring the Stop / Start relay normally closed. The signal
shall be from 0 volt to 10 volts with 0 volt equals pump minimum speed
(Adj.). The designated lead pump shall rotate upon one of the following
conditions: manually through a software switch, if pump runtime is
exceeded, daily, weekly, monthly.
8.
Central Hot Water Heating System
(to be used for atmospheric modular boilers, engineer to edit)
a.
General: BAS shall control the Central Hot Water Heating System
including boilers, boiler primary pumps, secondary hot water
pumps and secondary pump VFDs, as well as provide monitoring
and diagnostic information for management purposes.
b.
Heating Enable:
1)
2)
3)
The heating shall enable when:
a)
The outside air temperature is below the Heat
Lockout setpoint of 62°F (adj.) AND when any
heating request is received from any zone served
by the central HW heating system continuously for
5 min. (adj.)
b)
Anytime the outside air temperature is below the
continuous run setpoint of 40°F (adj).
c)
Whenever manually enabled by the operator locally
via a graphic icon. The graphic icon shall also be
capable of Overriding the System Off.
The Heating System shall be disabled when:
a)
All the zones served by the Heating System have
shut down as scheduled AND the OA temp is
above the continuous run OA setpoint plus 2°F.
b)
The outside air rises above the OA Heat Lockout
setpoint plus 2°F.
Secondary Heating Water (Building Loop) Pump Control
15900-91
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 4)
SECTION 15900
a)
The lead secondary hot water pump shall start and
run continuously when heating is enabled.
b)
BAS shall prove operation of the lead secondary
hot water pump via a current transducer. If, after 30
seconds, the pump fails to start or fails at any time
thereafter, the BAS shall generate an alarm and
start the lag pump. The request for the failed pump
shall stay active. The pump shall be considered
failed when the signal from the current transducer
reading the pump amps is less than 50% of the
signal when the pump is running at minimum
speed. The pump shall also be considered failed if
the system differential pressure signal is 25%
below the signal at setpoint for more than 30
minutes in which case the lag pump shall start
while the lead pump signal remains active.
c)
The lead pump shall continue to run for 15 min.
(adj.) after the heating system has been disabled.
The pumps shall remain off for at least three
minutes before being allowed to restart.
d)
The lead/lag pump sequence shall rotate weekly.
e)
For pumps with variable frequency drives (VFDs),
the BAS shall receive a system differential pressure
signal from a pressure transducer located as shown
on the drawings, if not indicated on the drawings;
locate approximately 75% to the farthest point in
the system from the pump. The BAS shall modulate
the operating pump speed signal to maintain the
differential setpoint (adjustable). A separate output
start/stop and speed signal from the BAS shall be
provided for each pump VFD. A VFD minimum
speed of 20 Hz. shall be programmed in to each
VFD.
Secondary Hot Water Supply Temperature (building loop)
setpoint Control
a)
The secondary hot water supply temperature
setpoint shall be reset based on outdoor air
temperature with all values being adjustable from
the graphic. The setpoint shall be reset from 135°F
to 180 ° F as the O/A temperature falls from 60°F to
20°F or below.
15900-92
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 5)
Boiler Burner Temperature Control
a)
6)
SECTION 15900
The BAS shall only enable and disable a boiler to
run. When a boiler is enabled the boiler shall run on
internal controls to maintain its operating
temperature of 180°F.
Boiler Enable and Rotation Sequence
a)
b)
Boilers Enable: When the Central Heating System
is Enabled the BAS shall sequence the boilers on
and off to maintain the secondary hot water
temperature setpoint as follows:
(1)
If the Secondary Hot Water temperature is
at least 2 degrees F (Adjustable) below the
secondary hot water supply temperature
setpoint, enable the lead boiler primary
pump, confirm pump flow via a current
switch input to the BAS, after a 30 second
delay, enable the lead boiler. Once the lead
boiler is enabled, it shall remain enabled for
at least 30 minutes to prevent short cycling.
(2)
If after a five minute delay from the time the
lead boiler is enabled the Secondary Hot
Water Supply temperature is at least 2
degrees F below the secondary hot water
supply temperature setpoint continuously for
five minutes, enable the second boiler
primary pump, confirm pump flow via a
current switch input to the BAS, after a 30
second delay, enable the second boiler.
Once the second boiler is enabled, it shall
remain enabled for at least 15 minutes to
prevent short cycling.
(3)
Continue to add additional boilers in the
same manner.
Boilers Disable:
(1)
If the Secondary Hot Water Supply
temperature is at least 2 degrees F above
the secondary hot water supply temperature
setpoint continuously for at least 15
minutes, disable the last boiler that was
15900-93
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 15900
enabled (unless that boiler is in its minimum
run time delay in which case it shall
continue to run until the delay expires), after
a 5 minute delay, disable the boiler’s
primary pump. Once a boiler is disabled, it
shall remain disabled for at least 15 minutes
to prevent short cycling.
c)
7)
(2)
If after a five minute delay, the Secondary
Hot Water Supply temperature remains at
least 2 degree F above the secondary hot
water
supply
temperature
setpoint
continuously for at least 15 minutes, disable
the second to last boiler that was enabled
(unless that boiler is in its minimum run time
delay in which case it shall continue to run
until the delay expires), after a 5 minute
delay, disable the primary pump. Once a
boiler is disabled, it shall remain disabled for
at least 15 minutes to prevent short cycling.
(3)
Continue to disable boilers in the same
manner until all boilers including the lead
boiler are disabled.
Boiler Rotation:
(1)
The BAS shall rotate the lead boiler every
24 hours. Each boiler shall be in the
rotation.
(2)
The lead boiler rotation shall take place only
when the plant is disabled and only if all
boilers are disabled. Should the plant be
enabled for more than 24 hours
continuously, the lead rotation shall be
delayed until the next time the plant is
disabled. Additional boilers shall stage on in
numerical order starting from the lead boiler.
Boiler and Primary Pump Alarm
a)
The BAS shall monitor the boiler alarm point from
each boiler burner control and if active, generate a
"Boiler #X Failure" alarm. Should a boiler alarm
point be active, the BAS shall continue to keep the
signal to the boiler enabled (no lock-out) and
continue through the enable/ disable sequence.
15900-94
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS b)
8)
9)
SECTION 15900
Should a boiler primary pump fail to start or fails
while running, the BAS shall continue to keep the
signal to the pump enabled (no lock-out) but shall
disable the boiler and continue through the enable/
disable sequence. Should the failed pump start
while the BAS is attempting to enable the boiler,
then the boiler shall be allowed to start.
Boiler Plant monitoring and alarming
a)
Each boiler shall have a boiler supply/discharge
temperature sensor which shall be displayed on the
graphic for monitoring purposes. The sensors shall
be located between the boiler and the connection to
the primary loop as close to the boiler as practical.
b)
The secondary hot water supply (building loop)
shall have temperature sensor located downstream
of the last boiler connection which shall be
displayed on the graphic. Should the secondary
hot water supply temperature be below the
secondary hot water supply temperature setpoint
by 10 degrees continuously for more than 30
minutes while the plant is enabled, then activate an
alarm.
c)
The secondary hot water return (building loop) shall
have a temperature sensor located upstream of the
first boiler connection which shall be displayed on
the graphic for monitoring purposes.
General
a)
All points, and commands for the Central Hot Water
system shall be displayed on the graphic.
b)
All points, and commands for the Central Hot Water
system shall be trended by the BAS. Digital points
shall be set up to trend on a change of state.
Analog points shall trend every 10 minutes.
c)
Failsafe wiring: All primary pumps, secondary pump
VFDs and boiler enable points shall be controlled
using normally closed contacts so that a failure of
the controller will enable the pumps and boilers.
Control relays coils shall be energized to disable
equipment and de-energized to enable equipment.
15900-95
11/17
AUTOMATIC TEMPE